JP2022080448A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve the interest for a game machine which can control a game state for a special state on the basis of an execution frequency of a variable display.SOLUTION: The number (for example, one) of jackpot variation patterns which a CPU 103 can determine in a "time shortening state B" when a variable display result is a "jackpot" is less than the number (for example, two) of variable display patterns which can be determined in a "time shortening state A" and is also less than the number (for example, three) of the variable display patterns which can be determined in a "probability variable state". An average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of a variable display time of the jackpot variation patterns which the CPU 103 determines in the "time shortening state B" when the variable display result is the "jackpot" is less than an average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation patterns which is determined in the "time shortening state A" and is also less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation patterns which is determined in the "probability variable state".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-50

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in Patent Document 1, in a pachinko gaming machine or the like as a gaming machine, for example, after a normal jackpot occurs, the probability of being controlled to a normal gaming state and determined to be a jackpot is reduced to about 1/300. When a big hit does not occur even if the number of times the special figure game is set and executed reaches 1000 times, the game state is controlled to the ceiling probability change state, and the probability that the big hit is decided is increased to about 1/100. There was something that was done. Further, it is disclosed that when a 1000 game jackpot does not occur in a normal game state, a time saving state may be generated instead of the ceiling probability change state. Further, as shown in Patent Document 2, as a gaming machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and the gaming medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area. When the execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied, a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on the variable display device, and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result, so-called. There is a pachinko game machine that enhances the game's interest with variable display games. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the player is in an advantageous state (big hit game state). Then, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, there is a gaming machine that controls the variable display to a special state that is easier to execute than the normal state. A machine has been proposed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-95449 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-80649

There was room for enhancing the commercial value of the gaming machine having the functions and configurations of both Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced commercial value.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and can control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the information from the game control means.
The game control means is
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state, a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, and the advantageous state.
A decidable means that can be determined to control to the advantageous state,
A variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means.
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means,
Includes an information transmission means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of specifying that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the staging execution means. ,
The special state includes a first special state, a second special state and a third special state.
The state control means is
When the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the non-special state, the advantageous state is controlled.
After the advantageous state is completed, the first special state is controlled.
When the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the non-special state without being controlled by the advantageous state, the second special state is controlled.
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the non-special state, control to the third special state is performed.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. Less than the number of decidable variable display patterns,
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state,
The determination means can determine that the state control means is controlled to the third special state before it is controlled to the third special state.
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the third special state when it is determined that the determination means is controlled to the third special state.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information.
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is short, the digestion rate of the variable display is higher than that of other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided and a special state can be provided. It is possible to perform control according to the game state when the display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest, so that the commercial value can be enhanced.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a time saving loss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a front view which shows the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 069SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D). Is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time reduction number determination table for each transition opportunity. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure exemplifying the staging control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a state transition diagram for explaining a state transition. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating play time (relief time shortening). Similarly, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the play time (relief time reduction). Similarly, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the play time (relief time reduction). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode relating to battle rush, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode relating to play time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding pole / battle rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the variable display number display and the special number display. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the effect about the case where the relief time is shortened after clearing the RAM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the case where the relief time is shortened after clearing a RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect related to the case where the relief time reduction is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit, and (B) is a time chart showing a modified example of the time reduction rush effect B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the case where the relief time is shortened by the variable display of 900 times after a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect operation example in the case where the reserved storage number is 0 when the relief time shortening is reached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect operation example in the case where the reserved storage number is 1 or more when the relief time shortening is reached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the customer waiting screen. It is a figure which shows the effect operation example about the transition to the customer waiting screen as the characteristic part 069SG transformation example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect operation example concerning the transition to the customer waiting screen as the feature part 069SG transformation example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game control timer interrupt processing as the characteristic part 069SG modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing as a characteristic part 069SG modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing as a characteristic part 069SG modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the display process as the characteristic part 069SG modification 2. It is a figure which shows the characteristic part 069SG modification 3. It is a figure for demonstrating the content of various productions. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of a countdown notice. Similarly, it is a figure which shows the production operation example of the countdown notice. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of a hold change notice. It is a figure which shows the directing operation example of a symbol chance eye notice. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the effect display notice. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice type determination table. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a reach notice execution decision table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing a button notice effect pattern determination table. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a character notice pattern determination table. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body motion pattern determination table. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body notice pattern determination table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining various operation examples for each gaming state. (A) is a timing chart showing a variable display mode of a symbol in a probabilistic state, a time-saving state A out-of-reach non-reach variation pattern, and (B) a time-saving state B out-of-reach non-reach variation pattern. This is an example of the staging operation of the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern of the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. This is an example of the staging operation of the shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern of the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. This is an example of the staging operation of the shortened non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern of the time saving state B. This is an example of the staging operation of SP reach E and SP reach D. It is a figure which compares the staging operation example of the non-reach deviation variation pattern. It is a figure which compares the staging operation example of the non-reach deviation variation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of a super reach fluctuation pattern. (A) to (C) are timing charts showing control operation examples in SP reach E, C, and D. It is a figure which compares super reach and non-reach off. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a rush introduction effect, and (D) is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the time-saving rush effect A. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing a probabilistic rushing effect, and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of the time-saving rushing effect B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern determination table as Embodiment 2 in feature part 069SG. It is a figure which shows a part of the variable display start setting process as the 2nd embodiment in a feature part 069SG. It is a figure which shows the variable display effect pattern determination table. This is an example of the staging operation of SP reach D. It is a figure for demonstrating the characteristic of each game state. In the feature unit 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the normal symbol hit determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time of the normal symbol, and (D) is the second start winning opening at the time of hitting the normal symbol. It is explanatory drawing of the opening time. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern according to the variable display result. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the probability change state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the probability change state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state B. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state B. It is explanatory drawing of the winning probability to the starting winning opening and the winning interval. It is explanatory drawing of the period value α, β, γ. It is explanatory drawing of the period value α', β', γ'. It is explanatory drawing of a period value δ, ε, ζ. It is explanatory drawing of the period value δ', ε', ζ'. It is explanatory drawing of a period value η, θ, ι. It is explanatory drawing of the period value η', θ', ι'. It is explanatory drawing of a period value κ, λ, μ. It is explanatory drawing of the period value κ', λ', μ'. It is explanatory drawing of a period value ν, ξ, π. It is explanatory drawing of the period value ν', ξ', π'. It is explanatory drawing of each period value. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the actual shooting value for 10 hours of the pachinko gaming machine, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the design value of the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing of the calculation of the average fluctuation time in a normal state. It is explanatory drawing of the calculation of the average fluctuation time in the time saving state A. It is explanatory drawing of the calculation of the average fluctuation time in the time saving state B. It is explanatory drawing of the calculation of the average fluctuation time in a probable change state. It is explanatory drawing of the average fluctuation time when the variation of 2nd special figure is executed in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. It is explanatory drawing of the average fluctuation time when the variation display of 110 times of the 2nd special figure is executed in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have three reserved storages in the second special figure. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 1100 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have three reserved storages in the second special figure. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have two reserved storage numbers in the second special figure. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 1100 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have two reserved storage numbers in the second special figure. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have one reserved storage number of the second special figure. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 1100 times in the state where the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state have one reserved storage number of the second special figure. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the state where the reserved storage number of the second special figure is 0 in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability variation state. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 1100 times in the state where the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is 0 in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability variation state. It is explanatory drawing of each period value. It is explanatory drawing of each period value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern in the feature part 018SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the high base state. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, γ. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various effects in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, γ. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a character type. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the character in the SP reach effects A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach effects A to E, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach effects A to E. It is a figure which shows the output pattern of the sound effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. It is a tree diagram which shows the flow of SP reach production A to E. It is a figure which shows the example of the staging operation from the start of variable display of SP reach α, β, γ to the development into SP reach staging. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of SP reach effect A. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of SP reach effect B, C. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of SP reach effect D, E. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the effect of a hit / fail button effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the movable body effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the big hit notification of SP reach effect A to E. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the effect of the miss notification of SP reach effect A to E. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the post-effect A. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the post-effect B. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the post-effect B. (A) is a diagram showing the SP reach effect type fixed table A, (B) is a diagram showing the SP reach effect type fixed table B, and (C) is a diagram showing the SP reach effect type fixed table C. It is a figure for demonstrating the data table for lighting a frame LED with a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. It is a figure for demonstrating the data table for lighting a frame LED with a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination process. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the time saving type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the time saving fanning production period. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the main effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving start time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the end of working hours. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the remaining hold period end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hold change determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of a dropout. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving fanning effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the time saving fanning effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the return staging setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a timing chart which shows each timing in the variable display in the case where the time saving symbol is stopped display and the case where it is not. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display, and the time saving fanning effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the information output process. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of various signals output by an external information output process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure display result. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the time saving symbol is stopped display. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structure of the special variable winning ball device which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK in the state which the big winning opening is controlled to the closed state. (A) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of the distribution part which concerns on the feature part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structure of the distribution member which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A)-(c) is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game ball which entered the distribution part which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of the distribution member which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the small hit start effect time which concerns on a feature part 063AK, and the timing when a game ball enters a distribution part. (A) is a timing chart of the effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature unit 063AK. (B) is a figure for demonstrating whether or not an effect corresponding to a small hit variation related to the feature unit 063AK is executed and an effect mode. (A) is a timing chart of the time saving suggestion effect related to the feature unit 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the time saving suggestion symbol which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A) is a diagram for explaining a normal passing fanning effect corresponding to the first special figure game according to the feature unit 063AK. (B) is a diagram for explaining a normal passing fanning effect corresponding to the second special figure game according to the feature unit 063AK. (C) is a diagram for explaining the time-saving time-passing fanning effect according to the feature portion 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special figure display result determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special figure display result determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the list of the jackpot type which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot type determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the list of the small hit type which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the small hit type determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big hit variation pattern determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the time saving variation pattern determination table for a normal state which concerns on a characteristic part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the small hit start effect waiting time determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening preprocessing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the hit end designation command determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the passage notification effect waiting time determination table which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the decorative symbol which becomes the small hit combination which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit determination decorative symbol determination table for a normal state according to the feature unit 063AK. (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit time determination decoration symbol determination table for a time saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the waiting process for hitting a special figure according to the feature unit 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the small hit start effect time determination table which concerns on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit medium effect processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end effect process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. (A) to (i) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state relating to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (g) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a normal state relating to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a time-saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation in a time-saving state according to the feature unit 063AK. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the normal hold change determination table which concerns on the modification of the characteristic part 063AK. (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the hold change determination table at the time of limitation which concerns on the modification of the characteristic part 063AK. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of staging operation according to a modified example of the feature portion 063AK. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the feature part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a figure which shows an example of the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the normal figure display result and the number of time reductions. It is a figure which shows the special figure display result and the number of time reductions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of normal symbol stop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control process process of a feature part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal figure interlocking effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure interlocking effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving notification setting processing. It is a timing chart which shows the effect content at the time of time saving transition of a feature part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the directing operation example of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the directing operation example of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the directing operation example of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotation display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing a movement display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) is a diagram showing a blinking mode of the fourth symbol. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the staging control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for effect control, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the staging control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the 2nd reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The gaming machine of Form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of out-of-order variation patterns (for example, two) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "out of time" is less than the number of possible variable display patterns (for example, time saving). The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "state A" (for example, 3) and the number of outlier variation patterns that can be determined in "probability change state" (for example, 4).
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "off", the variable display time of the out-of-range fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" The average time (for example, about 2.2 seconds) is smaller than the average time (for example, about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and in the "probability change state". A portion of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined, which is less than the average time (for example, about 4.83 seconds). See FIG. 11-50.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is short, the digestion rate of the variable display is higher than that of other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-1.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information in a plurality of columns (for example, decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C).
The starting order of the variable display of the decorative identification information in each column is such that the variable display of the decorative identification information is a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the decorative identification information in the advantageous state in the first special state. The mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the method and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state. It is common to the case where the non-specific display result is displayed in
The time until the variable display speed of the decorative identification information of each column in which the variable display is started reaches the maximum speed is decorated in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the variable display to the advantageous state in the first special state. Decorative identification in the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the identification information being the specific mode, and in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the identification information to the advantageous state in the second special state. The start order of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is different from the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the information being the specific mode. It is common in the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the state and the time-saving state A and the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B, but the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the best. The time required to reach the speed is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state A (tb1 to tb2 <ta1 to ta3), see FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first special state and the second special state have the same variable display start order of the decoration identification information of each column, but the time until the maximum speed is reached is different. It is possible to give a different impression to each person and enhance their interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 1-1 or Form 1-2.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
The order of stopping the variable display of the decorative identification information in each column is such that the variable display of the decorative identification information is a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the decorative identification information in the advantageous state in the first special state. The mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the method and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state. The stop order of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is different from that when the non-specific display result is displayed in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. If there is, the stop is displayed in the order of left → right → middle, and if it is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time. See Fig. 11-51).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display stop order of the decoration identification information in each column is different between the first special state and the second special state, so that a different impression can be given to each state and the interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-3.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
The order of stopping the variable display of the decorative identification information in each column is such that the variable display of the decorative identification information is a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the decorative identification information in the advantageous state in the first special state. The mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without the method and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state. It is common to the case where the non-specific display result is displayed in
The time from when the decoration identification information of one of the plurality of columns is stopped and displayed until the next decoration identification information is stopped and displayed is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state. In the variable display, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode and the non-specific display result is displayed, and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state. In the display, the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is different from the case where the non-specific display result is displayed without changing to the specific mode (for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, 5C is stopped. The order is the same for the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state A and the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B. The time from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area of 1 to when the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is a non-reach deviation variation pattern in the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. It may be different from the case of non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the time from the stop display of one decoration identification information to the stop display of the next decoration identification information differs between the first special state and the second special state, so that each state has a different time. It can give a different impression and enhance the interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-4.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
Equipped with an output means that can output a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each column is stopped and displayed.
Regarding the number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1, the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the stop sound to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where the non-specific display result is displayed and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information does not become the specific mode. It differs depending on whether the non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is left, middle, or when it is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. The part where the right is stopped and displayed three times at different timings, and in the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed once at the same timing. 11-51),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the stop of the decoration identification information by the stop sound, and the number of times the stop sound is output differs between the first special state and the second special state, which gives a different impression for each state. It can enhance the interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-5.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
Equipped with an output means that can output a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each column is stopped and displayed.
Regarding the number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1, the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode in the variable display in which the determination means is not determined to control the stop sound to the advantageous state in the first special state. In the case where the non-specific display result is displayed and in the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information does not become the specific mode. It is common to the case where the non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is the probabilistic state, the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state A, and the time saving state. It may be common to the case where the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern is used in B),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the stop of the decoration identification information by the stop sound, and the development cost is reduced by making the number of times of the stop sound output common between the first special state and the second special state. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 1-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-6.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
When the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result without being a specific mode when it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the decorative identification information is stopped. A display means capable of executing a specific operation display that causes the decorative identification information to perform a specific operation when displaying is provided.
When the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state, the specific operation display is executed, and when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state, the specific operation display is not executed (for example,). In the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the specific operation display (symbol stop action) is performed when the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern is performed, whereas in the time reduction state B, the specific operation display (symbol stop) is performed when the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern is used. The part where the action) is not performed. See FIGS. 11-51 to 11-54),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to realize a smooth variable display by not executing the specific motion display in the second special state while enhancing the effect of the effect by the specific motion display in the first special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-7.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
When the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result without being a specific mode when it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the decorative identification information is stopped. A display means capable of executing a specific operation display that causes the decorative identification information to perform a specific operation when displaying is provided.
The display mode of the specific operation display is common to the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state and the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state (for example,). The specific motion display (symbol stop action) is common to the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A and the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time saving state B. While enhancing the effect of staging, the part that shares the mode of the specific operation display between the case of the probabilistic state, the time saving state A and the time saving state B. See FIGS. 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the mode of the specific operation display between the first special state and the second special state while enhancing the effect of the effect in the specific operation display.

The gaming machine of Form 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-8.
It is possible to perform variable display in synchronization with the decorative identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and predetermined identification information (for example, a small pattern) different from the decorative identification information.
The period from when the identification information is stopped and displayed until when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed is a variable display of the decorative identification information when it is not determined by the determination means to control the predetermined identification information to the advantageous state in the second special state. In the case of variable display in which the non-specific display result is displayed without changing to the specific mode, the decorative identification information is obtained when it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state. The variable display mode of is shorter than the variable display in which the non-specific display result is displayed without becoming a specific mode (for example, the period from the stop display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the small symbol). , The case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is shorter than the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the probable change state and the time-saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7)> t2 (tb3 to tb4)} Part. See Figures 11-51),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a smooth variable display can be realized in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-9.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
The minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the first special state until the variable display of the decorative identification information is started in the next variable display, and 1 variable in the second special state. The minimum period from when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the display until the variable display of the decoration identification information is started in the next variable display is common (for example, 1 variable display in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A). The symbol confirmation period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from the stop display of the decorative symbol to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the next variable display, and the decorative symbol with 1 variable display in the time saving state B. Is the same as the symbol confirmation period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when is stopped and displayed until the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the next variable display. See FIGS. 11-51).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the control considering the drawing process until the decoration identification information is completely stopped and displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 1-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-10.
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display pattern determining means can determine the variable display pattern in the second special state, and the determining means controls the advantageous state. In the case of variable display in which it is not determined to be performed, the variable display pattern determining means is common with the variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "missing"). An out-of-reach variation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-saving state B" (for example, "non-reach A") and an out-of-range variation pattern that can be determined in the "time-saving state A" and the "probability change state" (for example, "non-reach A"). ) And are common parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-070) The gaming machine of Form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. It is less than the number of possible variable display patterns and less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "missing", the CPU 103 is in the "time saving state B". The number of determinable deviation variation patterns (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns determinable in "time saving state A" (for example, 3), and the number of decidable deviation variation patterns is determinable in "probability change state". Less than the number of variation patterns (eg, 4),
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is "missing"). In the case of Less than the average time (for example, about 5.58 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined in the "probability change state". FIG. -50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is short, the digestion rate of the variable display is higher than that of other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 2-1.
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display pattern determining means can determine the variable display pattern in the second special state, and the determining means controls the advantageous state. A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state in the case of variable display that is not determined to be performed is common (for example,). The loss variation pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time reduction state B and the loss variation display pattern (for example, non-reach, SP) that can be determined in at least one of the time reduction state A and the probabilistic state. Reach D) and the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 2-1 or Form 2-2.
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display pattern determining means can determine the variable display pattern in the second special state, and the determining means controls the advantageous state. The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be performed is common (for example, the CPU 103 is in a time saving state). The loss variation pattern that can be determined in B (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) and the loss variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) are common. Some parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-3.
The average period of the control period controlled by the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled by the third special state, and the average period of the control period controlled by the third special state is It is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled by the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state, and the probabilistic change state. It is preferable that the average time of the control period controlled by the state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state A).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average period of the control period is shorter than that in the third special state, so that the digestion rate of the variable display is increased, so that a suitable second special state can be provided. In the first special state, the average period of the control period becomes longer, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-4.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the CPU 103 saves time). The number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the state B (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of deviation variation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 3), and the number of deviation variation that can be determined in the time saving state A is smaller. The number of patterns (eg, 3) is less than the number of outlier variation patterns (eg, 4) that can be determined in the probabilistic state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to digestion of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased. You can enhance the fun of the game.

(SG2020-071) The gaming machine of the form 1-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1-1 to 1-11.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" (for example, one) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit"). The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (for example, 2) and the number of outlier variation patterns that can be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, 3).
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display time of the big hit fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B". The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) is smaller than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and is determined in the "probability change state". A portion of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern that is less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds); see FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. In the above, since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed and the state is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-12.
The variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is a variable display part that executes the variable display of the identification information, and the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part. Including the post-production part that informs the game value information that can identify
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state and the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state are different.
The execution period of the post-effect part in the first special state and the execution period of the post-effect part in the second special state are common (for example, the time saving state A and the variable display part of the probabilistic state). While the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time reduction state B, the symbol confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time reduction state A and the probable change state. ) And the symbol confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-production part of the time saving state B. See FIGS. 11-61),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the post-effect in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state. ..

The gaming machine of Form 1-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-13.
It is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner.
The variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is a variable display part that executes the variable display of the identification information, and the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part. Including the post-production part that informs the game value information that can identify
A display means capable of executing a specific operation display that causes the identification information to perform a specific operation when the identification information is stopped and displayed during the execution period of the variable display part in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. Equipped with
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state and the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state are different.
The execution period of the specific operation display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific operation display in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state). While the time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B, the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display of the time saving state A and the probable change state. And the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display in the time saving state B. See FIGS. 11-61.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the execution period of the specific operation display in the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state. can.

The gaming machine of Form 1-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-14.
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, and a variable display pattern that can be determined by the determining means to the advantageous state. In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled, the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the first special state in common with the variable display pattern (for example, the variable display result is a "big hit"). In this case, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" (for example, "SP reach D") and the out-of-range fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, "SP reach D") are Common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of Form 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-5.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 is "time saving state B". The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time saving state A" (for example, 2), and can be determined in "probability change state". Less than the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns (eg, 3),
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is "big hit". The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time saving state B” is the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time saving state A”. A portion that is less than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability change state". 50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. In the above, since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed and the state is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-6.
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, and a variable display pattern that can be determined by the determining means to the advantageous state. In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled, the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state is common (). For example, a jackpot variable display pattern (eg, SP reach D) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B and a jackpot variable display pattern (eg, probabilistic state) that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, the probabilistic state). , SP reach D) and the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-7.
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, and a variable display pattern that can be determined by the determining means to the advantageous state. At least a part of the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state in the case of the variable display determined to be controlled is common (). For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, not via SP) are common. Some parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-8.
The average period of the control period controlled by the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled by the third special state, and the average period of the control period controlled by the third special state is It is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled by the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state, and the probabilistic change state. The part where the average time of the control period controlled by the state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state A),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average period of the control period is shorter than that in the third special state, so that the digestion rate of the variable display is increased, so that a suitable second special state can be provided. In the first special state, the average period of the control period becomes longer, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 2-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-9.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the CPU 103 The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-saving state B (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 2), and the number of jackpots that can be determined in the time-saving state A is small. The number of fluctuation patterns (for example, 2) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probabilistic state (for example, 3).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to digestion of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased. You can enhance the fun of the game.

(SG2020-073) The gaming machine of Form 1-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-15.
It is possible to variablely display the special identification information based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball), and to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Variable decoration display means that performs variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed is included.
When the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is a specific mode (for example, a reach mode). The first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to E off") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the off-display result) and the variable decoration identification information It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach loss") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without changing the display mode to a specific mode.
In the case of the variable display of the special identification information which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state, the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, in the "time saving state B"). The rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "missing" (for example, 97%) is when the variable display result is "missing" in the "time saving state A". It is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 (for example, 95%), and when the variable display result is "out of reach" in the "probability change state", the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103. Is higher than the determined rate (eg, 95%); see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. By setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-16.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
In the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information to the stop display in the second non-specific variable display pattern, the variable display of the decoration identification information is started in the first non-specific variable display pattern. In the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, which is shorter than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific aspect. A portion shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from the start until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIGS. 11-62).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the variable display is completed in a shorter period than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific mode, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-17.
It is possible to variablely display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns).
In the second non-specific variable display pattern, the period from the start of variable display of the decoration identification information in the predetermined column among the plurality of columns to the stop display is the said in the first non-specific variable display pattern. It is shorter than the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the predetermined column to the stop display (for example, in the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is started. The period from to stop display (tb0 to tb1) is the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L to the stop display (tb0) in the super reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. -A portion shorter than tb2). See Fig. 11-62),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the variable display of the decorative identification information in the predetermined column is completed in a short period of time, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-18.
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common (. For example, a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. And are common parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of Form 2-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 1-10.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball), and the advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot gaming state) can be controlled. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Variable decoration display means that performs variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
When the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is a specific mode (for example, a reach mode). The first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to E off") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the off-display result) and the variable decoration identification information It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach loss") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without changing the display mode to a specific mode.
In the case of the variable display of the special identification information which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state, the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined and the determination is made in the third special state. When the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the means, the rate is higher than the ratio at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, the variable display result in the "time saving state B"). The rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when is "off" (for example, 97%) is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state A". The "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "outlier" in the "probability change state" while being higher than the rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined (for example, 95%). Higher than the percentage (eg, 95%), see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. By setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-11.
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second non that can be determined at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The specific variable display pattern is common (for example, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B, and can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. Non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns (eg, non-reach) and common parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-12.
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state. Is common (for example, a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. Non-reach) and the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of Form 1-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-19.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball), and the advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot gaming state) can be controlled. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Variable decoration display means that performs variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed is included.
When the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display of the decorative identification information is special after the variable display mode becomes a specific mode. The first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot", etc.) that displays the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the variable display mode of the decorative identification information are special without being a specific mode. It is possible to determine a second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "not via SP", etc.) for displaying the display result of the variable display of the identification information.
In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state, the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, the reach mode in the time saving state B). The rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" is determined (for example, 90%) is the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A. Is higher than the rate at which "" is determined (for example, 5%), and is higher than the rate at which "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the probabilistic state is determined (for example, 5%). (See Figures 11-69),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continued for a long time. In the above, by setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-20.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
A first specific operation display in which the decoration identification information is specifically operated when the variable display mode is a specific mode, and a second specific operation display in which the decoration identification information is specifically operated when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed (for example, It is equipped with a display means that can execute the symbol stop action display).
In the first specific variable display pattern, the first specific operation display and the second specific operation display are executed by the display means, but in the second specific variable display pattern, the first specific operation display is performed by the display means. The second specific operation display is executed without executing the operation display (for example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP reach E via reach, the reach specific operation display and the jackpot specific operation display are executed, but the reach is executed. In the fluctuation pattern of SP reach D that does not go through, the part where the reach specific operation display is not executed but the big hit specific operation display is executed. See FIGS. 11-55).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated by the first specific operation display, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-21.
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common (for example,). A non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B, and a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. Is a common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of Form 2-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-13.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball), and the advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot gaming state) can be controlled. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Variable decoration display means that performs variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information of) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state. Includes a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) that is controlled when
When the variable display pattern determining means is a variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the variable display of the decorative identification information is special after the variable display mode becomes a specific mode. The first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot", etc.) that displays the display result of the variable display of the identification information and the variable display mode of the decorative identification information are special without being a specific mode. It is possible to determine a second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via A", etc.) for displaying the display result of the variable display of the identification information.
In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state, the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined is the first special state. In the case of the variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined and the determination is made in the third special state. When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by means, the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined (for example, "SP reach D" which does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B. The rate at which the "big hit variation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" is determined (for example, 90%) is the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A is determined ( For example, a portion higher than 5%) and higher than the rate (for example, 5%) in which the “SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern” that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the probabilistic state (see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continued for a long time. In the above, by setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-14.
The second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state, and the second specific variable that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The display pattern is common (for example, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP), and a non-decidable pattern in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, the part that is common with SP non-via),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-15.
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state. Is common (for example, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and a non-reach loss variation pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, SP). (Non-via) and the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of Form 1-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-22.
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on what has been done (for example, winning a prize in the second starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Fluctuation efficiency of state control means (for example, CPU 103 has a normal state and a special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled into a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. (Parts that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control to improve
A first hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as hold storage.
A second reserved storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the reserved storage).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect including a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and an effect execution means.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The variable display pattern determining means may control the holding storage to the advantageous state by the determining means without storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage means in the first special state and the second special state. In the case of variable display that is not determined, it is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period in which the second reserved storage means can store the reserved storage.
The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and the predetermined variable display in the second special state. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, the suggestion effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state A". When the variable display is executed with the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "probability change state", "movable body notice", "character notice", etc. in the variable display. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state B", the "movable body notice" or "movable body notice" is executed in the variable display. A part that does not perform suggestive effects such as "character notice". See Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time, in the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern, the suggestion effect is used. A suitable second special condition can be provided because it is not unnecessarily agitated.

The gaming machine of Form 1-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-23.
In the second special state, when the variable display is such that the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state, the effect executing means does not execute the suggestion effect, and the determination means controls the advantageous state. In the case of the variable display determined to be, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means (for example, in the time saving state B, the "movable body notice" or the "character notice" is executed in the case of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern. If it is a big hit fluctuation pattern, "movable body notice" or "character notice" may be executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion staging is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-24.
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, decorative pattern).
The variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern for displaying the display result of the variable display after the variable display mode of the decorative identification information becomes a specific mode.
The suggestion effect includes a fanning effect for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is a specific mode (for example, the suggestion staging suggesting that the variable display mode is controlled to a jackpot gaming state has a variable display mode as a reach mode. Whether or not (whether or not the reach is established) may be included as a fanning effect such as "reach notice" or "button notice"),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion staging is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-25.
The effect executing means includes a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first suggestion effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including (for example, a first suggestion effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)) based on a variable display result) and a case where the first suggestion effect is executed. Second suggestion effect (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), which is highly controlled by the jackpot game state, and a part where multiple types of suggestion effects including can be executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion staging is executed in the second special state.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of Form 2-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-16.
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on what has been done (for example, winning a prize in the second starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Fluctuation efficiency of state control means (for example, CPU 103 has a normal state and a special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled into a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. (Parts that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control to improve
A first hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as hold storage.
A second reserved storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the reserved storage).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body notice" or a "character notice") that can execute an effect including a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
In the variable display pattern determining means, the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, and the determination means has the advantage. When the variable display is not determined to be controlled by the state, a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") of a predetermined variable display period capable of storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage means is determined. It is possible and
The effect executing means is variable when the variable display is executed by the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is executed by the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state. The suggestion effect can be executed in the display, and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state, the suggestion effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, "time saving state A"). When the variable display is executed with the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0, and when the variable display is executed with the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "probability change state", the variable display is displayed. When executed, a suggestion effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while an outlier variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in "time saving state B". When the variable display is executed in, the part in which the suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is not executed in the variable display. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time, in the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern, the suggestion effect is used. A suitable second special condition can be provided because it is not unnecessarily agitated.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of Form 1-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-26.
The identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). A game machine that can be controlled (for example, a pachinko game machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display of identification information as hold storage (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
An information transmission means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information about a game (for example, an effect control command), and
An effect executing means (for example, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means (for example). , The part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the look-ahead notice effect)
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display is executed.
The effect executing means selects one of the pre-reading notice effect patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", "effect display notice") from a plurality of types of look-ahead notice effect patterns. Decidable,
The number of pre-reading advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determination means can be determined in the first special state. The number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 0) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is smaller than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns. The variable display result is out of order in the "probability change state" as well as less than the number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 3) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state A". In some cases, the number of types of pre-reading notice (for example, 4) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 is smaller than the number of types),
In the case of the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state, the rate at which the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed is the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state. It is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" (for example). , 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice (for example, 30%) when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state A", and when the variable display result is out of place in the "probability change state". The portion lower than the execution rate (for example, 40%) of the look-ahead notice in (see FIG. 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and the pre-reading notice effect is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-27.
As a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be commonly executed by the effect execution means in the first special state and the second special state, the first look-ahead notice effect pattern and the first look-ahead notice effect pattern are executed. There is also a second look-ahead notice effect pattern, which has a high rate of being controlled in the advantageous state.
The rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, the time saving state A and the time saving state). As a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in B and the probability change state, the first look-ahead advance notice effect pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", "effect display notice" The "blue" pattern) and the second look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "hold change notice", "design chance eye", in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed. There are "notice" and "red" pattern of "effect display notice"), and the rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 0%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) is , A portion lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)) in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, it is less likely to be unnecessarily fanned by the first pre-reading notice effect, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-28.
As a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be commonly executed by the effect execution means in the first special state and the second special state, the first look-ahead notice effect pattern and the first look-ahead notice effect pattern are executed. There is also a second look-ahead notice effect pattern, which has a high rate of being controlled in the advantageous state.
The rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, the time saving state A and the time saving state). As a look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be executed in common by the effect control CPU 120 in B and the probability change state, the first look-ahead advance notice effect pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", "effect display notice" The "blue" pattern) and the second look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "hold change notice", "design chance eye", in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed. There are "notice" and "red" pattern of "effect display notice"), and the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 90%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) is , A portion higher than the rate at which the second look-ahead warning effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the second pre-reading notice effect is easily executed in the second special state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-29.
The look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect execution means in the first special state and the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect execution means in the second special state are common (for example, the time saving state A). The look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the probabilistic state and the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state B are common (for example, "design chance eye notice"). part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of Form 2-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 1-17.
The identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). A game machine that can be controlled (for example, a pachinko game machine 1).
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display of identification information as hold storage (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
An information transmission means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information about a game (for example, an effect control command), and
An effect executing means (for example, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect including a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the hold storage stored in the hold storage means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means (for example). , The part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the look-ahead notice effect)
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The effect executing means selects one of the pre-reading notice effect patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", "effect display notice") from a plurality of types of look-ahead notice effect patterns. Decidable,
The number of pre-reading advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect executing means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determination means can be determined in the first special state. It is smaller than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns and less than the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, for effect control when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B"). The number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 0) that can be determined by the CPU 120 is the number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 3) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state A". The number of pre-reading notice types (for example, less than 4) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state").
In the case of the variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state, the ratio at which the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed is the advantageous state in the first special state by the determination means. It is a variable display that is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled, and is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the third special state. In some cases, the rate of execution of the look-ahead notice is lower than the rate at which the look-ahead notice effect is executed (for example, the rate of execution of the look-ahead notice (for example, 0%) when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is "time saving state A". It is lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of order (for example, 30%), and the execution rate of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of place in the "probability change state" (for example, 40%). ) Lower than. See Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in the variable display in which the control to the advantageous state is not determined in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and the pre-reading notice effect is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-18.
The look-ahead advance notice effect pattern in which the effect execution means can be determined in the second special state, and the look-ahead advance notice effect in which the effect execution means can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The pattern is common (for example, the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in the time-saving state B, and the look-ahead in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability change state. The notice effect pattern is common (for example, "design chance eye notice").
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-19.
The look-ahead advance notice effect pattern in which the effect execution means can be determined in the second special state and the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern in which the effect execution means can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state are Common (for example, the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in the time-saving state B and the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability change state are common. There is (for example, "design chance eye notice") part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only by the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 2-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-20.
The number of the look-ahead notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect execution means in the second special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect execution means in the first special state. The number of the look-ahead advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect execution means in one special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead advance notice effect patterns that can be determined by the effect execution means in the third special state (for example, "time saving"). The number of pre-reading notice types (for example, 0) that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of order in "state B" is produced when the variable display result is out of order in "time saving state A". The number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state" while being smaller than the number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the control CPU 120 (for example, 3). (For example, less than 4),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined is reduced to give priority to digestion of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of pre-reading notice effect patterns that can be determined is large. By doing so, the fun of the game can be enhanced.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of Form 1-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-30.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect executing means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice") that can execute an effect including an action promotion effect that encourages the player's operation.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display in the first special state (for example, "time saving state B". The execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in "" (for example, 10% for a big hit and 5% for a missed state) is the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, a big hit). A portion lower than 80% (80%, 20% off) and lower than the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% on the jackpot and 30% on the off). 50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the player is urged to move in one variable display in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is less, so a suitable second special condition can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-32 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-31.
In the second special state, when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the ratio at which the operation promotion effect is executed by the effect executing means is the advantageous by the determining means. When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the state, the ratio is higher than the rate at which the operation promotion effect is executed by the effect executing means (for example, in the time saving state B, the effect control is performed when the variable display result is a big hit. The rate at which the "button notice" is executed by the CPU 120 for effect (for example, 10%) is higher than the rate at which the "button notice" is executed by the CPU 120 for effect control (for example, 5%) when the variable display result is out of alignment. High part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the fact that the operation promotion effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-33 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-32.
As the operation promotion effect pattern that can be executed by the effect execution means, the first operation promotion effect pattern and the second operation promotion in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first operation promotion effect pattern is executed. There is a production pattern,
The rate at which the second operation promotion effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second operation promotion effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, the effect of "button notice". As a pattern, there are a "blow" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in which the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the "blow" pattern is executed. The rate at which the "blow" pattern is executed (for example, 10%) is lower than the rate at which the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or probability variation (for example, 40%), but the time saving state The rate at which the "blow" pattern is executed in B may be higher than the rate at which the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability variation state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the second special state, the second operation promotion effect pattern is often obtained, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 1-34 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-33.
The period during which the operation promotion effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the operation promotion effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the "button" is used. The period during which the "notice" is executed and the period during which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the period during which the "reach notice" is executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the operation promotion effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-35 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-34.
The effect executing means can execute the operation promotion preparation effect before executing the operation promotion effect.
The period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a "effect control CPU 120". Before executing the "button notice", an operation promotion preparation effect (for example, although not shown in particular, an effect or effect display in which the push button 31B to be operated is faded in is displayed before the operation valid period starts is displayed. The period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state A or the probability change state and the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state B are common when the effect is enabled. It is preferable to do),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period of the operation promotion preparation effect between the first special state and the second special state, the development cost can be reduced and the operation promotion effect is executed. It can be suitably notified.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of Form 2-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-21.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect executing means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice") that can execute an effect including an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display in the first special state, and in the third special state. The execution rate of the operation promotion effect per 1 variable display is lower than the execution rate of the operation promotion effect (for example, the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for a big hit and 5% for a miss)). , It is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A" (for example, 80% in the big hit and 20% in the outlier), and the button notice per 1 variable display in the "probability change state". The portion lower than the execution rate (for example, 80% for big hits and 30% for misses), see Fig. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the player is urged to move in one variable display in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is less, so a suitable second special condition can be provided.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of Form 1-36 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-35.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a "hit / miss button effect") that can execute an effect including an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation and a specific effect that notifies that the player is controlled to the advantageous state. And the part where "movable body production" can be performed),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
As an effect execution pattern of the operation promotion effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect execution means in the variable display of 1, a first effect execution pattern (for example, "for example," Patterns A-2, A-3 ") and a second effect execution pattern (for example," pattern A-1 ") that executes the specific effect without executing the operation promotion effect.
The ratio at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determination means determines to control the advantageous state in the second special state is such that the determination means determines the advantageous state in the first special state. It is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control (for example, in the time saving state B, the "movable body" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern. The ratio of executing the "immediate hit effect" (for example, 90%) for executing the "effect" is to execute the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A. It is higher than the rate (for example, 0%) of executing the "immediate hit effect", and also executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probable change state. A portion higher than the rate at which "immediate hit effect" or "full rotation effect" is executed (for example, 0%), see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it was decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continued for a long time. It is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it is less likely to prompt the player to move when notified.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of Form 2-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-22.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect including an operation promotion effect for encouraging a player's operation and a specific effect for notifying that the player is controlled to an advantageous state is "button notice" and ". The part where the "hit / fail button effect" can be executed) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
As an effect execution pattern of the operation promotion effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect execution means in the variable display of 1, a first effect execution pattern (for example, "for example," Patterns A-2, A-3 ") and a second effect execution pattern (for example," pattern A-1 ") that executes the specific effect without executing the operation promotion effect.
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state is set to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state. The second effect is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to be controlled, and when it is determined by the determination means to control the second effect execution pattern to the advantageous state in the third special state. Execution of "immediate hit effect" that executes "movable body effect" without executing "win / fail button effect" in SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, which is higher than the rate at which the effect execution pattern is executed. The ratio (for example, 90%) is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A, and also A portion higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic state, see FIGS. 11-69.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it was decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continued for a long time. It is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it is less likely to prompt the player to move when notified.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine of Form 1-37 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-36.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect executing means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice") that can execute an effect including an action promotion effect that encourages the player's operation.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
As the types of the motion promotion effect that can be executed by the effect execution means, a first motion promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display of a "blow" operation) that urges the player to perform one operation and a predetermined operation period for the player are performed. There is a second movement promotion effect (for example, operation promotion display of "continuous hit" or "long press" operation) that encourages movement.
The effect executing means can execute both the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect in the first special state, and can execute the first operation promotion effect in the second special state. On the other hand, the second operation promotion effect is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has neither a "blow pattern" nor a "continuous hit pattern" or a "long press pattern" in the "probability change state" and the "time saving state A". Execution can be determined, and in "time saving state B", the "blow pattern" can be determined, but the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" is not determined. See Fig. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, annoying operation such as operation over a predetermined operation period is taken into consideration that a period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is less likely to be prompted to the player, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine of Form 2-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-23.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
An effect executing means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice") that can execute an effect including an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
As the types of the motion promoting effect that can be executed by the effect executing means, a first motion promoting effect (for example, an operation promotion display of a "blow" operation) that urges the player to perform one motion and a predetermined motion period for the player are performed. There is a second movement promotion effect (for example, operation promotion display of "continuous hit" or "long press" operation) that encourages movement.
The effect executing means can execute both the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect in the first special state and the third special state, and the first operation in the second special state. While the promotion effect can be executed, the second operation promotion effect is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a "blow pattern" and a "continuous hit pattern, long press" in the "probability change state" and the "time saving state A". Execution can be determined for any of the "patterns", and in the "time saving state B", the "blow pattern" can be determined, but the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" is not determined. FIG. 11-50. reference),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, annoying operation such as operation over a predetermined operation period is taken into consideration that a period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is less likely to be prompted to the player, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of Form 1-38 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-37.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body notice") capable of executing an effect including a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The effect executing means is controlled to the first suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (small)") and the advantageous state as compared with the case where the first suggestion effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion effects including a second suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (large)") with a high proportion.
The execution rate of the suggestion effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per 1 variable display in the first special state (for example, in the "time saving state B"). The execution rate of "movable body notice" per variable display of 1 (for example, jackpot 0%, loss 0%) is the execution rate of "movable body notice" per variable display of 1 in "time saving state A" (for example,). A portion lower than the jackpot 90%, missed 30%) and lower than the execution rate of "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, jackpot 90%, missed 40%). FIG. -50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is suggested that the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is reduced, so that a suitable second special condition can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-39 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-38.
In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, it is determined that the ratio at which the suggestion effect is executed in the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. In the case of the variable display, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in the first special state is higher (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B. The ratio (for example, 0%) is lower than the ratio (for example, 90%) in which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state when the variable display result is a big hit, but the variable display result is The rate at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B in the case of a big hit is higher than the rate in which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the probable change state when the variable display result is a big hit. May be),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest by making the degree of attention to the suggestion staging different between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-40 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-39.
In the case of the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the ratio at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. Is higher than the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined (for example, "vibration (small)" in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit. The rate at which the pattern is executed (for example, 0%) is greater than the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 30%). Although it is also low, the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is "vibration (small)" in the time saving state A or the probable change state when the variable display result is a big hit. Small) ”pattern may be higher than the percentage executed (eg, 30%)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest by making the degree of attention to the suggestion staging different between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of Form 2-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-24.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body notice") capable of executing an effect including a suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state.
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The effect executing means is controlled to the first suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (small)") and the advantageous state as compared with the case where the first suggestion effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion effects including a second suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (large)") with a high proportion.
The execution rate of the suggestion effect per 1 variable display in the 2nd special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per 1 variable display in the 1st special state, and 1 in the 3rd special state. The execution rate of the "movable body notice" per variable display of 1 in the "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for the jackpot and 0% for the loss) is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per variable display. It is lower than the execution rate of "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, big hit 90%, missed 30%), and "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state". Is lower than the execution rate (for example, 90% for big hits and 40% for misses). See Fig. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is suggested that the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is reduced, so that a suitable second special condition can be provided.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of Form 1-41 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-40.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball), and the advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot gaming state) can be controlled. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Variable decoration display means that performs variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
A staging execution means (for example, the staging control CPU 120 can execute a "character notice" or a "reach notice" that can execute a staging effect including a staging effect that arouses whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is set as a specific mode. Part) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The execution rate of the fanning effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the fanning effect per 1 variable display in the first special state (for example, in the "time saving state B"). The execution rate of "character notice" per variable display of 1 (for example, big hit 10%, missed 5%) is the execution rate of "character notice" per variable display of 1 in "time saving state A" (for example, big hit 80). %, Out of 20%) and lower than the execution rate of "Character notice" per 1 variable display in "Probability change state" (for example, big hit 80%, out of 30%), and "time saving state B". The execution rate of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "" (for example, 20%) is higher than the execution rate of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 40%). A portion that is low and lower than the execution rate (for example, 50%) of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in the "probability change state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the specific display is displayed or not is instigated in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is reduced, so that a suitable second special condition can be provided.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of Form 2-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-25.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball), and the advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot gaming state) can be controlled. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
Variable decoration display means that performs variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
A staging execution means (for example, the staging control CPU 120 can execute a "character notice" or a "reach notice" that can execute a staging effect including a staging effect that arouses whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration identification information is set as a specific mode. Part) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The execution rate of the fanning effect per 1 variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the fanning effect per 1 variable display in the first special state, and 1 in the third special state. The execution rate of the "character notice" per variable display of 1 in the "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for the big hit and 5% for the loss) is lower than the execution rate of the fanning effect per variable display (for example, the time saving state B). It is lower than the execution rate of "character notice" per 1 variable display in "state A" (for example, big hit 80%, missed 20%), and execution of "character notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state". It is lower than the ratio (for example, big hit 80%, missed 30%). Further, the execution ratio (for example, 20%) of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "time reduction state B" is "time reduction state A". It is lower than the execution rate of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 40%), and also from the execution rate of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 50%). Low part. See Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the specific display is displayed or not is instigated in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is reduced, so that a suitable second special condition can be provided.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of Form 1-42 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-41.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A movable body that can move (for example, a movable body 32) and
An effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is referred to as "movable body notice") capable of executing an effect including a movable body effect for operating the movable body and a specific effect for notifying that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state. The part where "movable body production" can be performed) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
As an effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect executing means in the variable display of 1, the movable body effect is executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed. The first effect execution pattern (for example, "Patterns A-2, A-3") that executes the movable body effect during the period, and the movable body effect that is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect, are described above. There is a second effect execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-1") that executes the movable body effect during the execution period of the specific effect.
The rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determination means determines to control the advantageous state in the second special state is such that the determination means determines the advantageous state in the first special state. The execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of alignment in "Time saving state B" is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control. (For example, 90%) is higher than the execution rate (for example, 10%) of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of alignment in "Time saving state A", and is variable display in "Probability change state". A portion higher than the execution rate (for example, 20%) of "Pattern A-1" when the result is out of order. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-43 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-42.
The control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the determination means in the second special state. The control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is common (for example, in the case of a time saving state A or a big hit in a probable change state, "movable". Control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and push button 31B in "body effect" (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200), and "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B. The control data used for the operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200) are common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the movable body between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-44 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-43.
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light
With the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. Control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the second special state. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the movable body LED 208 slightly frame LED 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect". (For example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) and a movable body that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B. A part that is common to the control data used for controlling the LED 208 (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended command such as B000),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movable body effect in the first special state and the second special state. ..

The gaming machine of Form 1-45 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-44.
A display means capable of displaying an effect image for emphasizing the movable body is provided.
An effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the effect image. It is common with the effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" (movable body effect image of FIGS. 11-59 (D1)). (Refer to 069SG456) and the effect image displayed in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B (see the movable body effect image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). And are common parts),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movable body effect in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-46 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-45.
Equipped with a vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined part,
The vibration mode executed by the vibrating means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when it is determined by the determining means to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the above-mentioned vibration mode. In the second special state, when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect is common. (For example, in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect", and the case of the big hit in the time saving state B. In the "movable body effect", the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 is common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the movable body effect in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-47 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-46.
The rate at which the first effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state is set to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state. When it is decided to control, the ratio is higher than the rate at which the first effect execution pattern is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, "Patterns A-2, A-". The rate at which "3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed (for example, 80 to 90%) is "Pattern A-2, A-3 (first effect)" when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B. Execution pattern) ”is executed (for example, higher than 10%)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first special state, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the movable body operates.

The gaming machine of Form 1-48 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-47.
The execution frequency of the movable body effect in the second special state is lower than the execution frequency of the movable body effect in the first special state (for example, the execution frequency of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state B (for example, about). 10%) is the part that is lower than the execution frequency (for example, 80 to 90%) of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state A or the probable change state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily in the second special state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of Form 2-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-15.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A movable body that can move (for example, a movable body 32) and
An effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is referred to as a "movable body notice") capable of executing an effect including a movable body effect for operating the movable body and a specific effect for notifying that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state. The part where "movable body production" can be performed) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
As an effect execution pattern of the movable body effect and the specific effect that can be executed by the effect executing means in the variable display of 1, the movable body effect is executed before the execution period of the specific effect, and the specific effect is executed. The first effect execution pattern (for example, "Patterns A-2, A-3") that executes the movable body effect during the period, and the movable body effect that is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect, are described above. There is a second effect execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-1") that executes the movable body effect during the execution period of the specific effect.
The ratio at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when the determination means determines to control the advantageous state in the second special state is such that the determination means determines the advantageous state in the first special state. The second effect is higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is determined to be controlled, and when it is determined by the determination means to control the second effect execution pattern to the advantageous state in the third special state. The execution rate of "Pattern A-1" (for example, 90%) when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is higher than the rate at which the staging execution pattern is executed (for example, the time saving state A). Is higher than the execution rate (for example, 10%) of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of order in "Probability change state", and "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of place in "Probability change state". Higher than the execution rate (eg, 20%). See Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the movable body is rarely operated unnecessarily even before the specific effect, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of Form 1-49 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-48.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
A specific effect for notifying that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and a specific effect executed after the specific effect and given in the advantageous state. An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a "movable body effect") that can execute an effect including a post-effect that notifies game value information (for example, the planned number of balls) that can specify the magnitude of the game value. And the part where "post-production" can be performed),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" (for example, one) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit"). The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (for example, 2) and the number of outlier variation patterns that can be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, 3).
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display time of the big hit fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B". The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) is smaller than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and is determined in the "probability change state". A portion of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern that is less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds); see FIG. 11-50).
The effect mode of the post-effect is common to the case where the post-effect is executed in the first special state and the case where the post-effect is executed in the second special state (for example, SP). As shown in FIG. 11-60, the effect mode of the "post-effect" that informs the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state that informs that the reach effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is "time saving state". The part common to "B", "probability change state", and "time saving state A". See Fig. 11-50),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Is common with the first special state after being informed that the digestion speed of the variable display is increased by reducing the types of variable display patterns and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, and that the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to provide a suitable second special state because it can be excited by the production of.

The gaming machine of Form 1-50 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-49.
It is determined that the specific effect is executed when the determination means determines to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the determination means controls the advantageous state in the second special state. The specific effect executed when it is performed is common (for example, the "movable body effect" executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability variation state, and the variable in the time saving state B. The part that is common to the "movable body effect" that is executed when the display result is a big hit. See Fig. 11-59 (D1)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the specific effect between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-51 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-50.
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light
Used for controlling the control data used for controlling the light emitting means for emitting light in conjunction with the post-effect in the first special state and for controlling the light emitting means for emitting light in conjunction with the post-effect in the second special state. The control data is common (for example, the control data used for controlling the movable LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state A or the probabilistic state, and the "post-effect" in the time-saving state B are linked. Is common to the control data used to control the movable LED 208 to emit light (for example, the light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the post-staging in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-52 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-51.
Equipped with a vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined part,
A vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-effect in the first special state, and a vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-effect in the second special state. Is common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state A or the probabilistic state, and executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state B. Is in common with the vibration mode to be performed (for example, the vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by standardizing the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the post-staging in the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of Form 2-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-27.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
A specific effect for notifying that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and a specific effect executed after the specific effect and given in the advantageous state. An effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a "movable body effect") that can execute an effect including a post-effect that notifies game value information (for example, the planned number of balls) that can specify the magnitude of the game value. And the part where "post-production" can be performed),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 is "time saving state B". The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time saving state A" (for example, 2), and can be determined in "probability change state". The number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns (for example, less than 3),
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, the variable display result is "big hit". The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time saving state B” is the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time saving state A”. A portion that is less than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and less than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability change state". 50),
The effect mode of the post-effect is the case where the post-effect is executed in the first special state, the case where the post-effect is executed in the second special state, and the case where the post-effect is executed in the third special state. This is common to the case where the post-article effect is executed (for example, the "post-effect" that notifies the planned number of balls to be given in the big hit game state that notifies that the SP reach effect is controlled to the big hit game state. As shown in FIG. 11-60, the staging mode of the above is common to the “time saving state B”, the “probability changing state”, and the “time saving state A”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display determined to be controlled to the advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. After being informed that the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, the digestion rate of the variable display is increased and the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state, the first special state and the first state Since it is possible to excite with the same effect as the 3 special states, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of Form 1-53 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-52.
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on what has been done (for example, winning a prize in the second starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Fluctuation efficiency of state control means (for example, CPU 103 has a normal state and a special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled into a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. (Parts that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control to improve
A first hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as hold storage.
A second reserved storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the reserved storage).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The variable display pattern determining means is
The second reserved storage is a variable display in which the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the first special state and the control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means. It is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (eg, "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period in which the means can store the hold storage.
The predetermined variable display period when the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the second special state and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than that (for example, the CPU 103 is a time for storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage when the reserved storage number is 0 in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A. While it is possible to determine an out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds), the time saving state B When the number of reserved storages is 0, the variable display time is longer than the variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or SP reach variation with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). A portion in which a short shortened non-reach variation pattern (eg, ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds or shortened non-reach A with a variation time of 3 seconds) can be determined; see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is made even when the hold storage is not stored, considering that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the predetermined variable display pattern having a long period is not determined and the digestion rate of the variable display does not decrease, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine of Form 2-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-28.
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening), and the second start condition is satisfied. The second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on what has been done (for example, winning a prize in the second starting winning opening of the game ball), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Fluctuation efficiency of state control means (for example, CPU 103 has a normal state and a special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled into a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. (Parts that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control to improve
A first hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the first identification information as hold storage.
A second reserved storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information related to the variable display of the second identification information as the reserved storage).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The variable display pattern determining means is
When the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the first special state or the third special state, and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. , A predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") of a predetermined variable display period capable of storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage means can be determined.
The predetermined variable display period when the reserved storage is not stored in the second reserved storage means in the second special state and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than that (for example, the CPU 103 is a time for storing the reserved storage in the second reserved storage when the reserved storage number is 0 in the probability change state or the time saving state A. While it is possible to determine an out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds), the time saving state B When the number of reserved storages is 0, the variable display time is longer than the variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or SP reach variation with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). Can determine a short shortened non-reach variation pattern (eg, ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds or shortened non-reach A with a variation time of 3 seconds; see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is made even when the hold storage is not stored, considering that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the predetermined variable display pattern having a long period is not determined and the digestion rate of the variable display does not decrease, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of Form 1-54 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-53.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
An effect executing means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing an effect including a special state start effect that notifies the start of control of the special state by displaying a special state start display when the control of the special state is started. The part where the CPU 120 can execute the "rush effect") and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that the variable display has been executed.
The effect executing means is
When the control of the first special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect.
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect, and a special display that is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image are displayed in the probability change rush effect. While the inrush image 069SG472 consisting of 069SG471 is displayed, when the control of the time saving state B is started, it is common with the inrush image 069SG470 displayed when the time saving state A and the probable change state are entered in the time saving inrushing effect B. A portion for displaying the inrush image 069SG470 and displaying the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started. FIGS. 11-50, 11-63, (See Figures 11-64),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the first special state is set in the special state start staging in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since not only the special state start display common to the time when the control is started but also the special display which is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed, the start of the second special state can be excited.

The gaming machine of Form 1-55 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-54.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can set a variable pattern in step 069SGS111) capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means. In the process, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means can determine a special variable display pattern for a variable display period in which the special state start effect can be executed in the variable display in which the control of the second special state is started (for example, the effect control). The CPU 120 may be able to determine a special variation pattern having a variable display time capable of executing the "rush effect" in the relief time reduction arrival variation).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special state start effect can be suitably executed.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of Form 2-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-29.
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). , Pachinko gaming machine 1)
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
When the control of the special state is started, the effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing the effect including the special state start effect of notifying the start of the control of the special state by displaying the special state start display. The part where the CPU 120 can execute the "rush effect") and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) Is executed, the second special state (for example, the time saving state B) is controlled, and the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state is completed. Including a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) controlled by
The effect executing means is
When the control of the third special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect.
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect, and the special display that is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving rush effect A, and when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image are displayed in the probability change rush effect. While the inrush image 069SG472 consisting of 069SG471 is displayed, when the control of the time saving state B is started, it is common with the inrush image 069SG470 displayed when the time saving state A and the probable change state are entered in the time saving inrushing effect B. A portion that displays the inrush image 069SG470 and displays the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started. FIGS. 11-50, 11-63, (See Figures 11-64),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the third special state is set in the special state start staging in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the advantageous state continues for a long time. Since not only the special state start display common to the time when the control is started but also the special display which is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed, the start of the second special state can be excited.

(SG2020-119) The gaming machine of Form 1-56 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 1-1 to Form 1-55.
It is possible to variablely display the special identification information based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball), and to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 of the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Variable decoration display means that performs variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). ) The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed is included.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. 10R)), including
When the determination means determines that the decorative variable display means is controlled to the advantageous state, the decorative variable display means is used as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. It is possible to execute a special decorative variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) in which the specific display result to be displayed is variablely displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped and displayed.
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determination means determines to control the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determination means in the first special state. The effect is higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined to control to an advantageous state (for example, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B. The rate at which the control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" (for example, 100%) is such that when the "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state A, the effect control CPU 120 "SP reach". The effect control CPU 120 is higher than the rate of executing "D (full rotation)" (for example, 0% (non-execution)) and when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the probabilistic state. A portion higher than the rate at which "SP reach D (full rotation)" is executed (for example, 0% (non-execution)), see FIGS. 11-69).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is controlled to the second advantageous state having a high advantage in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. When is determined, a special variable display is likely to be executed, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of Form 2-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2-1 to Form 2-30.
The special identification information can be variably displayed based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball), and the advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, the jackpot gaming state) can be controlled. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The fluctuation efficiency of the state control means (for example, the CPU 103 is improved between the normal state and the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol)) that can be controlled between the non-special state and the special state in which the start condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. The part that can be controlled into the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B) to execute the time saving control.
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process).
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines step 069SGS111). In the fluctuation pattern setting process of, the part that determines one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns based on the variable display result) and
Variable decoration display means that performs variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol as a plurality of types of decoration identification information. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times). The second special state (for example, the time saving state B) controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information of) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state. Includes a third special state (eg, probabilistic state) that is controlled when
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. 10R)), including
When the determination means determines that the decorative variable display means is controlled to the advantageous state, the decorative variable display means is used as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. It is possible to execute a special decorative variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) in which the specific display result to be displayed is variablely displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped and displayed.
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determination means determines to control the second advantageous state in the second special state is the rate at which the determination means determines in the first special state. When it is determined that the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state, and it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state by the determining means in the third special state. (For example, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B, the effect control CPU 120 executes "full rotation effect". The rate (for example, 100%) is the rate at which the effect control CPU 120 executes "SP reach D (full rotation)" when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state A (for example, 100%). For example, when it is higher than 0% (non-execution) and "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the probability change state, the effect control CPU 120 executes "SP reach D (full rotation)". Percentage higher than (eg, 0% (non-execution)); see Figures 11-69),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is controlled to the second advantageous state having a high advantage in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the advantageous state continues for a long time. When is determined, a special variable display is likely to be executed, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(Characteristic part 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The gaming machine of Form 1 of the feature unit 099SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state by the first number of times, which is executed in the second special state, is the period value executed in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled to the advantageous state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the variation of 1 in the time saving state B). The period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of Small part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-100) The gaming machine of Form 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state by the first number of times, which is executed in the second special state, is the period value executed in the first special state. One variable that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state by the first number of times and that is executed in the third special state and is not controlled by the advantageous state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for display by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B). The period value ψ obtained by multiplying β by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is. A portion smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state, by 110),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-101) The gaming machine of Form 3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state by the second number of times, which is executed in the second special state, is the period value executed in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled to the favorable state by the second number (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the variation of 1 in the time saving state B). The period value ψ'obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of, by 1100, is the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time saving state A, by 1100. 'Small part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-102) The gaming machine of Form 4 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state by the second number of times, which is executed in the second special state, is the period value executed in the first special state. One variable that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state by the second number of times and that is executed in the third special state and is not controlled by the advantageous state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for display by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value which is the average fluctuation time of one variation in the time saving state B). The period value ψ'obtained by multiplying β by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ'obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 1100, and is a period value. ψ'is a part smaller than the period value ω'obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the probabilistic state, by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-103) The gaming machine of Form 5 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving state B. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 110 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-104) The gaming machine of Form 6 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the third special state, which is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 which is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of order, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 0, by 110 is the second special figure reserved storage in the time saving state A. The period value ξ is smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number is 0 by 110, and the period value ξ is in the probabilistic state. 2nd special figure A part smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 0, and the variable display result is out of order by 110).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-105) The gaming machine of Form 7 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, it starts when the number of reserved second special figures is 0 in the time saving state B. The period value ξ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 1100 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value ν'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-106) The gaming machine of Form 8 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 0 in the third special state, which is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 which is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value ξ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of order, which is started when the number of hold storages is 0, by 1100 is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A. The period value ξ'is smaller than the period value ν'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number of stored items is 0 is 1100, and the period value ξ'is. The part smaller than the period value π'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved memory of the second special figure is 0 in the probabilistic state, and the variable display result is out of order by 1100. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-107) The gaming machine of Form 9 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B. The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 110 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-108) The gaming machine of the form 10 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means is 1 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the third special state, which is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times. The second special figure in the time saving state B is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19). The period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of order, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 1, by 110 is the second special figure reserved storage in the time saving state A. The period value λ is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number is 1, is 110, and the period value λ is in the probabilistic state. 2nd special figure A part smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 1, and the variable display result is out of order by 110).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-109) The gaming machine of Form 11 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B. The period value λ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 1100 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value κ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-110) The gaming machine of Form 12 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means is 1 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1 in the third special state, which is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times. The second special figure in the time saving state B is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20). The period value λ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 1, and the variable display result is out of order by 1100, is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A. It is smaller than the period value κ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that starts when the number of storages is 1, and the period value λ is probable. The part smaller than the period value μ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the state, and the variable display result is out of order, by 1100) ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-111) The gaming machine of the form 13 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the time saving state B. The period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-112) The gaming machine of the form 14 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 which is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 2, and the variable display result is out of order by 110, is the second special figure reserved storage in the time saving state A. The period value θ is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number is two is out of order by 110, and the period value θ is in the probabilistic state. 2nd special figure A part smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 2, and the variable display result is out of order by 110).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-113) The gaming machine of the form 15 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the time saving state B. The period value θ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 1100 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value η'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-114) The gaming machine of the form 16 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value θ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 2, and the variable display result is out of order by 1100, is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A. The period value θ'is smaller than the period value η'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number of storages is 2, is 1100, and the period value θ'is. The part smaller than the period value ι'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved memory of the second special figure is 2 in the probabilistic state, and the variable display result is out of order by 110. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-115) The gaming machine of Form 17 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, it starts when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state B. The period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 110 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 110),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-116) The gaming machine of the form 18 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The first number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is three. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-15, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 3, and the variable display result is out of order by 110, is the second special figure reserved storage in the time saving state A. The period value ε is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number is three is out of order by 110, and the period value ε is in the probabilistic state. 2nd special figure A part smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 3, and the variable display result is out of order by 110).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-117) The gaming machine of Form 19 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
It is possible to control a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the variable display is executed more frequently than the non-special state. A state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) is provided.
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. Includes a second special state (eg, time saving state B) that is controlled on condition that it has been done.
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the first special state. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, it starts when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state B. The period value ε'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is performed by 1100 is started when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state A. The part smaller than the period value δ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display for which the variable display result is out of order by 1100),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

(SG2020-118) The gaming machine of the form 20 is
A gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied (for example, winning a prize at the starting winning opening of the gaming ball). Pachinko game machine 1)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled into a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time saving state A, a time saving state B, a probable change state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state. Is provided with the part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6).
The special state is a first special state (for example, a time saving state A) controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) of variable display is executed. A second special state (for example, a time saving state B) controlled on the condition that it has been performed, and a third controlled state when the first special state or the advantageous state controlled from the second special state ends. Including special states (eg, probabilistic states),
The termination condition of the first special state includes that the variable display of the first number of times (for example, 110 times) is executed in the first special state.
The termination condition of the second special state includes that the variable display of the second number of times (for example, 1100 times) larger than the first number of times is executed in the second special state.
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display of the third number of times (for example, 110 times) less than the second number of times is executed in the third special state.
Further provided with a hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
The second number of times is set during the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the second special state. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3 in the first special state. The advantage that is started when the variable display period is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times and the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means in the third special state is three. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the second special figure in the time saving state B. The period value ε'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved storages is 3, and the variable display result is out of order by 1100, is the second special figure hold in the time saving state A. The period value ε'is smaller than the period value δ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result started when the number of storages is 3 is 1100, and the period value ε'is. The part smaller than the period value ζ'obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display, which is started when the number of reserved memory of the second special figure is 3 in the probabilistic state, and the variable display result is out of order by 1100. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, so that the second special state can be advanced. You can improve the game entertainment of the state.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a gaming medium into a gaming area (for example, a right gaming area and a left gaming area) where the gaming medium can flow down.
As the variable display, the variable display of the special identification information and the variable display of the normal identification information can be executed (for example, the part where the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed).
Based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information, the game medium is in the first state (for example, the open state) in which the game medium can enter and the game medium is more than the first state. A variable means (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B forming a second starting winning opening) that is changed to a second state (closed state) that is difficult to enter, and
A hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B) that can store information related to the variable display of the special identification information as hold storage.
Equipped with
The game area has a special path provided with the variable means (for example, a left game area) and a non-special path different from the special path (for example, a right game area).
The maximum number of reserved storages that can be stored by the reserved storage means is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding). The number of reserved storages that can be stored in the storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state),
The probability that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, FIG. 12-2 (for example, FIG. 12-2). As shown in B), the part where the probability of hitting a normal figure is the same regardless of whether the gaming state is the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the probability variation state),.
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, in FIG. 12-2 (D)). As shown, the part where the opening time of the second starting winning opening is 3 seconds regardless of whether the gaming state is the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the probability change state).
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is launched toward the special path (for example, in both the time saving state A and the time saving state B, a game in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area. The part that is in the state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the part where the playability is common between the first special state and the second special state, and the playability is improved between the first special state and the second special state which are the same special states. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the large difference.

The gaming machine of the form 22 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 21.
In the case where the period value is obtained by measuring the period required until the variable display not controlled by the advantageous state of the first number of times or the second number of times is executed in each special state, the starting point of the measurement is , The timing when the game ball is launched, or the timing when the launched game ball wins the start winning opening, including the time when the launch of the game medium is started (for example, the variable display period in which the variable display result is off). The part that calculates the average variable display period as the period from to the end timing of the variable display based on the start prize),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the period value measured can be appropriately obtained.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2, Form 6, Form 10, Form 14, and Form 18.
Equipped with a hold storage means that can store multiple information related to variable display as hold storage.
The maximum number of reserved storages that can be stored by the reserved storage means is the same in all of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the first regardless of the gaming state). The number of reserved storages that can be stored in the special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),.
The average variable display period of the variable display of 1 which is not controlled by the advantageous state varies depending on the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means (for example, FIGS. 12-6, 12-8, 12-). As shown in 10, since the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is out of alignment differs depending on the number of reserved storages, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment is stored. (Different part depending on the number of reserved memories),
The period value is a total value obtained by multiplying the ratio of the variable display executed for each reserved storage number to the first number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved storage number (for example, FIG. 12-13). As shown in, the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the ratio of the variable display executed in each hold storage number to the 110 variable displays by the average variable display period of each hold storage number. The part that is),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 24th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 23rd embodiment.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the first special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period A, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio a (for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 is out of order. The average variable display period, a is a portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state A is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 1, is the average variable display period B and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio b (for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of order). The average variable display period, b is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the time saving state A is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times of the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period C and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio c (for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 is out of order). The average variable display period, c is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the time saving state A is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 times variable display in the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period D and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio d (for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is out of order). The average variable display period, d is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state A is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times of the time saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio a, and the average variable display period A, and the first number of times, the ratio b, and the average variable display period B. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio c, and the average variable display period C, the first number of times, the ratio d, and the average variable display period D. Is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by (for example, the period value α is a part calculated by the value of A × a + B × b + C × c + D × d).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to the 23rd or 24th form.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the second special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period E, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio e (for example, in the time saving state B, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 is out of order. The average variable display period, e is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state B is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period F and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio f (for example, in F, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order. The average variable display period, f is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the time saving state B is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period G and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is a ratio g (for example, in G, the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storages is 2 in the time saving state B is out of order. The average variable display period, g is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the time saving state B is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period H and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is a ratio h (for example, in H, the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storages is 3 in the time saving state B is out of order. The average variable display period, h is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state B is the ratio of the variable display in the 110 times variable display in the time saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio e, and the average variable display period E, the first number of times, the ratio f, and the average variable display period F. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio g, and the average variable display period G, the first number of times, the ratio h, and the average variable display period H. Is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by (for example, the period value β is a part calculated by the value of E × e + F × f + G × g + H × h).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 23rd to 25th forms.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the third special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period I, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio i (for example, I is an average in which the variable display result is out of order when the number of reserved second special figures is 0 in the probabilistic state. In the variable display period, i is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the probabilistic state is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period J and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio j (for example, J is an average in which the variable display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 1 in the probabilistic state. In the variable display period, j is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the probabilistic state is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 2, is the average variable display period K and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is a ratio k (for example, K is an average in which the variable display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reserved storages is 2 in the probabilistic state. In the variable display period, k is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the probabilistic state is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period L and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is a ratio l (for example, L is an average in which the variable display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probabilistic state. In the variable display period, l is the portion in which the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the probabilistic state is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The period value of the third special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio i, and the average variable display period I, and the first number of times, the ratio j, and the average variable display period J. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period K, the first number of times, the ratio l, and the average variable display period L. Is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by (for example, the period value γ is a part calculated by the value of I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 27th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 4th, 8th, 12th, 16th, and 20th forms.
A holding storage means (for example, the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing a plurality of information related to the variable display as the holding storage is provided.
The maximum number of reserved storages that can be stored by the reserved storage means is the same in all of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the first regardless of the gaming state). The number of reserved storages that can be stored by the special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),
The average variable display period of the variable display varies depending on the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10). Since the selection rate of the variable display variation pattern that causes the display result to be off differs depending on the number of reserved storages, the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the variable display result to be off depends on the number of hold storages that are stored. part),
The period value is a total value obtained by multiplying the ratio of the variable display executed for each reserved storage number to the second number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved storage number (for example, FIG. 12-14). As shown in, the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the ratio of the variable display executed in each reserved storage number to the 1100 variable display times by the average variable display period of each reserved storage number. The part that is),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the 28th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 27th embodiment.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the first special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period A, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is a ratio a'(for example, A is a time saving state A and the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 0 is out of order. The average variable display period, a'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state A to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 1, is the average variable display period B and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio b'(for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of order). The average variable display period, b'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the time saving state A to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period C and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio c'(for example, in the time saving state A, the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is two is out of order). The average variable display period, c'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the time saving state A to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state A).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period D and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio d'(for example, in D, the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state A is out of order. The average variable display period, d'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state A to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio a', and the average variable display period A, the second number of times, the ratio b', and the average variable display. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by the period B, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio c'and the average variable display period C, the second number of times, the ratio d', and the average. It is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period D (for example, the period value α'is calculated by the value of A × a'+ B × b'+ C × c'+ D × d'. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the means 29 is the gaming machine according to the 27th or 28th form.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the second special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period E, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio e'(for example, in the time saving state B, the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is out of order). The average variable display period, e'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period F and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio f'(for example, F is a time saving state B, and the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is one is out of order. The average variable display period, f'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period G and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio g'(for example, G is a time saving state B, and the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is two is out of order. The average variable display period, g'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is two in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable displays of the time saving state B).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period H and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio h'(for example, H is a time saving state B, and the variable display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 is out of order. The average variable display period, h'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable display of the time saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio e', and the average variable display period E, the second number of times, the ratio f', and the average variable display. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by the period F, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio g', and the average variable display period G, the second number of times, the ratio h', and the average. It is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period H (for example, the period value β'is calculated by the value of E × e'+ F × f'+ G × g'+ H × h'. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

The gaming machine of the form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of the 27th to 29th forms.
The upper limit of the number of reserved storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved storage that can be stored in the 1st special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the 2nd special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state. Some parts),
In the third special state
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the hold storage number stored in the hold storage means is 0, is the average variable display period I, and the hold storage number is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number is the ratio i'(for example, I is out of the variable display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the probabilistic state. In the average variable display period, i'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the probabilistic state to the 1100 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 1, is the average variable display period J and the number of reserved storages is 1. The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is the ratio j'(for example, J is out of the variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 1 in the probabilistic state. Average variable display period, j'is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure hold memory in the probabilistic state to the 1100 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 2, is the average variable display period K and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio k'(for example, K is a variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storages is 2 in the probabilistic state). In the average variable display period, k'is the ratio of the variable display when there are two second special figure hold memories in the probabilistic state to the 1100 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state, which is executed when the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage means is 3, is the average variable display period L and the number of reserved storages is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the second number of times is a ratio l'(for example, L is a variable display result when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probabilistic state). In the average variable display period, l'is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the probabilistic state to the 1100 variable displays in the probabilistic state).
The period value of the third special state is a hold 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio i', and the average variable display period I, and the second number of times, the ratio j', and the average variable display. The hold 1 corresponding value multiplied by the period J, the hold 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio k', and the average variable display period K, the second number of times, the ratio l', and the average. It is the total value of the hold 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period L (for example, the period value γ'is calculated by the value of I × i'+ J × j'+ K × k'+ L × l'. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

(Characteristic part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) The gaming machine of the form 3-1 of the feature unit 018 SG form is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 018SG).
With a light emitting body (for example, a movable body LED 208, a frame LED 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc.),
A movable body (for example, a movable body 32) and
An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state and a special effect for operating the movable body and causing the light emitting body to emit light is provided. SP reach production A to E and the part where movable body production can be performed) and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
As the specific effect, a first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect B) that displays a specific character (for example, enemy character X-1) and notifies whether or not the specific character is used to control the advantageous state. ) And the second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A) that notifies whether or not the specific character is controlled to the advantageous state without displaying the specific character.
When it is notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect can be executed during the execution period of the specific effect (for example, among the execution periods of the SP reach effect (ta2 to ta5). The part where the movable body effect can be performed in ta3 to ta4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the first specific effect, the specific character (for example, character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with the effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body (FIG. 13-14). (D2) (see D4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, an effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B) related to the operation of the movable body in the same mode as the first specific effect is displayed, while the specific character is displayed. Is not displayed (see Fig. 13-14 (D1)),
The light emitting mode of the light emitting body in the special effect (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2) is a case where the special effect is executed in the first specific effect and a case where the special effect is executed in the second specific effect. (See Fig. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first specific effect in which the specific character is displayed and the second specific effect in which the specific character is not displayed, the operation mode of the movable body and the light emission mode of the light emitting body in the special effect are standardized and the manufacturing cost is reduced. The relationship between the specific effect and the special effect can be enhanced and the effect of the effect can be improved depending on whether or not the specific character is displayed during the execution period of the special effect.

The gaming machine of Form 3-2 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-1.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the first specific effect is executed than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, the super reach β is higher than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α). Since the fluctuation pattern of is higher than the SP reach production A, the SP reach production B and the SP reach production C have a higher jackpot expectation (big hit expectation: SP reach production A <SP reach production B). <SP reach production C) part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-3 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-1 or Form 3-2.
The execution period of the special effect is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, the execution period (ta3 to ta4) of the "decision effect" in the SP reach effects A to E is the SP reach. Common to the productions A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP reach production A = SP reach production B = SP reach production C = SP reach production D = SP reach production E)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the special effect common, the control data of the movable body and the light emitting body in the special effect can be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-3.
The execution period of the special effect includes a first period and a second period after the first period.
While the effect mode in the first period is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect, the effect mode in the second period differs between the first specific effect and the second specific effect (the first specific effect and the second specific effect). For example, the execution period of the movable body effect includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the effect mode in the first period is common to the SP reach effects B to E and the SP reach effect A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14 (C) is common), the effect mode in the second period is different between the SP reach effects B to E and the SP reach effect A. FIG. 13-14 (D1). The image shown is different from the image shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is either the first specific effect or the second specific effect until the first period, while further reducing the manufacturing cost by sharing the effect mode until the first period. Since it is unclear whether or not, it is possible to improve the production interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of Form 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-4.
As the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a third specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) that displays a special character (for example, enemy character X-2) different from the specific character.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between when the first specific effect is executed and when the third specific effect is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit in the low base state). The determination ratio of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and the determination ratio of the SP reach γ variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect E when the variable display result is a big hit in the high base state. Is 800/997),
In the third specific effect, an effect image common to the first specific effect according to the movement of the movable body during the execution period of the special effect executed when it is notified that the control is controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, the effect image 018SG250B) is displayed and the special character (for example, the character image 018SGX2) is displayed.
The light emitting mode of the light emitting body in the special effect executed in the third specific effect (for example, the light emitting pattern LP3-2) is the light emitting mode of the light emitting body in the special effect executed in the first specific effect. Common (see Figure 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the number of specific effects in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different, while reducing the manufacturing cost by standardizing the operation mode of the movable body and the light emission mode of the light emitting body in each special effect. It can be done, and it is possible to pay attention to which specific effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-5.
A motion detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a player's motion is provided.
Light emission of the light emitting body in the special effect regardless of the detection timing in which the operation of the player is detected by the operation detection means in the operation effective period before the notification that the control to the advantageous state is controlled in the specific effect. The end mode is common (for example, at any time when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed, or the operation valid period without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing when is finished, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the light emitting end mode of the light emitting body can be changed by changing the timing at which the player operates, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-6.
The effect executing means can execute a post-period effect (big hit notification) in a post-period after the special effect during the specific effect.
The light emission pattern is common regardless of the type of the specific effect in which the post-period effect is executed (for example, the jackpot is confirmed as the post-period effect in the post-period after the movable body effect during the execution of the SP reach effects A to E). Notification can be executed, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission patterns of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 are common regardless of the types of SP reach effects A to E (for example, light emission pattern LP3). -2) Part. See Fig. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the post-period effect is executed with a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of the specific effect, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-7.
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
The effect executing means can output a special effect sound from the sound output means in the special effect.
The output pattern of the special effect sound is common to all types of the specific effect (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is common to all types of SP reach effects A to E (sound). Pattern BP0-1 to 3) part. See Fig. 13-6 (C)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by sharing the output pattern of the special effect sound, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of Form 3-9 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-8.
A motion detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a player's motion is provided.
Regardless of the detection timing in which the movement of the player is detected by the movement detecting means in the operation valid period before the notification that the control to the advantageous state is controlled in the specific effect, the special effect sound in the special effect The output end mode is common (for example, at any time when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed, or the operation is valid without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the end of the period, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1-4).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the output end mode of the special effect sound can be changed by changing the timing at which the player operates, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-9.
The specific character displayed in the special effect executed in the first specific effect is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the movable body 32 is displayed. The effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration has a display color common to or similar to the display colors of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a portion displayed in a similar color).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the relationship between the specific character and the effect image can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

(SG2020-019) The gaming machine of Form 3-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-10.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 018SG).
A movable body (for example, a movable body 32) and
A staging execution means (for example, staging control) capable of executing a specific staging that notifies whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, a special staging that operates the movable body, and a post-staging that is executed after the special staging. CPU 120 can execute SP reach effects A to E and post-effects A and B)
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
As the specific effect, an effect of displaying a specific character (for example, an enemy character) and notifying whether or not the specific character is used to control the advantageous state is referred to as a first aspect (for example, SP reach effect B). It can be executed in the second aspect (for example, SP reach effect D).
When it is notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the special effect can be executed during the execution period of the specific effect (for example, among the execution periods of the SP reach effect (ta2 to ta5). The part where the movable body effect can be performed in ta3 to ta4)),
During the execution period of the special effect, in both the first aspect and the second aspect, the specific character (for example, the character image) together with the common effect image (for example, the effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body. 018SGX1) is displayed,
When the specific effect is executed in the first aspect, the post-effect using the specific character displayed in the specific effect of the first aspect is not executed, and the specific effect is the second aspect. When executed in the embodiment, the post-effect using the specific character displayed in the specific effect of the second aspect is executed (for example, in the case of the SP reach effect B, in the SP reach effect). Instead of the post-effect B using the displayed enemy character X-1, the post-effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed (see FIGS. 13-17), while the SP reach effect D is the SP reach effect. Post-aging B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19) is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first aspect and the second aspect, the common specific character is displayed in different effects while the operation mode of the movable body in the specific character and the special effect is standardized to reduce the manufacturing cost. As a result, the relationship between the specific effect and the special effect and the specific effect and the post-effect can be enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-12 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-11.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect that changes the specific character into a special mode after the special effect executed in the specific effect.
The special effect when the specific effect is executed in the second aspect is executed after the post-effect (for example, in the SP reach effect B, the jackpot notification before the post-effect A is defeated. The character image 018SGX1Z, in which the enemy character X-1 is hidden by the fade-out display, is displayed (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)). The special image 018SGXZ that disappears after being skipped and becomes a star is displayed (see Fig. 13-19 (G1-5)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes according to the mode of the specific effect, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-13 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-11 or Form 3-12.
It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display,
The effect executing means can execute the post-effect during the variable display period in which the variable display of 1 is executed.
In the post-effect, game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state notified to be controlled by the specific effect related to the post-effect is notified (for example, SP). The execution period of "post-effects A and B" in reach α, β, and γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the SP reach effects A to E. From the timing ta5 where the fixed decoration symbol which is the predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification, the timing ta7 where the fixed decoration symbol which is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (variable display ends) (The part that is said to be (ta5 to ta7)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the attention to the post-production in which the game value information is notified, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Form 3-14 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-11 or Form 3-12.
It is a gaming machine that is informed that the specific display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display and is controlled to the advantageous state.
The effect executing means can execute the post-effect when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-effect A, B" in SP reach α, β, γ is In the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol that is the predetermined jackpot combination in the jackpot confirmation notification of the SP reach effects A to E is temporarily stopped. From the displayed timing ta5 to the timing ta7 (ta5 to ta7) where the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (variable display ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to recognize the timing when the post-production is executed, so that the attention to the post-production can be increased.

The gaming machine of Form 3-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-11 to Form 3-14.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the gaming value imparted to the first advantageous state is larger than that of the first advantageous state.
The ratio controlled to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific effect of the second aspect is executed than when the specific effect of the first aspect is executed (for example, SP in a low base state). When the SP reach effect B is executed when the reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the “big hit B (6R)” (first advantageous state) is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit A (6R)” (first advantageous state). The ratio controlled to (2 advantageous states) is 30%, and when the SP reach effect D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, “big hit B (6R)” (No. 1). The ratio controlled by "big hit C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than (1 advantageous state), is 40%),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to whether the specific effect is executed in the first aspect or the second aspect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-11 to Form 3-15.
When the specific effect is executed in the first aspect, the effect executing means can execute the post-effect in a mode in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, the post-effect A of the SP reach effect A). Then, since the character does not appear in the SP reach production A, the character does not appear in the post-production A. Further, in the post-production A of the SP reach productions B and C, the character appears in the SP reach productions B and C. The part where the character does not appear in the post-production A),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the post-effect is executed even when the specific effect of the first aspect is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-11 to Form 3-16.
It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display,
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect during the variable display of 1.
The variable display period of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the second aspect is shorter than the variable display period of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the first aspect.
The period from the end of the special effect to the derivation display of the variable display result in the specific effect of the second aspect is that the variable display result is derived after the special effect is completed in the specific effect of the first aspect. Longer than the period until it is displayed (for example, the variable display period of SP reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period of SP reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ <SP reach). β), The period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the “movable body effect” ends in the SP reach γ to the timing ta7 where the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is in the SP reach β. It is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ> SP) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body effect" ends to the timing ta7 (ta4 to ta7) when the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Reach β)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the specific effect of the second aspect executed in the short variable display period, the period after the end of the special effect is lengthened to enhance the impression of the variable display even if the variable display period is short. be able to.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of Form 3-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-17.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 018SG).
A specific effect that notifies whether or not the specific effect is controlled, a special effect that is executed when the specific effect is notified that the specific effect is controlled, and a post-execution that is executed after the special effect. A staging execution means (for example, a portion where the staging control CPU 120 can execute the SP reach staging A to E, the movable body staging, and the post-staging A and B) is provided.
The effect executing means is
Whether or not a specific character (for example, enemy character X-1) and a special character (friendly character A-1) are displayed as the specific effect and the specific character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state. The first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D) for notifying the above, and the special character (enemy character X-2) and the special character (ally character A-1) different from the specific character are displayed and the special character is displayed. A second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) for notifying whether or not the special character is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed.
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the specific character displayed in the first specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated, whereby the advantageous state is obtained. It is possible to execute the first post-production (for example, post-production B) for notifying the game value information (for example, the planned number of balls to be released) that can specify the magnitude of the game value given in.
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect, the special character displayed in the second specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated, whereby the advantageous state is obtained. It is possible to execute a second post-production (for example, post-production B) that notifies the game value information (for example, the planned number of balls to be released) that can specify the magnitude of the game value given in.
At least, the operation mode of the special character is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by using a common character for the specific effect and the ex-post effect, the relationship between the specific effect and the post-effect can be easily understood while reducing the manufacturing cost, so that the effect can be enhanced. can.

The gaming machine of Form 3-19 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-18.
The execution period of the second post-effect is the same as the execution period of the first post-effect (for example, all the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect B" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E are all. Common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by sharing the execution period, it is possible to easily divert the control data of the post-effect, particularly the motion control data of the special character, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced. ..

The gaming machine of Form 3-20 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-18 or Form 3-19.
The effect executing means can make the light emitting body emit light in the post-effect.
The light emitting pattern of the light emitting body is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the movable body LEDs 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball ejection addition part of the post-effect B). The light emission pattern is common to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the light emission pattern can be made common, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-18 to Form 3-20.
The effect executing means can display a background image in the post-effect, and the effect execution means can display a background image.
The background image is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E. (See FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the background image can be shared, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-18 to Form 3-21.
The special character is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the ally character A-1 is a post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and a post-effect B of the SP reach effect E. Common (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the special character can be shared, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-18 to Form 3-22.
The effect executing means is
In the first post-production, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at a common time.
In the second post-effect, the special character and the special character can be displayed at a common time (for example, in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D, the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 The image of fighting with is displayed at the same time, and the image of fighting between the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1 is displayed at the same time in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach effect E (FIG. 13-18). -See Fig. 13-19)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since each character is displayed at the same time, the impression of the post-effect can be enhanced and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-18 to Form 3-23.
The post-production production period includes a first production period and a second production period after the first production period.
The effect executing means is
In the first effect period, the suggestion display regarding the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state notified that it is controlled by the specific effect related to the post-effect and the magnitude of the game value to be added to the suggestion display. (For example, the planned number of balls to be added is displayed according to the attack of the enemy character by the ally character appearing in the SP reach effects D and E).
In the second effect period, the added game value obtained by adding the magnitude of the game value shown in the addition display to the game value shown in the suggestion display is added to the game value given in the advantageous state. (For example, after the ally character gives the last blow to the enemy character, the planned number of balls is stopped and displayed, and after the planned number of balls is notified, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination is displayed. Scheduled ball launch notification part where the stop display is displayed and the variable display ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the post-effect, the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state after the suggestion display and the addition display are displayed is notified, so that the effect of the post-effect can be enhanced.

(SG2020-021) The gaming machine of Form 3-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 3-1 to Form 3-24.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 018SG).
A specific effect that notifies whether or not the specific effect is controlled, a special effect that is executed when the specific effect is notified that the specific effect is controlled, and a post-execution that is executed after the special effect. A staging execution means (for example, a portion where the staging control CPU 120 can execute the SP reach staging A to E, the movable body staging, and the post-staging A and B) is provided.
The advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, "big hit A (6R)" in the low base state / "big hit B (6R)" in the high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A second advantageous state (for example, "big hit B (6R)" in the low base state / "big hit C (10R)" in the high base state) is included.
The effect executing means is
As the specific effect, a first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D), a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) having an effect mode different from that of the first specific effect, the first specific effect, and the first specific effect It is possible to execute a third specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A), which is different from the second specific effect.
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the first ex-post effect (for example, ally A-1 and enemy X-1) of the effect mode related to the first specific effect appears. Post-production B) can be performed,
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect, a second ex-post effect (for example, ally A-1 and enemy X-2) of an effect mode related to the second specific effect appears. Post-production B) can be performed,
As the post-effect, when the special effect is executed in the third specific effect, the third post-effect (for example, post-effect A) of the effect mode related to the third specific effect can be executed.
The ratio controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on whether the first specific effect, the second specific effect, or the third specific effect is executed (for example, SP reach γ jackpot variation in a high base state). When the pattern is determined, the ratio controlled by "big hit C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "big hit B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is SP reach. It is 40% when the effect D is executed and 60% when the SP reach effect E is executed. When the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state, “big hit A (6R)”. The ratio controlled by the "big hit B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than the (first advantageous state), is 100% when the SP reach effect A is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, not only is it notified that the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state, but also the ratio of being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which specific effect is executed. The degree of attention of the player can be appropriately increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-26 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-25.
While the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production are common,
The effect period of the third post-effect is different from the effect period of the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the execution period (ta5 to) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C. All ta7) are common, and while the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of "post-effect B" corresponding to each of SP reach effects D and E is common, the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" is common. ) And the execution period (15 seconds) of "Post-production B"),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by making the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production common, it is possible to easily standardize the production content and control between the first post-production and the second post-production. By reducing the cost and executing the third post-production with different production periods, it is possible to prevent the post-production from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to enhance the production effect of the post-production. ..

The gaming machine of Form 3-27 is the gaming machine according to Form 3-25 or Form 3-26.
The effect executing means can make the light emitting body emit light in the post-effect.
While the light emitting pattern of the light emitting body in the first post-effect is common to the light emitting pattern of the light emitting body in the second post-effect, while
The light emitting pattern of the light emitting body in the third post-effect is different from the light emitting pattern of the light emitting body in the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the post-event corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E). While the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in the scheduled ball ejection notification part of the production B are common, the post-production corresponding to the SP reach production A The movable body LED 208 of A, the light emission patterns of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3), and the movable body LED 208 in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E. A portion different from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12. See FIG. 13-6.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by sharing the light emission pattern of the first post-effect and the light emission pattern of the second post-effect, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost and the third post-effect with different light emission patterns. By executing the production, the effect of the post-production can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area from a predetermined ball launching device.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and the movable piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable piece is a winning ball. It is close to the device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is in the closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the movable piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting winning). It is also said that the mouth is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided to operate according to the effect. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball ejection rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per ordinary figure", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning has occurred, but it is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the big hit game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy / high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy / high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy / low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control the game state, the game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. It should be noted that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit of a game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) gives a staging control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The staging control board 12 is equipped with a staging control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the staging control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the normal figure hold number.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process to determine whether or not the number of rounds that open the big prize opening has reached the set maximum number of executions, and if the maximum number of executions is reached, the big hit game state. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the ball ejection rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the ball ejection rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball ejection rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, 1020 to 1346 of the above-mentioned hit determination values are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special map has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special map and the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (A).

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, 1020 to 1346 of the above-mentioned hit determination values are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "missing time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are common. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to the setting. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values that can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio that the variable display result is out of time reduction is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the staging control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various staging devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the staging operation using various staging devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the staging control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the staging control process process in step S76, the staging random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the staging random numbers used on the side of the staging control board 12 is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The big hit middle effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and turning off the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature unit 069SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 069SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-64. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the feature unit 069SG, for example, the part described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "069SGS1", and "normal reach" is referred to as "N reach" or "super reach". May be abbreviated as "SP reach". Further, in the feature units 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "variation" may be referred to as "variable display". Further, a configuration having the same function as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function will be designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Embodiment 1]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment in the feature unit 069SG will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) in which the ratio of displaying the jackpot display result is different. This is described as a gaming machine that is not configurable and has a jackpot probability of about 1/319.

Further, even if the variable display is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) in a low accuracy state after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after the big hit occurs. When the next big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to the time saving state B (also referred to as relief time saving state or relief time saving) among a plurality of types of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to rescue a player who has played a game for a long period of time but has not generated a big hit (for example, to suppress investment in the game). , In this example, it is a game state called "play time".

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is controlled among a plurality of types of jackpots, the variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state A (low accuracy / high base state) among the plurality of types of time saving states. While the variable display number from the end of the time reduction state A to the arrival of the relief time reduction is 790 times remaining, if it is controlled by either the jackpot B or the jackpot C among multiple types of jackpots, the probability change state (high accuracy). Since the variable display is performed 110 times in the / high base state), the remaining 900 variable display times from the end of the probability change state to the arrival of the relief time reduction. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display number of times in the time saving state B (low accuracy / high base state) based on the value of the relief time saving number counter becomes “0” is 1100 times.

In the present embodiment, in the variable display when the relief time reduction is reached, the shutter image (see FIGS. 11-23 (B) (C)) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, so that the variation before the relief time reduction is reached. In the display, after reducing the visibility of the first background image (see FIG. 11-23 (A)) corresponding to the normal state displayed as the background image, the third background image corresponding to the relief time reduction as the background image. (See FIG. 11-23 (D)) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in the left game area where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 is formed. It is formed in the right game area where the game ball can flow down. The game ball weakly launched by the launcher flows down the first path in the left game area, and the game ball strongly launched by the launcher flows down the second path in the right game area.

In the present embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening along the flow direction of the game ball. The first big prize opening is an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter by driving the opening and closing of the big prize opening door (not shown) by driving the solenoid 069SG2A (see Fig. 11-2). It is possible to change to the state. The second major winning opening is an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closing in which the game ball cannot enter by driving the opening and closing of the large winning opening door (not shown) by driving the solenoid 069SG2B (see Fig. 11-3). It is possible to change to the state.

Further, a first count switch 069SG023A capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the first large winning opening, and a second count switch 069SG023B capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the second large winning opening. There is.

That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area (first path) can win a prize in the general winning opening 10 and the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and the right game area (second path). ) Flows down to the second starting winning slot formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. It is possible to pass through the passage gate 41 as well as being possible.

The switch circuit 110 in the present embodiment is connected to the first count switch 069SG023A, the second count switch 069SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 069SG024 built in the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left game area cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area cannot win the first starting winning opening. There is.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the variable display of the first special figure can be executed at a predetermined position of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the lower left position of the gaming area) in the present embodiment. 1 Special symbol display device 069SG004A, 2nd special symbol display device 069SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold indicator 069SG025A capable of displaying 1st hold storage number, 2nd hold storage number can be displayed. 2nd hold display 069SG025B, normal symbol display 069SG020 that can execute variable display of normal symbols, normal figure hold display 069SG025C that can display the number of normal symbol hold storage, the number of rounds of the big hit game during the big hit game ( Round display 069SG131 capable of displaying (big hit type), big hit game state, high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), low accuracy / high base state (time saving state), etc. Right-handed lamp 069SG132 that lights up in the state, probability change lamp 069SG133 that lights up in the high accuracy / high base state (probability change state), high accuracy / high base state (probability change state) and low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) A game information display unit is provided in which the time-saving lamps 069SG134 that are lit are collectively arranged. The right-handed lamp 069SG132 is exceptionally lit from the timing when the variable display is stopped when the variable display result is a big hit in the case where the gaming state is the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, on the main board 11, game information (signals) is transmitted to an external device such as a management computer of the game hall in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). It is equipped with an information output circuit for output.

In the present embodiment, the V winning opening and the discharging port on the downstream side of the V winning opening are provided in the second large winning opening. Further, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided on the upstream side of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. That is, the game ball flowing down in the second large winning opening can pass through the V winning opening when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and the V winning opening when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. It is assumed that it cannot pass through and flows down to the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 has a V switch 069SG023B1 capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through a V winning opening provided downstream of the second major winning opening via a switch circuit 110. And a discharge switch 069SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the discharge port are provided.

Further, the vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and the movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 are connected to the staging control board 12. Further, the lamp control board 14 has a right-handed LED069SG031 for encouraging a right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED069SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol that lights up during the variable display. The second special drawing LED069SG033, the first holding LED069SG034A that lights up when the first holding storage number is 1 to 2, and the first holding LED069SG034B that lights up when the first holding storage number is 3 to 4. , The second holding LED069SG035A that lights up when the second holding storage number is 1 to 2, the second holding LED069SG035B that lights up when the second holding storage number is 3 to 4, and the push button 31B are built-in. The button LED 62, the movable body LED 208 built in the movable body 32, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected to each other.

FIG. 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determining the random value MR3, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), but the present invention is not limited thereto. The range of each random number value MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and ordinary symbols. A variation pattern determination table or the like that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns as an embodiment is stored.

FIG. 11-3 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 069SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 069SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 069SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, compared to the probability determined (about 1 / 319.68 in the feature unit 069SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the jackpot gaming state is higher (in the feature section 069SG). About 1 / 80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

In addition to the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 7, the determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1). In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), the variation pattern determination table, the normal map display result determination table (not shown), and the normal map variation pattern. A decision table (not shown) and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate) does not change according to the set value, but the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate) is configured according to the set value. ) May change.

(Big hit type judgment table)
11-3 (C1) and 11-3 (C2) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 11-3 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3 (D). In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, in which time reduction control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot gaming state, are provided. Further, these big hits A, big hit B, and big hit C are maximum after the end of the big hit game by winning the V winning opening after the game ball wins the second big winning opening in the first round of the big hit gaming state. It is also a big hit in which probabilistic control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In the present embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state (for example, 0.1 second) in which the open state is short and a long open state in which the open state is long. There is a state (eg, 15 seconds). In the jackpot A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. And.

In the big hit game state by "Big hit A", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit A", it is extremely difficult to make the game ball win the V winning opening because the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round, and the probability variation control may be executed. You can't expect it, so it's a real normal jackpot.

In the big hit game state by "big hit B", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit B", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V winning opening, and the probability variation control may be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial probability change jackpot.

In the big hit game state by "big hit C", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit C", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V winning opening, and the probability variation control may be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial probability change jackpot.

In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as the jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot types are two or less or two or less. Four or more types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to win the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state at a rate of 50%. After the jackpot game is over, both probability variation control and time saving control are performed. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state, so that the probability change control is performed after the big hit game is completed. And time saving control are both implemented.

In this example, even if the jackpot is A, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is in the short open state, but it is extremely rare. Therefore, if the jackpot is A, It will be described as assuming that the probability change control is not executed without winning the V prize. Further, even in the case of the big hit B and the big hit C, it is extremely rare that the V prize cannot be won when the V lid is in the long open state, so the big hit B and the big hit C are obtained. If this is the case, it will be described as assuming that the V prize is won and the probability variation control is executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as a jackpot type for the second special symbol, a mode having jackpots B and C capable of executing 110 times probability variation control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a jackpot D or the like in which the time saving control is performed 1009 times (probability change state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be provided. By doing so, the next big hit will be rich, so the interest will be improved, and even if the probability change control is completed without the big hit occurring in the 110 times probability change state after the end of the big hit D, the time saving state A (low). After executing 899 variable displays without a big hit (probability / high base state), it is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state) described later by only executing one variable display in the normal state. Therefore, the interest is improved.

(Number of time reductions)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, when the jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not win in the probability variation region, (1) the time reduction control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability is low. It is controlled to the time saving state A in which the control is performed 110 times (in this example, it is controlled to the battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time saving. In addition, either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball is in the probability variation area. When a prize is won, (1) the time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability change control is performed 110 times (in this example, the pole battle rush with 110 times of time saving (pole / BATTLE RUSH)). In addition, when the variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled by the jackpot in the low accuracy state, (1) the time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) the low accuracy control is 1100. It is controlled by the time saving state B (in this example, 1100 play / 1100 battle rush (play / 1100 BATTLE RUSH)) performed once. However, after the end of the time saving state B, it is controlled to a big hit in a low accuracy state. Even if the fluctuation is performed 900 times again without being performed, the time saving state B is not controlled again based on this.

In the normal state, when the missed symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed, (1) time reduction control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy control is performed 1100 times. Time reduction state B (in this example, time reduction). It may be controlled by 1100 times of play / 1100 battle rush). In this case, even if the missed symbol with the time reduction is stopped and displayed in the high base state (probability change state, time reduction state), the transition control of the gaming state is not performed (the time reduction state is not controlled to the time reduction number of 1100 times). This is because it does not reduce the degree of relief of the player. For example, if the player is configured to re-control to the time-saving state of 1100 times of time-saving based on the stop display of the missed symbol with time-saving when it is controlled to the probable change state that tends to be a big hit, the player. It is not preferable because it controls from a state that is favorable to the user to a state that is disadvantageous to the user. Therefore, only when the gaming state controlled when the missed symbol with the time reduction is stopped and displayed is the normal state, it may be configured to control the time reduction state to the time reduction state of 1100 times.

The relief time reduction arrival rate is a rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled by the big hit gaming state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.

K = {(1-ML) ^ n} × 100
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable number of impressions)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in the present embodiment is about 1/319, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.9%. In the case of a gaming machine in which a set value can be set, if the set value with a low jackpot probability has a higher relief time reduction arrival rate, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability. can do.

(Variation pattern)
11-5 to 11-8 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the present embodiment.

In FIGS. 11-5, (A) is a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for deviation when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 2, and (B) is variation for deviation when the number of reserved storages is 3. A specific example of the pattern determination table, and (C) a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 2, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach B, and SP reach A is assigned. Two determination values are assigned, and one determination value is assigned to SP reach B. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 3, 97 determination values are assigned to the shortened non-reach B, and SP reach A. Two determination values are assigned to SP reach B, and one determination value is assigned to SP reach B.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to B not via SP, and SP 40 determination values are assigned to reach A, and 50 determination values are assigned to SP reach B.

Further, in FIGS. 11-6, (A) is a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the probabilistic state, and (B) is for loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3. A specific example of the variation pattern determination table of (C) is shown, and (C) a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to non-reach A and 2 to SP reach C. Is assigned, and three determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, 85 determination values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A, which is non-reach. Ten determination values are assigned to reach A, two determination values are assigned to SP reach C, and three determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0, five determination values are assigned to A without SP, and SP reach C. 80 determination values are assigned to SP reach D, and 15 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

Further, in FIGS. 11-7, (A) is a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the time saving state A, and (B) is the case of loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3. A specific example of the variation pattern determination table for a jackpot is shown, and (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to non-reach A and 5 to SP reach E. Judgment value is assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), 90 judgment values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A in the variation pattern judgment table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, and the non-reach is non-reach. Five determination values are assigned to reach A, and five determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, five determination values are assigned to the SP non-via A, and the SP 95 determination values are assigned to reach E.

Further, in FIGS. 11-8, (A) is a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages in the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is 0, and (B) shows the number of reserved storages being 1 to 1. A specific example of the variation pattern determination table for loss in the case of No. 3 and (C) a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for a big hit when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach A and 3 to SP reach D. Judgment value is assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, 97 determination values are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach, and the SP Three determination values are assigned to reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for deviation that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the probabilistic state is about 8.2 seconds {((((). 7s x 95) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3. Is about 4.8 seconds {((3s × 85) + (7s × 10) + (40s × 2) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}.

Here, assuming that the probabilistic change state is started and the hold storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the hold storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 110 variable displays, it is for the deviation that can be determined in the probabilistic state. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for big hits that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 in the probabilistic state is about 51.1 seconds {(( Since (22s × 5) + (55s × 80) + (40s × 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for big hits that can be determined in the probabilistic state is about 51. .1 second.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the time saving state A is about 9.15 seconds {(( (7s x 95) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3 is about 5.55. Seconds {((3s × 90) + (7s × 5) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}.

Here, assuming that the time saving state A is started and the reserved storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the holding storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 110 times variable display, it can be determined in the time saving state A. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss is about 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable display time for the jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 in the time saving state A is about 62.8 seconds { ((22s × 5) + (55s × 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the time saving state B is about 7.54 seconds {(( (7s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3 is about 2.205. Seconds {((1.5s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}.

Here, assuming that the time saving state B is started and the reserved storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the holding storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 1100 variable display, it can be determined in the time saving state B. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss is about 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.25 × 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for big hits that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot that can be determined in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds.

As described above, the number of fluctuation patterns for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 is 3 in the probability variation state, 2 in the time saving state A, and 2 in the time saving state B, and the number of holding storages is 1 to 1. In the case of 3, the number of deviation patterns that can be determined is four in the probability variation state, three in the time saving state A, and two in the time saving state B.

The average time of the variable display time of the determinable deviation pattern is 4.83 seconds for the probable change state, 5.58 seconds for the time reduction state A, and 2.2 seconds for the time reduction state B.

Further, the number of fluctuation patterns for big hits that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is 3 in the probability variation state, 2 in the time saving state A, and 1 in the time saving state B.

The average time of the variable display time of the determinable jackpot variation pattern is 51.1 seconds in the probabilistic state, 62.8 seconds in the time saving state A, and 40 seconds in the time saving state B.

That is, the number of types of determinable loss variation patterns decreases in the order of probabilistic change state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (probability change state> time saving state A> time saving state B), and the determinable loss variation variation pattern is variable. The average display time is shortened in the order of probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (probability variation state> time reduction state A> time reduction state B).

In addition, the types of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined decrease in the order of probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (probability variation state> time reduction state A> time reduction state B), and the determinable jackpot variation pattern is variably displayed. The average time is shortened in the order of probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (probability variation state> time reduction state A> time reduction state B). As described above, the time saving state B has fewer fluctuation pattern types and the variable display period of 1 is shorter than that of the probabilistic change state and the time saving state A. That is, a monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

As for the number of types of variation patterns for loss and the number of types of variation patterns for big hits that can be determined, the embodiment in which the probability variation state is larger than the time reduction state A is exemplified, but the time reduction state A is larger than the probability variation state. It may be the same in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A.

Further, the various variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-8 are commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In particular, in the time saving state B, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-8 is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that even if the first start winning is generated in the time saving state B, Compared to the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the number of variable pattern types that can be determined is small, and the average time of the variable display time is short, so that monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

It should be noted that different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

If a V prize is generated in the big hit game state by "big hit A", the probability change control and the time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit game state, as in the case of "big hit B" and "big hit C". Since it is controlled, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6. Further, when the V prize is not generated in the big hit game state by "big hit B" or "big hit C", the time saving state A in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state as in "big hit A". Therefore, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-7. That is, the variation pattern determination table does not use the variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type, and an irregular state may occur in the jackpot gaming state, so that the state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is linked. The fluctuation pattern judgment table is used.

That is, in a gaming machine capable of controlling a probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the gaming ball through a specific area (for example, a V winning opening) in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), V If a V prize occurs in a jackpot gaming state where a prize can be won, it is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, while when a V prize does not occur in a jackpot gaming state where a V prize can be won, the said When the V winning is not generated in the big hit gaming state where it is controlled to the first time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state and the V winning is difficult, the second time saving state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. The first time saving state and the second time saving state are common time saving states, and the variable display period of 1 in the first time saving state and the second time saving state is the variable display of 1 in the time saving state B of the present embodiment. It is preferably shorter than the period.

(Variation pattern without reach)
In the present embodiment, fluctuation patterns without reach (“shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B”, “ultra-shortened non-reach”, “non-reach A, non-reach B”, “SP non-via A, SP non-reach” “Via B”) is a variation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established and the variable display result is “missing” or “big hit” after the variable display is started is stopped and displayed. "Shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra-shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "SP non-reach A, SP non-reach B" are simply "non-reach" or "non-reach" Also called "non-reach fluctuation pattern". In addition, "SP non-via A, SP non-via B" is a non-reach fluctuation pattern for a big hit, which is a big hit without establishing reach or SP reach.

In the present embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns without reach, the variable display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach A" is 7000 ms, and it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "SP non-via A". The variable display period in the case is 7000 + 15000 ms, the variable display period when determined to be a “non-reach B” variation pattern is 12000 ms, and the variable display period is determined to be a “SP non-via B” variation pattern. Is 12000 + 15000 ms, the variable display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "shortened non-reach A" is 3000 ms, and the variable display period when determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "shortened non-reach B" is 5000 ms. , The variable display period when it is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortened non-reach" is 1500 ms. Of these, the variation pattern of "ultra-shortened non-reach" is a variation pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, and is controlled to another gaming state (time saving state A, probability changing state) in which the time saving control is executed. The variable display period is shorter than any of the fluctuation patterns determined in.

(Variation pattern with super reach)
In the present embodiment, the reach state is established in the fluctuation pattern with super reach (“SP reach A”, “SP reach B”, “SP reach C”, “SP reach D”, “SP reach E”). Later, as the SP reach effect, a boring effect (SP reach A) that informs whether or not the ally character and the enemy character have won the big hit by boring, and a battle between the ally character and the enemy character. A battle effect (SP reach B to E) for notifying whether or not a big hit has been won is executed, and the final display result is fixedly stopped after the boring effect and the battle effect are completed. Here, when the final display result is "missing", the effect of defeating the ally character to the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is "big hit", the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character (victory effect) is executed, or the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. After being executed, the effect (revival effect) in which the ally character revives and wins the enemy character is executed.

The "variable pattern without reach" is a variable pattern in which the variable display result is displayed without changing the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to a predetermined reach mode. In addition, even if there is a reach fan such as "reach notice" described later, it includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is finally displayed without the reach mode. Further, the "variable pattern accompanied by super reach" means that the display result is displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode, the reach effect is developed, and the SP reach effect is executed. It is a fluctuation pattern.

Further, the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (SP reach A to E) is given in the jackpot game state after the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed and the victory effect and the resurrection effect of the variable display part are completed. It includes a post-production part that informs the planned number of balls to be identifiable.

The variable display period of the variable display part is 45,000 ms for SP reach A, 80,000 ms for SP reach B, 40,000 ms for SP reach C, 25,000 ms for SP reach D, and 50,000 ms for SP reach E, for each type of SP reach A to E. It's different. On the other hand, the execution period of the post-production part is 15,000 ms, which is common to SP reach A to E. In the present embodiment, the post-production part is assigned a predetermined period (for example, 15,000 ms) in the variable display period, but the predetermined period may be different depending on the type of SP reach. Further, the fanfare period in the big hit game state may be assigned to the post-production part.

In the present embodiment, all the fluctuation patterns accompanied by reach are regarded as super reach fluctuation patterns, and an embodiment in which a normal reach fluctuation pattern is not set is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach fluctuation is not limited to this. A pattern may be set.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 11-9 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit" ("missing with time reduction"). Different EXT data are set according to (preliminary determination result) or the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is a big hit.

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result.

Command 8FXH stops (confirms) the variable display of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts the next variable display. It is a symbol confirmation specification command that specifies the symbol confirmation period until it is executed.

In the symbol confirmation designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (C), the command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation A designation command in which the change of the special symbol ends and the symbol confirmation period becomes 0.5 seconds. The command 8F01H is a symbol confirmation B designation command in which the change of the special symbol is completed and the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds.

In the present embodiment, (i) the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clear processing is executed, and (ii) the relief time reduction is reached with 900 variable displays after the big hit, and the relief time reduction arrival variation. In, a symbol confirmation specification command in which different EXT data is set is transmitted. Specifically, (i) when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clear processing is executed, the symbol confirmation A designation command in which the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival variation is transmitted. Further, (ii) when the relief time reduction is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit, the symbol confirmation B designation command in which the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival variation is transmitted.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command E1XXH is a remaining time reduction number notification command for notifying the remaining time reduction control number in the time reduction state (time reduction state A) excluding the relief time reduction. The command E2XXH is a remaining probability change number notification command for notifying the remaining probability change control number in the probability change state.

The command F100H is a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED069SG031. The command F101H is a right-handed LED turn-off notification command for notifying the turn-off of the right-handed LED069SG031.

The command 91XXH is a command for designating the number of relief time reductions at the time of restoration, and is an effect control command for converting the value of the relief time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number at the time of power restoration. In the recovery time reduction count specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), each place (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3 digits) of the relief time reduction counter value (4 digit value) at the time of power restoration. Different EXT data are set according to the 4th and 4th digits).

In the recovery time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), the commands 9100H to 910FH specify the first digit of the recovery time reduction number value, and the recovery time reduction number specification 1 command. Is. The commands 9110H to 911FH are two commands for designating the number of relief time reductions during recovery, which specify the second digit of the value of the number of relief time reductions. The commands 9130H to 913FH are three commands for designating the number of relief time reductions during recovery, which specify the third digit of the value of the number of relief time reductions. The commands 9140H to 914FH are four commands for designating the number of relief time reductions during recovery, which specify the fourth digit of the value of the number of relief time reductions.

The command 94XXH is a command for designating the number of relief time reductions, and is an effect control command for designating the remaining variable display number (number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In the relief time reduction command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), different EXT data are set according to the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. ..

In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), the command 9400H is a relief time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the relief time reduction has been reached. The command 9401H is a rescue time reduction number B designation command that specifies that there are 1 to 125 remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947EH is a rescue time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached. The command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that there are 127 or more remaining times until the relief time reduction is reached.

The command 96XXH is a command for designating the number of times of relief time reduction 2, and is an effect control command for designating the remaining variable display number of times (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened. In the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time reduction is set is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining variable display count until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, the command 9601H is transmitted as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command, and if the remaining variable display count is 700 times, the relief time is reduced. The command 9607H is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of time reductions. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo display designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the present embodiment. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining variable display times until the relief time is shortened. , The value obtained by converting the value of the current relief time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number is set, and the recovery time reduction number designation command is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to set a value corresponding to the value of the current relief time reduction counter and transmit the relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 1 to 125 times, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9401H as the relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed and the recovery process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, a command for specifying the number of relief time reductions is transmitted, and the remaining variable display up to the current relief time reduction is displayed. You will be notified of the number of times.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery and a command for specifying the number of times of relief time are transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted. ..

Further, when the RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, or when there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, the area of the relief time reduction counter is also included in the initialization process of step S8. Clear processing is executed for the included area.

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if a big hit does not occur even if the variable display is executed 900 times after the RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state B is controlled. Will be done. In this example, since the effect control command instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9 and the initial value (“900”) set in the relief time reduction counter correspond to each other, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the transmission of the instruction control command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter (it is "900" in this example), sets the value obtained by converting the current relief time reduction counter value into a hexadecimal number, and sets the recovery time reduction time reduction. Control is performed to send the number of times designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the progress processing of the game, is executed, so that the variable display is not started before the relief time reduction counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until the relief time is shortened.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state of continuation of the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is configured not to be initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When the error is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(Time saving flag, probability change flag)
In the present embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for being controlled to the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. In the following description, clearing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when the time saving state A via the jackpot A is controlled. This time saving flag A is set when the big hit gaming state of the big hit A ends, and when the time saving state A ends (the timing when the big hit occurs during the time saving state A, the 110 times time saving control ends and the normal state ends. It is erased at the timing controlled by).

The time saving flag B is set when the time saving state B controlled via the relief time saving is controlled. This time saving flag B is set to 900 variable displays in which the display result does not become a big hit symbol when the display result is executed 900 times variable display from the RAM clear, or in a low accuracy state after the big hit game state ends. Is set when is executed, and is erased when the time saving state B ends (the timing when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B, the timing when the 1100 times time saving control ends and the time saving state is controlled to the normal state, etc.). ..

The probability change flag is set when the probability change state is controlled. In the present embodiment, when the V prize is won in the first round of the big hit game, the probability change flag is set as the game state is controlled to the probability change state when the big hit game ends. This probability change flag is cleared at the timing when the probability change state ends (the timing when a big hit occurs during the probability change state, the timing when the 110th probability change control is executed and controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, when the probability change flag is determined to be YES in step 069SGS69A of FIG. 11-12 described later, the probability change flag is erased based on the 110th time since the variable display is controlled to the probability change state.

(Special design normal processing)
11-11 and 11-12 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 069SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 069SGS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter for counting the second reserved storage is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 069SGS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 069SGS54).

In the present embodiment, by executing the processes of steps 069SGS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. And store it in the random number buffer area of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 069SGS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out a hit determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is not set (if the probability variation state is low), the CPU 103 performs the jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for the low probability. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the case of a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a big hit determination using the big hit determination value for high probability. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

When it is decided to make a big hit (step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 069SGS64), and the CPU 103 is for type determination stored in the random number buffer area. The type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number is determined as the big hit type (step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not decided to make a big hit (step 069SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing the special symbol normal processing, the relief time reduction condition for controlling the relief time reduction regardless of the variable display result (big hit, loss) (the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted to become "0". That) is configured to occur. In this example, the time saving state A is based on the fact that the jackpot A is reached, and the time saving state is based on the fact that the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display of a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) is completed. Although it is controlled by B, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time reduction condition is satisfied becomes a big hit. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a big hit, it is configured to control the time saving state A based on the big hit.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time reduction state is 0 (step 069SGS66). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 069SGS67), and confirms whether or not the subtracted time reduction counter value is 0 (step 069SGS68). ). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction state is terminated at the end of the variable display (step 069SGS69).

In this example, a case is shown in which steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed before the variable display count processing up to the relief time reduction after step 069SGS71 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the variable display number up to the relief time reduction after step 069SGS71. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "110" in the time reduction counter (see step 069SGS172), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the subtraction is performed, in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Further, it may be configured to set "111", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. In this example, when the process of step 069SGS69A is executed, the process after step 069SGS70 (particularly the process of step 069SGSS71) is not performed when the game state is in the probable change state. In this example, even if the variable display is executed during the pole / battle rush), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not subtracted. If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is in the non-probability change state), the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70.

In the present embodiment, when the probability change flag is set, the process shifts to step 069SGS84 without executing the processing after step 069SGSS70. However, the probability change flag is not limited to this. If is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70, but the process of step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated, the relief time reduction number designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction count counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 at this point, the timing after being already controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the relief time reduction (whether it is controlled to the time reduction state B or the time reduction state B). This is the timing in which the normal state is controlled after the fluctuation is performed 1100 times), and the big hit that is the trigger for setting 900 in the relief time reduction counter is not generated. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step 069SGS71). Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS71, it does not matter whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data and produces a rescue time reduction specification command. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 069SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9401H as the relief time reduction number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 947EH as the relief time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state B is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 069SGS75). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data and issues a command 957FH as a relief time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 has the remaining variable display number of times up to the relief time reduction in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 069SGS77). Whether or not the remaining variable display number of times up to the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100 times can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining variable display number of times up to the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and produces a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 069SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9601H as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9608H as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the remaining variable display times up to the relief time reduction, and sends a relief time reduction number designation command or a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the remaining variable display number of times until the relief time is shortened and execute the fanning effect and the countdown effect described later.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (“900” is set) at the timing when the relief time is shortened and the relief time is configured to be continuously generated, only when the relief time is shortened for the first time. It is configured to send the relief time reduction number specification command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command, and it is configured not to send the relief time reduction number specification command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command when the relief time is shortened after the second time. May be good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 069SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to be the jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be the jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "3". If it is decided and it is decided to be a big hit C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7", and if it is decided to be out of the way, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special symbol stop processing)
11-13 and 11-14 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 069SGS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop process is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been done (step 069SGS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the probability change flag, the time reduction flag A, the time reduction flag B, the relief time reduction determination flag, and the number of times the variable display is executed during the time reduction state, if set. Clear the time reduction counter of (step 069SGS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step 069SGS135). Therefore, in this example, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and the next big hit does not occur even if the variable display of 900 times is executed in the low probability state after the big hit game is completed. Is a relief time reduction and is controlled to the time reduction state B.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 069SGS135, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit and the initial setting is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED 069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the first large winning opening 069SG007A and the second large winning opening 069SG007B are controlled to be in the open state. (Step 069SGS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 069SGS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 069SGS171), and if it is set, sets the time reduction flag B and controls the time reduction state (step 069SGS171A). .. Then, "1100" is set in the time reduction counter (step 069SGS172).

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the staging control CPU 120 (step 069SGS174). Further, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step). 069SGS174B). After that, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state B at the timing when the relief time is shortened, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving state B may be controlled at the timing when the relief time is shortened, and the relief time reduction counter may be set (“900” is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously generate the relief time reduction, and once the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state can be continued until a big hit occurs.

Further, in this example, "900" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". However, it is not limited to such a mode, although the case where the relief time is shortened is shown. For example, "0" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is added by 1 each time the variable display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "900". Based on this, it may be configured to generate a relief time reduction.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS172, 1100 times, which is a value larger than the variable display number (900 times) until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, in step 069SGS172, the same value as "900" or a smaller value may be set in the time reduction counter.

Further, in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be configured so as to be set in the time reduction number counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "110" is set in the time reduction counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "1100" is set in the time reduction counter. May be good.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 110 times with a probability of 10% and 1100 times with a probability of 90%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step 069SGS170, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction end flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to B) and ends the time saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed LED turn-off notification command for notifying the turn-off of the right-handed LED 069SG031 to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS151). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a normal state designation command (a kind of game state designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, the process of steps 069SGS141 to S152 is executed to shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification in the time saving final variation. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-handed notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the time saving end flag is not set in step 069SGS141 (step 069SGS141; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-15 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), when the jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation region, it is controlled to the probability variation state and the jackpot A occurs. Is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via big hit (low accuracy / high base state)). Although not shown, even when the jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled. In addition, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after RAM clear processing or (P-2) after the probability change state ends, the next big hit does not occur. When the variable display count reaches 900 times, or after the end of 110 variable display in (Q) (Q-1) time saving state A, the variable display count reaches 790 times without the next big hit. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving (low accuracy / high base state)).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the probabilistic state (high probability / high base state), when either the jackpot B or the jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probabilistic region, the probabilistic state is restored again. Be controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the time saving state A (low probability / high base state), when either the jackpot B or the jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation region, the probability variation state is established. Be controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state A, when the variable display of 110 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the control is performed to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, in the time saving state B (low probability / high base state), when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball passes through the probable change region, the probable change state is reached. Be controlled. Although not shown, when either the big hit B or the big hit C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region, the time saving state A (time saving state via the big hit) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display of 1100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the control is performed to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is out of order, if the relief time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after RAM clear processing or (P-2) after the probability change state ends, the next big hit does not occur. When the variable display count reaches 900 times, or after the end of 110 variable display in (Q) (Q-1) time saving state A, the variable display count reaches 790 times without the next big hit. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the relief time saving).

In this example, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state B and the game ball does not win a prize in the probable change area, the game ball uniformly shifts to the time saving state A, but only in such a control mode. I can't. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time reduction with the number of time reductions corresponding to the case where the game ball does not win in the probability variation area (110 times in this example), and the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger. For example, it may be configured to continue the current time saving state B as it is.

In this example, although it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or the probabilistic state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player. 1 The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the special symbol is executed.

(Explanation of play time)
Next, the characteristics of the "play time", which is the time saving state B (relief time saving state) in the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18. 11-16 are diagrams showing an example in the case where "play time" is not installed in (A1) and (A2), and are diagrams showing an example in the case where "play time" is installed in (B1) and (B2). 11-17 is a diagram showing an example of the deviation fluctuation in the normal state in FIGS. 11 to 17 (A) to (D). 11-18 are explanatory diagrams of play time in which the fluctuation efficiency is the same as in the normal state in (E1) and (E2), and are explanatory diagrams of the play time in the present case in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in the normal state in (F1) to (F4). Is. In FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18, for convenience of explaining the feature of "play time", an explanatory image different from the staging image described below will be used for explanation.

First, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine not equipped with the "play time" of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A1) and 11-16 (A2), after the end of the big hit, a low probability state (for example, normal) Variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, about 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled by the jackpot in the state (low probability / low base state)) Even if it is broken, it is not controlled by the "play time", that is, the time saving state. At this point, the jackpot probability denominator is already about three times higher, so the player continues to play the game without a jackpot for a long time, and the investment is also large. However, this normal state (low accuracy / low base state) continues until a big hit occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's willingness to play.

On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine equipped with the "play time" of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (B1) and 11-16 (B2), after the end of the big hit, a low probability state (for example, a normal state (low)) When the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled by the jackpot (probability / low base state)), it becomes the "play time" and becomes a specific number of times (for example). For example, it will be controlled to the time saving state B over the variable display of up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator, such as 1100 times. At this point, the probability of a big hit is already about three times higher, so the player has been playing the game for a long time without a big hit, and the investment is considerably large. However, by controlling the "play time", that is, the time saving state B, the additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a big hit is increased, so that the decrease in the motivation for playing can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) to (D), the player continues to play the game without a big hit for a period from the end of the big hit to being controlled by the "play time". ("I'm addicted"), during that period, various notices are being performed and continued to be fueled. Further, when the variable display becomes 900 times, for example, when the variable display is executed the first time (for example, 105 times) after the end of the big hit (see FIG. 11-17 (A)), the variable display is performed the second time (see FIG. 11-17 (A)). For example, when it is executed 213 times (see FIG. 11-17 (B)) and when the variable display is executed a third time (for example, 506 times) (see FIG. 11-17 (C)), the variable display is displayed. When the fourth number of times (for example, 882 times) is executed (see FIG. 11-17 (D)), at least an effect with a high expectation of a big hit such as SP reach (for example, an SP reach effect of "super heat") is specified. It has been executed many times, and all of these SP reach productions continue to fall off, so it is highly possible that they are quite depressed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (E1) and 11-18 (E2), even when the "play time" (time saving state B) is finally controlled via the variable display 900 times, this time saving state B is normally set. When the fluctuation efficiency is low as in the state (low accuracy / low base state), the number of wasted balls increases, and further additional investment and prolongation of the game can be considered. In addition, since the SP reach effect is completely removed in the variable display of 900 times, it is quite depressing, so even in the "play time", if the fanning effect occurs frequently, the motivation for playing is reduced.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (F1) to (F4), the "play time" (time saving state B) of the present embodiment has higher fluctuation efficiency than the normal state (low accuracy / low base state). Because it is in a short time state, it is possible to continue the game while suppressing additional investment. Further, in the time saving control, the variable display is executed a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, which is about 3.8 times the jackpot probability at the maximum), so that the jackpot is controlled during the period controlled by the time saving state B. Since there is a high probability (for example, about 97%), you can play the game with confidence. For example, when the jackpot probability is 1 / 319.9, the probability of not being a jackpot in one variable display is about 99% {(319.9-1) ÷ 319.9 = 0.996874}, and 1100 rotations. The probability of not being a big hit within is about 3% (0.996874 ^ 1100 = 0.031937). Therefore, the probability of becoming a big hit within 1100 rotations is about 97% (1-0.031937 = 0.968063).

Furthermore, in "play time", since the variable display period of the selected fluctuation pattern is short, the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in other time-saving states, so it is possible to efficiently digest the out-of-order variable display and draw a big hit in a short period of time. In an advantageous state where there is a high possibility that a big hit (for example, big hit B or big hit C) that is advantageous to the player will be given by becoming a big hit in the second special figure game by the right-handed game. be. In addition, it is difficult to perform the advance notice effect and the SP reach effect, which will be described later, and there is little chance of being fanned by the off-set effect, so that the decrease in the motivation for playing can be suitably suppressed. That is, the "play time" of the present embodiment is different from the game state in which the player waits for the next big hit while enjoying the effect, such as the probabilistic state or the time saving state A, and the fluctuation is different from the enjoyment of the effect. It is a gaming state that gives priority to efficiently digesting and allocating the next big hit. The details of the "play time" (time saving state B) of the present embodiment will be described below.

(Battle Rush)
In the present embodiment, the effect mode is controlled to "battle rush" when the time saving state A via the jackpot A is controlled. FIG. 11-19 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to “battle rush”.

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state A) and the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 110, the effect mode is ". The second background image 069SG320 showing the scenery of the city in the evening is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern corresponding to the "Battle Rush", and the "BATLE RUSH" is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect mode display 069SG221 composed of characters is displayed. Further, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the character "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 110) are displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, corresponding to the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, and the value of the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, four second hold display 069SG002 are displayed in the second hold display area 069SG012. Further, in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "4", etc.) and the small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying (for example, the arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

It should be noted that the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, the pending display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating the error state generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the time saving residual display 069SG201, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400. By displaying such items on the front side (upper layer) of the effect image such as a character, the effect images are duplicated to improve the visibility of the first hold storage number, the second hold storage number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, by displaying the decorative pattern on the back side (lower layer) of the effect image, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from being duplicated and the visibility of the effect image from being reduced. You may do so.

The above small symbol is also referred to as a fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is constant in a manner that is always visible in a display device such as, for example, an image display device 5. It is variably displayed depending on the operation (see the small symbol displayed in the display area 5SL shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1)). By variably displaying the fourth symbol, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body 32 is all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect is performed to shield the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variable display start command to perform variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variable display start command to perform variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Further, a fourth symbol display provided in a place other than the image display device 5 (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7 which is a predetermined place of the game board 2) such as the first special figure LED069SG032 and the second special figure LED069SG033. The symbol displayed on the device is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state A is completed, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state). In this case, the first background image 069SG310 showing the scenery of the city in the daytime is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the image display device 5 is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy / low base state at the lower right of the screen. The variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the character "game 0 times") corresponding to the variable display count is displayed. At this time, the effect mode display 069SG221 at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving residual display 069SG201 at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 100), the image. The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" at the lower right of the screen of the display device 5 are erased.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less when controlled to a low accuracy / low base state (normal state), a countdown effect described later is executed, and the screen right of the image display device 5 is displayed. The special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "up to 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the characters "more XXX times", and the triangular object, XXX = 1 to 300) are displayed at the lower part.

(Yu 1100 Battle Rush [Yu Time])
In the present embodiment, when the time saving state B is controlled via the relief time saving, the effect mode is controlled to "play 1100 battle rush" (also referred to as "play time"). FIG. 11-19 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "play / 1100 battle rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / high base state (time saving state B) and the value of the time saving number counter is 0 to 1100, the effect mode is ". Corresponding to the "Yu 1100 Battle Rush", the third background image 069SG330 showing the scenery of the city at night is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the "Yu" is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect mode display 069SG222 composed of the characters "1100 BATTLE RUSH" is displayed. Further, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", corresponding to the remaining variable display number controlled to the low accuracy / high base state, XX = 0 to 1100) is displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "4", etc.) and the small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying (for example, the arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Regarding the time saving residual display 069SG201, the cost can be reduced because the display mode (for example, design, font, color, etc.) is common to the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), when the 1100th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed and then controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, The first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. At this time, the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 and the time saving remaining display 069SG201 at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 1100) The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In the present embodiment, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit in the time saving state B, even if the variable display is executed 900 times without a big hit in the low accuracy state, the time is shortened. It is not controlled by the state B. Therefore, after the 110th variable display is completed without a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state described later, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit in the time saving state B, the variable display number display 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5. By doing so, after the 1100th variable display is completed without a big hit in the time saving state B, if the variable display is executed 900 times without a big hit in the low accuracy state, the time saving state is executed. It is possible to prevent B from thinking that it is controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013 and the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG012 during the period controlled to the time saving state B. Although the embodiment in which the second hold display 069SG002 is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 are displayed during the period controlled by the time saving state B. It may not be done. In the time saving state A or the probability change state, the active display 069SG003 or the second hold display 069SG002 may or may not be displayed.

Further, after the 110th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state A is completed, when the low accuracy / low base state is controlled, for example, a character such as "BATLE RUSH end" is displayed. Then, it may be controlled to a low accuracy / low base state. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, characters such as "BATLE RUSH end" as described above are displayed. It is preferable not to display.

Further, after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B is completed, when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state, the shutter effect performed at the time of transition to the time saving state B ( (See FIG. 11-23 (B)) may be performed before controlling to a low accuracy / low base state.

Further, when the 101st variable display is started when the game state is controlled to the time reduction state A, a countdown notification suggesting that the number of time reductions is 10 is remaining, while the game state is in the time reduction state. Even if the 1091st variable display when controlled by B starts, the countdown notification may not be performed. By doing so, the time saving state B (play time) is likely to end, but a fan is added. It can be prevented from being lost.

(Extreme Battle Rush)
In the present embodiment, the effect mode is controlled to "extreme battle rush" when the probability change state is controlled via the jackpot B or the jackpot C. FIG. 11-20 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to “extreme battle rush”.

As shown in FIG. 11-20 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state (probability variation state) and the value of the time reduction counter is 11 to 110, the effect mode is "pole". The fourth background image 069SG340 showing the scenery of the wilderness in the daytime is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern in response to the "battle rush", and the "pole BATTLE" is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. The effect mode display 069SG223 composed of the characters "RUSH" is displayed. Further, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the character "XX times remaining", XX = 11 to 110) are displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "4", etc.) and the small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying (for example, the arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (B), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state and the value of the time reduction counter is 0 to 10, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. In the section, the emphasized time saving residual display 069SG201 (in this example, the character "remaining XX times", XX = 0 to 10) in an aspect expanded from the time saving remaining display 069SG201 when the value of the time saving number counter is 11 to 110. ) Is displayed. The highlighted time-saving residual display 069SG201 is not limited to the enlarged mode of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201, and the display color of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 may be changed or an effect display may be added to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201. Further, a dedicated sound effect may be reproduced and output from the speaker at the timing of switching from the time saving residual display 069SG201 to the emphasized time saving residual display 069SG201.

Further, even in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the time saving residual display may be displayed in the same manner as in the probability change state. Further, regarding the time saving state B, the player may not be stressed by not displaying the emphasized time saving residual display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (C), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state, the 110th variable display in which the display result is "missing" is executed. The result image 069SG500 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The result image 069SG500 is given the characters "Pole / BATTLE RUSH end" to notify that the pole / battle rush has ended, and the characters "BONUS x 〇 times" to indicate the number of big hits (○ is the number of big hits). The characters "XXXXX pt" indicating the total number of game balls (XXXXX is the total number of game balls given) are included.

The number of big hits included in this result image 069SG500 is the number of consecutive big hits based on the variable display in the high accuracy state (so-called number of consecutive villas), and the total number of given game balls is the number of consecutive villas. It includes the number of prize balls given in the big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), after 110 variable displays when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / high base state are completed, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state. In this case, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the variable display number corresponding to the variable display number executed after being controlled to the low accuracy / low base state at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "game 0 times") is displayed. At this time, the effect mode display 069SG223 at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 and the emphasized time saving residual display 069SG201 at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "remaining XX times", X = 0 to 10). The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

When the gaming state is controlled from the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B to the normal state, a left-handed notification effect for instructing left-handedness may be executed based on the end of the time-saving control. For the left-handed notification effect, the left-handed notification image and the characters and arrow images of "left-handed" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the voice of "please left-handed" is reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Will be done.

Further, after the 110th variable display when the time saving state A is controlled as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2) is completed, or after the 110th variable display is completed, or as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), the time saving state B is controlled. After the 1100th variable display is completed, or after the 110th variable display is completed when the probabilistic state is controlled as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D). Variable display number display when control of low accuracy / low base state (normal state) is started By displaying the variable display number of 069SG202 as the common "0 times", the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (previous big hit). It is possible to make it difficult to easily grasp the type, which of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state was controlled, and to raise the expectation that the time-saving state B will be controlled.

When the control of the low accuracy / low base state (normal state) is started, the variable display number to be displayed on the variable display number display 069SG202 is "110 times" when the control of the time saving state A is completed. The variable display number executed in each state may be displayed, such as "1100 times" when the control of the time saving state B is completed and "110 times" when the control of the probabilistic state state is completed. By doing so, it is possible to roughly confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (whether it was controlled by the type of the previous jackpot, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the probability change state), thereby the time saving state B. Since it becomes easy to predict the variable number of times of display until it is controlled by, it is possible to improve the motivation to play.

Further, in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, a common music (for example, music A) is fixedly played as a BGM, and in the probabilistic state, a plurality of music (for example, music A to X) including music A). One of them may be selectable, and the selected music may be playable.

Further, when the music A is played in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, and the like are emitted in a light emission pattern corresponding to the music A (a light emission pattern matching the rhyme of the music, etc.). You may do it.

Further, when the music A is played in the time saving state B, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. have a light emitting pattern (such as a light emitting pattern matching the background image) different from that when the music A is played in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. It may be made to emit light.
Further, the light emission pattern (pattern matching the rhyme of the music) of the game effect lamp 9 or the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state is the light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 or the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B. The light emission pattern is emphasized more than (the pattern matched to the background image), and the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B becomes a calm light emission pattern. The emphasized light emission pattern includes a pattern having higher brightness than a calm light emission pattern, a pattern in which the light emission data switching interval is short, a pattern in which the blinking cycle is short, and the like. By doing so, in the time saving state B, as explained in the above flow, the player may be depressed, so that the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 are overemphasized. By calming down, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

Further, for example, a common background image is displayed in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, but in the time-saving state B, the perspective (visibility) of the background image is different from that of the time-saving state A, so that the same background is displayed. Even if the image is diverted, it may be understood that the state is completely different (giving a different impression).

In addition, the size of the decorative pattern is also different between the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B (for example, the time-saving state A: normal, the time-saving state B: large), and even if the background image is diverted, the state is completely different. May be understood (impressive).

Further, after the probabilistic rushing effect / time saving rushing effect A is executed, the prepaid card may be displayed to prevent forgetting to take it or the gaming machine maker may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable not to display the prepaid card for forgetting to remove or display the gaming machine maker after the time saving rush effect B is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed by performing the above display at the time of entering the time saving state B that does not go through the big hit.

(Variable display count display, special count display)
In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / low base state (normal state), the game is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy / low base state at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Variable display number display 069SG202 corresponding to the number of variable displays (in this example, characters such as "game XXX times") and special number display 069SG203 corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time is shortened (in this example) , "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" characters, "more XXX times" characters, triangular objects, etc.) can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the special number of times display is referred to as a countdown effect.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the variable display number display or the special number display is displayed according to the value of the relief time reduction counter. In addition, the display mode of the special number display can be changed according to the value of the relief time reduction counter. FIG. 11-21 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the image display device 5 when the variable display number display or the special number display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 301 to 900, the variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, "Game XXX" is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. The characters "times", XXX = 0 to 699, etc.) are displayed. The number (XXX) of the variable display count display 069SG202 is additionally displayed each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 31 to 300, the countdown effect is executed, and the special number display 069SG203 in a white mode is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. (In this example, the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the white characters "more XXX times", and the white triangular object, XXX = 31 to 300) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 30, the countdown effect is executed, and the special number display 069SG203 in a red mode is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, after the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red characters "more XXX times", and the red triangular object, XXX = 30) are enlarged and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds), the figure is shown. As shown in 11-21 (D), the image display device 5 is moved to the lower right of the screen and displayed in a reduced size. When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a special number display 069SG203 in a red mode is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH". The characters "up to", the red characters "more XXX times", and the red triangular object, XXX = 1 to 30) are displayed.

In the present embodiment, the special number display is not displayed in the variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is not limited to this. In the variable display when becomes 0, the special number display may be displayed. For example, in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, when the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 is executed after the special number display in the red mode is displayed, the special number in the golden mode is displayed. The number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "up to 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the golden characters "0 more times", the golden triangle object, etc.) may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the variable display number display 069SG202 is hidden during the period in which the special number display 069SG203 is displayed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this and is variable. The special number display 069SG203 may be displayed while the display number display 069SG202 is displayed, and the addition display of the variable display number display 069SG202 and the subtraction display of the special number display 069SG203 may be executed along with the variable display. In this case, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed in a mode with lower visibility than the display mode of the special count display 069SG203 (for example, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed in a smaller size than the special count display 069SG203). (Indicated by) is preferable.

Further, the trigger for starting the display of the special number display 069SG203 is when the variable display in which the remaining variable display number until controlled by the time saving state B becomes a predetermined number (for example, the remaining 50 times) is started. It may be a fixed timing, the timing when the display start lottery of the special number display 069SG203 is executed and the winning, the timing when the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach loss ends, or until the time reduction state B is controlled. It may be an irregular timing, such as when it is suggested by executing the remaining number of times suggestion effect that the remaining variable display number has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining 50 times). Further, when the display of the special number display 069SG203 is started, the special number display 069SG203 may be highlighted by displaying it in full screen or the like. Further, instead of displaying the special number display 069SG203, it may be possible to execute a dedicated background effect for switching to a dedicated effect mode (for example, "when reaching, intense heat").

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 301 to 900, it is switched to the fluctuation pattern table in which it is more difficult to determine the fluctuation pattern of SP reach than before the value of the relief time reduction counter is 301 to 900. You may. By doing so, it is possible to play with a variable display that captures the intention of the player who wants to quickly enter the relief time.

Further, during the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full-screen display period), the execution of various notice effects described later may be restricted (for example, not executed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner). .. Further, when the execution time of the notice effect and the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full screen display period) overlap, the special number display 069SG203 may be displayed in a mode that is not highlighted, or a look-ahead notice described later. If the execution time of the effect and the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full-screen display period) overlap, the special number display 069SG203 is displayed when the variable display after the pre-reading notice effect ends is started. When the display or the predetermined variable display in the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full-screen display period) becomes a big hit, the display of the special number display 069SG203 is restricted (for example, not displayed or conspicuous). It may be displayed in a non-existent manner).

(Example of production when the relief time is shortened)
As described above, (i) when the relief time is reached after the RAM clear processing is executed (when the relief time is reached without a big hit after the RAM is cleared), the symbol is confirmed in the relief time reduction arrival variation. When the symbol confirmation A designation command with a period of 0.5 seconds is sent, and (ii) the relief time is reached with 900 variable displays after the big hit (one big hit, then the relief time is reached without a big hit. In the case of), a symbol confirmation B designation command in which the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds in the relief time reduction arrival variation is transmitted. In the present embodiment, since the symbol determination period is different between the case of (i) and the case of (ii), the low probability / high base state is reached after the relief time reduction arrival variation in the low probability / low base state is completed. The effect mode of the period (that is, the symbol determination period) until the rescue time-saving game is started under the control of (time-saving state B) is different.

Next, (i) an example of the effect when the relief time is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25. In this example, (i) the case where the relief time is reached after the RAM clear processing is executed and the fluctuation pattern is “non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) out of reach” will be described.

(Example of production in case of (i))
FIG. 11-22 shows the execution of each effect when the variation pattern is determined to be “non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) out of reach” when the relief time is reached after the RAM clear process is executed. It is a time chart showing the timing, and FIGS. 11-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy / low base state), the CPU 103 variablely displays the first special symbol (relief time reduction counter). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation A designation command at the timing of ending (variable display when the value is 1) (at the timing of T1 shown in FIGS. 11-22) is the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols ("146" in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 069SG003 in the active display area 069SG013, and displays the hold display 069SG001 in the first hold display area 069SG011 based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 1. I'm letting you. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image of the decorative pattern based on the normal state of the game.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "1" in the display area 5SL because the first reserved storage number is 1, and displays the character "0" because the second reserved storage number is 0. ing. In addition, the combination of small symbols (“146” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the small symbol display area. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) (in FIG. 11-22). (At the timing of T2 shown), the effect control CPU 120 executes a shutter effect, and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), the effect of receiving the symbol confirmation A designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-22). The control CPU 120 determines and stops the final combination of small symbols (“234” in this example) in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, according to the end of the variable display, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and right-handed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the notification image 069SG400, and the characters "right-handed" are displayed in a fade-in manner. By doing so, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue the left-handed game and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, after displaying the right-handed notification image 069SG400 at the lower right of the screen, right-handed By displaying the broadcast image 069SG401 in a fade-in manner, it is possible to suitably lead to a right-handed game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 11-22). When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low accuracy / high base state), the effect control CPU 120 serves as a background image of the decorative pattern in response to the effect mode being set to "play 1100 battle rush". The third background image 069SG330 is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode display 069SG222 composed of the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving residual display 069SG201 (this) at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX = 1100) are displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In addition, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") is displayed in the small symbol display area.

Next, (ii) an example of the effect when the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25. In this example, (ii) the case where the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit and the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) off" will be described.

(Example of production in the case of (ii))
FIG. 11-24 shows when (A) is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) out of reach" when the relief time is reached with 900 variable displays after the big hit. A time chart showing the execution timing of each effect of the above, and (B) is a time chart showing a modified example of the time saving rush effect B. FIG. 11-25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

First, the staging configuration in FIGS. 11-25 (A) and 11-25 (B) is the "non-reach (shortening non-reach)" when the relief time is reached after the RAM clear processing shown in FIGS. 11-23 (A) and 11-23 (B). Since it is the same as the staging configuration in the variation pattern of "reach or non-reach) out of reach", the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 definitely stops the final combination of small symbols (“234” in this example) in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, according to the end of the variable display, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 is displayed. In the center of the screen, the right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400, and the characters "right-handed" are faded in. By doing so, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue the left-handed game and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, after displaying the right-handed notification image 069SG400 at the lower right of the screen, right-handed By displaying the broadcast image 069SG401 in a fade-in manner, it is possible to suitably lead to a right-handed game.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (D), at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed in the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) designated by the symbol confirmation B designation command (in FIG. 11-24 (A)). (At the timing of T4 shown), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect, erases the shutter image 069SG250 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right-handed notification image 069SG401 while displaying the right-handed notification image 069SG400. After the fade-out display, the time-saving rush effect B is executed, and the rush image 069SG473 (in this example, the image including the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush") described later is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In the time saving rush effect B, the player is notified that the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low accuracy / high base state) by displaying the rush image 069SG473 including the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush". ing.

Further, the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed in common with the inrush image 069SG470 which is displayed even when the control of the time saving state A and the probability change state is started, and the transmittance is 0% in the minimum size at the lower left of the display screen. It is composed of a play time image 069SG473A composed of the characters "1100" and a play time image 069SG473B composed of the characters "play".

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (E), at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)). When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low accuracy / high base state), the effect control CPU 120 has a background image of a decorative pattern corresponding to the effect mode being set to "play 1100 battle rush". The third background image 069SG330 is displayed as. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode display 069SG222 composed of the characters "Yu 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving residual display 069SG201 (this) at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, the characters "remaining XX times", XX = 1100) are displayed, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In addition, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") is displayed in the small symbol display area.

In the examples of FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25, the game state is controlled to the time saving state B after the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command has elapsed. , An example is shown in which the effect mode is set to "Yu 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed. Seconds) may elapse and the effect mode may be set to "play 1100 battle rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at a timing different from the timing at which the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B. For example, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, (A) the timing of receiving the customer waiting demo display designation command, and (B) the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B are started. At the timing, the effect mode may be set to "play 1100 battle rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed. Also, of the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command, the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (in this example, the symbol confirmation period specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command) has elapsed. At (in this example, the timing of T4), the time saving rush effect B (FIG. 11-25 (D)) is not executed, the effect mode is set to "play 1100 battle rush", and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed. You may do so.

Further, when displaying the shutter image 069SG250 in FIGS. 11-23 (B) and 11-25 (B), an image (for example, the character "play") suggesting that the shutter image 069SG250 is controlled to the time saving state B is displayed. It may be displayed. By doing so, when the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed in common at the timing controlled by the time saving state B and the timing other than the timing controlled by the time saving state B (for example, the timing when the effect mode is switched). , It becomes easy to distinguish.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25, relief is performed by (i) when the relief time is reached after the RAM is cleared, and (ii) after the big hit, 900 times of variable display. Although the mode in which the effect mode is different is illustrated depending on the time when the time is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect common to the case of (i) and the time of (ii). May be executed. That is, the time-saving rushing effect B may be executed between the time (i) and the time (ii), or the time-saving rushing effect B may be executed between the time (i) and the time (ii). May not be executed. Further, the time saving rushing effect B having different modes may be executed between the case of (i) and the time of (ii).

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25, a mode in which the time saving rush effect B is executed during the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) designated by the symbol confirmation B designation command is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and for example, the time saving rush effect B may be started after being controlled to the time saving state B. Hereinafter, an example of modification of the execution timing of each effect when the relief time is reached will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-24 (B), 11-26, and 11-27.

FIG. 11-24 (B) is a time chart as a modified example showing the execution timing of each effect when the relief time is reached. FIG. 11-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect operation when the number of reserved storages is 0 when the rescue time is reached.

First, since the staging configuration in FIGS. 11-26 (A) is the same as the staging configuration shown in FIG. 11-25 (A), the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (B), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) (FIG. 11-24 (FIG. 11-24). (At the timing of T2 shown in B)), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) whose display result is “off” in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "missing" is fixedly stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (D), based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED069SG031 is turned on, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In addition to displaying the characters of the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and "right-handed", the characters of the right-handed notification image 069SG401 and "right-handed" larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , Fade-in is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and right-handed notification is started.

Then, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the control of the time saving state B is started. The variable display can be started, but when the number of reserved storages is 0, the display of the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in FIGS. 11-26 (D) is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (E), the first variable display is started based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second start winning (or the first starting winning) is generated. At the timing (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (F), the effect control CPU 120 is at the timing when the second variable display is started after the first variable display is completed (in FIG. 11-24 (B)). After ending the shutter effect (at the timing of T6 shown) and hiding the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time saving inrush effect B is started.

Even if the time saving rush effect B is started at a timing other than the start timing of the second variable display in the time saving state B (for example, during the first variable display or at the start of the second and subsequent variable displays). good. Further, when the variable display period is short (for example, 1500 ms) such that the ultra-shortened variable pattern is determined as the variable display variable pattern, the variable display may be continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays. In this case, it is preferable that the image of the time-saving rushing effect B is continuously displayed regardless of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, if the variable display of the jackpot is started during the execution period of the time saving rush effect B, the executing time saving rush effect B is interrupted or terminated, and the effect according to the fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach effect) is performed. It may be shifted, or the jackpot notification effect may be executed without going through the effect according to the fluctuation pattern.

Next, FIGS. 11-27 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect operation when the number of reserved storages is 1 or more when the relief time reduction is reached.

First, since the staging configuration in FIGS. 11-27 (A) to (C) is the same as the staging configuration shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A) to (C), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the symbol confirmation B designation command is issued. The received effect control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (“234” in this example) whose display result is “off” in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "missing" is fixedly stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (D), based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED069SG031 is turned on, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In addition to displaying the characters of the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and "right-handed", the characters of the right-handed notification image 069SG401 and "right-handed" larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , Fade-in is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and right-handed notification is started.

Here, when the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 11-24 (B)). Since the control of the time saving state B is started and the first variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (D), the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and the image display device. The shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of 5. Further, the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (E), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the second variable display is started after the first variable display is completed, and the shutter image 069SG250 is used. After hiding the right-handed notification image 069SG401 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, the rush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving rushing effect B is started.

In this way, when the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation is completed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed LED069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, and displays the image display device 5 on the display screen. Right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed to start right-handed notification. Therefore, the variable display is not started after the time reduction state B control is started, so that the time reduction state B control is performed. Even when the shutter effect indicating that the start is started or the time saving rush effect B is not started, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that the time saving state B is controlled.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the relief time is reached after clearing the RAM, 0.5 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period, and when the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit, the symbol confirmation period is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, when the relief time is reached after clearing the RAM and after the big hit, the variable display is 900 times. A common symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set when the relief time is reached. Even in this case, the right-handed notification and the time saving rush effect B are controlled to the time saving state B by executing the variable display after the control of the time saving state B is started. It is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing it.

In the above embodiment, when the relief time is reached after the RAM is cleared, the shutter effect is terminated at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed, and the shutter image is displayed. An example is shown in which the display of the 069SG250 is finished and the background image of the play / 1100 battle rush is displayed. Here, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the symbol confirmation A designation command, for example, when the symbol confirmation A designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 is missed, or when the command of the symbol confirmation A designation command is garbled. If the received command cannot be recognized as the symbol confirmation A designation command, then (A) the timing when the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) after being controlled to the time saving state B, 1 Shutter at the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the second variable display (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variable pattern specification command, etc.) is received. You may end the production, end the display of the shutter image 069SG250, and display the background image of the play / 1100 battle rush. At the timing when another command corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B (for example, a game state designation command, a symbol confirmation designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter effect is terminated and the shutter is shuttered. The display of the image 069SG250 may be terminated and the background image of the play / 1100 battle rush may be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, 0.5 seconds of the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command elapses when the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit. An example is shown in which the shutter effect is terminated, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated, and the time-saving rush effect is executed at the same timing. Here, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the symbol confirmation B designation command, for example, when the symbol confirmation B designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 is missed, or when the command of the symbol confirmation B designation command is garbled. If the received command cannot be recognized as the symbol confirmation B designation command, then (A) the timing when the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) 1 after being controlled to the time saving state B. Shutter at the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the second variable display (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variable pattern specification command, etc.) is received. The effect may be ended, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time saving rush effect B may be executed. At the timing when another command corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B (for example, a game state designation command, a symbol confirmation designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter effect is terminated and the shutter is shuttered. The display of the image 069SG250 may be terminated and the time saving rush effect B may be executed.

Further, in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25, the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (shortened)" in the case where the relief time is reached after the RAM is cleared and the case where the relief time is reached by the variable display 900 times after the big hit. Each effect performed when "non-reach B or non-reach B) out of reach" was described, but although not shown in particular, the fluctuation pattern was determined to be "SP reach A out of line or SP reach B out of place". At that time, the SP reach effect corresponding to the SP reach type (for example, a boring effect for SP reach A and a battle effect for SP reach B) is executed, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the boring effect or battle effect. After displaying the image to be displayed and notifying that the variable display result is out of alignment, the shutter effect may be started, and the time saving rush effect B may be started during the symbol determination period after the shutter effect is completed.

Further, when the variable display (variation in reaching the relief time reduction) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 is a big hit, the following (1) to (3) may be used.

(1) When the jackpot fluctuation pattern "SP reach B (battle SP)" is determined in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, a shutter effect is performed at the start of the variable display (for example, FIG. 11-23 (B)), for example, the shutter effect ends at the timing of development to SP reach effect B (see the timing of FIG. 13-11 (A2)), and then SP reach effect B is executed and a big hit. May be notified.

(2) If the jackpot fluctuation pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)" is determined in the variable display where the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the special number display remains "1" and the shutter effect is not performed. You may execute a certain effect such that the SP reach effect B is executed.

(3) When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, a dedicated jackpot variation pattern (for example, shutter close → shutter open with decorative symbols aligned → jackpot) may be provided.

Further, the execution of the look-ahead effect described later when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 and the specified number of times remains, and the execution of the look-ahead effect in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 are restricted. Is preferable.

(Example of waiting screen for customers)
In the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo display designation command for designating the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demo effect in which the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. .. 11-28 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen in a customer waiting state.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, characters of "demo video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, "play" on a triangular object. An image with the characters "Time installed" is displayed) and is included. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, the demo image 069SG700 has a special number display 069SG203 (book) in addition to the various images (friend characters, characters of "demo video", etc.) described above. In the example, a special number display in a white aspect) is further included.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player during the customer waiting state that the number of remaining variable display times until the rescue time reduction is reached (in this example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less). It can be done and the operation can be promoted.

(Modified example of customer waiting screen)
In the example of FIG. 11-28 (A), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, the demo image 069SG700 includes the special number display 069SG203, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. Regardless of the value of the relief time reduction counter, the demo image 069SG700 does not include the special number display 069SG203 in both cases where the relief time reduction counter value is 301 or more and 300 or less. May be good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), when the customer waiting demo effect is executed, the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, characters of "demo video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image in which the characters "play time mounted" are displayed on a triangular object. ) And is included, but the special count display is not included regardless of the value of the relief time reduction count counter.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 (C), at the timing when a new start prize is generated and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, and the screen right of the image display device 5 is displayed. The special number display 069SG203 is displayed at the bottom.

According to such a configuration, by not notifying the player of the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is reached while waiting for the customer, only the gaming machines having the small remaining variable display number until the relief time reduction is reached are selected. This can be prevented and the occurrence of excessive bias in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Regardless of whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display number display or the special number display may be hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the power is turned on. ..

For example, when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, the variable display of a predetermined number of times is performed regardless of whether the value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of turning on the power is 301 or more and 300 or less. By hiding the variable display count display and the special count display until is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's game for the purpose of shortening the relief time only. In addition, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display of the predetermined number of times is displayed regardless of whether the value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of power failure is 301 or more and 300 or less. By hiding the variable display count display and the special count display until the execution is executed, it is possible to suppress the player's avoidance of the game.

According to such a configuration, when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on at the time of opening the store, the player aiming at the relief time can refer to the final variable display number at the time of the power failure on the previous day. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the selection of a gaming machine having a small number of remaining variable display times until the relief time is reached and playing a game. In addition, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on at the time of opening the store, the player aiming at the relief time reduction can refer to the final variable display number at the time of the power failure on the previous day to reduce the relief time. It is also possible to suppress the avoidance of games on a gaming machine that has a large number of variable display times remaining until the goal is reached.

Not limited to the above mode, when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes a specific value, the variable display count display or the variable display count display is performed even when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is not executed after the power is turned on. The special number display may be displayed.

For example, when the RAM clearing process is not performed when the power is turned on, the value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of turning on the power is a specific value (for example, 20 or less) less than the value corresponding to the predetermined number of times (for example, 50). May display the special number of times display while waiting for customers after the power is turned on or when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. Further, when the RAM clearing process is not performed when the power is turned on, the value of the relief time reduction counter at the time of turning on the power is not a specific value, but the variable display executed after the power is turned on indicates the number of relief times. Even if the value of the counter becomes a specific value (for example, 20 or less) and the value of the relief time reduction counter does not correspond to the predetermined number of times, the special number of times display may be displayed. good.

(Characteristic part 069SG deformation example 1)
Next, the feature portion 069SG modification 1 will be described. FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen as the feature unit 069SG modification 1. FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect operation example relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen as the feature unit 069SG modified example 1.

First, an example of the effect operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (A1), for example, the variable display of the symbol is displayed in the normal state (low accuracy / low base state). When a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without starting a new variable display after the stop, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image based on the reception of the customer waiting demo display designation command. A demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the device 5 to execute a customer waiting demo effect (see FIG. 11-29 (A2)). After that, when a start winning prize is generated, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and variable display is started (see FIG. 11-29 (A3)).

Next, an example of the effect operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen after reaching the relief time reduction will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (B1), the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation that has reached the relief time reduction is stopped. When the number of reserved storages is 0, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed LED069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, and the image display device 5 The right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the right-handed notification image 069SG401 and "right-handed" larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 are displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The character of is faded in to the front side of the decorative pattern, and right-handed notification is started. Further, the control of the time saving state B is started at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (see FIG. 11-29 (B2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms) elapses without starting a new variable display from the time when the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation is stopped, the effect control CPU 120 is used for the customer waiting demo. Even if the display designation command is received, the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed without executing the customer waiting demo effect (FIGS. 11-29). (B3)).

After that, when the start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 120 starts the right-handed game in the time saving state B, and the first variable display is started based on the occurrence of the second starting winning (or the first starting winning). At the timing, the shutter effect is started, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (B4)).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time saving inrush effect B is started (see FIG. 11-29 (B5)).

Next, to explain an example of the effect operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of the right-handed notification, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (C1), the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation that has reached the relief time reduction When the number of reserved storages is 1 or more (for example, 1) when stopped, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed LED069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display. Then, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right-handed notification image larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The image 069SG401 and the characters "right-handed" are faded in to the front side of the shutter image 069SG250, and the right-handed notification is started. Further, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed, the control of the time saving state B is started, and the first reserved storage is digested and the first variable display is performed. The effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are maintained in a state of being displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (C2)).

After that, when the first variable display ends and the first hold storage becomes 0, the state in which the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (FIGS. 11-29 (C3). )reference).

Then, a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without starting a new variable display from the time when the variable display of the symbol is stopped in the first variable display after the control of the time saving state B is started. At this time, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo display designation command, the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo effect. The state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (see FIG. 11-29 (C4)).

After that, when the start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 120 starts the right-handed game in the time saving state B, and the second variable display is started based on the occurrence of the second starting winning (or the first starting winning). At the timing, the shutter effect is ended, the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401 are hidden, and then the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time saving inrush effect B is started (FIG. 11-29 (C5)). reference).

As described above, in the feature unit 069SG modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 executes the customer waiting demo effect during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation to the end of the time reduction rush effect B. Since the display of the right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the right-handed notification image 069SG400, does not disappear by limiting and executing the right-handed notification with priority, FIG. 11- As shown in 29 (A2), by displaying the demo image 069SG700, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that the time saving state B is controlled.

Further, in this modification, the execution of the customer waiting demo effect is restricted during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation to the end of the time reduction rush effect B, and the right-handed notification is preferentially executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 issues a customer waiting demo display designation command during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation to the end of the time reduction rush effect B. The execution of the customer waiting demo effect may be restricted by not transmitting.

Next, another modification example of the effect operation example relating to the transition to the customer waiting screen when the relief time is shortened will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D1), when the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation that has reached the relief time reduction is stopped and the hold storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display. Based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the right-handed LED069SG031 is turned on, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400, and the characters "right-handed" are faded in to the front side of the decorative pattern in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and right-handed notification is started. do. Further, the control of the time saving state B is started at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) designated by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (see FIG. 11-30 (D2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms) elapses without starting a new variable display after the variable display of the symbol in the relief time reduction arrival variation is stopped and controlled to the time reduction state B, the effect control is performed. Based on the reception of the customer waiting demo display designation command, the CPU 120 displays the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer waiting demo effect, and right-handed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. The broadcast image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" are displayed (see FIG. 11-30 (D3)).

After that, when the start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 120 starts the right-handed game in the time saving state B, and the first variable display is started based on the occurrence of the second starting winning (or the first starting winning). At the timing, the shutter effect is started, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 maintain the state displayed on the front side of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-30 (D4)).

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D3), the player touches the touch ring of the ball striking operation handle 30 while displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo effect. At the same time, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and the customer waiting demo production is ended, the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed" shown in FIG. 11-30 (D2) are displayed, and then the first variable display is performed. The shutter effect may be started at the timing when is started.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-handed notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing, the inrush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time saving inrush effect B is started (see FIG. 11-30 (D5)).

In this way, during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation to the end of the time reduction rush effect B, the demo image 069SG700 may be displayed so that the customer waiting demo effect can be executed. In addition, right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed". In this way, regarding the control of displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo effect, the processing load is reduced by making it common to the normal state, while the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and " By displaying the characters "right-handed" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game.

Further, for example, the right-handed notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed notification image 069SG400, is displayed in duplicate on the front side of the demo image 069SG700, and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 is displayed in a state of higher visibility than the demo image 069SG700. You may try to do it.

(Characteristic part 069SG deformation example 2)
Next, the feature portion 069SG modification 2 will be described. FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing the game control timer interrupt processing as the feature unit 069SG modification 2. FIG. 11-32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modification 2. 11-33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modification 2. 11-34 is a flowchart showing the display process as the feature portion 069SG modification 2.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14, the right-handed lamp 069SG132 is turned on / off and the right-handed LED lighting notification command / right to the effect control board 12 in the special symbol stop processing. Although the embodiment of transmitting the hit LED turn-off notification command is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of turning on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the right-handed LED to the effect control board 12 are illustrated. The process of transmitting the lighting notification command and the right-handed LED extinguishing notification command may be executed outside the special symbol stop processing. In addition, an example is shown in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by the special symbol normal processing, and the relief time reduction determination flag is turned on when the relief time reduction is reached. Is executed by the special symbol stop processing to turn on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and send the right-handed LED lighting notification command / right-handed LED off notification command to the effect control board 12 without using the relief time reduction determination flag. You may do it.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 as a modification of the feature unit 069SG, the CPU 103 turns on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 after executing the game random number update process (step S24) in the game control timer interrupt process. Display processing (step 069SGS24A) including transmission processing of right-handed LED lighting notification command and right-handed LED off notification command to the effect control board 12 is executed, and normal symbol process processing (step S26) is executed. The display control process (step 069SGS26A) for turning on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 may be executed according to the setting process performed later in the display process.

In the feature unit 069SG modification 2, in order to execute the display process (step 069SGS24A) and the display control process (step 069SGS26A) described above, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol stop process shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-33. do.

In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-33, the CPU 103 first, when the jackpot flag is set, similarly to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14. , Step 069SGS131 to step 069SGS135 are executed. Then, after executing the processes of step 069SGS138 and step 069SGS139 without executing the lighting start of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 or the transmission of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, the CPU 103 is in the state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B described later. The memory is cleared (step 069SGS139a), the process of step 069SGS140 is executed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 specifies the states of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B at that time after executing the processes of step 069SGS131 to step 069SGS133, and these time saving flags A and time saving. The state of the flag B is updated and stored (step 069SGS160). Further, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the probability change flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E, and if the probability change flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is already 0. (Step 069SGS162).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is already 0, that is, if the time reduction state B is already in place (step 069SGS162; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E, and if the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS162; No). ) Sets the value of the relief time reduction counter to -1 (step 069SGS163), and determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after the value is -1 is 0 (step 069SGS164).

When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, and then ends the lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 or the right-handed LED extinguishing notification command. After executing the process of step 069SGS152 without executing the transmission, the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS172 to 069SGS174, and then starts lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and a right-handed LED start notification command. Outputs the specific number of times arrival information indicating that the variable display number has reached 1100 times from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like without executing transmission of the variable display result without becoming a big hit. A specific number (for example, 4) is set in the specific number of arrival information output count counter indicating the number of times to be performed, and a specific number of arrival information output period timer indicating the output period of the specific number of arrival information is set and a step is taken. Proceed to 069SGS174E (step 069SGS174C, step SGS174D).

In the information output process (step S23) at the time of the next interrupt, the CPU 103 sets the output of the specific number of arrival information output count counter over the period set in the specific number arrival information output period timer. You only have to execute it as many times as you have done.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 executes the on / off of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the transmission of the right-handed LED lighting notification command / right-handed LED off notification command in the display process (step 069SGS24A) at the time of the next interrupt. After setting the transition flag of, the process of step 069SGS175 is executed to end the special symbol stop process.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, in the display process, first, whether or not the transition flag is set, that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process in which the variable display result is lost at the time of the previous interrupt is executed. It is determined whether or not (step 069SGS181). When the migration flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display process is terminated, and when the migration flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the migration flag is cleared and stored (step 069SGS182). The state of the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B is compared with the state of the current time saving flag A and the time saving flag B (step 069SGS183), and the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is changed to the on state (set state). It is determined whether or not it is done (step 069SGS184).

When the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is changed to the on state, that is, when the time saving state A or the time saving state B is newly controlled (step 069SGS184; Yes), the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time saving lamp 069SG134 Along with setting the lighting, a right-handed LED lighting notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to end the display process (step 069SGS185, step 069SGS186).

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the on state (step 069SGS184; No), whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has further changed to the off state (cleared state). Is determined (step 069SGS187). When the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the off state (step 069SGS187; N), the display process is terminated, and when the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the off state, that is, a new time saving flag B has been changed. When the time saving state A or the time saving state B is controlled to the normal state (step 069SGS187; Yes), the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are turned off, and the right-handed LED off notification command is given to the staging control board 12. Is transmitted to end the display process (step 069SGS188, step 069SGS189).

In the display control process (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 may turn on / off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting of step 069SGS185 or the extinguishing setting of the process of step 069SGS188.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters "right-handed" on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving the right-handed LED lighting notification command from the CPU 103. In response to receiving the right-handed LED turn-off notification command from the CPU 103, the display of the right-handed notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters "right-handed" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 may be terminated.

(Characteristic part 069SG deformation example 3)
In the above embodiment, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 300, the special number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, so that the remaining variable display number until the relief time reduction is reached can be obtained. It was a production configuration that suggested that the number was reduced, but it is not limited to such a form, it is a production different from the special number display, and the remaining variable display number until reaching the relief time reduction is small. You may perform the suggestion relief time saving suggestion effect.

First, the staging configuration in FIGS. 11-35 (A) and (B) is the same as the staging configuration relating to the variable display number display and the special number display (white mode) shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A) and (B). Therefore, the description is omitted. Further, since the effect configuration other than the relief time reduction suggestion effect in FIGS. 11-35 (C) and (D) is the same as the effect configuration related to the special number display (red mode) shown in FIG. 11-21 (C). The explanation is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (C), when the first step in the relief time reduction suggestion effect is executed when the value of the relief time reduction frequency counter is 11 to 30, the first suggestion image (in this example, in this example). The first suggestion image 069SG800A) related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the relief time reduction that covers the upper 1/4 area of the background image is superimposed and displayed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestion image is an image having a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player, the visibility of the background image of the portion where the first suggestion image is superimposed and displayed seems to be deteriorated. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the first suggestion image 069SG800A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (D), when the value of the relief time reduction frequency counter is 1 to 10, when the second step in the relief time reduction suggestion effect is executed, the second suggestion image (this example). Then, the second suggestion image 069SG800B) related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the relief time reduction that covers the upper half area of the background image is superimposed and displayed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestion image is an image having a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player, the visibility of the background image of the portion where the second suggestion image is superimposed and displayed seems to be deteriorated. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the second suggestion image 069SG800B.

In the present embodiment, the background image including the suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) by the relief time saving suggestion effect is used as the background image on the image display device 5 even when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Is displayed. In this way, the relief time is shortened by changing the display mode of the interface image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the value of the relief time reduction counter regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed. It is possible to suggest that the number of variable display times remaining until the arrival is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In this example, as an image for changing the interface image, a suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) related to the shutter image when the relief time is shortened is superimposed and displayed on the background image. Not limited to such a form, an image not related to the shutter image at the time of reaching the relief time may be superimposed and displayed on the background image. For example, effect images having different display areas and display colors may be superimposed and displayed according to the value of the relief time reduction counter, and when the relief time reduction counter value is 21 or more, the effect image display area is the first. When the area (for example, 25% of the screen) and the display color is blue, but the value of the relief time reduction counter is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image is wider than the first area in the second area (for example, the screen). 50%), and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various productions)
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-36 to 11-50. 11-36 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects. 11-37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. 11-38 is also a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the pending change notice. FIG. 11-40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the symbol chance eye notice. 11-41 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the effect display notice. 11-42 is a diagram showing a look-ahead notice type determination table in FIGS. 11-42. 11-43 are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice effect pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-43. 11-44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. FIG. 11-45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display. 11-46 are diagrams showing a reach advance notice execution determination table, and FIGS. 11-46 are diagrams showing a button advance notice effect pattern determination table. 11-47 are diagrams showing the character notice pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-47. 11-48 is a diagram showing a movable body operation pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-48. 11-49 are diagrams showing the movable body notice pattern determination table in FIGS. 11-49. 11-50 are diagrams for explaining the characteristics of each of the gaming states (A) to (C).

As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the effect control CPU 120 has a countdown notice and a hold change notice as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. And, it is possible to execute the design chance eye notice and the effect display notice.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a movable body advance notice, a character advance notice, a reach advance notice, and a button advance notice as a notice effect suggesting that the variable display is controlled to a big hit.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a hit / fail button effect and a movable body effect as a decision effect for notifying whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled in the variable display based on the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (SP reach A to E). And can be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is scheduled to be given in the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable display based on the super reach jackpot variation pattern (SP reach A to E) is executed. It is possible to execute the post-production in the post-production part that notifies the number of balls so that it can be specified.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the control of each gaming state by displaying the state start display when the control of any of the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B as a special state is started. It is possible to execute a rush effect to notify.

(Pre-reading notice production)
Next, the look-ahead notice effect will be described. In the present embodiment, in the start winning determination process of step S101 in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of the start winning, stores the hold information in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updates the hold storage number. .. When a start prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information, and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are displayed based on the extracted random number value. The look-ahead determination process is executed. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 is in a jackpot game state for the hold storage stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 based on the information received from the main board 11 in the look-ahead notice setting process of step S161 in the effect control process process of FIG. Whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect that suggests that it is controlled, and if it is decided to execute, the look-ahead notice effect type to be executed (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice" , Which of the "effect display notice" and the effect pattern of various notices) is decided.

In this embodiment, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined on the condition that the number of reserved storages is "4", but the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is also determined when the number of reserved storages is other than "4". It may be decidable. Further, although the type of the look-ahead notice effect to be executed is determined to be one of countdown notice, hold change notice, symbol chance eye notice, and effect display notice, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, multiple notices may be executed at the same time.

The "countdown notice" starts the variable display of the hold memory that was not the target of the look-ahead notice effect until the variable display of the hold memory (hereinafter, also referred to as the target hold) that was the target of the look-ahead notice effect is started. It is an effect of executing a countdown such as "3"-> "2"-> "1"-> "0" for each.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the countdown notice is one of a pattern in which the countdown ends with "3", a pattern in which the countdown ends with "2", a pattern in which the countdown ends with "1", and a pattern in which the countdown ends with "0". The pattern is determined. The degree of expectation increases in the order of the pattern ending with "3", the pattern ending with "2", the pattern ending with "1", and the pattern ending with "0" (expectation: ending with "3" <" End with "2" <End with "1" <End with "0").

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (A), when the execution of the countdown notice and the pattern ending at "0" are determined with the occurrence of the start winning prize, after the variable display is completed (FIG. 11). -37 (B)), when the next variable display is started, the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37 (C)), and the variable is displayed. The display ends (see FIG. 11-37 (D)). Then, when the next variable display is started, a character image 069SG100C different from the character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed (see FIGS. 11-37 (E)), and the variable is displayed. The display ends (see FIG. 11-37 (F)).

Next, when the next variable display is started, a character image 069SG100A different from the character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C and a countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed (see FIGS. 11-38 (G)). The variable display ends (see FIG. 11-38 (H)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach fluctuation pattern) is started, the character image 069SG100B different from the character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG414 indicating "0" are displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 11-38 (I)), and the countdown notice ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the pattern of "3" is determined, a countdown notice is given when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed in FIGS. 11-37 (C). When the pattern is finished and the pattern of "2" is determined, the countdown notice ends when the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed in FIGS. 11-37 (E). When the pattern of "1" is determined, the countdown notice ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed in FIGS. 11-38 (G).

Further, the countdown effect pattern is arbitrary, and five or more types of effect patterns may be set. Further, the countdown may be started from a number other than "3". Further, the count may be increased as "0"-> "1"-> "2"-> "3".

The "hold change notice" changes the display color of the hold display of the target hold until it is notified whether or not it becomes a big hit in the variable display of the hold memory (target hold) that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. It is a production.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the hold change notice is a pattern in which the display color of the hold display is finally "blue", a pattern in which it becomes "green", a pattern in which it becomes "red", and a pattern in which it becomes "gold". And one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, at which timing the display color of the hold display is changed (for example, at the time of starting winning, at the time of holding memory digestion, variable display period of target holding, etc.). , When "red" is decided, it is possible to arbitrarily decide whether to change it to "red" from the beginning, or to change it step by step like "blue" → "green" → "red"). .. Expectations increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectations: "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (A), when the execution of the hold change notice and the "red" pattern are determined due to the occurrence of the start prize, the hold of the target hold that is the target of the hold change notice is held. After the display is displayed in white, the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display is started, the display color of the target hold changes to "blue" (see FIG. 11-39 (B)), and the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display is started, the display color of the target hold changes from "blue" to "red" (see FIG. 11-39 (C)), and the variable display ends. Then, the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach fluctuation pattern) is started.

The number of effect patterns for the pending change notice is arbitrary, and may have five or more types of patterns. Further, the pending change may be changed not only to the one whose color changes as described above, but also to a character, an item, or the like.

The "design chance eye notice" is an odd number in the variable display of the hold memory that was not the target of the look-ahead notice effect until the variable display of the hold memory (target hold) that was the target of the look-ahead notice effect was started. This is an effect that is stopped and displayed by "combination of even-numbered symbols" or "combination of odd-numbered symbols".

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the symbol chance eye notice is a pattern in which the missing symbol is stopped and displayed as an "even symbol combination" (for example, "264") and a pattern in which the missing symbol is an "odd symbol combination" (a combination of odd symbols). For example, there is a pattern that is stopped and displayed at (such as "135"), and based on the variable display result, it is determined whether the outlier symbol is "a combination of even-numbered symbols" or "a combination of odd-numbered symbols". Further, the symbol combination of "combination of even-numbered symbols" and "combination of odd-numbered symbols" may be determined from a plurality of types. Further, there are a pattern in which the display color of the pedestal display unit 069SG052, which will be described later, which constitutes the decorative pattern is "blue", a pattern of "green", a pattern of "red", and a pattern of "gold", and any one of them. The pattern is determined. The degree of expectation is higher for "combination of odd-numbered symbols" than for "combination of even-numbered symbols" for out-of-order symbols. In addition, the pedestal display unit increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation: "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (A), when the execution of the symbol chance eye notice and the effect pattern are determined due to the occurrence of the start winning, the variable display ends and the symbol is displayed from the next variable display. Start the chance eye notice.

When the out-of-order symbol is determined to be an "even-numbered symbol combination" and the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is determined to have a "blue" pattern, the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed with an even-numbered symbol combination of "246" and the pedestal is displayed. Part 069SG052 is displayed in "blue" (see FIGS. 11-40 (B1) (B2)). On the other hand, when the pattern in which the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is "red" is determined when the out-of-order symbol is "combination of odd-numbered symbols", the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of odd-numbered symbols in "375" and the pedestal display unit is displayed. 069SG052 is displayed in "red" (see FIGS. 11-40 (C1) (C2)).

In the present embodiment, the decorative design is a number display unit 069SG051 composed of numbers "1" to "9" and a pedestal display unit displayed on a display layer (rear side) lower than the number display unit 069SG051. It is composed of 069SG052 and. The pedestal display unit 069SG052 is formed in a substantially square shape so as to surround the numbers "1" to "9" displayed on the number display unit 069SG051, and is displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, white). It is a display mode common to all numbers ("1" to "9").

It should be noted that the number of effect patterns for the symbol chance eye notice is arbitrary, and the number of combinations of symbols, the display color of the pedestal display unit 069SG052, and the like may have five or more types of patterns. A character image, a decorative image, or the like may be displayed on the pedestal display unit 069SG052. Further, for example, individual character images corresponding to each of the numbers (“1” to “9”) may be displayed.

"Effect display notice" is when the variable display of the hold memory that was not the target of the look-ahead notice effect is started until the variable display of the hold memory (target hold) that was the target of the look-ahead notice effect is started. This is an effect in which the effect image is displayed in the lower region of the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern of the effect display notice includes a pattern in which the effect image is "blue", a pattern in "green", a pattern in "red", and a pattern in which the effect image is "gold". The pattern is determined. Although detailed description is omitted in the present embodiment, the mode of changing the display color of the effect image (for example, when "red" is determined, it is changed to "red" from the beginning, or "blue" → " It is possible to arbitrarily decide whether to change gradually from "green" to "red"). Expectations increase in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectations: "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (A), when the effect display notice is executed and the "red" pattern is determined with the occurrence of the start winning prize, the variable display ends (FIG. 11-41 (FIG. 11-41). B)), after the next variable display is started (see FIGS. 11-41 (C)), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the lower region of the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The “blue” effect image 069SG420 is displayed (see FIGS. 11-41 (D)). Next, when the next variable display is started, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIGS. 11-41 (E)), and when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the movable body on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A “red” effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the lower region of 32 (see FIG. 11-41 (F)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach fluctuation pattern) is started, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 11-41 (G)).

The number of effect patterns for the effect display notice is arbitrary, and may have five or more types of effect patterns. Further, the size of the effect image 069SG420 may be different depending on the degree of expectation. Further, the effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display but also at the start of the variable display or at a period other than that.

Next, in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state with respect to the hold storage stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 based on the information received from the main board 11. The pre-reading notice effect type determination tables A to D used for determining whether or not to execute the suggested pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect type to be executed when the execution is decided, will be described. In FIGS. 11-42, (A) is a notice effect type determination table A used in a normal state, (B) is a notice effect type determination table B used in a probabilistic state, and (C) is a notice effect used in a time saving state A. The type determination tables C and (D) are the advance notice effect type determination tables D used in the time saving state B. In the following, random values from 0 to 99 are used as random values for determining various effect types.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (A), in the advance notice effect type determination table A used when the game state is the normal state, when the variable display result is "big hit", 20 pieces are "non-executed". Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to the "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to the "pending change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice". Judgment values are assigned, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "pending change notice". 10 judgment values are assigned to, 15 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to the "effect display notice".

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (B), in the advance notice effect type determination table B used when the game state is a probable change state, when the variable display result is "big hit", 20 pieces are "non-executed". Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to the "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to the "pending change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice". Judgment values are assigned, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "pending change notice". 5 judgment values are assigned to, 15 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to the "effect display notice".

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (C), in the advance notice effect type determination table C used when the game state is the time saving state A, when the variable display result is "big hit", 40 pieces are "non-executed". Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" is assigned. Twenty determination values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", and "design chance eye". Ten determination values are assigned to the "notice", and ten determination values are assigned to the "effect display notice".

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (D), in the advance notice effect type determination table D used when the game state is the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "big hit", 70 pieces are set to "non-execution". Judgment values are assigned, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "design chance eye notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

As described above, in the pre-reading advance notice effect, when the variable display result is "off", the ratio of "non-execution" increases in the order of the normal state, the probable change state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B. That is, it is most easily executed in the probabilistic state, and is not executed (most difficult to be executed) in the time saving state B. Further, the "countdown notice" is a notice that is not executed in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, and the "hold change notice" and the "effect display notice" are notices that are not executed in the time saving state B.

Here, the determination of the look-ahead notice effect type is compared in three game states (probability change state, time reduction state A, time reduction state B) in which the time reduction control is executed.

First, when the variable display result is "big hit", the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect is 80% in the probabilistic state, 60% in the time saving state A, and 30% in the time saving state B, and the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined is 40% in the probabilistic state, 30% in the time saving state A, and 0% (non-execution) in the time saving state B.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "big hit" is "4 types" in the probabilistic state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. The number of types of pre-reading notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "off" is "4 types" in the probabilistic state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "0 types (non-types) in the time saving state B". Execution) ".

In this way, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is a "big hit", only the "design chance eye notice" can be executed, and no other look-ahead notice effect is executed. , If the variable display result is "off", the pre-reading notice effect is not executed. That is, in the time saving state B, the execution rate of the pre-reading advance notice effect is lower than in the probability change state and the time saving state A, and the number of determinable effect types is small.

Further, in the time saving state B, the "design chance eye notice" can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect. This is because, in the time saving state B, a variation pattern having a short variable display time (for example, ultra-shortened non-reach) is easily determined, and the time is shortened when the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable display of 1, for example. , It is easy to overlook the color change in a small hold display area such as "hold change notice". Further, although the "countdown notice" is executed in a plurality of variable displays, it is difficult to notice the change in the count because the period for displaying the count in one variable display is short. On the other hand, the "design chance eye notice" is executed by a plurality of variable displays, and the change in the display color between the decorative design and the pedestal can be appropriately shown when the decorative design is stopped and displayed. It can be said that it is a look-ahead notice production suitable for execution in.

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed when the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B is not limited to this. If the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect when the variable display result is "missing" is lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect when the variable display result is "missing" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A, the time saving state B In the case where the variable display result is "off", the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. Further, if the number of types of pre-reading advance notice effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "off" is smaller than that of the probabilistic change state or the time-saving state A, it is possible to execute two or more types of pre-reading advance notice effects in the time-saving state B. May be done.

Next, the effect pattern determination tables A to F used by the effect control CPU 120 to determine the effect pattern of the pre-reading advance notice effect determined to be executed will be described. In FIGS. 11-43, (A) is an effect pattern determination table A used in a normal state, (B) is an effect pattern determination table B used in a probabilistic state, and (C) is an effect pattern determination table used in a time saving state A. C and (D) are the effect pattern determination table D used in the time saving state B, (E) is the effect pattern determination table E used in the normal state, and (F) is the effect pattern determination table F used in the probabilistic state.

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect pattern determination table commonly used when determining the effect patterns of the hold change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice. In A, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". The determination value of is assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "golden". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (B), when the gaming state is in the probable change state, the effect pattern determination table commonly used when determining the effect patterns of the hold change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice. In B, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". The determination value of is assigned, and 20 determination values are assigned to "golden". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (C), when the game state is the time saving state A, the effect pattern determination commonly used when determining the effect patterns of the hold change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice. In Table C, when the variable display result is "big hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 70 are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment value is assigned.

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (D), in the effect pattern determination table D used when determining the effect pattern of the symbol chance eye notice when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is "big hit". In the case of, 90 determination values are assigned to "red" and 10 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", the "design chance eye notice" is not executed, so that the determination value is not assigned to any of the effect patterns.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (E), in the effect pattern determination table E used when determining the effect pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is "big hit". In the case of, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2", and the pattern ending with "1" is assigned. Twenty determination values are assigned, and 70 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1", and 5 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0".

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (F), in the effect pattern determination table F used when determining the effect pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is in the probable change state, the variable display result is "big hit". In this case, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1". The determination value of is assigned, and 70 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , 20 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1", and 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0".

In this way, the effect patterns in the pending change notice, the symbol chance eye notice, and the effect display notice are set so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (in this order). Expectations: "blue" <"green" <"red" <"gold"). In addition, the staging pattern in the countdown notice is set so that the degree of expectation increases in the order of "3", "2", "1", and "0" (expectation: "3"). Ends with "<Ends with" 2 "<Ends with" 1 "<Up to" 0 ").

Here, the determination of the effect patterns of various notices is compared in three game states (probability change state, time reduction state A, time reduction state B) in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition, the number of staging patterns of various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is "big hit" is "4 types" in the probabilistic state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. The number of staging patterns of various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is "off" is "4 types" in the probabilistic state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "0 types (non-type) in the time saving state B". Execution) ".

In this way, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is a "big hit", it is possible to determine either "red" or "gold" as the effect pattern of the "design chance eye notice". In addition, when the variable display result is "missing", neither is determined as the effect pattern of "design chance eye notice" (non-execution). That is, in the time saving state B, the number of effect patterns that can be determined is smaller than in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state A.

(Notice production)
Next, the advance notice production will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the "movable body notice", the "character notice", the "reach notice", and the "button notice" as the notice effects are predetermined in the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-44, the effect control CPU 120 is enabled to be executed at the time of Determine the pattern.

The "movable body notice" is an effect suggesting that the movable body 32 is controlled to a big hit by vibrating the movable body 32 up and down when the variable display is started (see FIGS. 11-57 (A1) (B1)). ). There are two types of effect patterns for the movable body notice: a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the vertical vibration width is small and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the vertical vibration width is larger than the vibration (small). Depending on the above, one of non-execution, "vibration (small) pattern", and "vibration (large) pattern" is determined.

The movable body 32 can move in the vertical direction between the origin position above the display screen of the image display device 5 and the effect position substantially in the center of the display screen, and falls from the origin position to the effect position due to its own weight. It is possible. The vibration in the notice of the movable body is an effect of vibrating the movable body 32 up and down between the origin position and a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position. Further, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set.

In the "character notice", a predetermined character appears in the period from the start of the variable display until the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the dialogue of the character is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the characters. It is an effect of inciting whether or not the reach mode is obtained by outputting the voice of the displayed dialogue (see FIGS. 11-57 (A2) and B2). The effect pattern of the reach notice is "line A pattern" where the character's line is "reach?" And "line B pattern" where the character's line is "reach !!", depending on the variable display result. , Non-execution, "Serif A pattern", "Serif B pattern" is determined. The content of the dialogue is arbitrary, and dialogue other than the above may be used.

The character dialogue pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set. Further, although the character type does not change, any character may be selectable from a plurality of types according to the variable display result.

The "reach notice" was stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L after the decorative symbol that was variablely displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L was stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. It is an effect that encourages whether or not the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, that is, whether or not it is in the reach mode (FIGS. 11-57 (A3 to A5), (Fig. 11-57). See B3 to B5)).

Specifically, after the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol is displayed before the stop display position in the right decorative symbol display area 5R that is variably displayed. The deceleration display of the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the area 5L is started (see FIGS. 11-57 (A4) and (B4)). Then, when the operation by the player is detected within the predetermined operation valid period after the deceleration display is started, or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, if the reach mode is not reached, the left decoration is used. The decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L passes through the stop display position, and the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 11-57 (A5) and (B5)), and the reach mode. In the case of, the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position.

The reach mode is a combination of a plurality of decorative symbols constituting the jackpot display result (for example, "333") from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol (identification information) to the derivation display of the display result. ), Except for one decorative symbol (for example, middle symbol), the decorative symbol (for example, left symbol and right symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the one decorative symbol (for example, middle symbol) is variablely displayed. It is a mode to perform (also called reach production).

When the variation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice regardless of whether or not the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result in the reach notice execution determination process of step 069SGS278 described later. Whether or not it is decided by lottery, and an effect control pattern (process table) according to the decided content is set. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the reach mode is not set after the reach notice is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern is SP reach, the reach mode is set after the reach notice is executed, and the SP reach effect is executed. ..

The "button notice" is set after the deceleration display of the decorative symbol having the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L in the right decorative symbol display area 5R is started when the above reach notice is executed. , It is an effect executed in the period until the predetermined operation valid period elapses (see FIGS. 11-57 (A4) (B4)). Specifically, it is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative symbol until the predetermined operation valid period elapses, and imitates the operation promotion display and the push button 31B. The operation promotion display and the button image are started when the button image is displayed, and when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed. And is hidden and ends.

The effect pattern (operation promotion mode) of the button notice is a "long press pattern" that prompts a long press operation of the push button 31B over a predetermined operation period, and a "long press pattern" that causes the push button 31B to be repeatedly pressed for a predetermined operation period. There is a "continuous hit pattern" and a "blow pattern" that prompts a single push operation of the push button 31B. Depending on the variable display result, there are non-execution, "long press pattern", "continuous hit pattern", and "blow pattern". Either is decided. The effect pattern is not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set.

The operation promotion display is "long press!" In the "long press pattern", "continuous hit!" In the "continuous hit pattern", and "blow!" In the "blow pattern".

(Decisive production)
Next, the deciding effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the deciding effect is performed in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern before notifying whether or not the jackpot is controlled at the end of the SP reach effect (FIG. 11-36). 58 (C4 to C8), FIGS. 11-59 (A10 to D3), (B7 to D3)), after the "win / fail button effect" and the "pass / fail button effect" executed during the predetermined operation valid period. There is a "movable body effect" that is executed.

The "win / fail button effect" is an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the push button 31B until the predetermined operation validity period elapses, and is an operation promotion display consisting of the characters "release !!" and "press !!". And a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed, and when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed. , The operation promotion display and the button image are hidden and the process ends (see FIGS. 11-58 (C4), 11-59 (A8 to A10), (B7)).

The effect pattern includes a "white pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red, which will be described later. When "Pattern A-1", "Pattern A-2", "Pattern B-1", and "Pattern B-2" are determined in the "movable body motion pattern determination process", the "white pattern" is determined. When the "pattern B-3" is determined, the "red pattern" is determined. It should be noted that either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" may be determined according to the variable display result, regardless of the "movable body motion pattern determination process". Further, the effect pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

The "movable body effect" is an effect of notifying whether or not the movable body 32 is controlled to the jackpot game state depending on whether or not the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. Specifically, it is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period in the "hit / fail button effect", or when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, and the movable body 32 is at the origin position. When it falls to the effect position, it is notified that it is controlled to the big hit game state, and when the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the effect position, it is not controlled to the big hit game state, that is, it is out of place. Be notified (see FIGS. 11-58 (C6), 11-59 (D1)).

When the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 built in the movable body 32 and the game effect lamp 9 are turned on in a predetermined manner, and an image of an enemy character being defeated on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. , An effect image that emphasizes the movable body 32 is displayed, and when the movable body 32 does not fall, the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9 are not turned on, and the image that the enemy character is defeated and the effect image are not displayed.

In this way, in the "decision effect", when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit notification is performed by executing the movable body effect after the hit / fail button effect is performed, and the variable display result is out of order. In some cases, after the pass / fail button effect is performed, the missed notification is performed without executing the movable body effect.

(Post-production)
Next, the post-production will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the post-effect is after being notified that the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In the effect part, the effect is such that the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state is identifiable (see FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10)).

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display in the variable display period of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern to the notification of the variable display result, and the post-effect part is the period in the variable display period of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. It is the period from the end of the variable display part to the end of the variable display. That is, the variable display period of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern includes the variable display part period and the post-production part period. The post-production is executed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, and during the symbol confirmation period after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. You may do so.

In the post-production, the ally character and the enemy character that appeared in the SP reach effect and the planned number of balls counter display indicating the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed, and the ally character attacks the enemy character. The scheduled number of balls counter display increases each time. Next, when an operation promotion display consisting of the characters "press!" And a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed during the predetermined operation valid period, and the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, Or, when the operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, the ally character defeats the enemy character, a predetermined number (for example, 1000 or 1500, etc.) is displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display, and the scheduled number during the big hit is displayed. The number of balls is notified. Then, after the end of the post-production, the jackpot game state is started.

(Rush production)
Next, the rush effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, the rush effect includes the "rush introduction effect" executed before the start of the "probability change rush effect" and the "time saving rush effect A", and the control of the probability change state after the end of the big hit game state. The "probability change rush effect" that is executed when the game is started, and the "time saving rush effect A" that is executed when the control of the time saving state A is started after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit game state in the low probability state. There is a "time saving rush effect B" that is executed when the control of the time saving state B is started by executing the variable display 900 times without being controlled by. In addition, the timing for starting the relief time saving arrival variation (variable display when the value of the relief time saving number counter becomes 0) in which the "time saving rushing effect B" is executed, that is, before the execution of the "time saving rushing effect B" is ""Shuttereffect" (see FIGS. 11-23 (B) (C) and 11-25 (B) (C)) is executed.

Specifically, the "probability change rush effect" and the "time reduction rush effect A" are executed during the ending period of the big hit game state, and the "time reduction rush effect B" is the 900th time when the control start condition of the time reduction state B is satisfied. It is executed in the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) after the variable display of (relief time reduction arrival variation) is completed.

"Time saving rush effect A" is a time saving state A by displaying the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!" after the rush introduction effect (see FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is executed. It is an effect of notifying that the control of the above is started (see FIG. 11-63 (D)).

In the "probability change rush effect", after the rush introduction effect (see FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is displayed, the character "pole" is displayed in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!". This is an effect of notifying that the control of the probabilistic state is started (see FIGS. 11-63 (D) and 11-64 (A1 to A4)).

In "Time saving rush effect B", the rush introduction effect (see FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is not displayed, and in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!" It is an effect of notifying that the control of the time saving state B is started by displaying the characters (see FIGS. 11-63 (D) and 11-64 (B1 to B4)).

Further, for the probabilistic rush effect / time saving rush effect B, the characters “BATTLE RUSH rush !!” may be displayed after displaying the characters “pole” and “play ・ 1100”.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the staging control board 12 will be described. 11-44 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the staging control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271; Yes), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 069SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "1-0" and stored. 1 The various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the special figure hold storage is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", and the first special figure hold storage is stored. Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-2", and the buffer number "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage is shifted. The various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not in the on state (off state) in step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is in the on state (step 069SGS271; No). Step 069SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273; Yes). The various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning is shifted to the upper position by one buffer number. (Step 069SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-0" and stored. 2 Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the special figure hold storage is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", and the second special figure hold storage is stored. Various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the buffer number "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage is shifted. The various command data stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variation pattern designation command is stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area in response to the reception of the variation pattern designation command in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, and is deleted at the end of the variable display. The fluctuation pattern specification command may be erased according to the reading.

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 069SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do. In the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area in response to the reception of the display result designation command, and at the end of the variable display. It will be erased. The display result specification command may be erased according to the reading.

In the feature unit 069SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a stop symbol other than "7". It is determined from a plurality of combinations of even-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", and "888"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "" are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which the three symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are irregular is determined as the stop symbol.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the above-mentioned symbol chance eye advance in the look-ahead advance notice setting process of step S161 in the effect control process process of FIG. 10, the variable display until the variable display of the target hold is started. The stop symbol of is determined to be either an even symbol combination or an odd symbol combination.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 stores the relief time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the relief time reduction has been reached in the command storage area, that is, whether or not the variation is the relief time reduction arrival variation. (Step 069SGS276A). If it is a relief time reduction arrival variation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), the shutter effect setting process is executed (step 069SGS276B), and if it is not a relief time reduction arrival variation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS277. In the shutter effect setting process, a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the shutter effect, and the corresponding shutter effect is started at the timing when the timer for waiting for the start of the effect is timered up.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS283. If the variation pattern is not a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern, that is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), the reach advance notice execution determination process is executed. (Step 069SGS278).

In the reach notice execution decision process, for example, random numbers (0 to 99) for reaching the reach notice execution decision are extracted, and whether or not the reach notice is executed is determined using the reach notice execution decision table shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A). do.

In the reach advance notice execution decision table, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A), when the game state is the "normal state" and the game state is the "probability change state" for each of "non-execution" and "execution". , In the case of "time saving state A" and in the case of "time saving state B", different determination values are assigned so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A).

Specifically, when the gaming state is the "normal state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the gaming state is the "probability change state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the gaming state is the "time saving state A", 60 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 40 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the gaming state is the "time saving state B", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution".

In this way, the reach notice is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the probability change state, the time reduction state A, and the time reduction state B when compared in the three game states excluding the normal state (execution rate: probability change state). > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the reach notice can be executed with a probability of 20% in the time saving state B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice is not executed in the time saving state B. You may do so.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not the execution of the reach notice is decided in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A), and when it is determined that the execution of the reach notice is not decided (step 069SGS279A; No), if it is determined that the execution of the reach notice is decided by proceeding to step 069SGS280 (step 069SGS279A; Yes), after selecting the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the reach notice (step 069SGS279B), the button notice is given. The pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button advance notice pattern determination process, for example, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the button advance notice pattern are extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B) to (E), the button advance notice pattern is determined corresponding to the gaming state. The button notice pattern is determined using the tables A to D.

In the button notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B) to (E), for each pattern of "non-execution", "blow", "continuous hit", and "long press". When the variable display result is "big hit", "out of reach", and "out of reach", different judgment values are shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B) to (E). It is assigned to be a number.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B), in the button notice pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", the variable display result is "big hit". 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "blow", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hit", and "long press". Twenty determination values are assigned to. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit" is assigned. On the other hand, 10 judgment values are assigned, and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit". 10 determination values are assigned to, and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (C), in the button notice pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is the "probability change state", when the variable display result is "big hit", "non-execution" is performed. 20 judgment values are assigned to "", 40 judgment values are assigned to "blow", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hit", and "long press" is assigned. Twenty determination values are assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit" is assigned. On the other hand, 10 judgment values are assigned, and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit". 10 determination values are assigned to, and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D), in the button notice pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is the "time saving state A", the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is "non-". 20 judgment values are assigned to "execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "blow", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hit", and "long press" is assigned. Twenty determination values are assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit" is assigned. Five determination values are assigned to it, and five determination values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach off", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "blow", and "continuous hit". Five determination values are assigned to, and ten determination values are assigned to "long press".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (E), in the button notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is the "time saving state B", the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is "non-". 90 judgment values are assigned to "execution", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "blow". Further, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 95 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 5 determination values are assigned to "blow". Further, when the variable display result when the number of reserved storages is "0" is "missing", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, the button notice is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the probability change state, the time reduction state A, and the time reduction state B when compared in the three game states excluding the normal state (execution rate: probability change state). > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In particular, in the case of the time saving state B, when the variable display result when the reserved storage number is "0" is "missing", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or SP reach is determined, but the execution rate of the reach notice is low and the execution rate is low. , Even if the reach notice is executed, the button notice is not executed.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of reserved storages is "0" in the time saving state B, the button notice is not executed even if the reach notice is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result when the reserved storage number is "0" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A is lower than the execution rate of the button notice when the variable display result is "missing". Button notice may be executable.

Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is other than "0", the button notice is executed at a rate of 5% in the reach notice. Not limited to this, regardless of the number of reserved storages, if the variable display result is "off", the button notice may not be executed.

In addition, in the case of a big hit or a missed reach, a pattern of "blow" that prompts the player to perform one operation may be executed, but the execution rate is extremely low, and the player is operated for a predetermined operation validity period. The "continuous hit" or "long press" operation that prompts the player, that is, the "continuous hit" or "long press" operation that is more troublesome than the "blow" operation that prompts the player to perform one operation is not promoted.

Returning to FIGS. 11-44, when it is determined in step 069SGS279A that the execution of the reach notice has not been determined (step 069SGS279A; No), or after the button notice pattern determination process is executed in step 069SGS279C, the effect control CPU 120 determines. The character notice pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS280). In the character notice pattern determination process, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the character notice pattern are extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D), the character notice pattern determination table A corresponding to the gaming state is used. -D is used to determine the character notice pattern.

In the character notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D), "non-execution", "line A (reach?)", And "line B (maybe reach !!)". When the variable display result is "big hit" and "missing" for each pattern of "", the different judgment values are the number of judgment values shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D). So assigned.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A), in the character notice pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", the variable display result is "big hit". Twenty determination values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "line A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B". When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and "line B". 10 determination values are assigned to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (B), in the character notice pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "probability change state", when the variable display result is "big hit", "non-execution" is performed. 20 determination values are assigned to "," 30 determination values are assigned to "line A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B". When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and "line B". 10 determination values are assigned to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (C), in the character notice pattern determination table C used when the game state is the “time saving state A”, the variable display result is “non-big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Twenty determination values are assigned to "execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "line A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B". When the variable display result is "off", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and "line B". 10 determination values are assigned to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (D), in the character notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is the "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "big hit", it is "non-". 90 determination values are assigned to "execution", and 10 determination values are assigned to "line B". Further, when the variable display result is "off", 95 determination values are assigned to "non-execution", and 5 determination values are assigned to "serif A". Further, when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of reserved storages is "0", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, the character notice is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the probability change state, the time reduction state A, and the time reduction state B when compared in the three game states excluding the normal state (execution rate: probability change state). > Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In particular, in the case of the time saving state B, if the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0", the non-reach or SP reach fluctuation pattern is determined, but in any fluctuation pattern variable display. The character notice is never executed.

In the present embodiment, the character advancement is not executed when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0" in the time saving state B, but the present invention is limited to this. Even if the character notice can be executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the character notice when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A. good.

Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is other than "0", the embodiment in which the character notice is executed at a rate of 5% is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is "missing" regardless of the number of reserved storages, the character notice may not be executed.

Returning to FIGS. 11-44, after executing the character notice pattern determination process in step 069SGS280, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a super reach variation pattern. Determination (step 069SGS281A). If the variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, if it is a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS282. When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), the movable body motion pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the movable body motion pattern are extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (A) to (D), the movable body motion pattern corresponding to the gaming state is obtained. The movable body motion pattern is determined using the determination tables A to D.

In the movable body operation pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (A) to (D), the movable body notice is not executed, and the movable body 32 is dropped by the movable body effect (decision effect). "Pattern A-1" for big hit, "Pattern A-2" for big hit that drops the movable body 32 by the movable body production, the movable body notice is vibration (large), "Pattern A-3" for big hits that drop the movable body 32 in the movable body production, "Pattern B-1" for the detachment that does not drop the movable body 32 in the movable body production of the fixed production without executing the movable body notice , The movable body notice is vibration (small), and the movable body 32 is not dropped by the movable body effect "Pattern B-2". For each pattern of "Pattern B-3" for not letting go, when the variable display result is "big hit" and "missing", different judgment values are obtained from FIGS. 11-48 (A) to ( It is assigned so as to have the number of determination values shown in D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (A), in the movable body motion pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", the variable display result is "big hit". , 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". A value has been assigned. When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1" and 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2". Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (B), in the movable body motion pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is the "probability changing state", when the variable display result is "big hit", the "pattern" is used. 20 judgment values are assigned to "A-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". Has been done. When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1" and 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2". Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (C), in the movable body motion pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is the "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "big hit", " 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". Assigned. When the variable display result is "off", 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2". Ten determination values are assigned to "Pattern B-3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D), in the movable body motion pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is the "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "big hit", " 90 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". Assigned. Further, when the variable display result is "off", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-1".

In this way, when comparing the movable body movement pattern when the variable display result is a big hit in the three gaming states excluding the normal state, both the movable body notice and the movable body effect are executed "Pattern A-". The execution ratios of "2" and "Pattern A-3" are higher in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A than in the time saving state B. On the other hand, the execution rate of the "pattern A-1" in which the movable body notice is not executed and only the movable body effect is executed is higher in the time saving state B than in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A.

Further, when comparing the movable body movement patterns when the variable display result is out of alignment in the three gaming states excluding the normal state, only the movable body notice is executed "Pattern B-2" and "Pattern B-3". The execution rate of "" is higher in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A than in the time saving state B (non-execution).

That is, in the case of the time saving state B, the execution rate of the movable body notice is lower than that of the probable change state and the time saving state A (execution rate of the movable body notice: probabilistic change state> time saving state A> time saving state B).

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, the execution of "Pattern A-1" in which the movable body notice is not executed and only the movable body effect is executed. Although the form in which the ratio is 90% is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "pattern A-1" in the case where the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A. If it is higher than the execution rate of, it may be 90% or less. Further, the execution rate may be 100% when the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B.

Returning to FIGS. 11-44, when it is determined in step 069SGS281A that the fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the movable body notice pattern. The process is executed (step 069SGS282). In the movable body notice pattern determination process, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the movable body notice pattern are extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D), the movable body notice pattern corresponding to the gaming state is obtained. The movable body notice pattern is determined using the determination tables A to D.

In the movable body notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D), each pattern of "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)" is shown. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", different judgment values are assigned to each of the cases of "missing" so as to be the number of judgment values shown in FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D). ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A), in the movable body notice pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is the "normal state", the variable display result is "big hit". , 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". Assigned. When the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration" is assigned. (Large) ”is assigned 10 determination values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), in the movable body notice pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is the “probability changing state”, the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is “non”. 10 judgment values are assigned to "execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". There is. When the variable display result is "off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration" is assigned. (Large) ”is assigned 10 determination values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), in the movable body notice pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is the “time saving state A”, the variable display result is “big hit” in the case of “big hit”. 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". ing. When the variable display result is "off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and "vibration" is assigned. (Large) ”is assigned 10 determination values.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (D), in the movable body notice pattern determination table D used when the game state is the “time saving state B”, when the variable display result is the “big hit”, the supermarket is used. Since only the reach fluctuation pattern is determined, no judgment value is assigned to "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)". If the non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined when the variable display result is "missing" when the number of reserved storages is "0", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution". There is.

In this way, the movable body notice is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B when compared in the three gaming states excluding the normal state (execution rate: probable change). State> Time saving state A> Time saving state B).

In particular, in the case of the time saving state B, when the non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined, the movable body advance notice is not executed even when the reserved storage number is “0”.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0" in the time saving state B, the movable body advance notice is not executed. It is not limited, and the movable body notice is executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the movable body notice when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is "0" in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A. It may be possible.

Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display result is "missing" when the reserved storage number is other than "0", the embodiment in which the movable body notice is not executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is "missing" when the number of reserved storages is other than "0", the movable body notice may be executed.

When the execution of any of the effect patterns is determined in the button advance notice pattern determination process, the character advance notice pattern determination process, and the movable body advance notice pattern determination process described above, the period until the advance notice is started is set in the various advance notice start waiting timers. , Various notices Waiting for start The corresponding notice is started when the timer is up.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, when the fluctuation pattern is shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or ultra-shortened non-reach in step 069SGS277, when the movable body operation pattern determination process of step 069SGS281B is executed, the movable body notice pattern determination in step 069SGS282 is executed. When the process is executed, in step 069SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 069SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 069SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the process ends.

(Variable display during staging process)
Next, FIG. 11-45 is a flowchart showing the variable display during staging process (step S172) in the staging control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by -1 (step 069SGS301, step 069SGS302, step 069SGS303). Further, in the effect control CPU 120, various effect start waiting timers are set (it is determined to perform the advance notice effect, etc.), or the advance notice effect execution flag is on (execution of the advance notice effect). In the case (step 069SGS304; Y), various staging processes are executed (step 069SGS305). When the effect waiting timer and the advance notice effect executing flag are off, the process proceeds to step 069SGS306 without executing the effect process of step 069SGS305.

In step 069SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 069SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 069SGS308). Further, the control state for the staging device (staging component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 069SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 069SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 069SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, the predetermined value is reset in the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

Further, when the variable display control timer is not timer-out (step 069SGS310; N), after the execution of step 069SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timer-out (step 069SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is not out of the timer (step 069SGS313; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 069SGS314). If the confirmation command reception flag is not in the ON state (step 069SGS314; No), the process is terminated.

When the variable display time timer is out of the timer in step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or when the confirmation command reception flag is on in step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), the right-handed LED lighting start command is received. It is determined whether or not the flag is on (step 069SGS315). When the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right-handed LED069SG031 is started to light, and the right-handed LED 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start the right-handed notification. After that (step 069SGS316), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated.

If the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is not in the ON state (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether or not the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is in the ON state (step 069SGS317). When the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is in the on state (step 069SGS317; Yes), after the right-handed LED069SG031 is finished lighting and the right-handed notification image 069SG400 is hidden and the right-handed notification is finished (step 069SGS317; Yes). Step 069SGS318), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated. If the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is not in the ON state (step 069SGS317; No), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 069SGS319). , Ends the process.

Although not shown in detail, after the processes from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318 have been executed, the effect control process flag has elapsed after the symbol confirmation period specified from the symbol confirmation designation command based on the confirmation command reception flag has elapsed. The value of is updated to the value corresponding to the waiting process for hitting the special figure (step S173).

In addition, even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern showing a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Even when a specified command is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 069SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

(Various operation examples by game state)
Next, various operation examples for each of the three game states of the time saving state B, the probability variation state, and the time saving state A will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-50. 11-50 is a diagram showing an example of a variable operation for each gaming state in FIG. 11-50, a diagram showing an example of a staging operation for each gaming state, and FIG. 11C for explaining the characteristics of the time saving state B. It is a figure.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (A), the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three gaming states of "time saving state B", "probability changing state", and "time saving state A" are compared. ..

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. There are "two" of "reach" and "SP reach D", and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), the maximum number of reserved memories is "1 to 3". There are "4 pieces" of "shortened non-reach A", "non-reach A", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D". As described above, when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, the maximum number is "3" of "shortened non-reach", "non-reach", and "SP reach E".

That is, the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (for example, two) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "off" is the variable display pattern that can be determined in the "time saving state A". It is less than the number (eg, 3) and less than the number of outlier variation patterns (eg, 4) that can be determined in the "probability change state".

The number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probable change state, or in the case of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the probable change state are at least one of them. If the number is small, the number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time reduction state B", as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B), the deviation that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0. The average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for is about 7.54 seconds {((7s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and is determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for possible deviation is about 2.205 seconds {((1.5s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}. Here, assuming that the time saving state B is started and the reserved storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the holding storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 1100 variable display, it can be determined in the time saving state B. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss is about 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.25 × 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

In the "probability change state", as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 is about 8.2 seconds. {((7s x 95) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, variable display time of variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storage is 1 to 3 The average time of is about 4.8 seconds {((3s × 85) + (7s × 10) + (40s × 2) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}. Here, assuming that the probabilistic change state is started and the hold storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the hold storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 110 variable displays, it is for the deviation that can be determined in the probabilistic state. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 is about 9.15. Seconds {((7s × 95) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3 is about. 5.55 seconds {((3s × 90) + (7s × 5) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}. Here, assuming that the time saving state A is started and the reserved storage number is 0 in the first variable display and the holding storage number is 1 to 3 in the 2 to 110 times variable display, it can be determined in the time saving state A. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss is about 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

That is, the average time (for example, about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time reduction state B" when the variable display result is "off" is in the "time reduction state A". It is less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (for example, about 5.58 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, about 4.83 seconds). Less than seconds).

Further, the average time (for example, about 7.54 seconds) of the variable display time of the variation pattern for deviation that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state B" is the holding storage in the "time saving state A". It is less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined when the number is 0 (for example, about 9.15 seconds), and the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "probability change state". Less than the average time of variable display time (eg, about 8.2 seconds).

Further, the average time (for example, about 2.205 seconds) of the variable display time for the deviation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3 in the "time saving state B" is in the "time saving state A". It is less than the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (for example, about 5.55 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, about 4.8 seconds). Less than seconds).

According to the items (A1) and (A2), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the big hit gaming state is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. The variable display in which is not determined provides a suitable time-saving state B because the digestion speed of the variable display is higher than that in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state A because there are few types of fluctuation patterns and the average time of the variable display time is shortened. can do.

The average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern becomes longer in the order of the time saving state B, the probable change state, and the time saving state A, or in the case of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the probable change state are at least one of them. If it is shortened, the above time can be changed in various ways.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, "1 piece" of "SP reach D". In the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, the maximum is "not via SP", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D". In "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, the maximum is "not via SP" and "SP reach E". "Two".

That is, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (for example, one) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "big hit" is the variable display pattern that can be determined in the "time saving state A". It is less than the number (eg, 2) and less than the number of outlier variation patterns (eg, 3) that can be determined in the "probability change state".

The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of the time saving state B, the time saving state A, and the probable change state, or in the case of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the probable change state are at least one of them. If the number is small, the number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the jackpot can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of is about 40 seconds.

In the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for big hits that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is about 51.1 seconds { ((22s × 5) ＋ (55s × 80) ＋ (40s × 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1} Therefore, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot that can be determined in the probabilistic state is about. It will be 51.1 seconds.

In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable display time for the jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3 is about 62.8 seconds. {((22s × 5) + (55s × 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

That is, the average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time saving state B” when the variable display result is the “big hit” is determined in the “time saving state A”. It is less than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, about 62.8 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability change state" (for example, about 51.1 seconds). Less than.

According to the items (A3) and (A4), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the big hit gaming state is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display in which is determined, the digestion speed of the variable display is higher than that in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A because the number of types of fluctuation patterns is small and the average time of the variable display time is shortened. Can be provided.

The average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern becomes longer in the order of the time saving state B, the probable change state, and the time saving state A, or in the case of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the probable change state are at least one of them. If it is shortened, the above time can be changed in various ways.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination ratio of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B), 95% when the number of reserved storages is 0, 1 to 3. In the "probability change state", as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), when the number of reserved storages is 0, 1 to 3, it is 80%, and in the "time saving state A", FIG. 11 As shown in -7 (A) and (B), when the number of reserved storages is 0, 1 to 3, it is 70%.

That is, the ratio (for example, 97%) in which the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B" is the variable display result in the "time saving state A". Is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when is "off" (for example, 95%), and when the variable display result is "off" in the "probability change state", the CPU 103 Is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern" is determined (eg, 95%).

According to the item (A5), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is not determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the variable display mode to the reach mode, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 is 97% in the time saving state B, and in both the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. Although the embodiment in which the time saving state B, the probable change state, and the time saving state A decrease in this order at 95% is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B (for example, 97%) and the probable change state (for example). , 95%), in the order of time saving state A (for example, 94%), or if the time saving state B is higher than at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state, the above The ratio can be changed in various ways.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B", the ratio of the "non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern" determined by the CPU 103 is 97%. The present invention is not limited to this, and the rate at which the "non-reach loss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B" is 100%, that is, ". When the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state B", the reach fluctuation pattern may not be determined.

Further, when the variable display result is "off", the CPU 103 determines the outlier variation pattern (for example, "non-reach A") that can be determined in "time saving state B", and in "time saving state A" and "probability change state". By sharing with a possible out-of-reach variation pattern (eg, "non-reach A"), it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the deviation variation pattern (for example, "SP reach D") that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" and the deviation variation pattern that can be determined in the "probability change state" (for example, "SP reach D"). For example, by sharing with "SP reach D"), it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (B), the contents of each item "B1" to "B10" in the three gaming states of "time saving state B", "probability changing state" and "time saving state A" are compared. do.

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution ratios of "movable body notice" and "character notice" as jackpot suggestion effects in the variable display of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0, in "time saving state B", FIG. 11-49 ( As shown in D), the execution rate of the "movable body notice" is 0% (non-execution), and as shown in FIG. 11-47 (D), the execution rate of the "character notice" is 0% (non-execution). Yes, in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), the execution rate of the "movable body notice" is 40%, and as shown in FIG. 11-47 (B), the execution of the "character notice". The ratio is 30%, and in the "time saving state A", the execution ratio of the "movable body notice" is 30% as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), and as shown in FIG. 11-47 (C). The execution rate of the "character notice" is 20%.

That is, the loss determined when the variable display is executed by the loss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state A", and when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "probability change state". When the variable display is executed in the variable pattern, the suggestion effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while the reserved storage number is 0 in the "time saving state B". When the variable display is executed in the deviation variation pattern determined in, the suggestion effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is not executed in the variable display.

According to the item (B1), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it can be determined when the reserved storage number is 0 in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit game state continues for a long time. In the variable display of various fluctuation patterns (for example, "non-reach" and "SP reach" other than shortened non-reach), a suitable time saving state B is provided because it is not unnecessarily fanned by a movable body notice or a character notice. be able to.

More specifically, when the control of the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B is started, the holding memory is stored in the first holding memory because the left-handed game was performed in the normal state until then. However, it is conceivable that there is no hold memory in the second hold memory. That is, when the probability change state or the time saving state A is started at the first hit, or when the control of the time saving state B is started by executing the variable display 900 times, the time for storing the holding storage in the second holding storage is set. The out-of-reach pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in order to earn is an out-of-reach pattern with a longer variable display time than a shortened non-reach (for example, a non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds or a variation time of 25 seconds. And 40 seconds SP reach, etc.) are determined at a high rate. Then, when the deviation variation pattern whose variable display time is longer than the shortened non-reach is determined, suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" can be executed in the variable display.

However, when the control of the time saving state B is started, it is highly possible that the player has executed various missed notices in the long game period so far, so that even in the time saving state B, the "movable body notice" is further performed. Or, if the "character notice" is executed, it causes annoyance. Therefore, when the variable display is executed in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the time saving state B, it is "movable". "Body notice" and "character notice" are not executed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display is executed by the deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the "time saving state B", the "movable body notice" or "movable body notice" or "moveable body notice" or "moveable body notice" is executed in the variable display. An example of a mode in which a suggestion effect such as "character notice" is not executed is illustrated. The execution rate of the suggestion effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" in the variable display is higher than the suggestion effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" in the "probability change state" and "time saving state A". It is preferable that the execution rate is lower than the execution rate.

Further, the ratio of suggestion effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" when the variable display is executed in the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved storages is 0 is the time saving state B. If the execution rate of the "movable body notice" or "character notice" in is lower than the execution rate of the "movable body notice" or "character notice" in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state, the above ratios vary. Can be changed to.

Further, in the time saving state B, the "movable body notice" and the "character notice" are not executed in the case of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern, and the "movable body notice" and the "character notice" are executed in the case of the jackpot fluctuation pattern. You may do so. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" are executed in the time saving state B.

In addition, the suggestion effect suggesting that the game is controlled by the jackpot game state is a "reach notice" or "reach notice" as a fanning effect that incites whether or not the variable display mode is the reach mode (whether or not the reach is established). It may include "button notice". By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest by paying attention to whether or not the "reach notice" or "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B.

Further, based on the variable display result, the first suggestion effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)) and the second suggestion effect are controlled to a higher hit game state than when the first suggestion effect is executed. By being able to execute multiple types of suggestion effects including suggestion effects (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), it is interesting to pay attention to whether or not the suggestion effects are executed in the time saving state B. Can be enhanced.

<Item B2>
As shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), the number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the staging control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of order is "0" because none of them is determined in "Time saving state B". In the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-42 (B), "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" are "4 pieces". Yes, in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (C), there are "three" of "holding change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice".

That is, the number of types of pre-reading notice (for example, 0) that can be determined by the staging control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state B" is that the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state A". In some cases, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is smaller than the number of types (for example, 3), and the pre-reading that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state". It is less than the number of types of notice (for example, 4).

In the present embodiment, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the staging control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is 0, but the present invention exemplifies the embodiment. The number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is not limited to this, for example, the "time saving state A" and the "probability changing state". If the variable display result is out of alignment in at least one of the above, the number of types of pre-reading notice that can be determined by the staging control CPU 120 may be smaller than the number of pre-reading notice types, and one or more types of pre-reading notice may be executed.

Further, the number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the staging control CPU 120 when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time reduction state B" is variable display in at least one of the "time reduction state A" and the "probability change state". If the result is less than the number of pre-reading notice types that can be determined by the effect control CPU 120 when the result is out of order, the number can be changed in various ways.

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution rate of the "look-ahead notice" when the variable display result is off, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), the execution rate of the "look-ahead notice" is "0%" because none of them is executed, and the "probability change". In the "state", as shown in FIG. 11-42 (B), the total execution rate of "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" is "40%". In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (C), the total execution ratio of "holding change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" is "30%".

That is, the execution rate of the look-ahead notice (for example, 0%) when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state B" is the execution rate of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of place in the "time saving state A". It is lower than (for example, 30%) and lower than the execution rate (for example, 40%) of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state".

According to the items (B2) and (B3), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the big hit gaming state is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display in which is not determined, the development cost can be suppressed by reducing the number of types of the look-ahead notice effect that can be determined, and since it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated by the look-ahead notice effect, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B. can.

In the present embodiment, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice is 0% when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B", that is, the mode in which the pre-reading notice is not executed is illustrated. The variable display result is not limited, and for example, when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B", the execution rate of the look-ahead notice is the variable display result in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability changing state". If it is lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice in the case where is off, the look-ahead notice may be executed.

Further, the execution rate of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is the look-ahead when the variable display result is out of alignment in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability change state". If it is lower than the execution rate of the notice, the above rate can be changed in various ways.

Further, as a look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be commonly executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-time reduction state B, and the probability change state, the first look-ahead advance notice effect pattern (for example, "hold change notice", "design chance eye notice". , "Blue" pattern of "effect display notice") and the second look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "hold") in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed. There are "change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" "red" pattern), and the rate at which the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 0%, FIG. 11). -43 (D)) is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the probability variation state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)). In the state B, since it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated by the first pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, as a look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be commonly executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-time reduction state B, and the probability change state, the first look-ahead advance notice effect pattern (for example, "hold change notice", "design chance eye notice". , "Blue" pattern of "effect display notice") and the second look-ahead notice effect pattern (for example, "hold") in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed. There are "change notice", "design chance eye notice", and "effect display notice" "red" pattern), and the rate at which the second look-ahead notice effect pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 90%, FIG. 11). -43 (D)) is higher than the rate at which the second look-ahead warning effect pattern is executed in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C)). Since the second look-ahead notice effect is likely to be executed in the time saving state B, a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

Further, the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time saving state A and the probability change state and the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the time reduction state B are common (for example, "design chance eye". By "notice"), the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in the time-saving state B and the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state are common. By some means (for example, "design chance eye notice"), the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in the time-saving state B and the pre-reading advance notice effect pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state A are common (for example). By ("design chance eye notice"), the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the look-ahead notice effect pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

<Item B4>
Regarding the execution rate of the "button notice" as an action promotion effect that encourages the player's action, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (E), in the case of a big hit, it is "10%", which is out of the question. In the case of "5%", in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C), it is "80%" in the case of a big hit and "30%" in the case of a missed reach, and "time reduction". In "state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D), it is "80%" in the case of a big hit and "20%" in the case of a miss. It should be noted that these execution ratios are the ratios when the "reach notice" is executed.

That is, the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for the big hit and 5% for the loss) is the execution of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A". It is lower than the ratio (for example, 80% for big hit and 20% for miss) and more than the execution ratio of button notice per 1 variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 80% for big hit and 30% for miss). low.

According to the item (B4), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the push button is pushed to the player in the variable display of 1 in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit game state continues for a long time. Since the number of times the button notice, which is an operation promotion effect for encouraging the operation of 31B, is executed is small, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is higher than the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A" or the "probability changing state". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the button notice may not be executed in the “time saving state B” (execution ratio 0%).

Further, if the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A" or the "probability change state", the above ratio. Can be changed in various ways.

<Item B5>
In the button notice, a "blow pattern" as a first motion promotion effect that encourages the player to perform one action, and a "continuous hit pattern, long" as a second motion promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action over a predetermined motion period. Regarding the execution rate with the "push pattern", in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (E), the execution rate of the "blow pattern" is "10%" in the case of a big hit, and in the case of out of reach. Is "5%", in the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is a big hit, and in the case of miss, it is "0% (non-execution)".

In the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C), the execution rate of the "blow pattern" is "40%" in the case of a big hit, "10%" in the case of a miss, and "10%" on average. In the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "40%" in the case of a big hit and "20%" in the case of a miss.

In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D), the execution rate of the "blow pattern" is "40%" in the case of a big hit and "7.5%" in the case of a miss. In the case of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "40%" in the case of a big hit and "17.5%" in the case of a miss.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the execution of both the "blow pattern" and the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "probability change state" and the "time saving state A", and in the "time saving state B". , While it is possible to determine the "blow pattern", it does not determine the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern".

In addition, the execution rate of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" per 1 variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for big hit and miss) is "continuous hit pattern" per 1 variable display in "probability change state". The execution rate of "pattern, long press pattern" is lower than the execution rate (for example, 40% for big hit, 20% for miss), and the execution rate of "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A". It is lower than (for example, 40% for big hits and 17.5% for misses).

According to the item (B5), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, the player pushes over the operation valid period in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. Since it is less likely to prompt the player to perform troublesome operations such as "continuous hitting pattern, long press pattern" in which the button 31B must be continuously operated, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which the "blow pattern" can be determined in the "time saving state B", but the execution of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern" is not determined. The present invention is not limited to this, for example, the determination ratio of the "blow pattern" in the "time saving state B" is the "blow pattern" in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability changing state". If it is lower than the decision rate of, the "blow pattern" may be made feasible.

Further, in the time saving state B, the ratio (for example, 10%) in which the "button notice" is executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a big hit is for the effect control when the variable display result is out of order. By making the rate higher than the rate at which the "button notice" is executed by the CPU 120 (for example, 5%), it is possible to pay attention to the execution of the "button notice" in the time saving state B and improve the interest.

In addition, as the effect pattern of the "button notice", there are a "blow" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the "blow" pattern is executed. The rate at which the "blow" pattern is executed in the time saving state B (for example, 10%) is the rate at which the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state (for example, 40%). ), But the rate at which the "blow" pattern is executed in the time saving state B is higher than the rate at which the "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probability variation. good. By doing so, when the movement promotion effect is executed in the time saving state B, it often becomes a "blow" pattern, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, the period in which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the probability change state and the period in which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the "reach notice" is executed. By (period), the development cost can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the "button notice" between the time saving state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a fade-in display of the push button 31B to be operated before the operation promotion preparation effect (for example, although not particularly shown, the operation valid period is started) before executing the “button notice”. When the effect to be performed or the effect display is displayed), the period during which the operation promotion preparation effect is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state, and the operation promotion preparation effect in the time saving state B are performed. It is preferable that the execution period is the same, and by doing so, the development cost can be reduced and it is possible to preferably notify that the "button notice" is executed.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of 1 of the "movable body notice" as a suggestion effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (D). In the case of big hit and miss, it is 0% (non-execution), and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), it is 90% in the case of big hit and 40% in the case of miss, and " In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (C), 90% is the case of a big hit and 30% is the case of a miss.

That is, the execution rate of the "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for the big hit and 0% for the loss) is the "movable body" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A". It is lower than the execution rate of "notice" (for example, big hit 90%, missed 30%), and the execution rate of "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in "probability change state" (for example, big hit 90%, missed 40%). ) Is lower.

According to the item (B6), it is suggested that the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times is controlled to the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled to the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. Since the number of times the movable body notice is executed is reduced, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the execution rate of the "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is 0% is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. In (), the execution rate of the "movable body notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is "movable" per 1 variable display in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability changing state". If it is lower than the execution rate of the "body notice", the "movable body notice" may be executed in the "time saving state B".

Further, the rate at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 0%) is "in the time saving state A or the probability change state when the variable display result is a big hit". Although it is lower than the rate at which "movable body notice" is executed (for example, 90%), the rate at which "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is a big hit for the variable display result. In this case, the rate may be higher than the rate at which the "movable body notice" is executed in the time saving state A or the probable change state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest by making the degree of attention to the "movable body notice" different between the time saving state A, the probable change state, and the time saving state B.

Further, the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit (for example, 0%) is the time saving state A or the probability change state when the variable display result is a big hit. Although it is lower than the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed (for example, 30%), the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a big hit is , The rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state when the variable display result is a big hit may be higher than the rate (for example, 30%). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest by making the degree of attention to the "movable body notice" different between the time saving state A, the probable change state, and the time saving state B.

<Item B7>
As shown in FIGS. 11-47 (D) in the "time saving state B", the execution ratio per 1 variable display of the "character notice" as a fanning effect for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is the reach mode. In the case of a big hit, it is 10%, in the case of a miss, it is 5%, and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-47 (B), in the case of a big hit, it is 80%, and in the case of a miss, it is 30%. Yes, in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (C), it is 80% in the case of a big hit and 20% in the case of a miss.

That is, the execution rate of "character notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, big hit 10%, missed 5%) is "character notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A". Is lower than the execution rate of "character notice" per variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 80% of big hit, 30% of loss). low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (A), the execution ratio per 1 variable display of the "reach notice" as a fanning effect for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is the reach mode is "time saving state". It is 20% in "B", 50% in "probability change state", and 40% in "time saving state A".

That is, the execution rate (for example, 20%) of the "reach notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" is the execution rate of the "reach notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state A" (for example). , 40%) and lower than the execution rate (for example, 50%) of "reach notice" per 1 variable display in the "probability change state".

According to the item (B7), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, whether or not the reach is established is instigated in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. Since the number of times the reach notice and the button notice are executed is reduced, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the "character notice" per variable display in the "time saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "time saving state A" and the "movable body notice". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution ratio of the "character notice" per 1 variable display in the "time saving state B" may be 0%, that is, not executed. Further, if the execution ratio of the "character notice" per variable display in the "time reduction state B" is lower than the execution ratio of the "time reduction state A" or the "movable body notice", the above ratio can be changed in various ways. be.

<Item B8>
"Pattern A" that executes "movable body notice" and "movable body effect" as a movable body operation pattern of "movable body notice" and "movable body effect" that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display of 1. -2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern) "and" pattern A-1 (first effect execution pattern) "that executes only" movable body effect "without executing" movable body notice ". Regarding the execution ratio of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a big hit in the case of "2 staging execution pattern)", as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D) in "Time saving state B". In the "probability change state", it is 20% as shown in FIG. 11-48 (B), and in the "time saving state A", it is 10% as shown in FIG. 11-48 (C). ..

That is, the execution rate (for example, 90%) of the "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of order in the "time saving state B" is "" when the variable display result is out of place in the "time saving state A". It is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" (for example, 10%) and higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" (for example, 20%) when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "probability change state". high.

According to the item (B8), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In this case, the movable body 32 is rarely operated unnecessarily in the notice of the movable body before the movable body effect in which the big hit is notified by the fall of the movable body 32 is executed. Can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the execution rate of the "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state B" is such that the variable display result is out of alignment in the "time saving state A" or the "probability change state". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is out of alignment in the “time saving state B”. The execution rate of "Pattern A-1" may be set to 0%, that is, it may not be executed.

Further, the ratio at which "Pattern A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state (for example). , 80-90%), "Pattern A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" is executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B. By being higher than the ratio (for example, 10%), it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the movable body 32 operates in the time saving state A or the probable change state.

Further, the execution frequency of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the execution frequency of the "movable body effect" in the time saving state A or the probabilistic state (for example, 80 to 90%). Therefore, since the movable body 32 is rarely operated unnecessarily in the time saving state B, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

<Item B9>
FIG. 11-60 describes the production mode of the “post-effect” that notifies the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state in which the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the SP reach effect is controlled to the jackpot game state. As shown in, the "time saving state B", the "probability changing state", and the "time saving state A" are common.

According to the item (B9), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display, the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average time of the variable display time is shortened, so that the digestion speed of the variable display is increased, and after being notified that the variable display is controlled to the jackpot game state, the time is shortened. Since it is possible to excite with a common effect between A and the probabilistic state, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, the "movable body effect" executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A or the probability change state, and the "movable body effect" executed when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B. , Are common (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), so that the development cost can be reduced.

Further, the control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state A or the probable change state, and the control of the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state B. Since the control data to be used is common (for example, light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300), the development cost can be reduced.

Further, a vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state A and the probable change state, and a vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-effect" in the time-saving state B. , Are common (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), so that the development cost can be reduced.

<Item B10>
When the time saving control is started, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the start of the time saving control by displaying the rush image 069SG470 (for example, the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!") as the special state start display. Regarding the "rush effect" as the special state start effect, when the control of the probability change state is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the probability change rush effect, and when the control of the time reduction state B is started, the time reduction rush effect B is displayed. In addition to displaying the inrush image 069SG470, the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B (for example, the characters "Yu 1100") are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started. (See FIGS. 11-63 (D), FIGS. 11-64 (A4) (B4)).

According to the item (B10), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, the probability change state is controlled in the rush effect in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit game state continues for a long time. Not only the inrush image 069SG470 common to the time when it is started, but also the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state is started, are displayed. Can be done.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may be able to determine a special variation pattern having a variable display time in which the “rush effect” can be executed in the relief time reduction arrival variation. By doing so, the "rush effect" can be suitably executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (C), the difference between the "time saving state B" and the "probability change state" and the "time saving state A" will be described.

<Item C1>
As described in each item A1 to A5 shown in FIGS. 11-50 (A), the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns and jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 is the smallest in the time-saving state B, and the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns is the smallest. The average time of the variable display time of the pattern or the jackpot fluctuation pattern is the shortest in the time saving state B, and the determination rate of the non-reach loss is the highest in the time saving state B. Therefore, the average digestion time per variable display of 1 in each of the "time reduction state B", "probability change state", and "time reduction state A" in which the time reduction control is performed is the fastest in the time reduction state B, and the probability change state is medium speed. , The time saving state A is low speed.

In this way, of the time-saving state B, the probabilistic state, and the time-saving state A, in which the fluctuation efficiency becomes higher than the normal state due to the time-saving control, the probabilistic state and the time-saving state A are the jackpot gaming states that are advantageous for the player. Whereas the time saving state B is controlled via the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without a big hit in the low probability state. be.

Further, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the variable display number of times the time saving control is executed is the first number (for example, 110 times), whereas in the time saving state B, the variable display number of times the time saving control is executed is the first number of times (for example, 110 times). The second number of times (for example, 1100 times) is larger than the first number of times.

In other words, in the case of a time-saving state such as a probabilistic state or a time-saving state A, the player can wait while expecting the next big hit while enjoying the reach and various effects while suppressing the investment compared to the normal state. On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state B, there is no big hit and the control is performed after a long period of game in a state disadvantageous to the player, and the variable display number of the time saving control is larger than that of the probability change state or the time saving state A. Considering that the time is shortened, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency as described above, the number of unnecessary shots is reduced and investment is suppressed, and rather than enjoying the production, the out-of-order variable display is efficiently digested for a short period of time. By giving priority to attracting a big hit in the meantime, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

<Item C2>
Further, as described in each item B1 to B10 shown in FIGS. 11-50 (B), the execution ratios of the various advance notice effects described above are the lowest in the time saving state B, the highest in the probability variation state, and the time saving state A. It is inside.

In other words, in the long-term game until it is controlled to the time saving state B, it is highly possible that the player is considerably depressed because various advance notice effects are executed and the player continues to miss the time. In the state B, the execution rate of the advance notice effect is lower than that of the other game states, so that it is possible to suitably prevent the player's motivation to play due to the out-of-order effect.

<Item C3>
In this way, the time saving state B has higher fluctuation efficiency than other probabilistic states and time saving states A in which the time saving control is performed in the same manner, and the chances of being fanned by the advance notice are reduced, so that additional investment is made. It is a gaming state characterized by appropriately digesting a variable display and waiting for a big hit while suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing.

More specifically, in the time saving state B, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed), the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game, and the easy entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening. While the control (high open control, high base control) is common to other probabilistic states and time saving states A, the average special figure fluctuation time (period during which the special figure is changed) is changed to other probabilistic changing states and time saving states. It is a time-saving state in which the variation efficiency is prioritized over the effectability by reducing the execution frequency of various effects while increasing the variation efficiency by making it shorter than the state A.

Further, the deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time reduction state B and the deviation variation display pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time reduction state A and the probabilistic state. , SP reach D), and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, the deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time reduction state B and the deviation variable display pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in both the time reduction state A and the probable change state. By making) and) common, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state, and the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state is controlled by the time saving state A. It is preferable that the control period is shorter than the average time. By doing so, in the time saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than that in the probabilistic state, and the digestion rate of the variable display is increased, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided, and in the time saving state A, the time saving state A can be provided. By increasing the average time of the control period, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the number of out-of-order fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of out-of-range fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 3), and in the time-saving state A. The number of deviable variation patterns that can be determined (for example, 3) is smaller than the number of deviable variation patterns that can be determined in the probabilistic state (for example, 4). While reducing the number and giving priority to the digestion of variable display, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by increasing the number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probabilistic state.

Further, the jackpot variable display pattern (eg, the jackpot variable display pattern) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in at least one of the jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP reach D) that can be determined in the time saving state B and the time saving state A and the probability variation state (for example, the probability variation state). , SP reach D), and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, the jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, not via SP) are common. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity by not setting the variable display pattern that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state, and the average time of the control period controlled by the probabilistic state is controlled by the time saving state A. It is preferable that the control period is shorter than the average time. By doing so, in the time saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than that in the probabilistic state, and the digestion rate of the variable display is increased, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided, and in the time saving state A, the time saving state A can be provided. By increasing the average time of the control period, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 2), and in the time saving state A. The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probabilistic state (for example, 3). While reducing the number and giving priority to the digestion of variable display, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by increasing the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probable change state.

Further, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state. By not setting the non-reach deviation that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state are common. Therefore, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced by not setting the non-reach deviation that can be determined only by the time saving state B.

Further, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, SP non-via). By not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, not via SP) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time saving state B, and a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probabilistic state (for example, not via SP). By not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only by the time saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the time saving state B, an embodiment in which the execution ratio of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 is lower than that in the probability variation state or the time saving state A is exemplified. / Low base state) When the number of remaining variable display times until controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving reaching variation) becomes less than a predetermined number of times (for example, remaining 100 times or 50 times), the CPU 120 for effect control The execution ratio of various effects that can be executed may be lower than the execution ratio of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the normal state. Further, in this case, the execution rate of the effect of 1 is lower than the execution rate in the normal state, but may be higher than the execution rate in the time saving state B (execution rate of the effect of 1; normal state (remaining). Number of times 101 times or more)> Normal state (remaining number of times 100 times or less)> Time saving state B).

In addition, the remaining variable display number of times until controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving reaching variation) in the normal state (low accuracy / low base state) is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, the remaining 100 times or 50 times). Occasionally, the contents of the above items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may be changed to the contents corresponding to the time saving state B. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness until the time saving state B is controlled.

In addition, the period during which the remaining variable display number of times until controlled by the time saving state B (relief time saving reaching variation) in the normal state (low accuracy / low base state) is a specific number of times (for example, the remaining 50 times or 10 times) or less. When the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the low-expected effect (for example, SP reach effect A, weak pattern notice effect, etc.) may be increased.

(Variable display mode of design)
Next, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol and the small symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-51 to 11-55. 11-51 is a timing chart showing a variable display mode of a symbol in a probabilistic state, a time-saving state A out-of-reach non-reach variation pattern, and (B) a time-saving state B out-of-reach non-reach variation pattern. .. FIG. 11-52 is an example of the staging operation of the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern of the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. FIG. 11-53 is an example of the staging operation of the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern of the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. FIG. 11-54 is an example of the staging operation of the shortened non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B. 11-55 is an example of the staging operation of SP reach E and SP reach D.

In the present embodiment, each decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R is lower than the number display unit 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9" and the number display unit 069SG051. It is composed of a pedestal display unit 069SG052 displayed on the display layer (rear side) of the above. On the other hand, the left small symbol, the medium small symbol, and the right small symbol displayed in the display area 5SL on the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 are only from the numbers "1" to "9" displayed smaller than the decorative symbols. It is composed. The decorative symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

The variable display mode of the variation pattern (for example, non-reach type out-of-reach variation pattern) in the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R, 5R of the decorative pattern is a normal state, a probabilistic change state / time saving state A, and a time saving state B. It is different from the case of. Hereinafter, regarding the variable display mode of the decorative symbol based on the non-reach type out-of-reach variation pattern (including shortened non-reach A and non-reach A) in the normal state, the probabilistic state / time saving state A, the timing of FIGS. 11-51 (A). It will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-52 and 11-53 based on the chart. Since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol of the non-reach system loss in the normal state, the probabilistic state / time saving state A is common, FIG. 11-52 describes the shortened non-reach loss variable display mode in the probabilistic state as an example. do.

As shown in FIGS. 11-51 (A), in the start timing ta1 of the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the decorative symbols and small symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R are variable. The displays are started simultaneously (all at once) (see FIGS. 11-52 (A)). That is, the starting order of the variable display of each decorative symbol is the same. In addition, each decorative symbol becomes "medium speed" at the timing ta2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started at "low speed", and further becomes "high speed" which is the maximum speed at the timing ta3 when the predetermined time has elapsed. After that, it is variably displayed at a constant rotation speed. On the other hand, the small symbol is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the start timing ta1 of the variable display. The maximum speed of the decorative symbol, "high speed", and the maximum speed of the small symbol, "high speed", may be common or different.

Next, when the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative symbol changes from "medium speed" to "low speed" in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. .. Then, at the timing ta4 when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 11-52 (B)). Next, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed to return to the original size (see FIG. 11-52 (C)), the original size is performed. The decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L at the timing of returning to (see FIG. 11-52 (D)).

Next, at the timing ta5 when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 11-52 (E)). Next, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed to return to the original size (see FIG. 11-52 (F)), the original size is performed. The decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R at the timing of returning to (see FIG. 11-52 (G)).

Next, at the timing ta6 when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, the predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 11-53 (H)). Next, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size and then a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed to return to the original size (see FIG. 11-53 (I)), the original size is performed. At the timing ta6 when returning to, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 11-53 (J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R have a temporary stop display mode (for example, from the provisional stop display to the stop display based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. , Swing mode, etc.).

Then, at the timing ta7 (timing when the symbol confirmation designation command is received) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing ta6 when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, the left, middle, and right small symbols are simultaneously displayed. The stop display is displayed (all at once) (see FIG. 11-53 (K)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without displaying the specific operation. Further, at the timing ta7 when the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stopped and displayed.

Then, the next variable display can be started at the timing ta8 when the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 ms) has elapsed from the timing ta7 when the small symbol is stopped and displayed.

Next, a variable display mode of the non-reach type out-of-reach decorative symbol in the time saving state B will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-54 based on the timing chart of FIGS. 11-51 (B). Since the variable display mode of the decorative symbol of the non-reach system in the time saving state B is common, FIGS. 11-54 will explain the variable display mode of the shortened non-reach in the time saving state B as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 11-51 (B), at the start timing tb1 of the variable display of the ultra-shortened non-reach loss in the time saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols and small symbols of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, 5R is displayed. It is started at the same time (all at once) (see FIG. 11-54 (A)). That is, the starting order of the variable display of each decorative symbol is the same. Further, each decorative symbol is variably displayed at a constant rotation speed after reaching the maximum speed of "high speed" at the timing tb2 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started at "medium speed". On the other hand, the small symbol is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the start timing tb1 of the variable display. The maximum speed of the decorative symbol, "high speed", and the maximum speed of the small symbol, "high speed", may be common or different.

Next, when the end of the variable display is approaching, the variable display speed of each decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C becomes "medium speed" at the same time (all at once), and the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, and 5C are reached. At the timing tb3 in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time (simultaneously), a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIGS. 11-54 (B)). The variable display speed of the decorative symbol may be changed from "high speed" to "low speed" without going through "medium speed". Next, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size, the specific operation display (stop display action) that returns to the original size is not performed, and a predetermined time elapses from the timing tb3 in which each decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. At the timing tb4 (timing when the symbol confirmation designation command is received), the left, middle, and right small symbols are simultaneously (simultaneously) stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 11-54 (C)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without displaying the specific operation. Further, at the timing tb4 at which the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stopped and displayed.

Then, the next variable display can be started at the timing tb5 in which the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 ms) has elapsed from the timing tb4 in which the small symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes "medium speed" during acceleration or deceleration is common to the time saving state B, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state A. The time saving state B may be shorter than the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. Further, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbol in the variable display becomes "high speed" is shorter in the time saving state B than in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, but in the time saving state B and the probabilistic state and the time saving state. It may be common with A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state A (left, middle, right). The present invention is not limited to this, for example, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the left, middle, and right are shown. While the decorative symbols are displayed horizontally side by side and stopped, in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at different positions in the vertical direction. The mode may be different from the stop display mode of the decorative symbol in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state A (variable display in the vertical direction). ), But the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the display is variable in the vertical direction, while in the time saving state B, the display is variably displayed in the horizontal direction. Variable display in the time saving state B, such as variable display, or variable display of decorative patterns is reduced to the display area 5SR, etc., and special effects by ally characters, enemy characters, etc. are continuously displayed on the display screen. The mode may be different from the variable display mode in the probabilistic state or the time saving state A.

As described above, the start order of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state A, and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern in the time-saving state B. The time required for the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C to reach the maximum speed is shorter in the time saving state B than in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. (Tb1 to tb2 <ta1 to ta3). Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

Further, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the stop display in the order of left → right → middle in the case of the probabilistic change state and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time reduction state A, and the time reduction is achieved. In the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

The order of stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is a non-reach loss variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time reduction state A, and a non-reach loss variation pattern in the time reduction state B. Although it is common to all cases, the time from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area of 1 of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is in a probable state. , The case where the non-reach deviation variation pattern is in the time saving state A and the case where the non-reach deviation variation pattern is in the time saving state B may be different. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

Further, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is 3 times because the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at different timings in the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A. In the case of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so that it is once. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

Further, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 may be common between the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the probabilistic state and the time reduction state A and the case of the non-reach loss variation pattern in the time reduction state B. good. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression to each state and enhance the interest.

Further, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the specific operation display (symbol stop action) is performed when the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern is performed, whereas in the time reduction state B, the specific operation display (the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern) is performed. The symbol stop action) is not performed. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the effect of the effect is enhanced by the specific operation display, while in the time saving state B, the specific operation display is not executed, so that a smooth variable display can be realized.

Further, the specific operation display (symbol stop action) is common to the case where the non-reach loss variation pattern is in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A and the case where the non-reach loss variation pattern is in the time reduction state B. While enhancing the effect of the display, the development cost can be reduced by sharing the mode of the specific operation display between the probabilistic state, the time saving state A and the time saving state B.

Further, in the period from the stop display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the small symbol, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is better than the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A. Is shorter than the case of {t1 (ta6 to ta7)> t2 (tb3 to tb4)}. Therefore, a smooth variable display can be realized in the time saving state B.

In addition, the symbol confirmation period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, until the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the next variable display. And, the symbol confirmation period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from the stop display of the decorative symbol in the variable display of 1 in the time saving state B to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the next variable display, is It is common. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost by standardizing the control considering the drawing process until the decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the specific operation display of each decorative symbol exemplifies an operation display in which the display is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to the original size, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode is not limited to this. Is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways. Further, in the specific operation display, the specific operation display is performed only on the pedestal display unit 069SG052, and the specific operation display is not performed on the number display unit 069SG051. Therefore, the effect is enhanced by the specific operation display while ensuring the visibility of the identification information. However, the numerical display unit 069SG051 may also display the specific operation together with the pedestal display unit 069SG052. Further, the specific operation mode may be different depending on each decorative symbol having a different number.

Further, in the above, the non-reach loss variation pattern of the shortened system and the non-reach loss variation pattern of the non-shortening system exemplify a mode in which the variable display mode is common, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the variable display mode may be different between the non-reach loss variation pattern of the shortened system and the non-reach loss variation pattern of the non-shortening system.

Further, with respect to the decorative symbol in the time saving state B, the display position may be different between the time when the variable display is started and the time when the variable display is stopped. By doing so, the variable display is preferably performed even in a short variable display period. I can show you.

Further, instead of accelerating the variable display speed of the decorative symbol until it reaches the maximum speed as in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is changed to a mode that is difficult to see (for example, a blackish mode) during the variable display, and The variable display with a sense of speed may be realized by changing from a mode that is difficult to see when the decorative symbol is stopped to a normal mode.

Next, the reach specific operation display and the jackpot specific operation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-55.

First, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP reach E, the variable display is started (see FIG. 11-55 (A)), and after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (FIG. 11-55). (Refer to (B)), the decorative symbol is decelerated and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the reach notice and the button notice are executed (see FIG. 11-55 (C)), and the decorative symbol is displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R. When is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pedestal display unit 069SG052 of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R is enlarged and displayed to the original size to the original size. The return reach specific operation display is performed (see FIG. 11-55 (D)), and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-55 (E)).

Next, although not particularly shown, when a jackpot notification is performed via the SP reach effect, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (FIG. 11). -55 (F)). After that, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size, and then the jackpot specific operation display that returns to the original size is performed. (See FIG. 11-55 (G)), the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP reach D, the variable display is started (see FIGS. 11-55 (I)), and the reach mode is not displayed in advance in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C. A fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed as a temporary stop (see FIG. 11-55 (F)). After that, after the pedestal display unit 069SG052 of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged and displayed to a predetermined size, and then the jackpot specific operation display that returns to the original size is performed. (See FIG. 11-55 (G)), the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (H)).

In this way, in the case of the SP reach E variation pattern, the reach specific operation display that specifically operates the decorative symbol when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode and the decorative symbol are stopped at the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination. The second specific operation display that causes the decorative symbol to perform a specific operation when displayed is feasible, and in the variation pattern of SP reach E via the reach, the reach specific operation display and the jackpot specific operation display are executed. However, in the fluctuation pattern of SP reach D that does not go through the reach, the reach specific operation display is not executed and the jackpot specific operation display is executed. Therefore, in the SP reach D that can be executed in the time saving state B, it is less likely to be unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, after the variable display is started as shown in FIG. 11-55 (I), the reach mode is not displayed and the decorative pattern is shown as shown in FIG. 11-55 (F). An example is an example in which a fixed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is started after the variable display is started. By the time the fixed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped and displayed, the "movable body effect" in which the movable body 32 is dropped may be executed without any operation by the player. ..

(Display mode of non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns are compared. FIG. 11-56 is a diagram comparing examples of staging operations of non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns. 11-57 is a diagram comparing examples of staging operations of non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns. In the following, a detailed operation example of the specific operation display executed when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 11-56, when the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns of the shortened system are compared, first, in the "ultra-shortened non-reach" that can be determined in the time saving state B, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are each. The variable display of the decorative pattern is started at the same time (see FIG. 11-56 (A1)). The variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is stopped and displayed at the same time (see FIG. 11-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in the "shortened non-reach A" that can be determined in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (FIG. 11-56 (B1)). reference). Next, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see FIG. 11-56 (B2)), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 11-56 (B3)). The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 11-56 (B4)).

In this way, regarding the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, in the probabilistic state and the shortened time state A, the variable display time is shortened non-reach A of "3 seconds", and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and middle. On the other hand, in the time saving state B, the variable display time is "1.5 seconds", which is an ultra-shortened non-reach, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time on the left, right, and middle.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-57, when the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns are compared, first, in "non-reach A" that can be determined in the probable change state, the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are respectively. Variable display of is started at the same time. At this time, a "movable body notice" in which the movable body 32 moves up and down may be executed (see FIG. 11-57 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the character image 069SG100C and the dialogue display 069SG431 composed of characters such as "reach?" Are displayed. "Notice" may be executed (see FIG. 11-57 (A2)).

Next, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see FIG. 11-57 (A3)), the decorative symbol is decelerated and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a push is made. A button image 069SG441 imitating the button 31B and an operation promotion display 069SG442 such as "long press!" May be displayed, and a "button notice" for promoting the operation of the push button 31B may be executed (FIG. 11-). 57 (A4)). After that, a decorative symbol different from the left symbol is stopped and displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57 (A5)), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C without the reach mode. The variable display ends (see FIG. 11-57 (A6)).

Further, the “non-reach A” (see FIGS. 11-57 (B1) to (B6)) that can be determined in the time saving state A is a non-reach loss variation pattern that can be determined in the probabilistic state (FIG. 11-57 (A1)). )-(Refer to (A6)), and therefore the description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the "non-reach A" that can be determined in the time saving state B, after the variable display of the decorative symbols of each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (see FIG. C1), the decorative symbol display area 5L. The variable display of each of the decorative symbols 5, 5C and 5R is stopped and displayed at the same time, and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-57 (C2)).

As described above, regarding the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display time is common to "7 seconds" in the probabilistic state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B, but in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, "movable body notice". , "Character notice", "Reach notice" and "Button notice" have a high execution rate, while in the time saving state B, "Movable body notice", "Character notice", "Reach notice" and "Button" The execution rate of various effects such as "notice" is lower (or not executed) than in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state A.

(Display mode of SP reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the super reach fluctuation patterns will be compared. 11-58 is a diagram comparing examples of staging operation of the super reach fluctuation pattern. 11-59 is a diagram comparing examples of staging operation of the super reach fluctuation pattern. FIG. 11-60 is a diagram comparing an example of the effect operation of the post-effect in the super reach variation pattern.

Hereinafter, when the super reach fluctuation patterns are compared based on FIGS. 11-58 and 11-59, first, in the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach E" that can be determined in the time saving state A, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C Variable display of each of the decorative symbols of 5R is started at the same time (see FIG. 11-58 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the character image 069SG100C and the dialogue display 069SG431 composed of characters such as "Maybe reach !!" are displayed. A "character notice" may be executed (see FIG. 11-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-58 (A3)). Although not particularly shown, "reach notice" or "button notice" may be executed when the reach mode is adopted.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440 including a character image and a character display such as "SP reach effect E" is displayed (see FIG. 11-58 (A4)). Further, at this time, the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right portion of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, a "battle effect" in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character and the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character confront each other is started (see FIG. 11-58 (A5)).

Next, a predetermined time has passed since the battle production was started, and the final confrontation is reached (see FIGS. 11-59 (A6) (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display 069SG452 such as "charge start!", And a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed as an operation promotion effect for promoting a long press operation of the push button 31B. "Win / fail button effect" is executed (see FIG. 11-59 (A8)). If a long press operation by the player is detected within the operation valid period in which the operation promotion display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see FIG. 11-59 (A9)).

Further, before displaying the button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B within or immediately before the effect period of the pass / fail button effect, a pre-effect (for example, a condensing effect in which light gathers at a position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed). Etc.) may be feasible. Further, it is preferable that such a preliminary effect is not executed in the time saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation promotion display 069SG452 was started, the display of the operation promotion display 069SG452 is changed to "Release !!" and the operation release of the push button 31B is promoted. At the same time, the gauge display 069SG453 displays the operation opening operation time (see FIG. 11-59 (A10)). Then, the ally character attacks at the timing when the release of the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by the time when the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the release of the pressing operation. Image 069SG455 representing the image 069SG455 is displayed, and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the vicinity of the intermediate position (see FIG. 11-59 (A11)).

Next, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable body effect is executed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character and the movable body 32 are displayed. A movable body effect image 069SG456 consisting of an effect image for emphasizing is displayed, and after the movable body 32 has fallen from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), the enemy character is defeated and the ally. A notification image 069SG457 indicating that the character has won the battle is displayed (see FIG. 11-59 (D2)), and the fixed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By being displayed, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit (see FIG. 11-59 (D3)).

When the jackpot is notified, as shown in FIGS. 11-60, the background image is switched and displayed on the fifth background image 069SG350, and the character image 069SG100C and the scheduled number of balls to be given in the jackpot gaming state are displayed. The number counter display 069SG460 is displayed and the post-production is started (see FIG. 11-60 (D4)).

Next, an image in which the ally character attacks the enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball number display 069SG461 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is the planned number of balls. It is added to the counter value displayed on the number counter display 069SG460 (see FIG. 11-60 (D5)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B and, for example, "press !!" The operation promotion display 069SG452 and the gauge display 069SG453 indicating the remaining operation valid period are displayed, and an operation promotion effect for promoting a single push operation of the push button 31B is executed (see FIG. 11-60 (D6)).

Next, at the timing when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by the time when the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the pressing operation, the ally character attacks and the scheduled ball is launched. The counter value of the number counter display 069SG460 is variably displayed (see FIG. 11-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 11-60 (D8)). Then, the scheduled number of balls counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the number of planned balls that can be obtained in the case of "6R big hit") is stopped and displayed. (See FIG. 11-60 (D9)).

In the case of jackpot A or jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 069SG460 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being updated, and in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), scheduled launch. The counter value displayed on the ball number counter display 069SG460 is updated and displayed after a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500") (see FIG. 11-60 (D10)), and then is controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

If the variable display result is off, the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the staging position, and the enemy character is not defeated, although not shown in detail. When the ally character is defeated in the battle and the combination of the misaligned symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order (Fig. 11-59 (Fig. 11-59). See D4)).

Returning to FIGS. 11-58, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of "SP reach C" that can be determined in the probabilistic state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (FIG. 11). -58 (B1)). Then, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen display is started (see FIG. 11-58 (B2)). After that, the same effect as in FIGS. 11-58 and 50 (A3 to A7) is performed without the variable display mode becoming the reach mode (see FIGS. 11-58 and 50 (B3 to B6)), and then FIG. 11 -59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as in FIGS. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIGS. 11-59 (B7 to B8)). Then, the productions of FIGS. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

Returning to FIGS. 11-58, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of "SP reach D" that can be determined in the time saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (FIG. 11-58). 11-58 (C1)). Then, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen display is started (see FIG. 11-58 (C2)). After that, after the same effect as in FIG. 11-58 (A5) is performed without the variable display mode becoming the reach mode and the effect shown in FIG. 11-58 (A4) being performed (FIG. 11-58). (See (C3)), the same effect as in FIGS. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed without the effect of FIGS. 11-59 (A8 to A9) (see FIGS. 11-59 (C4 to C5)). ). Then, the effects of FIGS. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10) described above are performed.

(Example of control operation of super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern)
Next, control operation examples of the jackpot fluctuation patterns of SP reach E, C, and D will be compared based on FIGS. 11-61. 11-61 is a timing chart showing an example of control operation in SP reach E, C, and D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to (C), the SP reach E, C, and D are acquired in the variable display part that executes the variable display of the decorative symbol and in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. It consists of a post-production part that informs the number of possible planned balls. In the variable display part, when the variable display is started, the above-mentioned "movable body notice", "character notice", "reach notice", "button notice", etc. are executed, and after the reach mode is reached, the SP reach effect is produced. "Battle production" and "short battle production" are executed. Then, after the "hit / miss button effect" as the operation promotion effect is started in the "decision effect" at the timing ta1, the "movable body effect" is started at the timing ta2. After that, after the results of the "battle effect" and the "short battle effect" are notified, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing ta3, and the jackpot specific operation display (big hit symbol stop action). After (see FIG. 11-55 (G)) is performed, the combination of the jackpot confirmed symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing ta4 to notify that the jackpot has been achieved. After that, the post-production is executed during the period from timing ta5 to ta6.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) of the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP reach E that can be determined in the time saving state A, 40 seconds for SP reach C that can be determined in the probabilistic state, and SP reach that can be determined in the time saving state B. In D, it is 25 seconds. On the other hand, the time (ta5 to ta6) of the post-production part is 15 seconds for each of SP reach E, C, and D.

That is, while the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the variable display part are different. Since the variable display time (15 seconds) of the post-effect part in the probabilistic state and the variable display time (15 seconds) of the post-effect part in the time-saving state B are common, the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state and the time-saving state B Therefore, it is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the post-production part while enhancing the production effect by making various effects in the variable display part different.

Further, while the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the probabilistic state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time saving state B, the time saving state A and the variable display part are different. Since the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display in the probabilistic state and the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display in the time saving state B are common, there is a difference in various effects in the variable display part. It is possible to reduce the development cost by sharing the display time of the jackpot specific operation display while enhancing the effect of the effect.

The execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the "hit / fail button effect" is common to the SP reach C and D, and only the SP reach E is different.

Further, the display control unit 123 generates image data (display data) for displaying the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and generates the image data (display data) in the display image creation area. Extended commands (for example, extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc.) as control information for movable bodies for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc. when performing display processing for outputting image data (display data) as a video signal. ("X" is an arbitrary number)), and extended commands as control information for lamps for turning on / off movable body LEDs 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. (for example, extended command BXXX ("X"). Is an arbitrary number)) and is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Based on the reception of the extended commands DXXX and SXXX, the effect control CPU 120 uses the motion control execution data of the movable motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B described in the process data. Separately from the operation control based on the operation control, the operation control for operating the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B is started in the operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands DXXX and SXXX.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the extended command BXXX or the like separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the movable body LED 208 described in the process data based on the reception of the extended command BXXX or the like. The control for turning on / off the movable LED 208 is started in the lighting pattern (see, for example, the light emission pattern shown in FIG. 13-6 (B) in the feature unit 018SG).

Further, the control data for operating the movable body 32 and the push button 31B and the control data for lighting the movable body LED 208 are stored in the ROM 121.

Here, control data used for operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probable change state (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200). And the control data (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200) used for the operation control of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B are common. Therefore, the development cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, an extended command (for example, extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. (“X” is an arbitrary number)) as control information for the movable body for operating the movable body 32, the push button 31B, or the like is used. , Separately from the extended command as control information for the lamp for turning on / off the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. (for example, the extended command BXXX (“X” is an arbitrary number)). Although the generated form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in order to turn on / off the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. in the “movable body effect” or the like. Based on the extended command B000 as control information for the lamp, lighting / extinguishing control of the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, and control for the movable body such as the movable body 32 and the push button 31B are executed. It may be done. That is, lighting control and operation control may be executed using common control information (extended command).

Further, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probable change state, and the "movable" in the case of the big hit in the time saving state B. The development cost can be reduced by sharing the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "body effect".

Further, control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probable change state ( For example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) and control data used for controlling the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B. By sharing with (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000), the development cost can be reduced.

Further, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for the movable body operation control and the LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extended command for the movable body operation control and the extended command for the LED lighting control. The control program capacity can be reduced. If the extended command used for the movable body effect is divided into the extended command for moving body operation control and the extended command for LED lighting control, one of the extended commands may be missed due to a defect, but it is common. This makes it possible to suitably produce a movable body.

In addition, an effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state A or the probable change state (see the movable body effect image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). And the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a big hit in the time saving state B (see the movable body effect image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). By being common, the development cost can be reduced.

(Comparison between super reach fluctuation pattern and non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, a comparison between the super reach variation pattern and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-62. 11-62 is a diagram comparing the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 11-62, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the stop display in the super reach out-of-reach variation pattern is that of the decorative symbol in the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern. It is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from the start of the variable display to the stop display.

Further, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern is the period (tb0) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. Since the variable display is completed in a shorter period than the period until the reach mode is reached by being shorter than tb3), it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

Further, in the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L to the stop display is the left in the super-reach out-of-reach variation pattern. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from the start to the stop display, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the predetermined row ends in a short period. A suitable time saving state B can be provided.

(Rush production)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the rush effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-63 and 11-64. 11-63 are diagrams showing examples of the effect of the rush introduction effect in FIGS. 11-63 and the effect of the time-saving rush effect A in FIG. 11-D. 11-64 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of (A1) to (A4) for the probabilistic rush effect, and (B1) to (B4) for the time-saving rush effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C), in the "rush introduction effect", the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and "BATTLE" is displayed.
RUSH rush! !! The character images 069SG470B constituting the image are framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 by a predetermined number (for example, one character) and are moved and displayed to the center of the display screen.

Then, the effect image 069SG470A, which is displayed at maximum and the display color is changed, and the character image 069SG470B, which is composed of the characters "BATTLE RUSH rush !!" gathered in the center of the display screen, are displayed. By performing the "rush effect A", it is notified that the control of the time saving state A is started.

Further, in the case of the "probability change rush effect", after the rush image 069SG470 of FIG. 11-63 (D) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (A1), the characters consisting of "poles" and the effect image After the probabilistic variation image 069SG471 having a predetermined transmittance of It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-64 (A2-A3)).

Then, a "probability change rush effect" is performed in which the rush image 069SG472 consisting of the rush image 069SG470 and the probability change image 069SG471 which is displayed at the minimum size and the transmittance is 0% at the lower left of the display screen is displayed. , It is notified that the control of the probabilistic state is started (see FIG. 11-64 (A4)).

Further, in the case of the "time saving rush effect B", the "rush introduction effect" described in FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C) is not executed, and the 900th time when the control start condition of the time saving state B is satisfied. After the inrush image 069SG470 of FIG. 11-63 (D) is displayed when the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) after the variable display of is completed is displayed, FIG. 11-64 (B1) shows. As shown, the playtime image 069SG473A having a predetermined transmittance consisting of a character consisting of "1100" and an effect image is displayed on a display layer higher than the inrush image 069SG470, and then directed toward the lower left of the display screen. The image is moved and displayed while gradually reducing and decreasing the transmittance (see FIGS. 11-64 (B2 to B3)).

Then, the inrush image 069SG470, the playtime image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed at the lower left of the display screen with the minimum size and the transmittance of 0%, and the playtime image consisting of the characters "play". It is notified that the control of the time saving state B is started by performing the "time saving rushing effect B" in which the rushing image 069SG473 including the image 069SG473B is displayed (see FIG. 11-64 (B4)).

In this way, when the control of the time saving state A is started, the inrush image 069SG470 is displayed in the time saving inrush effect A, and when the control of the probabilistic state is started, the inrush image 069SG470 is displayed in the probabilistic inrush effect. While the inrush image 069SG472 composed of the image 069SG471 is displayed, when the control of the time saving state B is started, the inrush image 069SG470 displayed when the time saving state A and the probable change state are entered in the time saving inrushing effect B are displayed. In addition to displaying the common inrush image 069SG470, the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started are displayed.

Therefore, in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, the probability change state and the time saving state A are controlled in the time saving rush effect B in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. Not only the inrush image 069SG470 which is common to the time when it is started, but also the play time image 069SG473B which is not displayed when the control of the probability change state or the time saving state A is started is displayed, so that the start of the time saving state B can be excited. ..

[Embodiment 2]
Next, the second embodiment in the feature unit 069SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-65 to 11-69. 11-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the feature unit 069SG. FIG. 11-66 is a diagram showing a part of the variable display start setting process as the second embodiment in the feature unit 069SG. 11-67 is a diagram showing a variable display effect pattern determination table. 11-68 is an example of the staging operation of SP reach D. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of each gaming state. In the second embodiment, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted from the illustration and detailed description, and the differences will be mainly described.

In FIGS. 11-65, (A) is a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages in the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is 0, and (B) shows the number of reserved storages 1 to 3. Specific example of the fluctuation pattern judgment table for out-of-case, (C) Specific example of the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hit when the number of reserved storage is 0, (B) The specific example of the big hit when the number of reserved storage is 1 to 3. A specific example of the fluctuation pattern judgment table for is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 11-65 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss when the number of reserved storages is 0, 100 determination values are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP reach E and SP reach D. 90 determination values are assigned.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach D is determined in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state A, the effect control CPU 120 uses the “short battle” described in the first embodiment as the variable display effect. When the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach D is determined in the time saving state B while executing the "effect", the CPU 120 for effect control does not perform the "short battle effect" as the variable display effect, but "immediately" described later. Perform "hit effect" or "full rotation effect".

Further, the variation pattern of SP reach D that can be determined in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A is the reach variation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed after the variable display mode is changed to the reach mode after the variable display is started. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of SP reach D that can be determined in the time saving state B is "immediate hit effect" or "full rotation effect" without the variable display mode becoming the reach mode after the variable display is started. Is a non-reach variation pattern that is executed.

Next, FIGS. 11-66 is a part of a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-44. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S069SGS271 to S069SGS276 in the variable display start setting process, and then shortens the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area in step S069SGS277. If it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern, that is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), the reach advance notice execution determination process of step 069SGS278 is performed. Before the execution, the processes of steps 069SGS277A to 069SGS277D are executed.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is the SP reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A), and is the SP reach D variation pattern. In the case (step 069SGS277A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B). Then, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), the variable display effect pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display effect pattern determination process, for example, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the variable display effect pattern are extracted, and the variable display effect pattern is determined using the variable display effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11-67.

In the variable display effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIGS. 11-67, when the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)" for each of "immediate hit effect" and "full rotation effect", "big hit". Different determination values are assigned to each of the cases of "A, B (6R)" so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIGS. 11-67.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)", 10 judgment values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect" and 60 judgment values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". Is assigned. When the jackpot type is "big hit A, B (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect", and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". Assigned.

As described above, when the "immediate hit effect" and the "full rotation effect" are compared in the three gaming states excluding the normal state, they are not executed in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, and are not executed in the time saving state B. It is a variable display effect that can be executed only in, and is executed in combination with the SP reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state A.

Further, the execution rate of the "immediate hit effect" when the jackpot type is "big hit A, B (6R)" is higher than the execution rate of the "immediate hit effect" when the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)". On the other hand, the execution rate of the "full rotation effect" when the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)" is higher than the "full rotation effect" when the jackpot type is "big hit A, B (6R)". Is higher than the execution rate. In other words, if the jackpot type is "big hit C (10R)", which is advantageous for the player because the number of planned balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state is larger than that of "big hit A, B (6R)", "immediate hit production". "Full rotation effect" is executed at a higher rate than.

Next, an example of the production operation of the "immediate hit effect" and the "full rotation effect" will be described. When the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, after the variable display is started, the variable display mode is changed to the reach mode, and then the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle effect. As a result, a "short battle effect" is executed in which the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a jackpot (see FIGS. 11-58 to 11-59), but the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B. If this is the case, after the variable display is started, the "immediate hit effect" or the "full rotation effect" is executed in which the variable display mode does not become the reach mode and the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit.

As shown in FIGS. 11-65, the "immediate hit effect" is performed after the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (FIG. 11-). 68 (see A1)), when a predetermined time elapses, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A2)). ). After that, in the "decision effect", an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the push button 31B is executed by displaying a button image imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display such as "press !!", and a gauge display. The movable body effect image 069SG456 showing that the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed, and the "movable body effect" in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the vicinity of the intermediate position is executed. (See FIG. 11-68 (A3)). Then, the fixed decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A4)). After that, in the post-effect part, after the post-effect similar to the post-effect described in FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIGS. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), the jackpot game state is controlled. Will be done.

As shown in FIGS. 11-65, the “full rotation effect” is performed after a blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen display at the start of the variable display is executed for a predetermined period in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (FIG. 11-68 (see B1)), in the third background image 069SG330, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started at the same time (see FIG. 11-68 (B2)). Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the full rotation display is started in which the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variably displayed in a state of being aligned with the fixed decorative symbols that are a predetermined jackpot combination. (See FIG. 11-68 (B3)). After that, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIGS. 11-68 (B4)). After that, in the post-effect part (design confirmation period), after the post-effect similar to the post-effect described in FIGS. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIGS. 11-68 (C1 to C7)). It is controlled to the jackpot game state.

In this way, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the variable display is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot without going through the reach mode after the variable display is started. By executing the "immediate hit effect" or the "full rotation effect" as the effect, the player can enjoy the SP reach effect with peace of mind without worrying about being fanned by the reach effect.

Further, in the "immediate hit effect" or "full rotation effect", a button image imitating the push button 31B, such as the "button notice" and the "win / fail button effect" described in the first embodiment, "press! The operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the push button 31B by displaying the operation promotion display and the gauge display such as "" and the operation effect that the player needs to operate the push button 31B are not executed. In the above, the player can suitably digest the variable display without promoting or performing troublesome operations.

(Various operation examples by game state)
Next, various operation examples for each of the three game states of the time saving state B, the probability variation state, and the time saving state A in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-69. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining various operation examples for each gaming state. Hereinafter, as shown in FIGS. 11-69, the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three gaming states of "time saving state B", "probability changing state", and "time saving state A" will be compared.

<Item D1>
First, regarding the rate at which the CPU 103 determines the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode, in the “time saving state B”, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (C), the number of reserved storages is 0, 1 to 3. In the case, the determination ratio of "SP reach D (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode is "90%", and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). When the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, the determination ratio of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode is "5%", and in "time saving state A", FIG. 11-7 (C). As shown in the above, when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3, the determination ratio of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode is "5%".

In the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the "SP reach D" is a reach fluctuation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed via the reach mode, and is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode.

That is, the ratio (for example, 90%) in which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B is determined does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state A. The rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" is determined (for example, 5%) is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" is determined without going through the reach mode in the probabilistic state (eg, 5%). 5%) higher than.

According to the item (D1), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, it is not determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the variable display mode to the reach mode, the jackpot game state is controlled without being unnecessarily agitated, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

In the present embodiment, the ratio at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B is determined is the reach mode in the time saving state A or the probability variation state. Although a form higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" is determined is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a jackpot in the time saving state B. May determine the "SP reach D fluctuation pattern (immediate hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode at a rate of 100%.

<Item D2>
The effect control CPU 120 can execute, for example, a "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach effect as an action promoting effect that encourages the player's operation, and as a specific effect that notifies the variable display result, for example, in the SP reach effect. "Movable body production" can be executed.

Then, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probability change state or the time saving state A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the “hit / fail button effect” in the “decision effect” in the variable display of the SP reach D. While executing the first effect execution pattern for executing the "movable body effect" later, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the "immediate hit effect" in the variable display of the SP reach D. In, the second effect execution pattern that executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "win / fail button effect" is executed.

Therefore, regarding the execution ratio of the "immediate hit effect" that executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the figure in the "time saving state B" is shown in the figure. As shown in 11-65 (C), the number of reserved storage is "90%" when the number of reserved storage is 0 to 3, and in the "probability change state", the number of reserved storage is as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C). In the case of 0 to 3, it is "0%", and in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), it is "0%" when the number of reserved storages is 0 to 3.

That is, in the time saving state B, the execution ratio (for example, 90%) of the "immediate hit effect" that executes the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is the time reduction state A. In the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern, it is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "hit / fail button effect", and in the probabilistic state, the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is "win / fail". It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0%) of executing "movable body effect" without executing "button effect".

According to the item (D2), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display a predetermined number of times, it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the jackpot gaming state continues for a long time. It is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B because it is less likely to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B when the notification is made.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of executing the "immediate hit effect" or the "full rotation effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B is the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A or the probable change state. Although a form higher than the ratio of executing the "immediate hit effect" or the "full rotation effect" is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "immediate hit" is performed in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B. The ratio of executing "effect" or "full rotation effect" may be 100%.

<Item D3>
When the number of reserved storages is 0, the rate at which the CPU 103 determines the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, "ultra-shortened non-reach" with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or "shortened non-reach A" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds) is ". In the "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-65 (A), it is "100%" when the number of reserved storages is 0, and in the "probability change state", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A). , When the number of reserved storage is 0, it is "0%", and in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), it is "0%" when the number of reserved storage is 0.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages is 0, the CPU 103 shortens. The variable display time is longer than the non-reach fluctuation pattern. The ratio for determining (reach fluctuation, etc.) is “0%” in the “time saving state B” when the number of reserved storages is 0, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (A), and is “0%” in the “probability change state”. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), when the number of reserved storage is 0, it is “100%”, and in the “time saving state A”, the number of reserved storage is as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A). In the case of 0, it is "100%".

That is, when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state A, the CPU 103 has a long variable display time for gaining time to store the reserved storages in the second reserved storages (for example, the variable time). While it is possible to determine non-reach of 7 seconds and SP reach fluctuation of 25 seconds or 40 seconds of fluctuation time, when the reserved storage number is 0 in the time saving state B, the variable display time is a long deviation fluctuation pattern ( For example, a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern with a shorter variable display time than non-reach A with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds (for example, a fluctuation time of more than 1.5 seconds). Shortened non-reach) can be determined.

According to the item (D3), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, even when the reserved storage number is 0, considering that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. An out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, non-reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) is determined and the digestion speed of the variable display is determined. Is not reduced, so that a suitable time saving state B can be provided.

<Item D4>
In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, "big hit A" and "big hit B" in which a 6R round game is executed are more advantageous to the player than "big hit A" and "big hit B" (for example,). , That is, the number of rounds, that is, the number of planned balls that can be obtained is large), and it is possible to determine either "big hit C" (see FIG. 11-3 (D)).

Further, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, the staging control CPU 120 has a special variable display pattern as a special variable display pattern in which the jackpot symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period and then stopped. "Full rotation effect" can be executed.

Further, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the SP reach D big hit fluctuation pattern, the ratio of the effect control CPU 120 to execute the "full rotation effect" is shown in the figure in the "time saving state B". As shown in 11-67, it is "90%", and in the "probability change state", it is "0%" ("full rotation staging" is not executed) as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), and "time reduction". In "state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), it is "0%" ("full rotation effect" is not executed).

That is, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B, the ratio (for example, 100%) that the effect control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" is the big hit in the time saving state A. When the "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the type, the effect control CPU 120 is higher than the rate at which the "full rotation effect" is executed (for example, 0% (non-execution)), and the big hit type in the probability change state. It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0% (non-execution)) that the effect control CPU 120 executes the “full rotation effect” when the “big hit C (10R)” is determined.

According to the item (D4), in the time saving state B controlled through the variable display of a predetermined number of times, the number of rounds is larger than that of the big hit A and the big hit B in consideration of the fact that the period not controlled by the big hit gaming state continues for a long time. When it is decided to control the jackpot C, which is highly advantageous for many players, it is a special variable display that is not executed (or the execution rate is low) in the normal state, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state A. Since the "rotation effect" is easily executed, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B.

In the present embodiment, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B, the ratio of the effect control CPU 120 to execute the "full rotation effect" is 100%. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the “full rotation effect” when the “big hit C (10R)” is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state B. If the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the effect control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation effect" when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state A or the probability change state, it is less than 100%. It may be executed at a rate. Further, when "big hit C (10R)" is determined as the big hit type in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the effect control CPU 120 may be able to execute the "full rotation effect".

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature part 069SG)
In the feature unit 069SG, as an example of the "advantageous state advantageous for the player", a mode in which the big hit gaming state is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic state and the small hit gaming state are not limited thereto. , Reach state, pseudo-ream effect state, hold ream, chance-up effect, pre-reading notice effect, time reduction loss, ceiling time reduction control, etc. may be included.

Further, the feature unit 069SG exemplifies a form in which a so-called one type of pachinko gaming machine capable of being controlled to a probable change state for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit is not limited to this. When the type is a probabilistic jackpot, it may be a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled in a probabilistic state from the end of the jackpot game until it is controlled by the next jackpot, or it may be in a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed until the probabilistic fall lottery is won. It may be a controlled pachinko gaming machine. Further, a so-called type 1 or 2 type of gaming machine that can be controlled to the big hit gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small hit in the short time state after the big hit game may be applied, and the game playability is variously changed. It is possible.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, as a special state in which the variable display is executed more frequently than in the non-special state (for example, the normal state), the time saving state A, the probabilistic change state, and the time saving state B are applied. The invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of gaming states other than the above may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, a first special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (for example, a normal state, a low probability / low base state) ends, and an advantageous state in the non-special state. As the second special state controlled on the condition that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled by, the time saving state A (first special state) and the time saving state B (relief time saving (relief time saving)) based on low accuracy and high. Although the embodiment to which the second special state)) is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high accuracy and high base probability variation state (first special state) and the low accuracy and high base time saving state B. (Relief time reduction (second special state)) may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, a mode in which a probabilistic state is applied is exemplified as a third special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. Is not limited to this, for example, in the case of one type and two types of pachinko gaming machines, a time saving state different from the time saving state as the first special state {for example, execution of a time saving state than the first special state A time saving state with a large number of times (long control period) may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, at least one special state with the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state has, for example, a plurality of types having different times of execution of time reduction control, execution frequency of variable display, and the like. It may have a special condition.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, a mode in which a normal state (low accuracy / low base state) is applied as a non-special state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display is more variable than the special state. As long as the game state has a low execution frequency, the game state is not limited to the low probability / low base state, and may be a high definite base state, a low probability / high base state, or the like.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, the time saving state B (relief time saving state) as the second special state is variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without being controlled to an advantageous state in the non-special state. Although the embodiment controlled by the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of times can be variously changed. Further, it may be controlled when another condition other than the above-mentioned condition is satisfied.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, in the time saving state B, the time saving state A, the average normal map fluctuation time (the period during which the normal map is changed) in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game, the first. 2 The average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) in the time saving state B is changed to the probabilistic state without changing the control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the starting winning opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the time saving state B. In, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed), the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening (high opening control, By making at least one of the high base control) different from the probabilistic state and the time saving state A, the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) may be further improved.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, the CPU 103 deviates from the variable display mode as the specific mode (for example, the reach mode) as the variation pattern and displays the display result in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A"). An example of a form in which a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach loss") that displays the deviation display result without setting the variable display mode to a specific mode can be determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first non-specific variable display pattern and the second non-specific variable display pattern may include fluctuation patterns of types other than the above. Further, as the variation pattern, the first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot", etc.) that displays the display result out of the specific mode (for example, reach mode) of the variable display mode is used. A second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via", etc.) that displays the misaligned display result without setting the variable display mode to a specific mode is determined. Although possible embodiments have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first specific variable display pattern and the second specific variable display pattern may include variation patterns of types other than the above.

Further, the "specific mode" is not limited to the "reach mode", and is, for example, a "chance eye mode (eg," 133 ")", a "pseudo-ream mode (eg, 122, etc.)", and a "normal reach mode". It may include various aspects such as "aspects" and "super reach aspects".

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, as a suggestion effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the big hit game state, a mode in which the "movable body notice" and the "character notice" are applied is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. If it is a production that suggests that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, it includes various effects such as a stop symbol notice, a pseudo-ream notice, a dialogue notice, an operation notice, a reach notice, and a look-ahead notice. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", and "design chance eye notice" are used as look-ahead notice effects suggesting that the hold memory stored in the hold memory is controlled in an advantageous state. , The embodiment to which the "effect display notice" is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include various reading notices such as "continuous effect" and "precursor effect". good.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, an embodiment in which a "button notice" or a "pass / fail button effect" is applied as an operation promoting effect for encouraging a player's operation is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above is not limited to this. It may include various effects other than. Further, the "player's operation" is not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, and is an effect or operation that encourages the operation of other operation means (for example, a touch panel) provided other than the push button 31B. Instead, it may be an effect that encourages the movement (movement) of the player.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, "Patterns A-2 and A-3" are examples of the first effect execution pattern in which the "hit / fail button" as the operation promotion effect is executed and then the "movable body effect" is executed as the specific effect. As an example of the second effect execution pattern in which the specific effect is executed without executing the operation promotion effect, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, other operation promotion effects such as "button notice" may be applied as the movement promotion effect, and effects other than "movable body effect" (for example, battle results in SP reach effect) may be applied as specific effects. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, as a first motion promotion effect for encouraging the player to perform one motion, an embodiment in which the operation promotion display of the "blow" operation is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It does not encourage the player to perform a single push operation, but may encourage the player to perform a single pull operation, a rotation operation, a reciprocating operation, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, an embodiment in which the operation promotion display of the "continuous hit" or "long press" operation is applied as the second operation promotion effect for urging the player to perform the operation over a predetermined operation period is illustrated. The invention is not limited to this, and may promote a pulling operation, a rotating operation, a reciprocating operation, and the like over a predetermined operation period. Further, the operation over a predetermined operation period is not necessarily limited to the operation detected continuously, and may include an operation performed intermittently, an operation according to a predetermined pattern, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, a mode in which a "character notice" or a "reach notice" is applied as an effect including a fanning effect for inciting whether or not the variable display mode is set as a specific mode is exemplified, but this is the present invention. It is not limited to the above, but it is an effect that encourages the "chance eye mode (for example," 133 ")", "pseudo-ream mode (for example, 122 etc.)", "normal reach mode", and "super reach mode". It may include various effects such as.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, in the post-production, a form is provided in which the planned number of balls is notified as game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value given in the advantageous state in which it is notified that the control is controlled in the specific effect. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 6R, 10R, etc.) may be notified. In addition, in a state where a big hit occurs in a continuous villa in a probable change state, the planned total number of balls to be released in this big hit and the total number of balls acquired in the predetermined consecutive villa period of the big hit are added. The number of balls may be displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, when the control of the special state is started, the rush introduction effect and the probability change rush effect are displayed as the special state start effect of notifying the start of the control of the special state by displaying the special state start display. , The time-saving rushing effect A, the time-saving rushing effect B, and the shutter effect are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various rushing effects other than the above may be feasible. Further, the effect mode of each rush effect is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, an embodiment in which the probabilistic rushing effect and the time-saving rushing effect A are set as separate effects is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic rushing effect and the time-saving rushing effect A are described. May be used as a common 1 rush effect.

Further, the feature unit 069SG exemplifies a mode in which the rush introduction effect is not executed when the time saving rush effect B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rush introduction effect is provided instead of the shutter effect. You may want to do it. Further, the rush introduction effect may be executed even when the time saving rush effect B is executed. In this case, in order to eliminate the troublesomeness of the effect, it is preferable to use the rush introduction effect in which the effect period is shorter than in the case of executing the probabilistic rush effect or the time-saving rush effect A.

Further, in the feature unit 069SG, as an example of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which the player has a higher advantage than the first advantageous state, the jackpots A and B (which have different numbers of game rounds in the jackpot gaming state) ( Although the embodiment in which the first advantageous state) and the jackpot C (second advantageous state) are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantage for the player is higher than that of the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state is not only a big hit in which the player has a high advantage in the big hit game state such as the number of game rounds and the number of planned balls that can be obtained, but also the game state after the end of the big hit game state is advantageous to the player. It may be a big hit (for example, a big hit with a long time reduction control after the big hit game state, or a big hit controlled by a "small hit rush" in which the execution frequency of the small hit game state becomes high after the end of the big hit). ..

(Explanation of feature 099SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 099SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-22. In the feature section 099SG, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 069SG will be omitted from the illustration and detailed description, and the differences will be mainly described. Further, the feature configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 099SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 069SG.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 11-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG is formed on the left side of the image display device 5 in the gaming board 2 in a left gaming region where the gaming ball can flow down. The right side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 is formed in a right game area where the game ball can flow down. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 099SG, the gaming ball that is weakly launched by the launching device due to the normal gaming state flows down the first path of the left gaming region, and the gaming state is shortened. The gaming ball strongly launched by the launcher due to any one of A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic state, flows down the second path of the right gaming area. Further, a part of the game ball flowing down the second path of the right game area can pass through the gate 41 provided on the second path (to the right of the image display device 5), and the gate can be passed. The variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passage of 41. Then, based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (a normal symbol hit), the second start winning opening provided on the second path changes from the closed state to the open state, and the second start A game ball can be won at the winning opening. In this feature unit 099SG, "variable display" may be described as "variable" or "variable display".

FIG. 12-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11 in the feature unit 099SG. As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), in the feature unit 099SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination are used. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3, the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and updates various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit C" when the variable display result is "big hit". For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "299".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to "0" to ". It takes a value in the range of "99".

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is a random number value used for determining the initial value of the random number value MR4, and takes a value in the range of “3” to “23”.

FIG. 12-1 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 099SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 099SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 099SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, compared to the probability determined (about 1 / 319.68 in the feature unit 099SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the jackpot gaming state is higher (in the feature section 099SG). About 1 / 80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

12-1 (C1) and 12-1 (C2) show a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 12-1 (C1) shows the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the variable display result as a “big hit” to the jackpot gaming state when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Based on this, it is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type from jackpot A and jackpot B, and FIG. 12-1 (C2) shows the variable display result as "big hit" when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. It is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type from the jackpot B and the jackpot C based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 099SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-1 (D). In the feature unit 099SG, as the jackpot type, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, in which time reduction control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot gaming state, are provided. Further, these big hits A, big hit B, and big hit C are maximum after the end of the big hit game by winning the V winning opening after the game ball wins the second big winning opening in the first round of the big hit gaming state. It is also a big hit in which probabilistic control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this feature unit 099SG, in the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid), a short open state (for example, 0.1 second) in which the open state is short and a long open state in which the open state is long are long. There is a state (eg, 15 seconds). In the jackpot A, the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in the jackpot B and the jackpot C, the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. And.

In the big hit game state by "Big hit A", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit A", it is extremely difficult to make the game ball win the V winning opening because the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round, and the probability variation control may be executed. You can't expect it, so it's a real normal jackpot.

In the big hit game state by "big hit B", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit B", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V winning opening, and the probability variation control may be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial probability change jackpot.

In the big hit game state by "big hit C", the second big winning opening is changed to an open state which is advantageous for the player in the first round, and the first big winning opening is advantageous for the player in the second to tenth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to a normal open state. Further, in the "big hit C", since the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V winning opening, and the probability variation control can be executed. Since it can be expected, it will be a substantial probability change jackpot.

In the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as the jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot types are two or less or two or less. Four or more types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 149 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

That is, in this feature unit 099SG, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to win the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state at a rate of 50%. After the jackpot game is over, both probability variation control and time saving control are performed. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win the V winning opening in the first round of the big hit game state, so that the probability change control is performed after the big hit game is completed. And time saving control are both implemented.

In this feature unit 099SG, even if it becomes a big hit A, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is in the short open state, but it is extremely rare, so when it becomes a big hit A, Will be described as assuming that the V prize is not won and the probability variation control is not executed. Further, even in the case of the big hit B and the big hit C, it is extremely rare that the V prize cannot be won when the V lid is in the long open state, so the big hit B and the big hit C are obtained. If this is the case, it will be described as assuming that the V prize is won and the probability variation control is executed.

In the present feature unit 099SG, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

FIG. 12-2 (A) shows whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per normal symbol) based on the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol when the gaming state is the normal state. It is a normal symbol hit determination table referred to for determining whether, and FIG. 12-2 (B) shows the normal symbol when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B. Based on the execution of the variable display, it is a normal symbol hit determination table referred to for determining whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (normal symbol hit).

The time saving state B in the feature unit 099SG is variable 900 times without being controlled to the big hit gaming state in the normal state (low probability / low base state in which neither probability variation control nor time saving control is executed). It is a gaming state controlled when the display is executed, and is a time saving state A (low accuracy / high base state) in which the time saving control is executed over a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), 3 of the range 3 to 13 of the random number values MR4 for normal symbol hit determination are assigned to hits, and 4 to 13 are assigned to outliers. ing. On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), 3 to 12 of the range 3 to 13 of the random number values MR4 for the ordinary symbol hit determination are assigned to the hit, and 13 is assigned to the hit. It is assigned to the outlier. That is, in this feature unit 099SG, the ratio per normal figure when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B is higher than the ratio per normal drawing when the gaming state is the normal state. Is also set high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the gaming state is the normal state is set to 60 seconds, whereas the gaming state is the time saving state A and the probable change state. , The fluctuation time of the normal symbol in any of the time saving states B is set to 0.1 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), the opening time of the second starting winning opening is set to 0.1 seconds when a normal drawing hit occurs when the gaming state is in the normal state. On the other hand, when the game state is any of the time saving state A, the probability changing state, and the time saving state B, the opening time of the second start winning opening is set to 3 seconds when a hit in the normal figure occurs.

That is, in the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B in the feature unit 099SG, "the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high", "the variable display time of the normal symbol is short", and "the variable display time of the normal symbol is short" as compared with the normal state. Since the opening time of the second starting winning opening is long when a normal symbol hits, it is easy for the game ball to win the second starting winning opening, that is, the variable display of the second special symbol is frequently executed. Although it is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B have "high probability of hitting a normal symbol" and "normal" as compared with the normal state. Variable display of the second special symbol by satisfying at least one of the conditions of "the variable display time of the symbol is short" and "the opening time of the second start winning opening when a normal symbol hit occurs is long". The execution frequency of may be set high.

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 11-1) in the feature section 069SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 099SG is the same as the pachinko gaming machine in the feature section 069SG. While the pachinko ball can win the first start winning opening, it is impossible to win the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, pass through the gate 41, etc., and the game ball shortens the time. In any of the state A, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state B, the player can launch the game ball toward the right game area 2R, so that the game ball can win a prize in the second start winning opening and the gate 41. It is possible to pass through. When the game state is a big hit game state, the player launches the game ball toward the right game area, so that the game ball can win a prize in the second start winning opening and the big winning opening and the gate. It is possible to pass through 41.

As shown in FIG. 12-12 (A), the game ball launched toward the left game area 2L when the game state is in the normal state is started and won by a plurality of nails or the like arranged on the game board 2. The probability of winning a game ball to the first start winning opening is about 5.5% (continuation by operating the player's hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30). The condition is that the game ball is launched into the left game area 2L). Further, when the game state is the normal state, even if the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal symbol due to the game ball passing through the gate 41 is extremely 60 seconds. In addition to being long, the opening time of the second start winning opening is extremely short at 0.1 seconds when a hit occurs (see Fig. 12-2 (C) and Fig. 12-2 (D)). There is almost no winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (B), when the game state is any of the time reduction state A, the probability variation state, and the time reduction state B, the game ball launched toward the right game area 2R has a gate 41. Since it is possible to pass through, the variable display time of the normal symbol by passing through the gate 41 is as short as 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start winning opening when a normal symbol hit occurs is 3 seconds ( (See FIGS. 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D)), the probability of winning a game ball to the second starting winning opening is about 55% (player's hitting operation handle (operation knob). The condition is that the game ball is continuously launched into the right game area 2R by the operation of 30).

FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol of the feature unit 099SG. In this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-3, as the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is out of order, the special figure fluctuation time is ultra-shortened non-reach of 1500 ms, and the special figure fluctuation time is shortened by 3000 ms. Reach A missed, special figure variation time shortened by 5000 ms Non-reach B missed, special figure variable time 7000 ms non-reach A missed, special figure variable time 12000 ms non-reach B missed, special figure variable time 45000 ms super reach A is out, Super Reach B with special figure fluctuation time is off 80,000 ms, Super Reach C with special figure fluctuation time is off 4000 ms, Super Reach D is off with special figure fluctuation time of 25,000 ms, and Super Reach E is off with special figure fluctuation time of 50,000 ms. Each fluctuation pattern of is provided. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern from the deviation of Super Reach A to the deviation of Super Reach E is also a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect of Super Reach during the variable display.

In addition, as a fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a big hit, there is a big hit notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display of 7,000 ms in which the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (the special figure fluctuation time is 7,000 ms + 15,000 ms) without super reach. A jackpot, super reach reach effect is not executed 12000 ms variable display followed by 15,000 ms jackpot notification period (special figure fluctuation time 12000 ms + 15,000 ms) Super reach non-via B jackpot, super reach reach effect is executed 45,000 ms It has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display (special figure fluctuation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms), and has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display of 80,000 ms in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Super reach B jackpot (where the figure variation time is 80,000 ms + 15,000 ms), super reach C jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display of 40,000 ms where the super reach reach effect is executed. Super reach D jackpot with a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms (special figure fluctuation time is 25,000 ms + 15,000 ms) after a variable display of 25,000 ms in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, and a variable display of 50,000 ms in which the reach effect of super reach is executed. Each variation pattern of the super reach E jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms (the special figure variation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms) is provided after. The fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A is a fluctuation pattern that executes a boring effect to notify whether or not a ally character and an enemy character have won a big hit by boring as a reach effect, and is a variation pattern of Super Reach B. , Super Reach C, and Super Reach E are fluctuation patterns that execute a battle effect to notify whether or not a ally character and an enemy character have won a big hit by performing a battle as a reach effect. As for the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D, as a reach effect, the ally character and the enemy character win a big hit by performing a shorter battle than the battle effect in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E. It is a fluctuation pattern that executes a short battle effect that informs whether or not it is present.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 099SG is a game control data holding area 099SG150 as shown in FIG. 12-4, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 099SG150 shown in FIG. 12-4 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 099SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 099SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 099SG153, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The upper limit of the hold data (hold storage) that can be stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B is always four regardless of the gaming state. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The upper limit of the hold data (hold storage) that can be stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B is always four regardless of the gaming state. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

That is, in the present feature unit 099SG, a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as the first special figure reserved storage (the reserved storage that can be stored in the first special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151A), and the second special figure reserved storage. Up to four hold storages can be stored as (hold storage that can be stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

When the variable display is executed, the CPU 103 first receives random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the second special symbol reservation storage unit 099SG151B when the second special symbol reservation storage exists in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6). The storage content of the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B is shifted after reading. That is, when the numerical values of the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored as the hold storage of the hold number 1 of the second special figure hold storage unit 099SG151B, the CPU 103 stores the random number values as the hold storage of these hold numbers 1. While reading the values of MR1 to the random number value MR3, the hold memory of the hold number 1 is erased, and the hold memory stored as the hold memory of the hold number 2 is used as the hold memory of the hold number 1 and the hold memory of the hold number 3. The stored hold storage is re-stored as the hold storage of the hold number 2 and the hold storage stored as the hold storage of the hold number 4 as the hold storage of the hold number 3.

Further, when the reserved storage is not stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved storage exists. When the first special figure reservation storage exists, the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A are shifted after reading the random number values MR1 to MR3 from the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A. That is, when the numerical values of the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored as the hold storage of the hold number 1 of the first special figure hold storage unit 099SG151A, the CPU 103 stores the random number values as the hold storage of these hold numbers 1. While reading the values of MR1 to the random number value MR3, the hold memory of the hold number 1 is erased, and the hold memory stored as the hold memory of the hold number 2 is used as the hold memory of the hold number 1 and the hold memory of the hold number 3. The stored hold storage is re-stored as the hold storage of the hold number 2 and the hold storage stored as the hold storage of the hold number 4 as the hold storage of the hold number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B (when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the random number value). After executing the jackpot type determination based on MR2), in the variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 6), the variation pattern differs depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved special symbols for which the variable display is executed. The fluctuation pattern is determined using the judgment table.

That is, in the feature unit 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine the fluctuation pattern according to the number of reserved storages obtained by subtracting 1 from the reserved storage immediately before the variable display in the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The normal figure hold storage unit 099SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 099SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 099SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags including the above-mentioned ball ejection state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 099SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 099SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 099SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination table used when executing the variable display of the special symbol will be described. As shown in FIGS. 12-5 to 12-11, in the feature unit 099SG, the game state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the reserved storage number of the special symbol for executing the variable display of the special symbol are stored. It is possible to determine the variation pattern using different variation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation for loss shown in FIG. 12-5 (A). The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach B deviation, super reach A deviation, and super reach B deviation using the pattern determination table A. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 97 numerical values among the numerical values that can be taken by the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the non-reach B deviation variation patterns, and 2 numerical values are assigned. Super reach A is assigned to the deviation pattern, and one numerical value is assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach B. That is, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of non-reach B loss at a rate of 97%. It is determined that the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A is out of alignment at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B is determined to be out of alignment at a rate of 1%.

Further, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved special symbols for executing the variable display is 3, the out-of-order variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 12-5 (B) is used. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the shortened non-reach B deviation, the super reach A deviation, and the super reach B deviation. In the deviation pattern determination table B, 97 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the shortened non-reach B deviation variation patterns, and two numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach A, and one numerical value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach B. That is, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 97%. It is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A is determined at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B is determined at a rate of 1%.

In addition, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, it is common regardless of the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display (even when the number of reserved storages is any of 0 to 3). In), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the super reach non-via B jackpot, the super reach A jackpot, and the super reach B jackpot using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for jackpot determination, 10 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot B without super reach, and 40 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A jackpot, and 50 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B jackpot. That is, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the B jackpot without super reach at a rate of 10% regardless of the number of reserved memories, and the rate is 40%. Is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A jackpot, and is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B jackpot at a rate of 50%.

Further, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved special symbols for executing variable display is 0, the out-of-order variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 12-6 (A) is used. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A deviation, super reach C deviation, and super reach deviation D. In the deviation pattern determination table C, 95 of the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination are assigned to the non-reach A deviation pattern, and two numerical values are assigned. Super reach C is assigned to the deviation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach D. That is, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the change pattern is determined to be a non-reach A off change pattern at a rate of 95%. Then, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C is determined at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved special symbols for executing variable display is one, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), the change pattern determination for loss is made. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A, non-reach A, super reach C, and super reach D by using the table D. In the deviation pattern determination table D, 80 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation variation patterns, and 15 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the non-reach A out-of-reach variation pattern, two numbers are assigned to the super-reach C out-of-range variation pattern, and three numbers are assigned to the super-reach D out-of-reach variation pattern. That is, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 80%. It is determined, 15% is determined to be a non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern, 2% is determined to be a super reach C out-of-range variation pattern, and 3% is determined to be a super reach D out-of-range variation pattern. To.

Further, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (C), the change pattern determination for loss is made. The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the table E. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A off, non-reach A off, super reach C off, and super reach D off. In the deviation pattern determination table E, 90 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation variation patterns, and 5 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the non-reach A out-of-reach variation pattern, two numerical values are assigned to the super reach C out-of-range variation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the super reach D out-of-reach variation pattern. That is, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 90%. It is determined, 5% is determined to be a non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern, 2% is determined to be a super reach C out-of-range variation pattern, and 3% is determined to be a super reach D out-of-range variation pattern. To.

Further, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), the change pattern determination for loss is made. The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the table F. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A, super reach C, and super reach D. In the deviation pattern determination table F, 95 of the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation pattern, and two numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach C, and three numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of Super Reach D. That is, when the game state is a probable change state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 95%. It is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach C is determined at a rate of 2%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 3%.

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment in the probabilistic state, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols for which the variable display is executed. That is, in the probabilistic state in the feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of order is the reserved storage number of the special symbol to be executed (the first special figure if the variable display of the first special symbol is used). It differs depending on the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage unit 099SG151A, and the number of reserved storages stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151B in the case of variable display of the second special symbol).

Further, when the game state is a probable change state and the variable display result is a big hit, the change pattern is not super-reached by using the big hit change pattern determination table B as shown in FIG. 12-7, regardless of the number of reserved storages. It is determined from the fluctuation patterns of via A jackpot, super reach C jackpot, and super reach D jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 5 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are assigned to the variation pattern of the A jackpot not via Super Reach, and 80 numbers are assigned. Numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C jackpot, and 15 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D jackpot. That is, when the game state is a probable change state and the variable display result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the A big hit without super reach is determined at a rate of 5% regardless of the number of reserved memories, and the super reach is determined at a rate of 80%. The fluctuation pattern of the C jackpot is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D jackpot is determined at a rate of 15%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the variation pattern for loss is as shown in FIG. 12-8 (A). The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach A deviation and the super reach E deviation using the determination table G. In the deviation pattern determination table G, 95 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for deviation pattern determination are assigned to the non-reach A deviation variation pattern, and 5 numerical values are assigned. Super reach E is assigned to the deviation pattern. That is, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the non-reach A out-of-reach fluctuation pattern at a rate of 95%. It is determined and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach E is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (B), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the determination table H, and is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, and super reach E deviation. In the deviation pattern determination table H, 85 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation variation patterns, and 10 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern, and five numerical values are assigned to the super reach E out-of-reach variation pattern. That is, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 85%. Is determined to be a non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern at a rate of 10%, and a super reach E out-of-range variation pattern is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (C), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the determination table I, and is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A deviation, non-reach A deviation, and super reach E deviation. In the variation pattern determination table I for deviation, 90 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern are assigned to the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach A deviation, and 5 numerical values. Is assigned to the non-reach A out-of-range variation pattern, and five numerical values are assigned to the super reach E out-of-reach variation pattern. That is, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 90%. At a rate of 5%, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach A is determined to be a variation pattern of non-reach A, and at a rate of 5%, the fluctuation pattern of super reach E is determined to be a variation pattern of deviation.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (D), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is shortened by using the determination table J. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach A deviation and the super reach D deviation. In the deviation pattern determination table J, 95 of the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the shortened non-reach A deviation pattern, and 5 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach D. That is, when the game state is the time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, the fluctuation pattern is shortened at a rate of 95%. Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment in the time saving state A, the determination ratio of each variable pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols for which the variable display is executed. That is, in the time saving state A in the feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment is the reserved storage number of the special symbol to be executed (the first special if the first special symbol is variable display). It differs depending on the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage unit 099SG151A in the figure, and the number of reserved storages stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151B in the case of variable display of the second special symbol).

Further, when the game state is the time saving state A and the variable display result is the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is super-reached by using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table C as shown in FIG. 12-9, regardless of the number of reserved storages. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of non-via A jackpot and super reach E jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table C, 5 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are assigned to the variation pattern of the A jackpot not via Super Reach, and 95 numbers are assigned. Numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach E jackpot. That is, when the game state is the time saving state A and the variable display result is the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the super reach non-via A jackpot at a rate of 5% regardless of the number of reserved memories, and is 95%. The fluctuation pattern of Super Reach E jackpot is determined by the ratio.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the variation pattern for loss is as shown in FIG. 12-10 (A). The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the non-reach B deviation and the super reach D deviation using the determination table K. In the deviation pattern determination table I, 97 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination are assigned to the non-reach B deviation variation patterns, and 3 numerical values are assigned. Super reach D is assigned to the deviation pattern. That is, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 0, the fluctuation pattern becomes the non-reach B out-of-reach fluctuation pattern at a rate of 97%. It is determined and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the ultra-shortened non-reach deviation and the super reach D deviation using the determination table L. In the deviation pattern determination table L, 97 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns, and 3 numerical values are assigned. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach D. That is, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss at a rate of 97%. Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (C), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the ultra-shortened non-reach deviation and the super reach D deviation using the determination table M. In the deviation pattern determination table M, 99 numerical values among the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern, and one numerical value is used. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach D. That is, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 2, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss at a rate of 99%. Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is determined at a rate of 1%.

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (D), the variation pattern for loss The fluctuation pattern is determined only from the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach by using the determination table N. In the deviation pattern determination table N, 100 of the possible numerical values of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach deviation pattern. That is, when the game state is the time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol for executing the variable display is 3, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of ultra-shortened non-reach loss at a rate of 100%. Will be decided.

As described above, for the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment in the time saving state B, the determination ratio of each variable pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols for which the variable display is executed. That is, in the time saving state B in the feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off is the reserved storage number of the special symbol to be executed (the first special if the first special symbol is variable display). It differs depending on the number of reserved storages stored in the reserved storage unit 099SG151A in the figure, and the number of reserved storages stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 099SG151B in the case of variable display of the second special symbol).

Further, when the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is the big hit, the fluctuation pattern is super-reached by using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table D as shown in FIG. 12-11, regardless of the number of reserved storages. D Determine only the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table D, 100 of the possible numerical values of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach D jackpot. That is, when the game state is the time saving state B and the variable display result is the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D jackpot at a rate of 100% regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Here, the period values in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 099SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-13 to 12-23.

First, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (A) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the time saving state A is the period value α, the period value α is A ×. It is calculated by the value of a + B × b + C × c + D × d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the time saving state A, and a is the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A is out of order, b. Is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state A to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state A, and C is the second special figure holding storage number of 2 in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result in the case of pieces is out of order, c is the ratio of the variation display when there are two second special figure reserved memories in the time saving state A to the 110 times variation display in the time saving state A. , D is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reservations is 3 in the time saving state A, and d is when the second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state A. The variation display is the ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation display of the time saving state A. The variable display period in which the variable display result in the feature unit 099SG is out of alignment refers to the period from the variable display start timing to the variable display end timing of the special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (B) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the time saving state B is the period value β, the period value β is E ×. It is calculated by the value of e + F × f + G × g + H × h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the time saving state B, and e is the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order, f. Is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state B to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state B, and G is the second special figure holding storage number of 2 in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result in the case of individual pieces is out of order, g is the ratio of the variation display when there are two second special figure reserved memories in the time saving state B to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state B. , H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reservations is 3 in the time saving state B, and h is when the second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state B. The variation display is the ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation display of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (C) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the probabilistic state is the period value γ, the period value γ is I × i + J. It is calculated by the value of × j + K × k + L × l. Here, I is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state, and i is the case where the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the probabilistic state, and j is the probabilistic state. The ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is one to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, K is the fluctuation display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is two in the probabilistic state. Is the average fluctuation time that is out of the range, k is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are two second special figure hold memories in the probabilistic state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, and H is the second special figure in the probabilistic state. Figure The average fluctuation time when the number of reserved memories is 3 and the variable display result is out of order, l is the 2nd special figure in the probabilistic state. It is the ratio to the display.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-13 (A) to 12-13 (C), the numerical values in the present feature section are substituted into the algebras A to L and a to l, and the period value α in the time saving state A and the time saving state B are used. When the period value β and the period value γ in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value α is a value larger than the period value β, and the period value γ is a value larger than the period value β (α> β, γ>. β).

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations displayed in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. As shown in FIGS. 12-14 (A) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of 1100 fluctuations in the game state of the time-saving state A is the period value α', the period value α'is It is calculated by the value of A × a'+ B × b'+ C × c'+ D × d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state A, and a'is the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation display of the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A is out of order. b'is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state A to the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, and C is the number of second special figure holding storages in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when there are two, c'is the variation display when the second special figure hold memory is two in the time saving state A, and the variation display is 1100 times in the time saving state A. In the time saving state A, D is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding storage is 3, and d'is 3 in the time saving state A. This is the ratio of the variation display when is to the 1100 variation display of the time saving state A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (B) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the time saving state B is the period value β', the period value β'is It is calculated by the value of E × e'+ F × f'+ G × g'+ H × h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state B, and e'is the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation display of the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order. f'is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time saving state B, and G is the number of second special figure holding storages in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when there are two, g'is the variation display when the second special figure hold memory is two in the time saving state B, and the variation display is 1100 times in the time saving state B. H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state B, and h'is 3 second special figure holding storage in the time saving state B. This is the ratio of the variation display when is to the 1100 variation display of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (C) and 12-23, assuming that the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is the probabilistic state is the period value γ', the period value γ'is I. It is calculated by the value of × i'+ J × j'+ K × k'+ L × l'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the probabilistic state, and i'is when the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the probabilistic state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the probabilistic state, and j'is the probabilistic change. The ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, K is the fluctuation when the number of the second special figure holding storage is two in the probabilistic state. The average fluctuation time at which the display result is off, k'is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are two second special figure hold memories in the probability change state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probability change state, and H is the probability change state. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of 2nd special figure reserved storage is 3, l'is the variation display when the 2nd special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probabilistic state. It is a ratio to the fluctuation display of 1100 times.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-14 (A) to 12-14 (C) and 12-23, the period in the time saving state A by substituting the numerical values in this feature section into the algebras A to L and a'to l'. When the value α', the period value β'in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value α'is larger than the period value β', and the period value γ'is the period value β'. (Α'> β', γ'> β').

Next, pay attention to the case where the variation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the like, so that the time saving state A changes every 110 times. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is the period value δ, the period value δ is calculated by the value of D × 110. Here, as described above, D is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is the period value ε, the period value ε is calculated by the value of H × 110. Here, as described above, H is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-15 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time in the probability change state. 2. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3 is the period value ζ, the period value ζ is calculated by the value of L × 110. Here, as described above, L is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probability variation state.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-15 (A) to 12-15 (C), the period value δ in the time saving state A and the period value in the time saving state B by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into each of the algebras D, H, L. When ε and the period value ζ in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value δ is a value larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is a value larger than the period value ε (δ> ε, ζ> ε). ..

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations displayed in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is the period value δ', the period value δ'is calculated by the value of D × 1100. .. Here, as described above, D is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state B. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 3 is the period value ε', the period value ε'is calculated by the value of H × 1100. .. Here, as described above, H is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 1100 times is changed every time in the probability change state. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three is the period value ζ', the period value ζ'is calculated by the value of L × 1100. Here, as described above, L is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the probability variation state.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-16 (A) to 12-16 (C), the period value δ'in the time-saving state A and the period in the time-saving state B by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into the algebras D, H, and L. When the value ε'and the period value ζ'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value δ'is larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ'is larger than the period value ε'(δ'). > Ε', ζ'> ε').

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the like, so that the time saving state A changes every 110 times. Assuming that the period value of the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is two is η, the period value η is calculated by the value of C × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state B every time. Fluctuation, average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of reserved 2nd special figure is 2 When the fluctuation display of the 2nd special figure is always executed 110 times of fluctuation display Assuming that the average fluctuation time is the period value θ, the period value θ is calculated by the value of G × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time in the probability change state. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is two is the period value ι, the period value ι is calculated by the value of K × 110.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-17 (A) to 12-17 (C), the period value η in the time-saving state A and the period value in the time-saving state B are substituted into the algebras C, G, and K in the present feature section. When θ and the period value ι in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value η is a value larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι is a value larger than the period value θ (η> θ, ι> θ). ..

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation display times in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the like, thereby changing every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is two is the period value η', the period value η'is calculated by the value of C × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state B. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is two is the period value θ', the period value θ'is calculated by the value of G × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 1100 times is changed every time in the probability change state. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is two is the period value ι', the period value ι'is calculated by the value of K × 1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-18 (A) to 12-18 (C), the period value η'in the time-saving state A and the period in the time-saving state B by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into the algebras C, G, and K. When the value θ'and the period value ι'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value η'is larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι'is larger than the period value θ'(η'. > Θ', ι'> θ').

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is one is the period value κ, the period value κ is calculated by the value of B × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state B every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is one is the period value λ, the period value λ is calculated by the value of F × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-19 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 110 times is changed every time in the probability change state. 2. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is one is the period value μ, the period value μ is calculated by the value of J × 110.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-19 (A) to 12-19 (C), by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into the algebras B, F, and J, the period value κ in the time saving state A and the period value in the time saving state B. When λ and the period value μ in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value κ is a value larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is a value larger than the period value λ (κ> λ, μ> λ). ..

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation display times in the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability change state multiple times. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is one is the period value κ', the period value κ'is calculated by the value of B × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state B. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is one is the period value λ', the period value λ'is calculated by the value of F × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 1100 times is changed every time in the probability change state. If the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is one is set to the period value μ', the period value μ'is calculated by the value of J × 1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-20 (A) to 12-20 (C), by substituting the numerical values in the present feature into the algebras B, F, and J, the period value κ'in the time-saving state A and the period in the time-saving state B. When the value λ'and the period value μ'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value κ'is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ'is larger than the period value λ'(κ'. > Λ', μ'> λ').

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state A every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation and the second special figure are executed in the state where the number of reserved storages is 0 is the period value ν, the period value ν is calculated by the value of A × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player makes 110 fluctuations in the time saving state B every time. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is the period value ξ, the period value ξ is calculated by the value of E × 110.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the like, the change is 110 times every time in the probability change state. If the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 is set to the period value π, the period value π is calculated by the value of I × 110.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-21 (A) to 12-21 (C), the period value ν in the time saving state A and the period value in the time saving state B are substituted by the numerical values in the present feature section into the algebra A, E, and I. ξ, When the period value π in the probabilistic state is calculated, the period value ν is a value larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π is a value larger than the period value ξ (ν> ξ, π> ξ). ..

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations displayed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability-changing state reaches 1100 by controlling each of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state multiple times. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (A) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state A. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation and the second special figure are executed in the state where the number of reserved storages is 0 is the period value ν', the period value ν'is calculated by the value of A × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (B) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the player changes every 1100 times in the time saving state B. Assuming that the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation and the second special figure are executed in the state where the number of reserved storages is 0 is the period value ξ', the period value ξ'is calculated by the value of E × 1100.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (C) and 12-23, the player constantly continuously launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and the fluctuation of 1100 times is changed every time in the probability change state. If the average fluctuation time when executed in the state where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 is set to the period value π', the period value π'is calculated by the value of I × 1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-22 (A) to 12-22 (C), the period value ν'in the time-saving state A and the period in the time-saving state B by substituting the numerical values in this feature section into the algebras A, E, and I. When the value ξ'and the period value π'in the probabilistic state are calculated, the period value ν'is larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π'is larger than the period value ξ'(ν'). > Ξ', π'> ξ').

Next, the actual firing values in the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic state (number of firing game balls, special figure 1 start) when the test firing test of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG was performed for 10 hours. Pachinko obtained from the number of winnings in the mouth, the number of winnings in the starting mouth of the special figure 2, the number of times the fluctuations are displayed in the special figure 1, the number of times the fluctuations are displayed in the special figure 2, the total number of times the fluctuations are displayed in the special figure 2, the total number of times the fluctuations are displayed in the special figure 2) and the actual shooting values. The design values of the gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 12-24 (A) and 12-24 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the total time of the test firing test time in the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state is less than 10 hours because the remaining time is in the big hit game state. Is it there? Further, the actual shooting value in the normal state is conditioned on the continuous launch of the game ball into the left game area 2L by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30, and is in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state. The actual shooting value is conditional on the continuous launch of the game ball into the right game area 2R by the operation of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30.

As shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), under the normal state, the test firing test time is 346.08 minutes, the number of launching game balls is 34580, the number of winnings in the special figure 1 starting port is 1939, and the number of winnings in the special figure 2 starting port is 1939. The number of winnings is 0, the number of times of special figure 1 variation is 1883, the number of times of special figure 2 variation is 0, the total number of special figure 1 variation is 23840 seconds, and the total number of special figure 2 variation is 0 seconds. Further, in the time saving state A, the test firing test time is 77.0 minutes, the number of launching game balls is 7676, the number of special figure 1 starting opening winnings is 0, the number of special drawing 2 starting opening winnings is 4371, and special drawing 1 The number of times of variation display is 0, the number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 658, the total number of times of variation of special figure 1 is 0 seconds, and the total number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 3548 seconds. Further, in the time saving state B, the test firing test time is 14.96 minutes, the number of launching game balls is 1494, the number of special figure 1 starting opening winnings is 0, the number of special drawing 2 starting opening winnings is 821, and special drawing 1 The number of times of variation display is 0, the number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 594, the total number of times of variation of special figure 1 is 0 seconds, and the total number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 954 seconds. In addition, in the probabilistic state, the test firing test time is 116.0 minutes, the number of launching game balls is 11515, the number of special figure 1 starting opening winnings is 0, the number of special drawing 2 starting opening winnings is 6556, and the number of special drawing 1 fluctuations. The number of display times is 0, the number of times of variation of special figure 2 is 987, the total change time of special figure 1 is 0 seconds, and the total change time of special figure 2 is 4387 seconds.

From the above actual shooting values, as a design value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), the number of firing game balls per minute in the normal state is 99.9 / Minutes, special figure 1 winning rate is 5.6 pieces / minute, special figure 2 winning rate is 0 pieces / minute, average special figure 1 fluctuation time is 12.661 seconds, average special figure 2 fluctuation time is calculated as 0 seconds. ing. In addition, the number of launching game balls per minute in the time saving state A is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 56.7 / minute, and the average special figure 1 The fluctuation time is calculated to be 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. In addition, the number of launching game balls per minute in the time saving state B is 99.9 / minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 54.8 / minute, and the average special figure 1 The fluctuation time is calculated to be 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is calculated to be 1.607 seconds. In addition, the number of launching game balls per minute in the probabilistic state is 99.9 / min, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 / min, the special figure 2 winning rate is 56.7 / min, and the average special figure 1 variation. The time is calculated to be 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is calculated to be 4.445 seconds.

Comparing the special figure 2 winning rates of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state, only the special figure 2 winning rate of the time-saving state B is different, but this is due to the number of launching game balls in the time-saving state B. This is due to an error caused by less than the two states of.

Here, the average fluctuation time in the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probable change state is actually calculated based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in FIGS. 12-24.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (A), in the normal state, the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result when the first special figure holding storage number is 0 is out of order, and the first special figure holding storage number are For the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result in the case of 1 is out of order, and the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result in the case of the first special figure hold storage number is out of 2, the first special figure hold storage number is 0. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the cases of 2 to 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-5 (A)), 12000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45,000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1 / It is calculated as 100 = 13340 (ms). Further, regarding the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of alignment when the first special figure reserved storage number is 3, the variation pattern that can be selected when the first special figure reserved storage number is 3 and these fluctuation patterns From the determination ratio (see FIG. 12-5 (B)), it is calculated as 5000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1/100 = 6550 (ms).

In addition, when the ratio of the variation display executed in each case of 0 to 3 in the first special figure reserved storage number is calculated based on the normal state shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), FIG. 12-25 (B). ), The ratio of the variable display executed when the number of reserved storages of the first special figure is 0 is 10%, and the ratio of the variable display executed when the number of stored storages of the first special figure is 1. 40%, the ratio of variable display executed when the number of 1st special figure reserved storage is 2 is 40%, and the ratio of variable display executed when the number of 1st special figure reserved storage is 3 is 10. Calculated as%.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (C), the average fluctuation time in the normal state is 13340 (ms) × 10/100 +13340 (ms) × 40/100 + 13340 (ms) × 40/100 + 6550 (ms) × 10. It is calculated as / 100 = 12661 (ms).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (A), in the time saving state A, the average fluctuation time A in which the variation display result is out of the case when the second special figure hold storage number is 0 is the second special figure hold. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of storages is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-8 (A)), 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 50,000 (ms) × 5/100 = 9150 (ms). ), And the average fluctuation time B at which the variation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of alignment is the variation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1. From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-8 (B)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) × 85/100 + 7000 (ms) × 10/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5750 (ms), and the second The average fluctuation time C at which the variation display result when the number of special figure reservations is 2 is out of alignment is based on the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of second special figure reservations is 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns ( (See FIG. 12-8 (C)), 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5550 (ms), and the second special figure reserved storage number is 3. The average fluctuation time D at which the variation display result in the case of is out of alignment is determined from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (FIG. 12-6 (D)). (See), calculated as 3000 (ms) × 95/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5350 (ms).

It should be noted that, based on the time saving state A shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the second special figure is executed in each case where the number of reserved storages in the second special figure in the 110 times and 1100 times variation display in the time saving state A is 0 to 3. When the ratio of the fluctuation display to be performed is calculated, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (B), the ratio (a and a') of the fluctuation display executed when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 is 0. .9090909%, executed when the ratio of variable display (b and b') executed when the number of second special figure reservations is one is 0.9090909%, and executed when the number of second special figure reservations is two. The ratio of variable display (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the ratio of variable display (d and d') executed when the number of 2nd special figure reservations is 3 is 95.454545%. It is calculated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (C), the average fluctuation time (α and α') of one fluctuation in the time saving state A is 9150 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) × 0.9090909 / 100 + 5550. It is calculated as (ms) × 2.7272727 / 100 + 5350 (ms) × 95.4545455 / 100 = 5393.636 (ms).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (A), in the time saving state B, the average fluctuation time E in which the variation display result is out of the case when the second special figure hold storage number is 0 is the second special figure hold. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of storages is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (A)), 5000 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5600 (ms). ), And the average fluctuation time F at which the variation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of alignment is the variation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1. It is calculated as 1500 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 2205 (ms) from the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-10 (B)), and the second special figure reserved storage number is 2. The average fluctuation time G in which the variation display result in the case of is out of alignment is determined from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 2 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (FIG. 12-10 (C)). (Refer to), 1500 (ms) × 99/100 + 25000 (ms) × 1/100 = 1735 (ms), and the average variation time H in which the variation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 is out of order. Is 1500 (ms) × 100/100 = 1500 (see FIG. 12-10 (D)) from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns. ms) is calculated.

It should be noted that, based on the time saving state B shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), the second special figure in the variable display of 110 times and 1100 times in the time saving state B is executed in each case of 0 to 3 reserved storage numbers. When the ratio of the variable display to be performed is calculated, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (B), the ratio (e and e') of the variable display executed when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 is 0. .9090909%, executed when the ratio of variable display (f and f') executed when the number of second special figure reservations is one is 1.8181818%, and executed when the number of second special figure reservations is two. The ratio of variable display (g and g') to be displayed is 24.54554545%, and the ratio of variable display (h and h') executed when the number of second special figure reserved storage is 3 is 72.7272727%. It is calculated.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (C), the average fluctuation time (β and β') of one fluctuation in the time saving state B is 5600 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) × 1.8181818 / 100 + 1735. It is calculated as (ms) × 24.54554545 / 100 + 1500 (ms) × 72.7272727 / 100 = 1607.773 (ms).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (A), in the probabilistic state, the average fluctuation time I in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is the second special figure reserved storage. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (A)), 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 40,000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25,000 × 3/100 = The average fluctuation time J calculated as 8200 (ms) and the variation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 is out of the range is the variation that can be selected when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1. From the pattern and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (B)), 3000 (ms) × 80/100 + 7000 (ms) × 15/100 + 40000 × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5000 (ms). ), And the average fluctuation time K at which the variation display result is out of order when the second special figure reservation number is 2, is the variation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure reservation number is 2. From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-6 (C)), 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 40000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 4600 (ms). ), And the average fluctuation time L at which the variation display result is out of order when the second special figure reservation number is 3, is the variation pattern that can be selected when the second special figure reservation number is 3. From the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-6 (D)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) × 95/100 + 40000 × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 4400 (ms).

It should be noted that, based on the probabilistic state shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), it is executed in each case where the number of the second special figure reserved storage in the 110 times and 1100 times variation display in the probable change state is 0 to 3. When the ratio of the variable display is calculated, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the ratio of the variable display (i and i') executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 is 0.9090909. %, The rate of variation display (j and j') executed when the number of second special figure reserved storage is one is 0.9090909%, and it is executed when the number of second special figure reserved storage is two. It is calculated that the ratio of variation display (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the ratio of variation display (l and l') executed when the number of second special figure reservations is 3 is 95.4545455%. To.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (C), the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state is 8200 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) × 0.9090909 / 100 + 4600 ( It is calculated as ms) × 2.7272727 / 100 + 4400 (ms) × 95.4545455/100 = 4445.455 (ms).

From the above, comparing the average fluctuation time of one variation in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variation state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-29, one variation in the time-saving state B. The average fluctuation time (β and β') of is shorter than the average fluctuation time (α and α') of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A (α> β and α'> β'), and one fluctuation in the time-saving state B. The average fluctuation time (β and β') of is set shorter than the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state (γ> β and γ'> β').

Subsequently, the total average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state B, and the variation display of 110 times in the probability variation state are displayed. In the total average fluctuation time when executed, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state B, and the probability variation state. The total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times is calculated.

As shown in FIGS. 12-30 (A) and 12-35, where the total average fluctuation time when the variation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A is the period value χ, the period value χ is α ( Alternatively, it is calculated as α') × 110 = 5393.633 (ms) × 110 = 593299.63 (ms). Further, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state B is the period value ψ, the period value ψ is β (or β') × 110 = 1607.773 (ms) × 110. It is calculated as = 176855.03 (ms). Further, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 110 times in the probabilistic state is the period value ω, the period value ω is γ (or γ') × 110 = 4445.455 (ms) × 110 =. It is calculated as 489000.05 (ms).

That is, in the present feature unit 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time saving state B by 110 is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time saving state A by 110. It is set smaller than the period value ω, and the period value ψ is set smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state by 110 (χ> ψ and). ω> ψ).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (A) and 12-36, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state A is the period value χ', the period value χ'. Is calculated as α (or α') × 1100 = 5393.633 (ms) × 1100 = 5932996.3 (ms). Further, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state B is the period value ψ', the period value ψ'is β (or β') × 1100 = 1607.773 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 1768550.3 (ms). Further, assuming that the total average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the probabilistic state is the period value ω', the period value ω'is γ (or γ') × 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 1100 = 489,0000.5 (ms).

That is, in the present feature unit 099SG, the period value ψ'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time saving state B by 1100 is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time saving state A by 110. It is set smaller than the period value ω'to be obtained, and the period value ψ'is set smaller than the period value ω'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state by 110 (. χ'> ψ'and ω'> ψ').

Further, the average fluctuation time when the variation is executed 110 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state is changed every time, and the second special figure holding storage number is three, is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), it is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is three. The period value δ is calculated as D × 110 = 5350 (ms) × 110 = 588500 (ms). Further, the period value ε, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3, is H × 110 = 1500 (ms). It is calculated as × 110 = 165000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3, is L × 110 = 4400 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 110 = 484000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value δ is a value larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is a value larger than the period value ε (δ). > Ε, ζ> ε).

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuations are performed 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state every fluctuation, and the second special figure reserved storage number is three is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), it is an average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is three. The period value δ'is calculated as D × 1100 = 5350 (ms) × 1100 = 5885000 (ms). In addition, the period value ε', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3, is H × 1100 = 1500 (ms). ) X 1100 = 1650000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 3, is L × 1100 = 4400 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 4840000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value δ'is a value larger than the period value ε', and the period value ζ'is a value larger than the period value ε'. (Δ'> ε', ζ'> ε').

Further, the average fluctuation time when the variation is performed 110 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state is changed every time, and the second special figure holding storage number is two, is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), it is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is two. The period value η is calculated as C × 110 = 5550 (ms) × 110 = 610500 (ms). Further, the period value θ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 2, is G × 110 = 1735 (ms). It is calculated as × 110 = 190850 (ms). Then, the period value ι, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 2, is K × 110 = 4600 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 110 = 506000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value η is a value larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι is a value larger than the period value θ (η). > Θ, ι> θ).

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuations are performed 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state are changed every time, and the second special figure holding storage number is two, are compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B), it is an average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is two. The period value η'is calculated as C × 1100 = 5550 (ms) × 1100 = 615000 (ms). Further, the period value θ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 2, is G × 1100 = 1735 (ms). ) X 1100 = 1908500 (ms). Then, the period value ι', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 2, is K × 1100 = 4600 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 5060000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value η'is a value larger than the period value θ', and the period value ι'is a value larger than the period value θ'. (Η'> θ', ι'> θ').

Further, the average fluctuation time when the variation is executed 110 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state is changed every time, and the second special figure holding storage number is one, is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (A), it is an average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is one. The period value κ is calculated as B × 110 = 5750 (ms) × 110 = 632500 (ms). Further, the period value λ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 1, is F × 110 = 2205 (ms). It is calculated as × 110 = 242550 (ms). Then, the period value μ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 1, is J × 110 = 5000 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 110 = 550000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value κ is a value larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is a value larger than the period value λ (κ). > Λ, μ> λ).

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuations are performed 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state every fluctuation, and the second special figure reserved storage number is one is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (B), it is an average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is one. The period value κ'is calculated as B × 1100 = 5750 (ms) × 1100 = 6325000 (ms). Further, the period value λ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 1, is F × 1100 = 2205 (ms). ) X 1100 = 2425500 (ms). Then, the period value μ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 1, is J × 1100 = 5000 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 5500000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value κ'is a value larger than the period value λ', and the period value μ'is a value larger than the period value λ'. (Κ'> λ', μ'> λ').

Further, the average fluctuation time when the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state are executed 110 times every fluctuation and the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), it is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are changed every time in the time saving state A and the second special figure holding storage number is 0. The period value ν is calculated as B × 110 = 9150 (ms) × 110 = 1006500 (ms). Further, the period value ξ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 0, is E × 110 = 5600 (ms). It is calculated as × 110 = 616000 (ms). Then, the period value π, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are fluctuated every time in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 0, is I × 110 = 8200 (ms) ×. It is calculated as 110 = 902000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ν is a value larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π is a value larger than the period value ξ (ν). > Ξ, π> ξ).

Further, the average fluctuation time when the fluctuations are performed 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic change state every fluctuation, and the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (B), it is an average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in the time saving state A and the second special figure reserved storage number is 0. The period value ν'is calculated as B × 1100 = 9150 (ms) × 1100 = 10065000 (ms). Further, the period value ξ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are made every fluctuation in the time saving state B and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 0, is E × 1100 = 5600 (ms). ) X 1100 = 616000 (ms). Then, the period value π', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are made every fluctuation in the probabilistic state and the second special figure is executed in a state where the number of reserved storages is 0, is I × 1100 = 8200 (ms). It is calculated as × 1100 = 9020000 (ms). That is, in this feature unit 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ν'is a value larger than the period value ξ', and the period value π'is a value larger than the period value ξ'. (Ν'> ξ', π'> ξ').

That is, in the feature unit 099SG, when the time required for 110 fluctuation display in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state is compared, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the 110 times are compared. The time required for the fluctuation display is set to be the shortest in the time saving state B (χ> ψ, ω> ψ). Further, comparing the time required for 1100 fluctuation display in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probability variation state, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display is also shortened. The state B is set to the lowest (χ'> ψ', ω'> ψ').

Further, in the case of executing 110 fluctuations in each of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probabilistic state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 0, the 110 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 110 fluctuation display (ν> ξ, π> ξ). Further, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure reserved storage number is 0, the 1100 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (B), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display (ν'> ξ', π'> ξ'). ..

Further, in the case where 110 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is one, the 110 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (A), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 110 fluctuation display (κ> λ, μ> λ). Further, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 1, the 1100 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (B), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display (κ'> λ', μ'> λ'). ..

Further, in the case where the variation is executed 110 times in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 2, the 110 times variation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 110 fluctuation display (η> θ, ι> θ). Further, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 2, the 1100 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display (η'> θ', ι'> θ'). ..

Further, in the case where the variation is executed 110 times in each of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 3, the 110 times variation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 110 fluctuation display (δ> ε, ζ> ε). Further, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed every fluctuation in each of the time reduction state A, the time reduction state B, and the probabilistic change state, and the second special figure holding storage number is 3, the 1100 fluctuation display is required. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), the time state B is set to be the shortest in the time required for the 1100 fluctuation display (δ'> ε', ζ'> ε'). ..

That is, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state in the feature unit 099SG, when the second special figure holding storage number is 0 and the fluctuation is performed 110 times or 1100 times, the second special figure holding is performed. When the number of storages is one and the fluctuation is 110 times or 1100 times, the second special figure is reserved. When the number of storages is two and the fluctuation is 110 times or 1100 times, the second special figure is reserved. The time-saving state B is set to have the highest fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (the average fluctuation display time required for each fluctuation is short) in either case where the fluctuation is performed 110 times or 1100 times in the state where the number of storages is three. ing. Further, when the player plays the game in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state without worrying about the second special figure reserved memory number (FIGS. 12-26 (B) and 12-27 (B)). , Even when the fluctuation display for each reserved storage number is performed 110 times or 1100 times at the ratio shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (average required for one fluctuation). (Variation display time is short) is set.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG, in addition to the time saving state (time saving state A) and the probabilistic state in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is higher than those in the time saving state A and the probabilistic state. Since it is possible to control the time saving state B, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

For example, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, after the end of a big hit, a predetermined number of times (for example, a big hit probability is about 1) without being controlled by the big hit in a low probability state (for example, a normal state (low probability / low base state)). Even when the variable display (about 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) is performed, such as 900 times in the case of / 300, it is not controlled to the time saving state B unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature unit 099SG. At this point, the jackpot probability denominator is already about three times higher, so the player continues to play the game without a jackpot for a long time, and the investment is also large. However, this normal state (low accuracy / low base state) continues until a big hit occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's willingness to play.

On the other hand, in the case where the time saving state B can be controlled like the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the main feature unit 099SG, after the big hit ends, the big hit is made in the low probability state (for example, the normal state (low probability / low base state)). When a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) is variablely displayed without being controlled, the time saving state B is controlled, and a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times) is a maximum jackpot. It will be controlled to the time saving state B over the variable display (about 3.8 times the probability denominator, etc.). At this point, the probability of a big hit is already about three times higher, so the player has been playing the game for a long time without a big hit, and the investment is considerably large. However, by being controlled to the time saving state B, the additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a big hit is increased, so that the decrease in the motivation for playing can be suppressed.

In particular, in the feature unit 099SG, when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B, the player requires a large amount of time and investment. It functions as a gaming state for relieving the player, in order to shorten the period until the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state by executing the game.

Further, in the feature unit 099SG, even if the reserved storage number is fixed and digested in any of the states of 0 to 3, the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency than the time saving state A and the probable change state. Various effects (for example, countdown notice, hold change notice, symbol chance eye notice, effect display notice) described in FIGS. 11-36 (and the drawing in which the feature points according to the feature point 11-36 are described) of the feature unit 069SG. The execution rate of pre-reading notice effects such as, movable body notice, character notice, reach notice, button notice, etc.) is lower than the execution rate of various effects in the time saving state A and the probable change state (in the feature unit 099SG). The execution ratio of various effects is the same as the execution ratio of various effects described in FIGS. 11-36 of the feature unit 069SG). Therefore, even if the player continues to play the game for a long time without a big hit, and even if the investment is high and the player is depressed, when the time saving state B is controlled, the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 in any state. Regardless of whether the fluctuation is digested in a fixed state or in a state where the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the fluctuation can be efficiently digested in a state where there is little unnecessary fanning, and thus a suitable time saving state B is provided. be able to.

Further, in the feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-15, 12-17, 12-19, and 12-21, the average fluctuation time in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state is multiplied by 110. The calculated values are calculated and compared. This is because the digestion time of 110 fluctuation displays (total time of 110 fluctuation displays) out of the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time reduction state B is from the digestion time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time reduction state A and the probable change state. Also shows that it is short. If the digestion time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B is the same (or substantially the same) as the digestion time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A and the probabilistic state, 1100 times of the time-saving state B Since the digestion time of the variable display requires several times the digestion time of 110 variable displays of the time saving state B, if the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B, the digestion time is prolonged, which is not suitable for the player. It may give a feeling of pleasure or dissatisfaction. Therefore, the present invention prevents the player from giving a feeling of dissatisfaction when the player is controlled to the time-saving state B by increasing the fluctuation efficiency in the time-saving state B more than the time-saving state A and the probable change state, and as a result, it is preferable. The invention is an invention for the purpose of providing a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of controlling a gaming state to a time saving state B.

Further, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, 12-18, 12-20, and 12-22, the average fluctuation time in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability variation state is multiplied by 1100. The calculated values are calculated and compared. By controlling the time saving state A and the probabilistic change state multiple times, the variation display in the time saving state A and the probabilistic change state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation display times in the time saving state B, and these time saving states are executed. By comparing the fluctuation time for 1100 times in the state A, the fluctuation time for 1100 times in the time saving state B, and the fluctuation time for 1100 times in the probabilistic change state, it is shown that the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency, and the variation display is the player. This is to show that the time saving state B can be suitably controlled so as not to give a feeling of dissatisfaction.

This is performed when the variation display in the time reduction state A or the probability variation state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation display times in the time reduction state B, by being controlled to the time reduction state A or the probability variation state multiple times. By designing the time-saving state B to have the highest fluctuation efficiency, it is shown that the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency even when compared with the time-saving state A and the probability variation state. Therefore, the fluctuation in the time saving state B is not dissatisfied, and as a result, the time saving state B is preferably controlled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B, by 110, is the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A. The period value ψ is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of, by 110, and the period value ψ is the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probabilistic state, multiplied by 110. Since it is set to be smaller than the obtained period value ω, the period until it is controlled to the big hit gaming state is shortened because the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state A and the probabilistic changing state. The player's dissatisfaction in the state B can be reduced, and as a result, a suitable time saving state B can be provided. In particular, in the present feature unit 099SG, as described above, in the time saving state B, the period until the big hit game state is controlled can be shortened by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than the time saving state A and the probability change state, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced. At the same time, in the time saving state A and the probability change state (the time saving state A and the probability change state in which the special figure fluctuation time is longer than the time saving state B and the variation display is likely to be executed) controlled via the jackpot game, the jackpot game is performed during the variation display. A predetermined effect suggesting that the state is controlled can be performed over an appropriate period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), the period value ψ'obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B, by 1100, is 1 in the time saving state A. It is smaller than the period value χ'obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of fluctuations, by 1100, and the period value ψ'is 1100 for the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probabilistic state. Since it is set to be smaller than the period value ω'obtained by multiplying, the period until the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state A or the probabilistic state and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player in the time saving state B by shortening, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B. In particular, in the present feature unit 099SG, as described above, in the time saving state B, the period until the big hit game state is controlled can be shortened by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than the time saving state A and the probability change state, and the dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced. At the same time, in the time saving state A and the probability change state (the time saving state A and the probability change state in which the special figure fluctuation time is longer than the time saving state B and the variation display is likely to be executed) controlled via the jackpot game, the jackpot game is performed during the variation display. A predetermined effect suggesting that the state is controlled can be performed over an appropriate period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 in the time saving state B is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 110 times in the time-saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time-saving state A. The period value ξ is set to be smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the variation display in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display by the number of fluctuation display times of 110 times in the time-saving state B, the variation display in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state is set. Since it can be made to progress faster than that, it is possible to improve the game entertainment of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is 0 in the time saving state B is 1100 times of the fluctuation in the time saving state B. The period value ξ'obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 1100 in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state A. It is set smaller than the period value ν'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display, and the period value ξ'is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 0 in the probabilistic state. Since it is set to be smaller than the period value π'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation by the number of fluctuation display times of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the variation display in the time saving state B is set to the time saving state. Since it is possible to make progress faster than A or the probable change state, it is possible to improve the game interest of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is 110 fluctuations in the time saving state B. The period value λ obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 110 times in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is one in the time saving state A. The period value λ is set to be smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the variation display in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display by the number of fluctuation display times of 110 times in the time-saving state B, the variation display in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state is set. Since it can be made to progress faster than that, it is possible to improve the game entertainment of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is 1100 times of the fluctuation in the time saving state B. The period value λ'obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 1100 in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is one in the time saving state A. It is set smaller than the period value κ'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display, and the period value λ'is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the probabilistic state. Since the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value μ'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation by the number of fluctuation display times of 1100 times in the time-saving state B, the variation display in the time-saving state B is set to the time-saving state. Since it is possible to make progress faster than A or the probable change state, it is possible to improve the game interest of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 2 in the time saving state B is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value θ obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 110 times in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is two in the time saving state A. The period value θ is set to be smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the variation display in the time saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display by the number of times of the variation display of 110 times in the time saving state B, the variation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A or the probability variation state. Since it can be made to progress faster than that, it is possible to improve the game entertainment of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 2 in the time saving state B is 1100 times of the fluctuation in the time saving state B. The period value θ'obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 1100 in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is two in the time saving state A. The period value θ'is set smaller than the period value η'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display, and the period value θ'is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is two in the probabilistic state. Since the period value ι'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation by the number of fluctuation display of 1100 times in the time saving state B is set, the variation display in the time saving state B is set to be smaller than the time saving state. Since it is possible to make progress faster than A or the probable change state, it is possible to improve the game interest of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state B is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value ε obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 110 times in the time-saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time-saving state A. The period value ε is set to be smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of times of the fluctuation display of 110 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is the time saving state A or the probability variation state. Since it can be made to progress faster than that, it is possible to improve the game entertainment of the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation executed when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 3 in the time saving state B is 1100 times of the fluctuation in the time saving state B. The period value ε'obtained by multiplying the number of impressions is 1100 in the time saving state B with the average fluctuation time of the deviation display executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the time saving state A. It is set to be smaller than the period value δ'obtained by multiplying the number of times of variation display, and the period value ε'is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 in the probabilistic state. Since the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ζ'obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the variation display of the deviation by the number of fluctuation display times of 1100 times in the time-saving state B, the variation display in the time-saving state B is set to the time-saving state. Since it is possible to make progress faster than A or the probable change state, it is possible to improve the game interest of the time saving state B.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 099SG can execute the variable display of the normal symbol in addition to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit (per ordinary symbol). A game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening that has changed from the closed state to the open state. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening, and the game ball has won the second starting winning opening. Based on this, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, and the information of the variable display of the special symbol that has not been executed can be stored as the reserved storage. It has 099SG151B. In both the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B, the maximum number of reserved storage units is set to 4, and the upper limit of the maximum number of reserved storage units is set according to the gaming state. It doesn't change.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (B) and 12-2 (D), the probability that a normal symbol hit will occur in the variable display of a normal symbol is that the game state is the time saving state A and the time saving state B. In addition to being common in some cases, the opening time of the second start winning opening when a normal figure hit occurs is set to 3 seconds, which is common between the case where the game state is the time saving state A and the case where the game state is the time saving state B. When the game state is the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the game ball launched toward the second path of the right game area by the launching device wins (enters) the gate 41 or the second start winning opening. ) It is possible. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 099SG, most of the game playability can be shared between the case where the gaming state is the time saving state A and the time saving state B, so that the time saving state A and the time saving state A can be shared. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the large difference in playability between the state B and the state B.

Further, in the feature unit 099SG, when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state, the variation display period in which the variation display result is out of order is displayed variable from the variation display start timing of the special symbol. The average fluctuation time is calculated as the period until the end timing, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the fluctuation display number of times when the gaming state is any of the probabilistic state, the time saving state B, and the probable change state, "110" or "1100". , But the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display period in which the variable display result is out of alignment is the timing at which the game ball is launched, or The average fluctuation time is calculated as the period from the timing when the launched game ball wins the start winning opening to the end timing of the fluctuation display based on the start winning prize, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the game state are in a probable change state. Each period value may be calculated by multiplying "110" or "1100", which is the number of fluctuation display times in either the time saving state B or the probabilistic state. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately obtain the period value in each gaming state by measurement.

Further, the upper limit of the number of hold data (holding storage) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 12-13. In addition, each period value in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic state is obtained by multiplying the ratio of the fluctuation display executed in each holding storage number to the 110 fluctuation display times by the average fluctuation time of each holding storage number. Since it is calculated by the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

In particular, if the gaming state is the time saving state A and the period value when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A is α, the period value α is A × a + B × b + C × c + D ×. It is calculated by the value of d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure reservations is 0 in the time saving state A, and a is 0 in the second special figure holding storage in the time saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A is out of order, b. Is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, and C is the second special figure holding storage number of 2 in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result in the case of pieces is out of order, c is the ratio of the variation display when there are two second special figure reserved memories in the time saving state A to the 110 times variation display in the time saving state A. , D is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding memories is 3 in the time saving state A, and d is when the second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state A. The variation display is the ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation display of the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α in the time saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, assuming that the period value when the gaming state is the time saving state B and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B is β, the period value β is E × e + F × f + G × g + H ×. It is calculated by the value of h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the time saving state B, and e is the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays of the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order, f. Is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state B to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state B, and G is the second special figure holding storage number of 2 in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result in the case of individual pieces is out of order, g is the ratio of the variation display when there are two second special figure reserved memories in the time saving state B to the 110 times variation display of the time saving state B. , H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding memories is 3 in the time saving state B, and h is when the second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state B. The variation display is the ratio of the variation display to the 110 variation display of the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β in the time saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, assuming that the period value when the gaming state is the probable change state and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the probable change state is γ, the period value γ is I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l. Calculated by value. Here, I is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state, and i is the case where the second special figure reserved memory is 0 in the probabilistic state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the probabilistic state, and j is the probabilistic state. The ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is one to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, K is the fluctuation display result when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is two in the probabilistic state. Is the average fluctuation time that is out of the range, k is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are two second special figure hold memories in the probabilistic state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, and L is the second special figure in the probabilistic state. Figure The average fluctuation time when the number of reserved memories is 3 and the variable display result is out of order, l is the 2nd special figure in the probabilistic state. It is the ratio to the display. By calculating the period value γ as described above, it is possible to obtain the period value γ in an accurate probability variation state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, the upper limit of the number of hold data (holding storage) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 12-14. In addition, for each period value in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state, the ratio of the fluctuation display executed in each holding storage number to the 1100 fluctuation display is multiplied by the average fluctuation time of each holding storage number. Since it is calculated by the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

In particular, if the gaming state is the time saving state A and the period value when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A is α', the period value α'is A × a'+ B ×. It is calculated by the value of b'+ C × c'+ D × d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state A, and a'is the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation display of the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state A is out of order. b'is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state A to the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time saving state A, and C is the number of second special figure holding storages in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when there are two, c'is the variation display when the second special figure hold memory is two in the time saving state A, and the variation display is 1100 times in the time saving state A. In the time saving state A, D is the average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding storage is 3, and d'is 3 in the time saving state A. This is the ratio of the variation display when is to the 1100 variation display of the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α'as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α'in the time saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, if the game state is the time saving state B and the period value when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B is β', the period value β'is E × e'+ F ×. It is calculated by the value of f'+ G × g'+ H × h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state B, and e'is the second special figure holding storage is 0 in the time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation display of the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the time saving state B is out of order. f'is the ratio of the variation display when there is one second special figure holding memory in the time saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays of the time saving state B, and G is the number of second special figure holding storages in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time in which the variation display result is out of order when there are two, g'is the variation display when the second special figure hold memory is two in the time saving state B, and the variation display is 1100 times in the time saving state B. H is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of second special figure holding storage is 3 in the time saving state B, and h'is 3 second special figure holding storage in the time saving state B. This is the ratio of the variation display when is to the 1100 variation display of the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β'as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β'in the time saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

Further, assuming that the period value when the gaming state is the probable change state and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the probable change state is γ', the period value γ'is I × i'+ J × j'. It is calculated by the value of + K × k'+ L × l'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the probabilistic state, and i'is when the second special figure reserved storage is 0 in the probabilistic state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is out of order when the second special figure reserved storage number is 1 in the probabilistic state, and j'is the probabilistic change. The ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is one in the state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probabilistic state, K is the fluctuation when the number of the second special figure holding storage is two in the probabilistic state. The average fluctuation time at which the display result is off, k'is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are two second special figure hold memories in the probability change state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probability change state, and L is the probability change state. The average fluctuation time at which the variation display result is out of order when the number of the second special figure reserved storage is three, l'is the variation display when the second special figure reserved storage is three in the probabilistic state, and the variation display is the probabilistic state. It is a ratio to the fluctuation display of 1100 times. By calculating the period value γ'as described above, it is possible to obtain the period value γ'in an accurate probability variation state corresponding to the number of reserved storages.

As described above, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic change state in the feature unit 099SG, when the second special figure is changed 110 times or 1100 times while the number of reserved storages is 0, the second When the number of special figure reservations is 1 and the fluctuation is 110 times or 1100 times, when the 2nd special figure reservation number is 2 and the fluctuation is 110 times or 1100 times, the second The time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (the average fluctuation display time required for each fluctuation is short, regardless of whether the fluctuation is performed 110 times or 1100 times while the number of special figure reservations is three. ) It is set. Further, when the player plays the game in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the probability change state without worrying about the second special figure reserved memory number (FIGS. 12-26 (B) and 12-27 (B)). , Even when the fluctuation display for each reserved storage number is performed 110 times or 1100 times at the ratio shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (average required for one fluctuation). (Variation display time is short) is set.

Further, in the feature unit 099SG, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probabilistic state are multiplied by 110 or 1100, respectively. Although the embodiment showing that the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B is the highest by comparing the values obtained in the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state A is not limited to this. , The value to be multiplied by the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time saving state B and the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the probability variation state may be a value other than 110 or 1099 such as 109 or 1099. The reason for multiplying the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probabilistic state B by 109 or 1099 is the time-saving state. This is because the first fluctuation in A, the time saving state B, and the probabilistic state is almost always started when the number of reserved storages is 0. In addition, when the final 5 fluctuations of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, the probable change state, or the time-saving state A and the probable change state are set to the fluctuations with a longer special figure fluctuation time at a higher rate than the other fluctuations. May be a value to be multiplied by 104, 1094, etc. excluding a total of 6 fluctuations of the first fluctuation and the last 5 fluctuations of each state.

(Explanation of feature unit 018SG)
Next, an embodiment in the feature unit 018SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-23. FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 018SG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the low base state, and FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table in the high base state. In the feature section 018SG, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature sections 069SG and 099SG will be omitted from the illustration and detailed description, and the differences will be mainly described. Further, the feature configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 018SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 069SG and the feature section 099SG.

FIG. 13-1 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 018SG. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach variation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... In addition, a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... May be different. Further, although the super reach α and the super reach β are provided as the super reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type as in the normal reach fluctuation putter.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect of the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Further, among the fluctuation patterns of the super reach, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β has a variable display period longer than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach α (80 seconds). .. On the other hand, the variable display period of the super reach γ deviation pattern is shorter than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the super reach α deviation pattern because it is the deviation pattern for high base as described later. It is said to be a period (40 seconds).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 13-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is a normal state (low base state). If the variable display result is "big hit" in the normal state (low base state), select the big hit variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach). It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot), PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot). In the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. That is, when the game state is a low base state and the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination rate is higher in the order of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off" and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the deviation pattern determination table A is used. The fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach out of reach), PA2-1 (variation pattern of out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern of out of super reach α), and PA2-3 (variation of out of super reach β). Pattern) and determine. Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected, and the variation pattern determination table B for deviation is used. The fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), and PA2-3 (variation of super reach β loss). Pattern) and determine. Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

FIG. 13-2 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is a time saving state (high base state). When the variable display result is "big hit" in the time saving state (high base state), the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach) using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot). In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. That is, when the game state is a high base state and the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination rate is higher in the order of normal reach and super reach γ.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is "off", the deviation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PA1-4 (non-reach deviation pattern) using the deviation pattern determination table D. , PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ deviation). Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 determination values are assigned to PA2-4. Assigned.

(About various productions)
Next, various effects performed in the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-3 to 13-5. FIG. 13-3 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, and γ. FIG. 13-4 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the out-of-range fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, and γ. 13-5 are diagrams for explaining the contents of various effects in FIG. 13-5, and are diagrams for explaining character types in FIGS. 13-5.

Although not particularly shown, the effect control CPU 120 is not shown in particular, but in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the normal reach variation pattern, after the variable display is started, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, and the normal reach effect is performed as the variable display effect (hereinafter referred to as the normal reach effect). , Abbreviated as "N reach production"). After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends without developing into a super reach effect (hereinafter, abbreviated as "SP reach effect").

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, in the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the super reach fluctuation pattern, the period from the timing ta0 at which the variable display is started to the elapse of a predetermined period (ta0 to ta1). Then, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 13-9 (N1)). In addition, as the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED208 light emission pattern in this period (ta0 to ta1), in the low base state, the light emission pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of normal background effects, and in the high base state, a plurality of types of music. It is said that the light emission pattern is according to the above, and it is various by combining the light emission pattern according to various SP reach effects with the light emission pattern according to multiple types of normal background effects and the light emission patterns according to multiple types of music. The effect of the effect can be enhanced by the various light emission patterns.

At the timing ta1 when a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing ta0 when the variable display is started, the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, and the "N reach effect" as the variable display effect is executed over the predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). After that, the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode at the timing ta2, and the “SP reach effect” as the variable display effect is executed for a predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

In this way, the "N reach effect" is a common effect executed in both the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, and in the case of the normal reach variation pattern, it ends without developing into the "SP reach effect" and is super. In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, it develops into "SP reach production". Therefore, the player can expect to develop into the "SP reach effects A to E" described later by executing the "N reach effect" even in the case of the normal reach variation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, "SP reach effects A to E" indicate whether or not the variable display result is "big hit", that is, "big hit" or "missing". It is an effect of notifying, and in the SP reach effect period, the "decision effect" described later is executed over a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in FIG. 13-3, when the variable display result is a big hit, after the end of the "SP reach effects A to E", the "post-effect" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7). After that, the variable display ends. In this way, the variable display based on the super reach fluctuation pattern of SP reach α, β, and γ is the variable display part (ta0 to ta5) that executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. It is composed of a post-production part (ta5 to ta7) that informs the expected number of balls that can be acquired in the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-4, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the variable display ends at the same time as the end of "SP reach effects A to E". After the notification of the loss is completed (ta5 to ta5A), the confirmation decoration symbol of the predetermined reach combination that is not the big hit combination is temporarily stopped and returned to the normal background screen (shaking state), and the symbol confirmation period is reached. Temporary stop is displayed until it becomes.

Next, various effects executed in the super reach fluctuation pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 13-5 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach α fluctuation pattern, “SP reach effect A” is executed as the SP reach effect, and when the variation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern. When "SP reach effect B" or "SP reach effect C" is executed as the SP reach effect and the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect D" or "SP reach effect E" is executed as the SP reach effect. Is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), in the "SP reach effects B to E" other than the "SP reach effect A", the ally character A different from the ally character A-1 and the ally character A-1. -2, an enemy character X-1, and an enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1 can appear. The number of types of ally characters and enemy characters is not limited to the above, and ally characters and enemy characters other than the above may appear. Further, even if the characters are the same, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the display mode.

"SP reach effect A" is an effect that is executed when the SP reach α fluctuation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and a moving image for performing a bowling challenge is displayed. When all the pins fall, the "big hit" is notified, and when all the pins do not fall, the "missing" is notified. In the moving image of the bowling challenge, the friendly characters A-1 and A-2 and the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are not displayed.

"SP reach effect B" can be executed when the SP reach β fluctuation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 Is a production in which a moving image of "Battle A" confronting in the city is displayed, and when the ally character A-1 defeats the enemy character X-1 and wins, the "big hit" is notified and the ally character A-1 Is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-1, and the "missing" is notified.

"SP reach effect C" can be executed when the SP reach β fluctuation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 Is a production in which a moving image of "Battle A" confronting in the city is displayed, and when the ally character A-2 defeats the enemy character X-2 and wins, the "big hit" is notified and the ally character A-2. Is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-2, and the "missing" is notified.

"SP reach effect D" is enabled when the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B (high base state), and is enabled for allies. It is a production that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which character A-1 and enemy character X-1 confront each other in the wilderness, and when ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, " "Big hit" is notified, and "missing" is notified when the ally character A-1 is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-1.

"SP reach effect E" can be executed when the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined when the gaming state is one of the time saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time saving state B (high base state), and the ally. It is a production that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which character A-1 and enemy character X-2 confront each other in the wilderness, and when ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, " "Big hit" is notified, and "missing" is notified when the ally character A-1 is defeated without defeating the enemy character X-2.

Since the fluctuation pattern of super reach β has a higher expectation of big hit than the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, the expectation of big hit is higher in SP reach production B and SP reach production C than in SP reach production A ( Jackpot expectation: SP reach production A <SP reach production B <SP reach production C).

The "decision effect" is a predetermined period (for example, timing ta3 when the final confrontation of bowling or battle starts just before the end of the SP reach effect) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the SP reach effects A to E. , Ta3 to ta5). Specifically, during the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation of the push button 31B, the "win / fail button effect" for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B and the operation of the push button 31B are detected during the operation valid period. It includes a "movable body effect" that is executed at the timing when the operation is performed or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B.

The "movable body effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit, and the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, or the operation valid period without detecting the operation of the push button 31B. This is an effect in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the above is completed. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the operation is not executed at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation valid period ends.

Further, according to the execution of the movable body effect (falling of the movable body 32), the effect image related to the operation of the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body LED 208 and the game effect are displayed. A light emitting effect that lights the lamp 9 or the like with a predetermined light emitting color (for example, rainbow color lighting), and a vibration that drives the vibration motor 61 for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B. A staging and a sound staging that outputs a predetermined sound effect are performed.

Further, in the SP reach effect A, the ally character and the enemy character are not displayed in the boring confrontation, so that the character is not displayed in the movable body effect, while in the SP reach effect B to E, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the battle confrontation. By displaying, the enemy character that was displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed even in the movable body production.

In this way, in the "decision effect", when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit notification is performed by executing the movable body effect after the hit / fail button effect is performed, and the variable display result is out of order. In some cases, after the pass / fail button effect is performed, the missed notification is performed without executing the movable body effect.

The "post-effect A" is executed after being notified that the SP reach effects A to C are controlled to the big hit game state when the variable display result is a big hit in the normal state (low base state) of the game state. To. Specifically, in the SP reach effects A to C, after the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the jackpot confirmation notification is performed. The re-variable display was executed in the re-lottery variable part (ta5 to ta6) in which the re-variable display of the confirmed decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is executed, and in the re-lottery variable part. It is composed of a re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in which the display result is notified when the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed later in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-production A is set to "10 seconds".

In the present embodiment, in the SP reach effects A to C, the definite decorative symbol consisting of a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the revariable display is started in the re-lottery variable part. After that, in the re-lottery result part, the definite decorative symbol consisting of a combination of even-numbered symbols or the definite decorative symbol consisting of a combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed. When the confirmed decorative symbol consisting of a combination of even symbols is stopped and displayed in the re-lottery result part, it is notified that the "big hit A" is controlled to the time saving state A after the end of the jackpot game state, and the odd symbols are displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol consisting of the combination is stopped and displayed (symbol promotion), it is notified that the "big hit B" is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, in the post-effect A of the SP reach effect A, the character does not appear in the SP reach effect A, so that the character does not appear in the post-effect A either. Further, in the post-production A of the SP reach productions B and C, the character appears in the SP reach productions B and C, but the character does not appear in the post-production A. By doing so, even when the SP reach effect A in which the character does not appear is executed, the post-effect A is executed in a manner in which the character does not appear, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The "post-effect B" is controlled to the big hit game state in the SP reach effects D and E when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A, the probability change state, and the time saving state B (high base state). It is executed after being notified. Specifically, in the SP reach effects D and E, after the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the jackpot confirmation notification is performed. Scheduled ball ejection addition parts (ta5 to ta6) in which the scheduled number of balls to be ejected is added and displayed according to the ally characters appearing in SP reach effects D and E attacking the enemy character, and the ally character becomes the enemy character. After giving the last blow, the scheduled number of balls is stopped and displayed, and after the planned number of balls is notified, the fixed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends. It is composed of ta6 to ta7). The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-effect B is set to be "15 seconds", which is longer than the execution period of the post-effect A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in the SP reach α is 45 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in the SP reach β. Is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach γ is 40 seconds. That is, the variable display part period is shortened in the order of SP reach β, SP reach α, and SP reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A); SP reach β> SP reach α> SP reach γ). ..

Further, the period (ta0 to ta1) from the start of the variable display in the SP reach α, β, and γ to the N reach is different, and the period from the start of the variable display in the SP reach γ to the N reach. The period (ta0 to ta1) is shorter than the period (ta0 to ta1) from the start of variable display to N reach in SP reach α and β (ta0 to ta1; SP reach γ <SP reach α, β).

Further, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in the SP reach α, β, and γ is different, and the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in the SP reach γ is N in the SP reach α and β. It is shorter than the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the reach effect (ta1 to ta2; SP reach γ <SP reach α, β).

Further, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of the SP reach effects A to E in the SP reach α, β, and γ are different, and the SP reach γ (SP reach effects D and E) and the SP reach α (SP reach effects A) are different. , SP reach β (SP reach effect B, C) becomes longer in this order {ta2 to ta5; SP reach γ (SP reach effect D, E) <SP reach α (SP reach effect A) <SP reach β (SP) Reach production B, C)}.

Further, while the variable display part period (40 seconds) of SP reach γ is shorter than the variable display part period (45 seconds) of SP reach α and the variable display part period (80 seconds) of SP reach β (variable display period). SP reach β> SP reach α> SP reach γ), SP reach γ (SP reach effects D, E) After the decision effect is completed, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R has a predetermined jackpot combination. The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-effect B until the finalized decorative symbol is stopped is determined by the SP reach α (SP reach effect A) and the SP reach β (SP reach effect B, C). It is longer than the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-production A from the end to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R (ta5 to ta7). ta7; SP reach γ (15 seconds)> SP reach α, β (10 seconds)).

Further, the execution period (ta3 to ta5) of the "decision effect" in the SP reach effects A to E is common to the SP reach effects A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP reach effect A = SP reach effect B =. SP reach production C = SP reach production D = SP reach production E). Therefore, since the control data of the movable body 32 and the movable body LED 208 in the SP reach effects A to E can be shared, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. The execution period of the "win / fail button effect" and the execution period of the "movable body effect" in the "decision effect" are also common to the SP reach effects A to E.

Further, the execution period of the "post-effects A and B" in the SP reach α, β, and γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the SP reach effect A. From the timing ta5 when the fixed decoration symbol that is the predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification of ~ E, the fixed decoration symbol that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (variable display ends). ) By setting the timing up to ta7 (ta5 to ta7), it becomes easier to recognize the timing at which the post-production is executed, and at the same time, the form in which the attention to the post-production A and B can be increased is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the "post-production A, B" is used in the symbol confirmation period, the jackpot fanfare period, etc., which are started after the fixed decoration symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is stopped and displayed. May be feasible.

Further, the variable display period of the SP reach γ for the high base is shorter than the variable display period of the SP reach β for the low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ <SP reach β), and the “movable body” in the SP reach γ. The period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "effect" ends to the timing ta7 (ta4 to ta7) when the fixed decorative symbol, which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is stopped and displayed, is the timing ta4 when the "movable body effect" ends in the SP reach β. It is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ> SP reach β) until the timing ta7 when the definite decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. By doing so, in the SP reach γ executed in a short variable display period, the period after the end of the “movable body effect” is lengthened to enhance the impression of the variable display even if the variable display period is short. be able to.

Further, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C is the same, and the execution period (post-effect B) corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E is common. ta5 to ta7) are all common. By doing so, the control data of the post-effects A and B, particularly the post-effect B, can easily divert the motion control data of the character, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-effect A" corresponding to each of the SP reach effects A to C is the same, and the execution period (post-effect B) corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E is common. While ta5 to ta7) are all common, the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" and the execution period (15 seconds) of "post-effect B" are different, so that each of SP reach effects A to C is different. By making the production period of the post-production A corresponding to the above common, it is possible to easily standardize the production content and control, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and by executing the post-production B with a different production period. , It is possible to prevent the post-production A and B from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the post-production.

(Operation modes of SP reach effects A to E and post-effects A and B)
Next, the operation modes of the SP reach effects A to E and the post-effects A and B when the variable display result is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-6. 13-6 is a diagram showing the display mode of the character in the SP reach effects A to E, (B) a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach effects A to E, and (C) a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach effects A to E, and FIGS. 13-6 shows the SP reach. It is a figure which shows the output pattern of the BGM and the sound effect in the production A to E.

As shown in FIGS. 13-6 (A), the display mode of the characters in the SP reach effects A to E will be described. In the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the boring confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach effects, the SP reach effects A In the SP reach effect B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed. In the SP reach effect D, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed. As described above, the SP reach effect A is an effect in which the character is not displayed, while the SP reach effects B to E are the effects in which the character is displayed.

In addition, during the execution period of the "hit / fail button effect" of the determined effect in the SP reach effect, no character is displayed in the SP reach effects A to E, while in the execution period of the "movable body effect", the SP reach effect A , The character is not displayed, in the SP reach effect B, the enemy character X-1 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed, and in the SP reach effect C, the enemy character X-2 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed. In the SP reach effect D, the enemy character X-1 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the enemy character X-2 displayed in the battle confrontation is displayed.

Further, during the execution period (ta4 to ta5) of the jackpot confirmation notification in the SP reach effect, the character is not displayed in the SP reach effect A, and in the SP reach effect B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed. In the SP reach effect C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect D, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and the SP reach effect is displayed. In E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed.

Further, in the re-lottery variation part (ta5 to ta6) and the re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-effect A corresponding to the SP reach effects A to C, the character is not displayed in the SP reach effect A, and the SP In the reach effect B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are not displayed, and in the SP reach effect C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are not displayed.

Further, in the scheduled launch addition part (ta5 to ta6) and the scheduled launch notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach effects D and E, in the SP reach effect D, the ally character A-1 And the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed.

In this way, in the SP reach effect A, the character is not displayed in the boring confrontation, so that the character is not displayed in the movable body effect or the post-effect A, while in the SP reach effects B to E, the character is confronted with the ally character in the battle confrontation. The enemy character is also displayed in the movable body effect and the post effect A and B.

That is, in the SP reach effect A, the image of the mode related to the boring confrontation (the image in which the character is not displayed) is displayed in the movable body effect before the big hit confirmation notification is performed, and in the SP reach effects B to E, the big hit. In the movable body effect before the definite notification is performed, the image of the mode related to the battle confrontation (the image of the enemy character that was opposed) is displayed, so the SP reach effects A to E and the SP reach effect A. It is possible to enhance the relationship with the movable body effect performed during the effect period of ~ E.

Further, in the SP reach effect A, an image of an aspect related to the SP reach effect A (an image in which the character is not displayed) is displayed in the post-effect A, and in the SP reach effects D and E, the SP reach is displayed in the post-effect B. Since the images of the modes related to the effects D and E (images of the friendly character and the enemy character who faced each other) are displayed, the SP reach effects A, D and E and the end of the SP reach effects A, D and E. It is possible to enhance the relevance of the post-productions A and B to be executed later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (B), the light emission patterns of the movable body LEDs 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the SP reach effects A to E will be described. The numerical values in parentheses (for example, B100, etc.) of each pattern indicate the extended commands described in the feature unit 069SG. Further, the various light emission patterns described below differ from other light emission patterns in at least one of a plurality of elements such as emission color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting time, extinguishing timing, extinguishing time, and blinking cycle. Each emission pattern can be changed in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach production, the SP reach production A is lit by the light emission pattern LP1-1 based on the expansion command B100, and the SP reach productions B and C are lit by the expansion command. It is lit by the light emission pattern LP1-2 based on B101, and is lit by the light emission pattern LP1-3 based on the extended command B102 in the SP reach effects D and E.

Further, during the execution period of the "hit / fail button effect" in the SP reach effect, the light emission pattern LP2-1 to 4 common to the SP reach effects A to E is lit based on the extended commands B200 to B203. .. As for the emission patterns LP2-2 to 4, one of them is selected based on the variable display result, and the expectation is higher in the order of emission patterns LP2-2, LP2-3, LP2-4. ing.

Further, during the execution period of the "movable body effect" and the "big hit notification" in the SP reach effect, the SP reach effects A to E are lit by the common light emission pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B000. Further, during the execution period of the "missing notification" in the SP reach effect, the SP reach effects A to E are lit by the common light emission pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B300.

Further, in the re-lottery fluctuation part in the post-effect A and the scheduled ball ejection addition part (ta5 to ta6) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effects A to C are lit by the common light emission pattern LP4-1 based on the extended command BA00. Then, in the SP reach effects D and E, the lights are turned on by the common light emission pattern LP4-4 based on the extended command BB00.

Further, in the re-lottery result part in the post-effect A and the scheduled ball ejection notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effects A to C are lit by the common light emission pattern LP4-2 based on the extended command BA01. Or, it is lit by the common light emission pattern LP4-3 based on the extended command BA02, and in the SP reach effects D and E, it is lit by the common light emission pattern LP4-5 based on the extended command BB01, or it is turned on by the extended command BB02. Based on this, it is lit with a common light emission pattern LP4-6.

The light emission patterns LP1-1 to 3, LP2-1 to 4, LP3-1 to 2, and LP4-1 to 6 are patterns that emit light in different light emission modes based on the light emission control data described later. The outline of each light emission pattern will be described below. The extended command is shown in parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (A), in the "boring / battle", the light emitting pattern LP1-1 (B100) has a frame LED (frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1) according to the introduction of the reach title and the moving image of the boring confrontation. ~ 9R12) and the on-board LED (movable body LED208) emit light (see FIG. 13-10), and the light emission pattern LP1-2 (B101) introduces a reach title and emits light based on the color of the city background. The frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in color, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface also emit light according to the actions (attack action, etc.) of the ally A-1 / A-2 and the enemy X-1 / X-2. It is a light emitting pattern (see FIGS. 13-11 (A2) and (A3)), and the light emitting pattern LP1-3 (B102) is a frame LED and a game board surface with a light emitting color based on the introduction of the title and the color of the wilderness background. This is a pattern in which the upper LED emits light, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light according to the actions (attack operation, etc.) of the ally A-1 and the enemy X-1 / X-2 (FIG. 13-12 (FIG. 13-12). See A4) and (A5)).

In the "hit / fail button effect", the light emission pattern LP2-1 (B200) is the default white frame LED after the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in accordance with "hold down the button to accumulate power!". And the pattern that the LED on the game board surface emits light (see FIG. 13-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-2 (B201) is for power-up (first stage) at the time of button operation, and the frame LED and the game are in "blue". It is a pattern that the LED on the board emits light (see FIG. 13-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for power-up (second stage) at the time of button operation, and is "green" on the frame LED and the game board surface. The LED emits light (see FIG. 13-13), and the light emission pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for power-up (third stage) when the button is operated, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in "red". It is a pattern (see FIG. 13-13). It should be noted that the light emission patterns LP2-2 to 4 are light emission patterns that gradually change to blue, green, and red (MAX) according to the player's long press operation (how much the gauge display is accumulated).

In the "missing notification", when the light emitting pattern LP3-1 (B300) is notified of the "missing" in the result notification, the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in white with low brightness, and the display screen is a normal background. It is a pattern that continues until the next fluctuation is started even if it returns to (see FIG. 13-16).

In the "movable body effect & big hit notification", the light emission pattern LP3-2 (B000) is used as the background for the movable body effect (first period) when the "big hit" is notified in the result notification. In the movable body production (second period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light according to the background image and the effect display at the time of the movable body production, and the frame LED and the game are displayed in rainbow colors in the jackpot notification. It is a pattern in which the LED on the board emits light (see FIGS. 13-14 and 13-15). The extended command (B000) is different from other extended commands in that it operates the movable body 32, so that the operation control data (sets the number of steps, the speed, and the time related to the motor drive), the frame LED, and the LED on the game board surface are used. Both the gradation control data for emitting light and the gradation control data are set.

Further, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for the movable body operation control and the LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extended command for the movable body operation control and the extended command for the LED lighting control. The control program capacity can be reduced. If the extended command used for the movable body effect is divided into the extended command for moving body operation control and the extended command for LED lighting control, one of the extended commands may be missed due to a defect, but it is common. This makes it possible to suitably produce a movable body.

In addition, by performing movable body operation control and LED lighting control with one extended command without separating the extended command between "movable body effect" and "big hit notification", it is not necessary to divide the extended command according to the effect. Therefore, the program capacity of the staging control can be reduced. If the extended command is divided into "movable body effect" and "big hit notification", there is a risk that one of the extended commands will be missed due to a defect, but by sharing it, "movable body effect" and "big hit" are suitable. "Notification" can be performed.

In the "re-lottery fluctuation / scheduled ball ejection addition", the light emission pattern LP4-1 (BA00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light according to the moving image (round and round) of the background (FIG. 13-17). (Refer to F1)), the light emission pattern LP4-4 (BB00) is a light emission color based on the color of the space background, and the frame LED and the KED on the game board surface emit light, and the action of the ally A-1 (attack action, etc.) ), The frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light (see FIGS. 13-18).

In the "re-lottery result / scheduled launch notification", the light emitting pattern LP4-2 (BA01) emits light from the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface when the combination of even symbols (for example, 666) is stopped and displayed. It is a pattern (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), and the light emitting pattern LP4-3 (BA02) is brighter than the light emitting pattern LP4-2 when the combination of odd symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stopped and displayed. It is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light at a higher gradation cycle speed (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), and the light emission pattern LP4-5 (BB01) is for the scheduled launch notification "750". , The frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light according to the display of "750", and the same gradation control data as "1500" is used until "750" is displayed (FIG. 13-19). (Refer to (G1-3) to (G3)), the light emitting pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the scheduled launch notification "1500", and is more than when "750" is displayed according to the display of "1500". It is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light at high brightness and the gradation cycle is fast, and the gradation control data common to "750" is used until "1500" is displayed (FIG. 13-19 (FIG. 13-19). See G1-4) to (G4)).

Further, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation notification as the post-period effect in the later period after the movable body effect during the execution of the SP reach effects A to E, and the jackpot confirmation notification depends on the type of the SP reach effects A to E. However, since the light emission patterns of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable LED 208 are common (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2), the common light emission pattern is used regardless of the type of SP reach effects A to E. Since the jackpot confirmation notification is executed, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

The light emission pattern may be different depending on the types of SP reach effects A to E. For example, the light emission pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of the SP reach effect A is set to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow emission) shown in FIG. 13-21, and is used for the jackpot confirmation notification of the SP reach effects B and C. The corresponding light emission pattern LP3-2 is a rainbow-colored blinking pattern (flash rainbow light emission) shown in FIG. 13-22, and the light emission pattern LP3-3 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of the SP reach effects D and E is shown in FIG. 13-. The rainbow-colored blinking pattern (flash rainbow emission) shown in 22 may be changed to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow emission) shown in FIG. 13-21.

Further, the light emission patterns of the movable body LEDs 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball ejection addition part of the post-production B are common to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4). As a result, the light emission pattern can be made common, so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

Further, the light emitting patterns of the movable body LEDs 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 (light emitting patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) in the scheduled ball ejection notification part of the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the SP reach effect E. On the other hand, the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 of the post-effect A corresponding to the SP reach effect A, and the SP reach effect D The manufacturing cost is further reduced by being different from the light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-production B corresponding to the SP reach production E. The reduction can be achieved, and the effect of the post-effect can be enhanced by executing the post-effect A having a different light emission pattern.

In the present embodiment, the operation valid period is an arbitrary timing in which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed, or the operation valid period is not detected without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. Even when the "movable body effect" is executed at the end timing, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is exemplified by the common light emission pattern LP3-2, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 emit light in different light emission patterns according to the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed. You may do it. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the light emitting mode by changing the timing at which the player operates, so that the hobby of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), regarding the LED light emission pattern in the SP reach effect, the light emission pattern LP1-2 is commonly used in the SP reach effects B and C. For example, the SP reach effect B is used. The light emission pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + image color of the enemy character X-1, light emission according to the action) is used, and the light emission pattern LP1-2-2 (B200: city background) is used for SP reach C. By using color + image color of enemy character X-2, light emission according to action), the brightness data of a part of the LED light emission pattern (city background color part) of SP reach effects B and C is used in common. While suppressing the development cost, the parts related to the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 may each use dedicated luminance data to make a difference in the appearance at the minimum cost.

The light emission pattern LP1-3 is commonly used in the SP reach effects D and E. For example, in the SP reach effect D, the light emission pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: wilderness background color + image color of the enemy character X-1) , Light emission according to the action), and SP Reach E uses the light emission pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: wilderness background color + image color of enemy character X-2, light emission according to the action). While reducing the development cost by using the brightness data of a part of the LED light emission pattern (city background color part) of the SP reach effects D and E in common, the part related to the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 has their own brightness. The data may be used to make a difference in the presentation at the lowest cost.

Further, one of the SP reach effects B and C in the low base state and the SP reach effects D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach effects D and E) is set as a common light emission pattern, and the other (for example, SP) is used. Reach effects B and C) may be different emission patterns. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost on one side and to show the difference in the production on the other side.

(Gradation control data)
Here, the control data for realizing the light emission effect will be briefly described. FIG. 13-21 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED with a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. FIG. 13-22 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in the lighting pattern of the flash rainbow light emission.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, as "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED, data of various luminances corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 40 msec. .. The effect control CPU 120 smoothly lights the frame lamp in a rainbow color by performing lamp control based on the smooth rainbow light emission data table.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-22, as the "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED, the luminance data corresponding to the extinguishing of 20 msec corresponds to the seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 msec intervals. It is specified between data of various brightness. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the flash rainbow light emission data table to violently turn on the frame lamp in the rainbow color.

The ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a light emission control table used by the effect control CPU 120 to control the light emission of each LED. The light emission control table includes, for example, a light emission pattern (light emission patterns LP1-1 to 2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to 3, LP4-1 to 4, etc.), a driver ID, an output terminal number, and electrical components. And the data for generating the light emission control are defined in association with each other.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emitting pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light emitting body driver, and the output terminal number stores the number of the light emitting body driver output terminal. The light emitter driver and the electrical components corresponding to the output terminal numbers (for example, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, movable body LED208, etc.) are stored in the light emitting body driver, and the light emitting body driver is stored in the light emission control generation data. The data for controlling the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the above, and the data used for generating the light emission control data based on the control data format is stored.

Each emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit emission time, a emission control cycle, and format data. For example, the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table is stored in the data name, and the format type includes the basic format (EX = 0) and the extended format (EX = 1). Identification information (“basic” or “extended”) of which format is applied is stored, and the address set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the illuminant driver is stored in the address, and data transmission is performed. The cycle stores the cycle of transmitting the light emission control data from the effect control board 12 to the light emitting body driver of the lamp board 14, and the unit light emitting time is the unit time of causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitting body driver to emit light. It will be remembered. In this embodiment, the data transmission cycle will be described as 10 ms (milliseconds).

In the light emission control cycle, a time (hereinafter, this cycle is referred to as “light emission control cycle”), which is a control unit for light emission for one cycle, is stored. This light emission control cycle differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, when the emission type is "continuous" or "blinking", a time such as "100ms" can be set, and the emission type is "switching" (special emission color due to change of multiple colors (special emission color due to change of multiple colors). In the case of rainbow-colored light emission, etc.), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

In the format data, time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type is stored. Specifically, in the format data, the light emission order and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the light emission order are defined in association with each other.

In the present embodiment, it will be described that the light emission of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 is controlled by the Q data (color hexadecimal number, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal. In the color hexadecimal number, "16 × 16 = 256 gradations" is expressed by expressing each of RGB by a total of 6 hexadecimal digits (0 to F) by 2 digits, but in the present specification, 2 digits of each of RGB are expressed. The numerical values of are the same, and each of RGB is illustrated and explained as a notation in which each digit is abbreviated to a total of 3 digits. Further, for the sake of simplicity, the notation of "0x" representing a hexadecimal number is omitted and illustrated and described.

Further, the Q data includes Q data for group 1 and Q data for group 2 as Q data to be output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit constituting the light emitter driver corresponding to the address. Q data for 3 is included. In the Q data corresponding to each group, RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in the group are stored.

This will be described in detail. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10 ms", it is defined that the effect control board 12 transmits data to the light emitter driver every 10 ms. Further, if the unit light emission time is "100 ms", it is defined that the target LED emits light in a unit light emission time of 100 ms. Further, if the light emission control cycle is "100 ms", the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and the same time as the unit light emission time is set as the light emission control cycle in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color. There is.

Further, for example, in the format data, the order of light emission is defined from "1" to "N", and the Q data (RGB value) of each group is defined for each of the light emission orders "1" to "N". If "0, 0, F" is defined as, the R value and G value in the Q data are set to "0" and the B value is set to "F" for all emission orders. Continuous blue emission is realized.

Next, control data for controlling the gradation of the LED to realize light emission due to color mixing will be described. The Q data (RGB value) in the gradation control data described here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the above-mentioned emission control generation data.

FIG. 13-22 shows gradation control data which is control data for performing gradation control for realizing rainbow-colored blinking (corresponding to flash rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-2, etc.) in the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated. Since the gradation control data of the frame LEDs 9R1 to 9R12 is targeted for the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, the illustration is omitted. In this gradation control data, the switching unit emission time Δtn is shown in the left column, and each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 (group 1 (9L1)) is shown in the right column. The Q data (RGB value) corresponding to 9L4), ...) Is expressed in hexadecimal.

Further, in the emission order 2 of the gradation control data shown in FIGS. 13-22, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 20 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of the groups 1 to 12 (9L1 to 9L12) are “0, 0, By setting "0", the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are turned off.

Further, in the emission order 1 of the gradation control data shown in FIGS. 13-22, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 30 ms, the Q data (RGB values) of the groups 1 and 2 are “0, 4, F”, and the group 3. Q data (RGB value) is "0, 8, F", Q data (RGB value) of group 4 is "0, C, F", and Q data (RGB value) of group 5 is "0, F, D". , The Q data (RGB value) of group 6 is "0, F, 9", the Q data (RGB value) of group 7 is "0, F, 5", and the Q data (RGB value) of group 8 is "0". , F, 1 ”, Q data (RGB value) of group 9 is“ 2, F, 0 ”, Q data (RGB value) of group 10 is“ 6, F, 0 ”, Q data (RGB value) of group 11. ) Is "A, F, 0" and the Q data (RGB values) of the group 12 is "F, F, 0". ) Is realized.

In this way, by controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to emit light in a plurality of colors in order with a short switching unit emission time Δts, and by sandwiching the control to turn off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, human beings. It can be visually recognized as if it is blinking in rainbow colors. The mode sandwiched between them is not limited to extinguishing, and may be, for example, white that does not constitute rainbow color. In the case of emitting light in white, "1. An RGB value with low brightness such as "1, 1" may be set.

FIG. 13-21 shows the gradation control data which is the control data for performing the gradation control for realizing the rainbow-colored lighting (corresponding to smooth rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-1, etc.) in the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated.

In the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21, unlike the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21, the control for turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 is not sandwiched between them. Therefore, it can be visually recognized by humans as if they were lit in rainbow colors. In the emission order 1 of the gradation control data, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the emission of the same emission color as the emission order 2 of the gradation control data is realized. In addition, even in the gradation control data, by controlling the emission colors to be emitted from the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 in order with a short switching unit emission time Δts, the emission colors are lit in rainbow colors visually by humans. It can be visually recognized as if it were.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 13-6 (C), the output patterns of BGM and sound effects in the SP reach effects A to E will be described. Further, in the various sound patterns described below, at least one of a plurality of elements such as volume, sound quality, rhythm, tempo, and music is different from other sound patterns, and each sound pattern is changed variously. It is possible.

In the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the boring confrontation and the battle confrontation in the SP reach production, the BGM and the sound effect are output in the sound pattern BP1-1 in the SP reach production A, and the sound pattern BP1- in the SP reach production B. BGM and sound effects are output in 2, in SP reach effect C, BGM and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-3, and in SP reach effect D, BGM and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-4. In the SP reach effect E, the BGM and the sound effect are output in the sound pattern BP1-5.

Further, during the execution period of the "hit / miss button effect" in the SP reach effect, the sound patterns BP2-1 to 4 common to the SP reach effects A to E are output. As for the sound patterns BP2-2 to 4, one of them is selected based on the variable display result, and the expectation is higher in the order of the sound patterns BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4. ing.

Further, during the execution period of the "movable body effect" and the "big hit notification" in the SP reach effect, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound patterns BP0-1 to 3 in the SP reach effects A to E. Further, during the execution period of the "missing notification" in the SP reach effect, the SP reach effects A to E are lit with the common sound patterns BP3-1 to 3.

Further, in the re-lottery fluctuation part in the post-effect A and the scheduled ball ejection addition part (ta5 to ta6) in the post-effect B, the SP reach effects A to C are output by the sound pattern BP4-1, and the SP reach effect D, In E, BGM and sound effects are output by the sound pattern BP4-4.

Further, in the re-lottery result part in the post-production A and the scheduled ball ejection notification part (ta6 to ta7) in the post-production B, in the SP reach productions A to C, the sound pattern BP4-2 or the sound pattern BP4-3 is used. BGM and sound effects are output, and in the SP reach effects D and E, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound pattern BP4-5 or the sound pattern BP4-6.

The sound patterns BP1-1 to 4, BP2-1 to 4, BP0-1 to 3, BP3-1 to 3, and BP4-1 to 4 output sounds in different modes based on the sound control data, respectively. It is said that the pattern is to be made, and the outline of each sound pattern will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (B), in "bowling / battle", the sound pattern BP1-1 is the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for the SP reach production A, the voice of "defeat the pin!", And the SP reach. It is a pattern in which the BGM of the production A is output (see FIG. 13-10), and the sound pattern BP1-2 is the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for the SP reach production B, the voice of "Fight!" It is a pattern in which the voice of the ally A-1, the BGM of the SP reach effect B, and the battle effect sound are output (see Fig. 13-11 (A2)), and the sound pattern BP1-3 is the SP reach effect C. It is a pattern that outputs the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for, the voice of "Fight!", The voice of the ally A-2 of "Next is settled!", The BGM of SP reach production C, and the battle sound (Fig.). 13-11 (see A3)), the sound pattern BP1-4 is the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for SP reach production D, the voice of "Fight!", And the voice of ally A-1 of "Next is settled!" , The BGM of the SP reach effect D, the pattern in which the battle effect sound is output (see FIG. 13-12 (A4)), and the sound pattern BP1-5 is the voice at the time of introducing the reach title for the SP reach effect E, " This is a pattern in which the voice of "Fight!", The voice of ally A-1 of "Next is settled!", The BGM of SP reach production E, and the battle effect sound are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A5)).

In the "hit / fail button effect", the sound pattern BP2-1 is a pattern in which the voice of "hold down the button to accumulate power" and the sound effect of power level 0 are output (see FIG. 13-13). The sound pattern BP2-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the power level 1 is output, the sound pattern BP2-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the power level 2 is output, and the sound pattern BP2-4 is the power. This is a pattern in which a level 3 (MAX) voice and a power level 3 (MAX) sound effect are output.

In the "missing notification", the sound pattern BP3-1 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the failure is output (see FIG. 13-16 (H1)), and the sound pattern BP3-2 is the defeat of the ally A-1 (sorry). ) Voice and battle defeat BGM is output (see Fig. 13-16 (H2) (H4) (H5)), and sound pattern BP3-3 is the defeat (sorry) voice and battle of ally A-2. This is a pattern in which the defeated BGM is output (see FIG. 13-16 (H3)).

In the "movable body effect & jackpot notification", the sound pattern BP0-1 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body effect, the sound effect of success, and the BGM of success are output (see FIG. 13-15 (E1)). The sound pattern BP0-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body effect, the winning voice of the ally A-1, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIGS. 13-15 (E2) (E4) (E5)). The sound pattern BP0-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body effect, the winning voice of the ally A-2, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIG. 13-15 (E3)).

In the "re-lottery variation / scheduled ball addition", the sound pattern BP4-1 is a pattern in which the BGM of the re-lottery variation is output (see FIG. 13-17 (F1)), and the sound pattern BP4-4 is scheduled. This is a pattern in which the BGM of the ball ejection addition, the sound effect (attack) of the scheduled ball ejection addition, the voice for the scheduled ball ejection addition of the ally A-1, and the voice of "press!" Are output (see FIG. 13-18).

In the "re-lottery result / scheduled launch notification", the sound pattern BP4-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of even-numbered symbols and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (FIG. 13-17 (F2), sound pattern BP4). -3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of odd-numbered symbols and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), and the sound pattern BP4-5 is the BGM of the scheduled launch notification, 750. It is a pattern in which sound effects are output (see FIGS. 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), and the sound pattern BP4-6 outputs the sound effects of BGM and 1500 of the scheduled launch notification and the voice of MAX. It is a pattern to be performed (see FIGS. 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

Further, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is common to all types of SP reach effects A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to 3), so that the manufacturing cost can be further reduced. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the operation valid period is an arbitrary timing in which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / fail button effect" is executed, or the operation valid period is not detected without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. Even when the "movable body effect" is executed at the end timing, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect exemplifies the common sound pattern BP2-1 to 4, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the sound effect may be output in a different sound pattern according to the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in which the "hit / miss button effect" is executed. By doing so, the sound effect can be changed by different timings operated by the player, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(Flow of SP reach production A to E)
Next, the flow of the SP reach effects A to E will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-8. FIG. 13-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach effects A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, in the SP reach α, β, and γ, when the SP reach effect is developed from the N reach effect, in the case of the SP reach effect A, boring as shown in (A1). The start image of the battle A between the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2) in the case of the SP reach effect B, and in the case of the SP reach effect C. Displays the start image of the battle A between the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 as shown in (A3), and in the case of the SP reach effect D, the ally character A- as shown in (A4). The start image of the battle B between 1 and the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, the start of the battle B between the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 as shown in (A5). The image is displayed. As described above, the first half of the SP reach effects A to E is different for each of the SP reach effects A to E.

Next, the hit / fail button effect is started at a predetermined timing at the end of the SP reach effect. Specifically, as shown in (B1), after the first operation promotion effect for promoting the long press operation of the push button 31B is started, a predetermined time has elapsed since the first operation promotion effect was started. At the timing, as shown in (B2), the second operation promotion effect for promoting the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is started. As described above, the effect mode in the pass / fail button effect is common to the SP reach effects A to E.

Next, when the variable display result is a big hit, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period of the hit / fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. At the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed without doing so, as shown in (C), an image showing the last throw in bowling and the last blow in battle is displayed.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the ball hits the pin is displayed, and the SP reach effect B is displayed. In the case of (D2), as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of SP reach effect C, , (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of the SP reach effect D, (D4). ), The movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the staging position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of the SP reach staging E, it is shown in (D5). As described above, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the staging position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. As described above, the effect mode of the movable body effect is different between the SP reach effect A, the SP reach effects B and D, and the SP reach effects C and E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect A, a result image indicating that the pin has fallen is displayed as shown in (E1), and in the case of the SP reach effect B, the battle A is displayed as shown in (E2). A result image showing that the player has won is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect C, a result image indicating that the battle A has been won is displayed as shown in (E3). In the case of the SP reach effect D, ( As shown in E4), a result image showing that the battle B has been won is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, a result image showing that the battle A has been won is displayed as shown in (E5). To. It should be noted that the effect mode of the result notification is different for each of the SP reach effects A to E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effects A to C, the post-effect A is started, and in the re-lottery variation part shown in (F1), the image in which the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in (E1 to E3) is revariably displayed is displayed. After being displayed, in the re-lottery result part shown in (F2) and (F3), the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect D, the post-effect B is started, and in the scheduled ball ejection addition part shown in (G1), the ally character A-1 displayed in (A4) attacks the enemy character X-1. Then, an image in which the scheduled ball is added is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect E, the post-effect B is started, and in the scheduled ball addition part shown in (G2), the ally displayed in (A5). An image is displayed in which the character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2 and the scheduled launch ball is added. Next, in the case of the SP reach effects D and E, the scheduled number of balls to be released is displayed in the scheduled ball ejection notification part shown in (G3) and (G4).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period of the pass / fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. The image shown in (C) (D1 to D5) is not displayed at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, and in the case of SP reach effect A, as shown in (H1), the strike failed. The result image shown is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect B, the result image indicating that the battle A has been defeated is displayed as shown in (H2), and in the case of the SP reach effect C, it is shown in (H3). As shown in (H4), a result image indicating that the player has been defeated in Battle A is displayed, and in the case of the SP reach effect D, a result image indicating that the player has been defeated in Battle B is displayed. In the case of E, as shown in (H5), a result image showing that the battle A has been defeated is displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the result notification is different between the SP reach effect A, the SP reach effects B and D, and the SP reach effects C and E.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effects A to E, as shown in (I1), a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is stopped and displayed.

(Example of SP reach production A to E production operation)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the SP reach effects A to E executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-9 to 13-20. FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation from the start of variable display of SP reach α, β, and γ to the development of SP reach effect. FIG. 13-10 is a diagram showing an example of the staging operation of the SP reach staging A. FIG. 13-11 is a diagram showing an example of the staging operation of the SP reach staging B and C. 13-12 is a diagram showing an example of the staging operation of the SP reach staging D and E. FIG. 13-13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the pass / fail button effect. FIG. 13-14 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the movable body effect. FIG. 13-15 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the jackpot notification of the SP reach effects A to E. FIG. 13-16 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the missed notification of the SP reach effects A to E. FIG. 13-17 is a diagram showing an example of the staging operation of the post-staging A. FIG. 13-18 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the post-effect B. FIG. 13-19 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the post-effect B.

In the following description, the staging operations that are commonly executed among the SP reach effects A to E will be collectively described, and the different staging operations will be described individually. Further, it is assumed that a part of the numbers (for example, A to I) assigned to each frame corresponds to the numbers assigned to the frames shown in FIGS. 13-8.

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N1), each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R is based on the fact that any of SP reach α, β, and γ is determined as the fluctuation pattern with the occurrence of the starting prize. In, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In the following, the active display area 018SG003 corresponding to the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 018SG013 corresponding to the active display area 069SG013 of the feature unit 069SG, and the first hold display area corresponding to the first hold display area 069SG011 is displayed. The hold display 018SG001 corresponding to the hold display 069SG001 is displayed in the 018SG011, and the hold display 018SG002 corresponding to the hold display 069SG002 is displayed in the second hold display area 018SG012 corresponding to the second hold display area 069SG012. do.

After the variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N2), when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started. As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N3), the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C and the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach mode was established. After the decorative symbols having different numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol display area 5C is restarted as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N4), which leads to the SP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1), when the SP reach effect A is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01A indicating that A is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01A has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect A) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and a content display indicating bowling. It has 018SG102 and.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-1), an image 018SG103 showing that the pins are lined up in the bowling lane and the challenge is started is displayed and is shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-2). As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-3), after the image 018SG104 in which the ball hits the pin and is knocked down is displayed, an image in which one pin remains in the bowling lane and "one remaining". The image 018SG105 is displayed, which has the characters "!" And indicates that the next throw is the last throw. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-1, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-1. BGM is output.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2), when the SP reach effect B is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01B indicating that B is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01B includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect B) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and an ally character A-1. The content display 018SG102 indicating the above. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-2. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-1), there are a background image 018SG201 showing the city, a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1. Then, the image 018SG202 showing that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-2), the image 018SG203 in which the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are fighting is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-3), an image 018SG204 having a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX1 and showing that the next is the final blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3), when the SP reach effect C is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01C indicating that C is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01C has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect C) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and an ally character A-2. The content display 018SG102 indicating the above. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-3. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-1), there are a background image 018SG201 showing the city, a character image 018SGA2 showing the ally character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2. Then, the image 018SG212 showing that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-2), the image 018SG213 in which the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are fighting is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 having a character image 018SGA2 and a character image 018SGX2 and showing that the next is the final blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4), when the SP reach effect D is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01D indicating that D is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01D has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect D) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and an ally character A-1. The content display 018SG102 indicating the above. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LEDs 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-4. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-1), there are a background image 018SG221 showing the wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1. Then, the image 018SG222 showing that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-2), the image 018SG223 in which the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are fighting is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 having a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX1 and showing that the next is the final blow is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5), when the SP reach effect E is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR on the upper right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01E indicating that E is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01E includes a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach effect E) indicating the type of SP reach effect, an expectation degree display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating a jackpot expectation degree, and an ally character A-1. The content display 018SG102 indicating the above. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-5. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-1), there are a background image 018SG221 showing the wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2. Then, the image 018SG232 showing that the confrontation is started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-2), the image 018SG233 in which the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are fighting is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 having a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX2 and showing that the next is the final blow is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1), when the pass / fail button effect is started, the button image 018SG241 imitating the push button 31B and, for example, "Keep pressing the button to accumulate power!" Operation promotion display 018SG242 and the like are displayed, and an operation promotion effect for promoting a long press operation of the push button 31B is started. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP2-1, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP2-1. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-1), the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "charge start!", The gauge display 018SG243 indicating the power level and the effect image 018SG244 are displayed, and a long press operation is performed. Is detected, the display modes of the gauge display 018SG243 and the effect image 018SG244 change. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission patterns LP2-2 to 4, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound patterns BP2-2 to 4. Voice and BGM are output from 8R.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-2), when the long press operation is detected for a predetermined period, the gauge display 018SG243 becomes MAX, and the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "Power MAX!". To. Even if the long press operation is detected for a predetermined period, the gauge display 018SG243 may not be set to MAX according to the variable display result. Further, the change mode of the power level may be different depending on the variable display result.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the pass / fail button effect, the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "Release!" As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-3), and the push button is displayed to the player. The long press operation of 31B is urged to be released, and the gauge display 018SG243 is switched and displayed on the gauge indicating the remaining operation valid period. Further, the staging operation of FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3) is common to the SP reach staging A to E.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-2), an operation promotion display for accumulating power is executed in the pass / fail button effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion display may not be executed.

Then, it is variable when the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in the hit / fail button effect, or when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B. When the display result is a big hit, the movable body effect shown in FIGS. 13-14 is started.

In the first period from the start of the movable body effect to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position. The attack image 018SG250 showing the last throw and the last blow is displayed. The attack image 018SG250 includes an object image 018SG250A that imitates the spherical operation portion of the push button 31B, and an effect image 018SG250B that shows that the object is moving to the back side of the screen. Further, according to the movement from the origin position of the movable body 32 to the effect position, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are colored according to the background as the light emission effect based on the light emission pattern LP3-2. It lights up, and as a sound effect, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1 to 3, and as a vibration effect, the push button 31B vibrates by the vibration motor 61.

As described above, in the first period of the movable body effect, the effect of the common mode is executed in the SP reach effects A to E, but in the second period after the first period ends, as follows. SP reach effects A to E perform different types of effects.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (D1), in the case of the SP reach effect A, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A and the effect image 018SG250B showing the impact. The impact image 018SG251 that the object hits something is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 exemplifies a mode in which the collided object (for example, a pin) with which an object (ball) collides is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the impact image is not limited to this. An image showing a boring pin may be displayed on the 018SG251.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2) (D4), in the case of the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position and the object image. It has 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B showing an impact, and a character image 018SGX1 showing an enemy character X1, and an impact image 018SG252 showing that the attack hits the enemy character X-1 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D3) and 13-14 (D5), in the case of the SP reach effect C and the SP reach effect E, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position and the object image. It has 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B showing an impact, and a character image 018SGX2 showing an enemy character X2, and an impact image 018SG253 showing that the attack hits the enemy character X-2 is displayed.

Further, in the second period of the movable body effect shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D1) to (D5), a common display effect, light emission effect, sound effect, and vibration effect are performed. Specifically, the effect image 018SG250B is alternately displayed and hidden according to the vibration of the movable body 32 (displayed when the movable body 32 moves upward, displayed when the movable body 32 moves downward, etc.), and emits light. As a result, based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 basically match the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B, and the orange and red colors are from the movable body LED 208 to the frame LED 9L1. It emits light with a light emission pattern that flows outward in the order of 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12, and also emits light with a light emission pattern that flashes violently in white when the effect image 018SG250B is displayed. Based on 3 to 3, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the push button 31B is vibrated by the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect. In addition, in FIGS. 13-14 (D1) to (D5), the display using the light guide plate display device or the like may be performed.

In FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 has a display common to or similar to the display colors of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time. It is displayed in color (for example, similar colors). By doing so, the relationship between the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 showing the enemy character and the effect image 018SG250B can be enhanced, so that the effect of the movable body effect can be enhanced.

Then, after the movable body production is completed, as shown in FIGS. 13-15, it is notified that a big hit will occur. Specifically, in the case of the SP reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E1), an image 018SG261 showing a fallen bowling pin, a character display 018SG262 indicating “success!”, And an effect image 018SG263. The result image 018SG260A showing that the bowling challenge was successful is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the staging position to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-1. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E2), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX1Z showing the enemy character X-1 and "victory!" The result image 018SG260B showing that the ally character A-1 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in the staging position. Move from to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends. The character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by the fade-out display. By displaying the character image 018SGX1Z in this way, it is possible to preferably notify the end of the series of effects.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E3), the character image 018SGA2 showing the ally character A-2, the character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2, and "victory!" The result image 018SG260C showing that the ally character A-2 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in the staging position. Move from to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-3. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends. The character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 is hidden by the fade-out display. By displaying the character image 018SGX2Z in this way, it is possible to preferably notify the end of the series of effects.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E4), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1 and "victory!" The result image 018SG260D showing that the ally character A-1 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in the staging position. Move from to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E5), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2 are "victory!". The result image 018SG260E showing that the ally character A-1 has won the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 is in the staging position. Move from to the origin position. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L is based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , The winning voice and the sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E are displayed, the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E are hidden, and as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (E6), the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C, A fixed decorative symbol (for example, 666, etc.), which is a predetermined jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped and displayed on the 5R, and the characters "big hit" are displayed to notify the jackpot confirmation that the jackpot has been confirmed. Will be executed.

On the other hand, when the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in the pass / fail button effect shown in FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3), or when the push button 31B is pressed. If the variable display result is out of alignment when the operation valid period has elapsed without the release of the long press operation being detected, the movable body effect is not executed, and as shown in FIGS. 13-16, the outlier is confirmed. The indicated missed confirmation notification is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H1), in the case of the SP reach effect A, the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and is an image showing a bowling pin that remains without falling. 018SG271 and a character display 018SG272 indicating "failure ..." are provided, and a result image 018SG270A indicating that the bowling challenge has failed is displayed. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a speaker based on the sound pattern BP3-1. The failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration effect ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIGS. 13-16 (H2) (H4), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the ally character A-1. A character image 018SGA1 showing the character image 018SGA1, a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1, and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeat ...", and the ally character A-1 battles with the enemy character X-1. The result image 018SG270B showing that the confrontation was defeated is displayed. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a speaker based on the sound pattern BP3-2. The failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration effect ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H3), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the character image 018SGA2 showing the ally character A-2 and the enemy. It has a character image 018SGX2 showing the character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeat ...", and is a result showing that the ally character A-2 has been defeated in the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270C is displayed. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a speaker based on the sound pattern BP3-3. The failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration effect ends.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H5), the movable body 32 does not move while being maintained at the origin position, and the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the enemy. It has a character image 018SGX2 showing the character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 showing "defeat ...", and is a result showing that the ally character A-1 has been defeated in the battle confrontation with the enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270E is displayed. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a speaker based on the sound pattern BP3-2. The failure sound effect is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration effect ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E are displayed, the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E are hidden, and as shown in FIGS. 13-16 (H6), the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C, A definite decorative symbol (for example, 676, etc.) of a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach loss”) that is not a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed on the 5R, so that a loss confirmation notification indicating that the loss has been confirmed is executed. ..

Next, when the big hit confirmation notification is executed in the SP reach effects A to C, the post-effect A shown in FIGS. 13-17 is executed.

Specifically, in the jackpot confirmation notification, after the confirmation decoration symbol (for example, 666) which is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, FIGS. 13-17. In the re-lottery variable part shown in (F1), the re-variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, as a light emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emitting pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-1. Is output.

Then, in the re-lottery result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F2), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variation), it is predetermined when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the revariable display. As a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination, a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666) is stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends. Further, as a light emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emitting pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-2. Is output.

Further, in the re-lottery result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F3), when the jackpot type is jackpot B (probability variation), a predetermined jackpot occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the revariable display. As the final decorative symbol to be a combination, the combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends. Further, as a light emitting effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emitting pattern LP4-3, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L, 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-3. Is output.

Next, when the big hit confirmation notification is executed in the SP reach effects D and E, the post-effect B shown in FIGS. 13-18 is executed.

Specifically, in the jackpot confirmation notification, after the confirmation decoration symbol (for example, 666) which is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, FIG. 13-18. In the scheduled ball ejection addition part shown in (G1-1), the background image 018SG280 showing the universe, the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, and the scheduled launching number given in the jackpot game state displaying the scheduled ball ejection number. The scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 indicating the number of balls is displayed, and the post-production B is started. Further, as a light emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emitting pattern LP4-4, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-4. Is output.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and the ally. An image of character A-1 attacking enemy character X-1 is displayed, and additional ball ejection number display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack, and the displayed planned ball ejection number is displayed. It is added to the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281.

Further, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G2), the character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1 and the character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2 are displayed, and the ally. An image of character A-1 attacking enemy character X-2 is displayed, and additional ball ejection number display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed according to the attack, and the displayed planned ball ejection number is displayed. It is added to the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-2), when the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (for example, “300”), the push button 31B is imitated. The button image 018SG283, the operation promotion display 018SG284 such as "press !!", and the gauge display 018SG285 indicating the remaining operation valid period are displayed, and the operation promotion effect for promoting the single push operation of the push button 31B is executed. To.

Next, in the case of the SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-3), the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or the pressing operation is performed. The character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX1 are displayed at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without being detected, the ally character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-1, and the counter value of the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is displayed. Is displayed in a variable manner. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP4-5, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L, 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-5. And sound effects are output.

On the other hand, in the case of the SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-4), the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period elapses, or the pressing operation is performed. The character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX2 are displayed at the timing when the operation valid period elapses without being detected, the ally character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2, and the counter value of the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is displayed. Is displayed in a variable manner. Further, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 are lit based on the light emission pattern LP4-6, and as a sound effect, the speakers 8L and 8R to BGM are based on the sound pattern BP4-6. And sound effects and voices are output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-5), the character image 018SGA1 and the special image 018SGXZ that disappears after the attacked enemy character X-2 is blown and becomes a star are displayed, and at the same time. The scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the number of planned balls that can be acquired in the case of "6R big hit") is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-19 (G3), in the case of the jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being updated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G4), in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the scheduled number of balls counter display 018SG281 is a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500"). After being updated and displayed in, it is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(SP reach production type determination table)
Next, in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 executes the SP reach effect type when the determined variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern. In the determination process, the SP reach effect type determination table used when determining the SP reach effect type will be described. 13-20 is a diagram showing (A) the SP reach effect type determination table A, (B) the SP reach effect type determination table B, and (C) the SP reach effect type determination table C.

In the SP reach effect type determination process, for example, random numbers (0 to 99) for determining the SP reach effect type are extracted, and SP reach is used using any of the SP reach effect type determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. 13-20. Determine the production type.

In the SP reach effect type determination table, as shown in FIGS. 13-20 (A) to (C), "big hit C (10R)", "big hit B (6R)", "big hit A (6R)", "big hit A (6R)" Different determination values are assigned to each of the "missing" so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIGS. 13-20 (A) to 13-20 (C).

When the variation pattern is SP reach α, the SP reach effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 13-20 (A) is used. Specifically, in the case of "big hit B (6R)", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "big hit A (6R)", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "off", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern PA-2".

When the variation pattern is SP reach β, the SP reach effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 13-20 (B) is used. Specifically, in the case of "big hit B (6R)", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PB-1" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PC-1". .. In the case of "big hit A (6R)", 70 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1" and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "missing", 70 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PB-2" and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PC-2".

That is, when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state and the jackpot type is “big hit B (6R)” which is more advantageous for the player than “big hit A (6R)”, the SP reach effect. C is determined at a higher rate than the SP reach effect B.

When the fluctuation pattern is SP reach γ, the SP reach effect type determination table C shown in FIG. 13-20 (C) is used. Specifically, in the case of "big hit C (10R)", 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-1" and 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". .. In the case of "big hit B (6R)", 60 determination values are assigned to "pattern PD-1" and 40 determination values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". In the case of "off", 60 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PD-2" and 40 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PE-2".

That is, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state and the jackpot type is “big hit C (10R)” which is more advantageous for the player than “big hit B (6R)”, the SP reach effect. E is determined at a higher rate than the SP reach effect D.

(Action / effect)
As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and notifies whether or not the enemy character X-1 is used to control the game to the big hit game state (for example, the first specific effect (for example). The SP reach effect B) and the second specific effect (for example, the SP reach effect A) that notifies whether or not the enemy character is controlled to the jackpot game state can be executed, and the SP reach effect can be executed. When a big hit is notified, the "movable body effect" as a special effect can be executed during the execution period of the SP reach effect, and the operation of the movable body 32 during the execution period of the movable body effect in the SP reach effect B. The character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with the effect image 018SG250B related to the above, and the character image 018SGX1 is displayed while the effect image 018SG250B in the same mode as the SP reach effect B is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect in the SP reach effect A. However, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect is a common light emission pattern LP3-in the case where the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect B and the case where the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect A. It is 2.

By doing so, the SP reach effect B in which the enemy character is displayed and the SP reach effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed share the same operation mode of the movable body 32 and the light emission mode of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect. While reducing the manufacturing cost, the relationship between the SP reach effect and the movable body effect can be enhanced and the effect of the effect can be improved depending on whether or not the enemy character is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect.

More specifically, in the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect A, which have different effect modes, the movable body effect performed during the SP reach effect is the same in terms of the execution timing and the operation mode of the movable body 32, but the effect. By setting the display mode corresponding to each SP reach effect for the image 018SG250B, it is possible to prevent the flow of the SP reach effect from being divided by the movable body effect.

In the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the SP reach effect B is applied as the first specific effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the SP reach effect C to E is also applied. It is possible.

Further, the execution period of the movable body effect includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the effect mode in the first period is common to the SP reach effects B to E and the SP reach effect A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14 (C) is common), the effect mode in the second period is different between the SP reach effects B to E and the SP reach effect A (in FIG. 13-14 (D1)). The image shown is different from the image shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5)). By doing so, by making the production mode common until the first period, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced, and the SP reach productions B to E and the SP reach production A can be performed until the first period. Since it is unclear which one it is, it is possible to improve the production interest of the SP reach production.

Further, as the SP reach effect, the SP reach effect E that displays the enemy X-2 different from the enemy character X-1 can be executed, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot state is when the SP reach effect B is executed. And when the SP reach effect E is executed. That is, when the variable display result is a big hit in the low base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern capable of executing the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and the variable display result is a big hit in the high base state. The determination ratio of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern capable of executing the SP reach effect E is 800/997. Then, in the SP reach effect C, the effect image 018SG250B common to the SP reach effect B corresponding to the operation of the movable body 32 is displayed and the enemy is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect executed when the big hit is notified. The character image 018SGX2 showing the character X2 is displayed, and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect executed by the SP reach effect C is the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect executed by the SP reach effect B. It is a common light emission pattern LP3-2.

By doing so, the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body effect and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 are shared to reduce the manufacturing cost, and the SP reach effect in which the ratio controlled to the big hit state is different is different. It is possible to increase the number of SP reach effects, and it is possible to pay attention to which SP reach effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the enemy character X1 displayed in the movable body effect executed in the SP reach effect B is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image, so that the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image can be enhanced. , It is possible to enhance the effect of moving body production.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an enemy character and notifies whether or not the enemy character is used to control the game to a big hit game state in the first aspect (for example, SP reach effect B) and the second aspect. (For example, it can be executed with the SP reach effect D), and the movable body effect can be executed during the execution period of the SP reach effects B and D (ta3 to ta4 out of ta2 to ta5), and the movable body effect can be executed. During the period, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with the common effect image (for example, the effect image 018SG250B) related to the operation of the movable body 32 in both the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D, and in the case of the SP reach effect B. , The post-effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed instead of the post-effect B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach effect (see FIG. 13-17), while the SP reach effect D In this case, the post-effect B (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19) using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach effect is executed.

By doing so, the SP reach effect B and the SP reach effect D share the same operation mode of the movable body 32 in the enemy character and the movable body effect to reduce the manufacturing cost, and the common enemy character X. By displaying -1 with different effects, the relationship between the SP reach effects B and D and the movable body effect and the SP reach effects B and D and the post-effects A and B can be enhanced, and the effect can be improved.

More specifically, even in the post-production after the big hit confirmation notification is performed in the SP reach production, the re-variation result notification of the decorative pattern and the scheduled number of balls are notified using the character displayed in the SP reach production. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP reach effect, notifications such as re-variation result notification and scheduled number of balls will be notified in common, while the display content will correspond to the type of SP reach effect from the SP reach effect. It is possible to show up to the post-production as a series of productions.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a special effect (for example, an effect in which the enemy character disappears) that changes the enemy character X-1 into a special mode after the movable body effect executed in the SP reach effect. Yes, in the SP reach effect B, the character image 018SGX1Z in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by the fade-out display is displayed in the jackpot notification before the post-effect A (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)). In the SP reach effect D, in the post-effect B, a special image 018SGXZ that disappears after the attacked enemy character X-2 is blown and becomes a star is displayed (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)). By doing so, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes according to the type of SP reach effect, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as a special effect, the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by the fade-out display, or the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears after being skipped and becomes a star. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may be an effect of displaying an effect image, etc.). In addition, there are various effects such as those in which the character is not hidden, the transmittance is increased, the brightness is lowered, the image is deformed, and the mode is changed even if the character is not hidden. It can be changed.

Further, when the SP reach effect B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state, the “big hit” which is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit A (6R)” (first advantageous state). The ratio controlled by "B (6R)" (second advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach effect D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, the “big hit” is executed. The ratio controlled by "big hit C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40%. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to which of the SP reach effects B and D is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1, and determines whether or not the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 are used to control the game to a big hit game state. The first specific effect to be notified (for example, SP reach effect D) and the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1 different from the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A- When the second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) for notifying whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled by using 1 and the second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect E) is executed, and the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect D. In the jackpot game state in which the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach effect D are displayed and operated to notify that the SP reach effect D is controlled. It is possible to execute the post-effect B that notifies the planned number of balls to be released, and when the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect E, the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A displayed in the SP reach effect E are executed. By displaying and operating -1, it is possible to execute the post-effect B that notifies the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state that the SP reach effect E is controlled, and at least the ally. The operation mode of the character A-1 is common to the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19).

By doing so, by using a common ally character in the SP reach production and the post-production, it becomes easier to understand the relationship between the SP reach production and the post-production while reducing the manufacturing cost. Can also be enhanced.

Further, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), so that the background image is also included. Since it can be standardized, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

Further, the ally character A-1 is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), so that the special character is also common. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be further reduced.

Further, in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D, an image in which the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 fight is displayed at the same time, and in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E, the enemy character Images of the battle between X-2 and ally character A-1 are displayed at the same time (see FIGS. 13-18 to 13-19), so that each character is displayed at the same time, giving the impression of post-production B. It can be enhanced and the effect of production can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has, as post-effects, the first post-effect (for example, post-effect B) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect D when the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect D, and the SP. The second post-effect (for example, post-effect B) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect E when the movable body effect is executed in the reach effect E, and the movable body effect when the movable body effect is executed in the SP reach effect A. The third post-effect (for example, post-effect A) of the effect mode related to the SP reach effect A can be executed, and the ratio controlled to the second advantageous state is the SP reach effect D, the SP reach effect E, and the SP reach. It depends on which of the production A is executed.

That is, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, the “big hit C (10R)” (second advantage) is more advantageous to the player than the “big hit B (6R)” (first advantageous state). The ratio controlled by the state) is 40% when the SP reach effect D is executed and 60% when the SP reach effect E is executed, and the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state. At that time, the SP reach effect A executes the ratio controlled by the "big hit B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A (6R)" (first advantageous state). It is 100% when it is done.

By doing so, not only the big hit is notified by the SP reach effect, but also the ratio controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which SP reach effect is executed, so that the player for the SP reach effect It is possible to raise the degree of attention of the game, and to improve the entertainment of the game.

In the embodiment, as the first post-effect of the staging mode related to the first specific staging, the ally character and the enemy character displayed in the SP reach staging D are displayed, so that the first post-event is displayed. The effect is related to the first specific effect, and as the second post-effect of the effect mode related to the second specific effect, the ally character and the enemy character displayed in the SP reach effect E are displayed. The second post-effect is related to the second specific effect, and the ally character and the enemy character are not displayed in the SP reach effect A and the ex-post effect A, thereby exemplifying the form in which the third post-effect is related to the third specific effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the character displayed in the SP reach effect is displayed as the third post-effect of the effect mode related to the third specific effect. The 3 post-production may be related to the 3rd specific production.

That is, if the post-effect related to the specific effect is an effect in which the display mode in the specific effect and at least a part of the effect mode are common, the common effect mode is that the character is displayed or the character is not displayed. If they are common, the character types displayed in the specific effect and the post-effect may be different. Further, it may have four or more types of specific effects and post-effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect and the second specific effect can be executed in a low base state, and the third specific effect can be executed in a high base state. The first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect are not limited to each other, and may be an effect that can be executed in a low base state or an effect that can be executed in a high base state. That is, the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect may be any effect that can be determined regardless of the gaming state.

Further, as the third specific effect, the SP reach effect F (for example, a battle effect with an enemy character X-3 different from the enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in a high base state can be executed. Well, in this case, the ratio controlled by the jackpot C (10R) may be SP reach effect F (50%)> SP reach effect E (35%)> SP reach effect D (15%). The post-effect C (third post-effect) performed when the big hit is notified in the SP reach effect F may have a longer effect period than the post-effects A and B.

Further, in the SP reach effect F, for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body effect shown in FIGS. 13-6 (B) is a light emission pattern LP3-2 common to the SP reach effects A to E, and is shown in FIGS. 13-6. The sound pattern of the movable body effect shown in (C) is preferably the sound patterns BP0-1 to 3 common to the SP reach effects A to E.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, for example, an advantageous state in which the big hit gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, the planned number of balls to be released is A form to which a large number of 10R jackpots C) and an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, jackpot B or jackpot C controlled to a probable change state after the end of the jackpot) is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state is the number of balls released, the number of game rounds, the control period of the probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the small hit state, as compared with the first advantageous state. It may include a state in which the fall rate of probability fluctuation is advantageous. Further, the jackpot gaming state or the effect mode after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be an advantageous state or the like that is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 018SG is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature sections 069G and 099G, for example, the SP reach effect A in the feature section 018SG is applied to the SP reach A and B of the feature sections 069G and 099G. Apply, the SP reach effects B and C in the feature unit 018SG are applied to the SP reach C of the feature units 069G and 099G, and the SP reach effects D and E in the feature unit 018SG are applied to the SP reach D of the feature units 069G and 099G. It is possible.

(Explanation of deformation and application of feature unit 018SG)
The feature unit 018SG exemplifies a form in which a big hit gaming state is applied as an advantageous state advantageous for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit gaming state and the time saving state (high base state) are not limited to this. , Probability change state, etc. may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, a form in which the movable body 32 is applied is exemplified as an example of the movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body other than the movable body 32 provided on the game board is not limited to this. Alternatively, a movable body or the like provided in the gaming machine frame 3 may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, as a specific effect for notifying whether or not the game is controlled in an advantageous state, a mode in which the SP reach effects A to E for notifying whether or not the game is controlled in the jackpot game state is applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal reach effect, a post-effect, or the like may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, as a specific character or a special character, an example in which the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 confronting the ally characters A-1 and A-2 are applied has been exemplified, but the present invention relates to this. The present invention is not limited, and enemy characters other than the above, other characters that do not confront ally characters, and the like may be applicable. Further, a character or the like composed of an image in which a person is made into a live-action image may be used.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, an embodiment in which ally characters A-1 and A-2 confronting enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are applied as special characters, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, ally characters other than the above, other characters that do not confront the enemy character, and the like may be applicable. Further, a character or the like composed of an image in which a person is made into a live-action image may be used.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, as a specific effect in which the character is displayed, a form in which the SP reach effects A to E in which the special character (friendly character) confronts the specific character or the special character (enemy character) is applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a special character, a specific character, or a special character is applied to a plurality of ally characters or enemy characters or a plurality of characters that do not confront each other without confrontation. good.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, an embodiment in which the movable body effect is applied as a special effect of operating the movable body and emitting light of the light emitting body is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other than the movable body 32. You may apply the effect of operating the movable body of. Further, the operation mode of the movable body 32 can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, the execution time of the movable body effect is set before the big hit confirmation notification in the latter stage of the SP reach effects A to E, but it can be changed in various ways such as in the middle stage of the SP reach effects A to E. Is. Further, although the movable body effect can be started in response to the operation of the push button 31B of the player, it may be started at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, in the movable body effect, the movable body LED 208, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 emit light, a sound effect is output, and the push button 31B vibrates according to the operation of the movable body 32. Although the embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light guide plate light emitting effect using the light guide plate device may be enabled according to the operation of the movable body 32. In this case, it is preferable that the light emitting pattern of the light guide plate device is common in the SP reach effects A to E as in the light emitting pattern of the LED.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, a form in which the effect image 018SG250B representing "impact" is applied as an effect image related to the operation of the movable body 32 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , It may be an effect image of a mode related to the operation mode (for example, vibration) of the movable body 32 (for example, a mode representing an impact), an effect image of a mode for emphasizing the vibrating movable body 32, or the like. It may be.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, as a post-effect to be executed after the movable body effect as a special effect, after executing the revariable display of the fixed decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. An example is an example in which the effect A and the post-effect B that informs the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state notified by using the ally character or the enemy character that appeared in the SP reach effect are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if it is an effect performed after the special effect, it is not limited to the above-mentioned post-effect. Or a small hit medium effect executed in a small hit game state may be applicable.

Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the post-effect B for notifying the planned number of balls to be given in the notified big hit game state is executed before the variable display ends, but the big hit game state. It is possible to perform post-production to inform the planned number of balls to be given in the notified jackpot game state during the fanfare period from the start of the game to the start of the round game, the round interval between the game rounds, etc. May be.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, in the post-effect B, the jackpot is used as game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value given in the jackpot game state in which it is notified that the SP reach effects D and E are controlled. Although the embodiment in which the planned number of balls to be given is identifiable is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds and the like may be notified.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, in the post-effect B, a mode is exemplified in which the planned number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state notified to be controlled by the SP reach effects D and E is notified. Is not limited to this, for example, when the jackpot has been held for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) or more, the first number of balls is replaced with the above-mentioned planned number of balls, or in addition to the planned number of balls. The total number of balls that have been acquired so far from the jackpot game state may be notified. Further, when the number of balls is added in the scheduled ball addition part in the post-production B, or when the planned number of balls is notified in the scheduled ball notification part, the total number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 2500 balls, 5000 balls). When the number of balls, 7,500 balls, 10,000 balls, etc.) is exceeded, it may be possible to notify that the total number of balls has exceeded a predetermined number.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, while the types of ally characters and enemy characters to be confronted are different in the SP reach effects A to E, the operation mode of the movable body 32 and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B in the movable body effect are common. Although a certain form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background image in the SP reach effects A to E, the type and execution ratio of various advance notice effects such as chance up, the battle confrontation period, and the operation mode of the character. And the display mode may be different depending on the variable display result, and even in such a case, it is preferable that the operation mode of the movable body 32 and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B in the movable body effect are common.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, the SP reach effects D and E exemplify an embodiment in which the execution period of the scheduled ball addition part and the scheduled ball notification part in the post-production B is the same. The execution period of the scheduled ball addition part and the scheduled ball notification part may be different depending on the type of big hit, that is, the size of the planned number of balls.

Further, in the feature unit 018SG, the SP reach effects A to C can be executed in the low base state, and the SP reach effects D and E can be executed in the high base state, but the present invention is limited thereto. All of the above-mentioned specific effects (SP reach effects) may be effects that can be executed in a low base state, or may be effects that can be performed in a high base state. That is, it may be possible to execute in any type of gaming state.

Although the feature portions 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG in the embodiment of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and changes and changes are made within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Even if there is an addition, it is included in the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like are exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is used for gaming. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added, while the number of game balls used for the game is The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified, and the variable display result is derived from the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least a machine that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

Hereinafter, as another embodiment, it will be described that the time saving control is performed when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result which is not mounted in the above-described embodiment. More specifically, in the winning random number value judgment process, when the judgment result becomes "miss (time reduction)", the variable display result becomes the loss (time reduction) display result and is controlled to the time reduction state. be.

The correspondence with the claims is as follows.
The non-special state is the normal state (low probability low base state). The first special state is a time-saving state controlled after the advantageous state (big hit) is completed. The second special state is a time-saving state controlled by executing the fluctuation of the loss a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state. The third special state is a time saving state that is controlled when the loss (time saving) display result, which is a part of the loss display result, is obtained.

Among the following other embodiments, "time saving A" to "time saving D" are the time saving states controlled when the loss (time saving) display result which is a part of the loss display result is obtained, and is the third special. It is a state corresponding to the state.

The other embodiments described below have the same configurations as those in FIGS. 1 to 5 and 8 of the above-described embodiments, and the same control is performed.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the staging control board 12. In the staging control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process to determine whether or not the number of rounds that open the big prize opening has reached the set maximum number of executions, and if the maximum number of executions is reached, the big hit game state. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this big hit end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 15 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 15 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed in the special figure of "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value is set. In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 16, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The big hit middle effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "and end the big hit production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 17-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The staging control pattern may include a staging control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice staging control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various staging executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in response to the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the staging control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial staging control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as the staging control timer setting unit) corresponding to the staging pattern specified by the staging pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of hold storages is "0", the hold display is not updated and the active display area is displayed. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 17-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so as to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right". At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach where the variable display result becomes "missing", the fixed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. When the variable display result is a "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As the result becomes lower, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2 number, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, 6 As the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the rate of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit". The number of determination values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect is performed according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). The setting suggestion effect is determined whether or not to be executed by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed or "with effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the determination result of step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "have an effect" to execute the setting suggestion effect (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 17-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 17-3 as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". ..

FIG. 17-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content of these setting suggestion patterns differs depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 17-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 17-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed by the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed by the pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is obtained. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continued, and the suggestions regarding the set values will be made.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to the copper color. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color. Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L, 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, these. The staging mode by any staging device, such as a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for performing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value.

FIG. 17-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control for executing various effects is performed as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinking. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect period is in effect (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). If it is not the advance notice period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect is executed after the symbol display color is changed, the control of the jackpot gaming state is suggested and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. It is possible to make suggestions regarding the set value.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as the execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), after the control of step S247 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern is variable based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. After the control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation is performed (step S248), the variable display effect process is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when a player notifies an advantageous effect (advantageous effect), the player takes an image or a video of the effect on a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a production that is often performed even in a disadvantageous case (disadvantageous production), since it does not arouse the motivation to shoot, if the execution period of the disadvantageous production is long, the player will be rather uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking and secure the shooting time when the effect advantageous to the player is executed. Further, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the process is waited for. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 17-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 17-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 17-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which the reach effect of the normal reach shifts to the reach effect of the super reach, which is the reach development. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 17-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 17-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 17-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 17-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the pattern display color changes to silver due to the pattern RE-2. FIG. 17-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the pattern display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and the display color remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6 which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation level by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, the effect may be such that after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made. In the case of executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of making a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state and is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may make a suggestion regarding a probabilistic state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature unit 059AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18-1 to 18-35. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK of the present embodiment is not limited to the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving control is performed (the time saving state is set) even when the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result. As for the display result of the special figure game, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in both the normal state and the time saving state, but in the time saving state, even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving control is not newly performed. On the other hand, as for the decorative symbol, different symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time saving state. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK having such characteristics will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 18-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 059AK of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area from a predetermined ball launching device.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the normal symbol changes, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display. In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbol includes one in which a plurality of LEDs are sequentially turned on or blinked, and as a display result, a predetermined LED lighting combination may be displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display). included.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory. Further, in the time saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening is executed, and the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved. Then, in the time-saving state, if a so-called right-handed hit is performed to launch the game ball into the game area on the right side of the player so that the game ball is won in the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. good.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82, and forms a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big hit game state, so-called right-handed hitting may be performed in which the game ball is launched into the game area on the right side so that the game ball is won in the big prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 18-1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 18-1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 18-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on (). Step S1201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S2101; Yes) because it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 performs the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 is a first stored value of a first special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit or the like). It suffices if the first special figure holding storage number can be specified by reading the special figure holding storage number count value. When it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 stores the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S1203).

When it is determined in step S1201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No), or when it is determined in step S1202 that the first special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (step S1202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S1204; Yes) because it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 refers to the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 is a second stored value of a second special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit or the like). It suffices if the second special figure holding storage number can be specified by reading the special figure holding storage number count value. When it is determined in step S1205 that the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S1206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No) or when it is determined that the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103 determines. The start winning judgment process is terminated.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates so as to add 1 to the special figure reserved storage count value according to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold storage count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the 1st special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the 1st start winning opening and the 1st start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the 1st special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). In addition, the second special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated to be added by 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, among the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold display 25A to specify the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. The display may be performed by the first hold display 25A (for example, the number of LED lights may be increased by one). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the added second special figure hold storage number. The second hold display 25B may be used (for example, the number of LEDs lit is increased by one).

The first special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (first special figure game) in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting prize is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are stored as pending data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first hold display unit 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display unit 5HL. do.

In the second special figure holding storage unit, the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and the second starting winning is generated, but the special drawing game (second) that has not been started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the special symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are set as pending data, and the number thereof is Storage is performed until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second hold display unit 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display unit 5HR. do.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command prepared in advance to the staging control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S1212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S1213). As described above, the winning random value determination process is a process for determining the starting winning, and the random value is based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 among the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S1209. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target is “big hit” or “small hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 17-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S1214; "2"). Step S1215), the start winning determination process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0". (Step S1216), the process proceeds to step S1204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 18-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of FIG. 18-2 as the winning random number value determination process. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as "big hit" or "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the starting winning timing detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Judgment as to whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the randomized value (random value extracted in the process of step S1209) is "big hit" or "small hit", and variable display of the decorative symbol. It determines which fluctuation pattern will be (so-called "look-ahead"). As a result, the special symbol display result is "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the start condition of the special symbol game is satisfied). It is pre-read that it will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the staging control board 12 will hold the display by the staging control CPU 120 or the like. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 18-3, the CPU 103 first, for example, has a time saving flag (a flag that is turned on when the time saving state is set) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. ) And the state of the probabilistic flag (the flag that is turned on when the probabilistic change state is reached) to specify the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S351). The CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state by confirming the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.). To identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it may be specified that the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S351, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is in the jackpot gaming state (step S352). When it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability change state or the time reduction state (step S353). ). When it is determined that the base is high (step S353; Yes), or when it is determined that the jackpot is being achieved in the process of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S354). When it is determined that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S356).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S353 (step S353; No), the CPU 103 is the first. From the 1 special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is determined according to the starting port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state. A table for determining the figure display result is selected (step S355).

Following the process of step S355, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). The CPU 103, for example, compares each determined value included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S1209 shown in FIG. 18-2 one by one. It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). can.

In the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S1210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 holds the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure reservation storage unit), a storage area of the CPU 103, etc. separately from the step S1210, and makes the above determination based on the held random number values. May be done. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described later. As described above, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure holding storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18-11), which will be described later, prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, and sets it in the table to be used (step). S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern.

When it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S360). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. , It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 18-11 (B)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step S362). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes "small hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not within the range of the small hit determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined time saving determination range (step). 059AKS001). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the jackpot determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S355. Therefore, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the time saving determination range. Although the special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)" is "loss", it is a variable display result in which the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time reduction control is performed from the variable display performed after the stop display is performed. show.

When it is determined that the time saving determination range is within the range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type based on the random number value MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the time saving type determination table data from the time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 18-7. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the time saving type is determined by referring to the selected time saving type determination table data.

Following the process of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 prepares a table for determining the loss variation pattern at the time of turning on the time saving start flag, which will be described later, prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 (see FIGS. 18-12 (A) and 18-12 (D)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002A). The time reduction start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the time reduction symbol is stopped and displayed, although the variable display result is "loss", and the random value MR3 is used for each fluctuation pattern. The decision value to be compared with is assigned. In step 059AKS002A, either the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12 (A) or the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12 (D) is selected according to the time saving type. do it.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the table is not within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; No), the time saving start flag off time loss fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 in advance (FIG. 18-12 (FIG. 18-12). B) Refer to) and set it in the usage table (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any of step S309, step S312, step 059AKS002A, and step 059AKS002B, the CPU 103 is set in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S1209. Refer to any of the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table, small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on, and loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is off, and make a determination value that matches the random number value MR3. The assigned fluctuation pattern is determined (step S363). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, determining the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the random number value MR3 by comparing each determination value assigned to each variation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determined value. Or the fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing any of the processes of steps S356 and S363, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start winning command according to the determination result of step S358, step 059AKS002, and step S363 (step S364). The numerical judgment process is terminated. The start winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure hold storage number designation command, a symbol judgment result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the starting port buffer value is "1", the first starting opening winning command, the first special figure hold storage number specification command, the symbol determination result specification command, and the variation pattern determination result specification are used as start winning commands. Set the command and transmission settings. When the starting port buffer value is "2", the second starting opening winning command, the second special figure hold storage number specification command, the symbol determination result specification command, and the variation pattern determination result specification are used as start winning commands. Set the command and transmission settings. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure hold storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure hold storage number specification command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current 1st special figure hold storage number and 2nd special figure hold storage number (to the storage number). The command including the corresponding EXT data) may be specified, and the designated special figure holding storage number may be specified by the count value of the first special figure holding storage number counter or the second special figure holding storage number counter. When the determination result of step S357 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the symbol specification command to be transmitted is a command for specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" ("big hit"). A command (command including the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result in step S357 is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a command for specifying that the determination result of the variable display result is “small hit” (“small hit”). A command including EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". When the command is specified (a command including EXT data corresponding to "missing (time saving)") and the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is not within the time saving determination range (step S360; No), the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing". It is a command to specify that there is (a command including EXT data corresponding to "missing"), and when the determination result in step S354 is the start opening buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), the determination at the start winning is performed. It may be a command that specifies that it is "no judgment" (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be transmitted is a command for specifying a variation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command including EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result), and the determination result in step S354 is When the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment") that specifies that the judgment at the time of starting winning is not performed is "no judgment". do it.

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S1209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small". Whether or not there is a "hit" or "loss (time reduction)", and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIGS. 18-10) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state, and the determination is not made based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not always accurate, but to some extent. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. Further, in the winning random number value determination process, the start is started by the process of step S354 based on the case where it is determined that the big hit is being made in the process of step S352 or the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S353. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing the process such as step S355, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, each of the above is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening. Restrict so that the judgment is not made. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start prize is won when the time reduction control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in effect. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading based on the above.

FIG. 18-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 14 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 18-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S1231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S1231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S1232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure holding storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 151B is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1233). Further, in the process of step S1233, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S1235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the RAM 102 may read the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S1235 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" in step S1231, and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S1236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure holding storage is updated. The hold data indicated by the random number values MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 151A is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1237). Further, in the process of step S1237, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S1234 and S1238, the table is used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S1239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 18-5 (A) is set in the table to be used. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 18-5 (B) is set in the table to be used. Further, the CPU 103 may select the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state.

The first special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", and the variable display result as "loss (time reduction)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", and the variable display result as "loss (time reduction)" and then variable It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control from the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is determined according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time reduction)", and "loss". In the second special figure display result determination table, a random number value for determining the special figure display result is determined according to whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with MR1 are assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "loss (time reduction)", and "loss".

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the determined value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result has the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the decision data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the time saving state from the next variable display as "loss (time saving)". In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Many decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Controlling to a state increases the probability of being determined. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, it is a big hit as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the gaming state is high. In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table sets the special figure display result as "missing (time reduction)" from the next variable display. Decision data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the time saving state is high. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state, the ratio of the special figure display result being "missing (time saving)" is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. The ratio determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" can be different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or a probability change. Frequent small hit game states where it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a state (high accuracy and high base state). By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". .. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, even if the ratio determined to control the small hit game state is lower in the high base state such as the time reduction state or the probability change state than in the low base state such as the normal state or the probability change state without time reduction. good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table.

Following the process of step S1239 shown in FIG. 18-4, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is subjected to "big hit", "small hit", and "missing (missing). Compared with the decision value assigned to each special figure display result of "time reduction)" and "loss", the special figure display result is either "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time reduction)" or "loss". (Step S1240).

Since the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current game state is selected in step S1239, in the process of step S1240, the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a probable change state. Depending on whether or not it is, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is the normal state in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table. Alternatively, the table data corresponding to the case of the time saving state is usually selected as the determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probability change state, the game state is the probability change state in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table. The table data corresponding to the case of is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined with reference to this.

After the special figure display result is determined in step S1240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step S1241). Then, when it is determined to be a "big hit" (step S1241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-6 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced by. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). There are multiple types of numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability", depending on whether the game is a special figure game using the symbol display device 4B. It is assigned to the jackpot type of.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "probability" is different depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. That is, when the variable special map is the first special map, the determined value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the "probability" jackpot type, while the variable special map is assigned. Is the second special figure, the determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type as "probable" can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the short-term open big hit state by setting the big hit type to "probability". In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

Even when the variable special map is the second special map, the determined value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special map is the first special map is assigned to the "probability" jackpot type. good. For example, when the variable special map is the second special map, a smaller determination value may be assigned to the "probability" jackpot type as compared with the case where the variable special map is the first special map. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 18-4, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for variation can be changed to "non-probability". It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each of the "probability variation" and "probability" jackpot types is matched (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S1245), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability", the jackpot type buffer value may be "0", if it is "probability variation", it may be "1", and if it is "probability", it may be "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S1246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S1246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S1246; No), the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "time reduction"). It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS003). Then, when it is determined to be "time saving" (step 059AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type as shown in FIG. 18-7 as a table to be used for determining the time saving type to any one of a plurality of types. The table is selected and set, and the time saving type is determined based on the random number value MR2 in the same manner as in the case of determining the jackpot type (step 059AKS004).

The time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 18-7 is based on MR2, which is common with the random number value for determining the jackpot type when it is decided to control the special figure display result as "loss (time saving)" to the time saving state. It is a table referred to for determining one of multiple types of time saving type. In the time saving type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the time saving type is a plurality of types of big hit types such as "time saving A" to "time saving D". Is assigned to. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure, "time saving A" or "time saving B". When the special symbol that is variablely displayed (variable) in the special figure game is the second special figure, it is determined to be the time saving type of "time saving C" or "time saving D". "Time saving A" and "time saving C" are time saving types controlled to the time saving state while the special figure game is played 100 times. "Time saving B" is a time saving type controlled to a time saving state while the special figure game is played 50 times. "Time saving D" is a time saving type controlled to a time saving state while the special figure game is played 20 times.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 of FIG. 18-4, the CPU 103 corresponds to the time saving type determined in the step 059AKS004, for example, the time saving type buffer value which is the storage value of the time saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102. (Step 059AKS005), the determined time saving type is stored. As an example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", the time saving type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "time saving B", it is set to "1", if it is "time saving C", it is set to "2", and "time saving D". If it is, it may be set to "3".

After executing the process of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving / medium flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006). The time saving medium flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is currently in progress (sometimes referred to simply as a time saving flag). If the time saving middle flag is in the off state (step 059AKS006; No), the time saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 059AKS006A). The time saving start flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is started from the next special figure game.

When it is determined in step 059AKS003 that it is not "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS003; No), or when it is determined in step 059AKS006 that the time reduction medium flag is on (step 059AKS006; Yes), step After executing any of the processes of S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, a preliminary determination result of whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and whether or not to control the next time reduction state, and further, the big hit. A definite special symbol is set according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state and the determination result of the time saving type in the time saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is not "missing (time reduction)", the lost symbol corresponds to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "missing". The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol that becomes is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", the time saving symbols "1" and "1" are set according to the determination result of the time saving type in step 059AKS004. Any one of the special symbols indicating the numbers of "4", "6", and "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, the special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the time reduction type is "time reduction A". Further, according to the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving B", the special symbol showing the number "4" is set as the confirmed special symbol. A special symbol showing the number "6" is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the time reduction type is "time reduction C". A special symbol showing the number "8" is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the time reduction type is "time reduction D".

When it is determined in step S1246 that the special figure display result is a "small hit", the small hit symbol is used in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is a "small hit". The special symbol showing the number of "2" is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S1241 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the big hit symbols are "3", "5", and "7" according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S1244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers of "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the special symbol showing the number "3" which is the normal jackpot symbol among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "probability variation", the special symbol showing the number "7", which is the probability variation jackpot symbol, among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the finalized special symbol. Depending on the decision result that the jackpot type is "probability", the special symbol showing the number "5", which is the short-term open jackpot symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .. If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S1250), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 18-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11 (A), and the jackpot display result is "big hit". A variation pattern corresponding to the time is determined (step S262).

FIG. 18-10 shows an example of the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" and "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. Correspondingly, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in case the variable display result becomes a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). .. Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. In the feature unit 059AK, a dedicated variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) or a variable display, which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", is selected. Although it encourages the result to be "missing (time saving)", there is a variation pattern of time saving that is "missing". Regarding the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time of loss (time reduction), which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", for example, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D. There may be a variation pattern of the kind of super reach effect that is executed only when.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern. The big hit fluctuation pattern and the small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The super reach fluctuation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing".

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11 (A) changes the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is set to "big hit". It is a table referred to for determining one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR3 for pattern determination. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11 (A), a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined according to whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability”, “probability”, or “probability”. The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR3 is any of the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, the fluctuation pattern PB4-3, and the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3. Is assigned to a crab.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 18-11 (A), the determination value varies depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined, so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern is different. There is a part assigned to the pattern. For example, the determination values for the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB4-3, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability". The allocation is different. This makes it possible to make the ratios determined for the same fluctuation pattern different depending on the determination result of which of the plurality of types of jackpots is to be used.

Further, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there is a portion in which determination values are assigned to different fluctuation patterns depending on which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", a determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-1, the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and the fluctuation pattern PB4-3. On the other hand, no determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability", the determination value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to the fluctuation pattern PC1-3, while the fluctuation pattern PA4-1 and the fluctuation pattern PB4. No decision value is assigned to -1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is controlled to the short-term open big hit state according to "probability", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be different from the case where the normal open big hit state is controlled. be able to.

When the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probable change", it depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable change state, or a time saving state. Therefore, the assignment of the determined value for each fluctuation pattern may be different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation pattern can be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of the gaming state is. Further, when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probable change", it depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probable change state, or a time saving state. Therefore, the determined value may be assigned to different fluctuation patterns. Thereby, it is possible to determine different fluctuation patterns depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", more determined values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1 showing the variation pattern of normal reach than in the case of "probability variation". .. Therefore, when the reach effect of Super Reach is executed, it is more likely that the jackpot type will be "probable change" rather than "non-probable change", so that the player can have expectations and the game. You can improve your interest. Further, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11 (A), the variation pattern PB4-2 that performs the reach effect of the super reach B is more than the variation pattern PB4-1 that performs the reach effect of the super reach C. , The fluctuation pattern PB4-3 that performs the reach effect of the super reach A is more assigned than the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the fluctuation time becomes longer (see the fluctuation time of FIG. 18-10), more determination values are assigned. Has been done.

Returning to FIG. 18-8, when it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in the off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263). ). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11 (B), and the special figure display result is "small hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit is determined (step S264).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is in the on state (step 059AKS007). When it is determined that the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table when the time saving start flag is turned on as shown in FIGS. 18-12 (A), (C) and (D). (Step 059AKS008). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction start flag is in the off state (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table at the time of time reduction start flag off as shown in FIGS. 18-12 (B) and (E) (step). 059AKS009).

After executing the process of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, depending on the type of the special figure and whether or not the time is shortened. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “loss (time reduction)” or “loss” is determined (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, when the special map display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the variable special map is the first special map, FIG. 18-, regardless of whether or not the time reduction control is performed. Refer to the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in 12 (A), and use it as numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation, depending on the time saving type. Based on this, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, when the special map display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the variable special map is the second special map, FIG. 18-12 (C) or (D) depends on whether or not the time reduction control is performed. ) Refers to the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table, and determines the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, when the special map display result is "missing" and the variable special map is the first special map, the time saving control can be performed by referring to the time saving start flag off time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 or the like depending on whether or not the time saving state is being performed. Further, when the special map display result is "missing" and the variable special map is the second special map, if the time saving is in progress, the loss variation pattern determination table at the time of turning off the time saving start flag shown in FIG. 18-12 (B) is used. With reference to it, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 and the like. On the other hand, in the normal state, the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 by referring to the time saving start flag off time loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12 (E). decide. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the time reduction start flag is on, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the type of super reach is selected. The decision value is assigned so that the time saving type is determined at different ratios accordingly. Specifically, the decision value is assigned so that the person who executes the super reach with a high expectation of a big hit becomes the time reduction type with a large number of time reductions (B is "time reduction A" rather than super reach C). It is assigned so that the ratio of time saving types is high). In addition, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on is selected), the determination value is set to Super Reach A, which has the highest expectation of big hit. Not assigned. That is, in the feature unit 059AK, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of “loss (time reduction)” differs depending on the type of super reach. Further, in the feature unit 059AK, for example, as shown in FIGS. 18-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, when a big hit occurs, or when a loss (time reduction) occurs. Determining values are assigned so that multiple variable display results are obtained, such as when the result is simply a loss. Therefore, the variation of the production result can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is provided in the game area on the right side of the player, and the game ball wins only when the so-called right-handed hit is made. ing. Therefore, in the feature unit 059AK, the second special figure fluctuates in the time saving state due to the player hitting right in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving control is completed and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure remains, the second special figure changes in the normal state. That is, the second special figure changes in the normal state only when the time saving control is completed and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure remains. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18-12 (E), the feature unit 059AK corresponds to four times, which is the maximum number of variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction (maximum value of the reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure). It is a variable display (variable) fluctuation pattern determination table (corresponding to "4").

After returning to FIG. 18-8 and executing the process of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS011). When the time reduction start flag is on (step 059AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 indicates that the determined variation pattern is a variation pattern for determining the time reduction (that is, a variation pattern dedicated to the time reduction (time reduction)). (Step 059AKS012). If the determined variation pattern is not PB2-4, the time-saving fanning effect period as a period for executing the time-saving fanning effect described later is added to the special figure variation time indicated by the determined variation pattern (step 059AKS013). .. Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIGS. 18-9, a time saving fanning effect period may be added according to the time saving type. In addition, PB2-4, which is a dedicated fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (time reduction), and PB2-5, which is a fluctuation pattern of time-saving gasse, have a time-saving fanning effect period (10 seconds) during the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIGS. 18-10. )It is included. The time-saving fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the time-saving symbol, which is a decorative symbol indicating that the decorative symbol is controlled to the time-saving state from the next variable display, is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 in FIG. 18-8, the CPU 103 sets a special figure variation time (also referred to as a variation time), which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIGS. 18-10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the time saving fanning effect period Is the added period. The CPU 103 sets a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the period in which the time-saving fanning effect period is added). Therefore, it is possible to set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in the game control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, when the time saving start flag is on and the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time saving fanning effect period is set as the period for executing the time saving fanning effect. , An example of adding to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern is shown, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period is set. It may be added to the special figure fluctuation time. In this case, as in the case of the time saving type, a period corresponding to the big hit type may be added, and the processing may be common to step 059AKS013. Specifically, the respective periods corresponding to "time reduction A", "time reduction B", and "time reduction C" shown in FIGS. 18-9 are added as periods corresponding to "non-probability", "probability", and "probability". do it.

Following the process of step S266, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold display 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold display 25A may be used (for example, the number of LEDs lit is reduced by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold display 25B may be used (for example, the number of LEDs lit is reduced by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of change of the special symbol (command at the start of change) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special figure display result, the determination result of the change pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 requests the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 as a first fluctuation start designation command and a fluctuation pattern designation command (variation start designation command). A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264, or S265), a display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special figure hold storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result). The 1-decreased 1st special figure hold storage count value, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the 1st special figure hold storage when one hold storage is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for this. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 requests the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 as a second fluctuation start designation command and a fluctuation pattern designation command (variation start designation command). A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264 or S265), a display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special figure hold storage number specification command (1). The decremented second special figure reserved storage count value, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved storage when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process.

FIG. 18-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 14 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 18-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display flag provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 is on. (Step S291). Here, the flag for confirming the special figure is set to the ON state by the process of step S295 described later in correspondence with the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special symbol is off in step S291 (step S291; No), a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol is made (step S292). At this time, the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process for transmitting the decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step 059AKS021). The decorative symbol stop command is also called a symbol confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. This command specifies the period (fixed period) for displaying the symbol.

Here, the main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 18-14. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern specification command is also a command for designating the variation start of the decorative pattern.

The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start opening winning designation command) for designating that the first starting winning is generated due to the game medium entering the first starting winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start opening winning designation command) for designating that the second starting winning is generated due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first starting opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command may be collectively referred to as a starting opening winning designation command.

The command 8CXX (H) specifies whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a loss (time reduction), and a big hit type, a time reduction type, etc., that is, an effect control command (display result) that specifies a variable display result. Specified command). In this embodiment, display result specification commands corresponding to each display result are set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "missing" and "missing" with the time saving type "time saving A" (for example). "01" for "time reduction)", "05" for "big hit" with "probability change" as the jackpot type).

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first variable start designation command) for designating to start variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second variable start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described later.

Command 8FXX (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed, and the derived display is displayed. This command specifies the period (fixed period) for displaying the decorative pattern. In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, whether or not the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" and the display result corresponding to each time reduction type when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)". The specified command is set. For example, if the variable display result is not "loss (time reduction)", "00" is set for "XX" in the command, and if the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", the time reduction type is selected. A unique number is assigned accordingly, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" if the time saving type is "time saving A", "02" if the time saving type is "time saving B", time saving. If the type is "time reduction C", "03", if the time reduction type is "time reduction D", "04", etc.).

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating the game state. In the present embodiment, a game state designation command corresponding to each game state is set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the gaming state is a high accuracy low base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the gaming state is a high accuracy high base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the gaming state is a low accuracy high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command) for designating the start of the big hit game state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect executed at the start of the big hit game state to notify that the big hit game state has been reached. The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game state.

The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) for designating the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) for designating the closure of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command) for designating the end (start of ending) of the big hit game state. The ending is an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game state, which is executed at the end of the big hit game state. The command A602 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game state.

The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure holding storage number designation command) for designating the first special figure holding storage number. "XX" indicates the first special figure reserved storage number. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure holding storage number designation command) for designating the second special figure holding storage number. "XX" indicates the second special figure reserved storage number. The first special figure hold storage number designation command and the second special figure hold storage number designation command may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold storage number designation command.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (design determination result designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. The command C5XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) for designating a variation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In the present embodiment, in the process of step S101 described later, when the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs, the random numbers MR1 to 3 are extracted. For the variable display corresponding to the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3, the variable display is variable based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random numbers MR1 to MR3 before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied. Whether or not the display result is a "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display are determined. The determination at the time of starting winning refers to these determinations, and is executed in the winning random value determination process (see FIG. 18-3) in step S1213. In certain cases, this determination may not be performed. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case where there is no judgment) about the display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the symbol specification command (for example, if "no judgment", " "00", "01" etc. are set for "Loss", a unique number is assigned according to the time saving type for "Loss (time saving)", and unique according to the big hit type for "Big hit". Number is assigned). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case without judgment) for the fluctuation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, if "no judgment". "00", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

FIG. 18-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 18-13 as the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. The decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is a process for setting to transmit a variable display result and a decorative symbol stop command according to the time saving type. In the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time saving / medium flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS041). If the time saving middle flag is in the off state (step 059AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is set in the on state (step 059AKS042). If the time reduction start flag is on (step 059AKS042; Yes), the variable display result this time is "missing (time reduction)", so the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the decorative symbol stop command according to the time reduction type. (Step 059AKS043), the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is terminated.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIGS. 18-15 (B), a predetermined decorative symbol stop command (symbol confirmation command) is set according to the time saving type. As shown in the figure, the fixed time is 10 seconds for "time saving A" and "time saving B", while the fixed time is 5 seconds for "time saving C" and 2 seconds for "time saving D". The time saving types of "time saving A" and "time saving B" are the time saving types determined only when the variable display result of the first special figure is "missing (time saving)", and are "time saving C" and "time saving". Since the time saving type of "D" is a time saving type determined only when the variable display result of the second special figure is "missing (time saving)", the variable display result of the first special figure is "missing (time saving)". Since the fixed time differs depending on whether the variable display result of the second special figure is "missing (time saving)", the variation of the variable display increases and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, when the variable display result of the second special figure is "loss (time reduction)", the confirmation period differs depending on the time reduction type, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the confirmation period. Further, in the feature unit 059AK, since the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time saving state is not obtained, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the holding (remaining holding) of the second special figure remaining after the time saving is completed is obtained. Only in the case of "loss (time reduction)", the processing of the step 059AKS043 is performed, so that the fixed time corresponding to the time reduction type of "time reduction C" and "time reduction D" shown in the figure is obtained. That is, in the case where the time reduction state is controlled again in a short period after the end of the time reduction (at the maximum after the end of the period of four variable display of the maximum reserved storage number of the second special figure) (“time reduction”). In "C" and "time reduction D"), as shown in the figure, when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" in the normal state ("time reduction A" and "time reduction B"). The confirmation time is shorter than. Therefore, it is necessary to clearly notify the player that the time saving state is controlled, and it is possible to control the time saving state by prolonging the fixed period for the normal state and the variable display of the first special figure. A period can be provided to clearly notify the player. In addition, in the case where the time is controlled again in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction, if the fixed period is long, the game entertainment may be deteriorated. Is prevented from decreasing.

When the time saving middle flag is on in step 059AKS041 of FIG. 18-15 (A) (step 059AKS041; Yes), or when the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS042 (step 059AKS042; No), the CPU 103 Sets to transmit the command 8F00 (fixed period 0.5 seconds) as the decorative symbol stop command (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process.

After returning to FIG. 18-13 and executing the process of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 has a confirmation period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, 0) corresponding to the decorative symbol stop command (symbol confirmation command) set in step 059AKS021. .5 seconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step 059AKS022). In the process of step 059AKS022, the timer initial value predetermined according to the variable display result and the time saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after setting the special symbol confirmation display in-display flag to the ON state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. In this way, after the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process process corresponding to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol confirmed display time set in step 059AKS022 elapses. Every time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure confirmation display flag is on.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer for which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294, is read, and whether or not the timer value becomes "0" is determined. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is other than "0", the game control process timer value should be updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Just do it. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and the process waits until the special symbol confirmation display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display in-display flag and turning it off (step S297), whether or not the jackpot flag is on is determined. Determination (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot (step S299). Further, the setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 is made (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value is the transmission command in the transmission command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

Following the process of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off (step S301). In addition, settings are made to end the probabilistic change state, the time saving state, and the remaining holding period described later (step 059AKS023). For example, as the process of step 059AKS023, the process of clearing the probability change flag, the time saving medium flag, and the remaining holding period flag to turn off the state, and the number of times of time saving for counting the remaining number of times of the special figure game executed in the time saving state. A process such as clearing the counter may be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S303), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit (step S305). Subsequently, a setting is made for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result of "small hit" from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 (step S306). After that, the small hit flag is cleared and the state is turned off (step S307). Further, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time saving start time processing is executed (step 059AKS025). The details of the time saving start processing will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS025, or when the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special figure process flag and initializes the value to "0". (Step S309). After executing any of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the process of step 059AKS027, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the time reduction counter, is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches a predetermined time reduction end determination value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, it is determined as No.

When terminating the reduced working hours state (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the processing at the end of the reduced working hours (step 059AKS028). The details of the processing at the end of working hours will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS028, or when the time saving state is not terminated in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the remaining hold period is reached (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining hold period may be determined by checking whether or not the flag during the remaining hold period, which will be described later, is set to the ON state. When it is the remaining hold period, that is, when the flag during the remaining hold period is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining hold period end determination process (step 059AKS031), and then ends the special symbol stop process. .. The details of the remaining hold period end determination process will be described later. On the other hand, when it is not the remaining hold period, that is, when the flag during the remaining hold period is off (step 059AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process as it is.

FIG. 18-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS025 of FIG. 18-13 as the process at the start of time reduction. The time saving start time processing is a processing in which the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" and the setting for performing the time saving control from the next variable display is performed. In the time saving start time processing shown in FIGS. 18-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving start flag to the off state (step 059AKS051), and sets the time saving middle flag to the on state (step 059AKS052). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS053). The remaining hold period flag is a flag indicating that the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction is in progress, and is a flag in step 059AKS063 (see FIG. 18-17) described later. When all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the time reduction is completed (step 059AKS072, which will be described later) are set to the on state in the process, or the second remaining after the time reduction is completed. 2 When the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the special figure becomes "miss (time reduction)", it is cleared to the off state (step 059AKS055 described later).

When it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 18-16 that the flag is in the off state during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 launches a game ball into the game area on the right side of the player. Is set to send a right-handed instruction command for instructing (step 059AKS054), and the time saving start time processing is ended. By transmitting the right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS054 to the staging control board 12, the right-handed instruction display of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 18-33 (F) is displayed on the side of the staging control board 12. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 18-16 that the remaining holding period flag is in the on state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining holding period flag to the off state (step 059AKS055). , Clear various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining hold count value and the variable count value after the end of working hours, which will be described later, may be cleared to "0" which is an initial value. Like the remaining hold count value, the variable count value after the end of the reduced working hours may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays performed after the end of the reduced working hours state. Although not shown, the variation count value after the end of the reduced working hours is not shown, but is displayed every time the variable display is performed, for example, in the special symbol variation process in step S112 of FIG. 14 when the flag during the remaining holding period is on. It should be +1.

After executing the process of step 059AKS056 of FIG. 18-16, the CPU 103 is set to send a simple mode right-handed instruction command (step 059AKS057), and the time saving start time process is terminated. By transmitting the simple mode right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS057 to the side of the staging control board 12, the right-handed instruction of the mode shown in FIG. 18-35 (O) is given on the side of the staging control board 12. The display is done. The right-handed instruction command in the simplified mode transmitted and set in step 059AKS057 of FIG. 18-16 is different from the right-handed instruction command transmitted and set in the process of step 059AKS054, which is during the remaining hold period. This is because the variable display result is "missing (time reduction)". Specifically, in a short period after the end of the time reduction (at the maximum after the end of the period of four variable displays of the maximum reserved storage number of the second special figure), the time reduction state is controlled again, so that step 059AKS057 If the right-handed instruction command set to be transmitted in the process of step 059AKS054 is transmitted in the process of, the player may be troubled. Therefore, in the process of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying a right-handed instruction is transmitted in a simple manner to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game interest. ..

FIG. 18-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS028 of FIG. 18-13 as the process at the end of working hours. The time saving end time processing is a processing for ending the time saving control and setting the remaining holding period. Regarding the probabilistic state in which the time reduction / medium flag is on and the probabilistic change flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes "big hit". Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the time reduction control even in the probability change state, and the time reduction control may be terminated based on the determination result that the time reduction control is terminated. When the time reduction control is terminated in this way, the normal state may be obtained by also ending the probability variation control, and for the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit", or further. It may be continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

In the time saving end processing shown in FIGS. 18-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving middle flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, it may be determined whether or not there is a hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure by checking the hold information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102.

When the second special figure is held (remaining hold) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the flag is set to the on state during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS063), and the second special figure is held (remaining hold). The remaining hold count value is set according to the number (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of reserved information corresponding to the second special figure stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "4", "4" is set in the remaining reserved number count value, and "4" is set. If it is "3", "3" may be set, if it is "2", "2" may be set, and if it is "1", "1" may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation count value to "0" after the end of the reduced working hours and initializes it (step 059AKS065). Since the fluctuation count value after the end of the reduced working hours is initialized to "0" in step 059AKS056 of FIG. 18-16, if it is "0", the process of step 059AKS065 may be skipped. good. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 sets to send a right-handed erase command for erasing the right-handed instruction display (step 059AKS066), and ends the time-saving end time process. By transmitting the right-handed erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 to the staging control board 12, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIGS. 18-30 is executed on the staging control board 12 side. , The right-handed instruction display will be erased.

When it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 18-17 that the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure does not exist (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 fires the game ball to the game area on the left side of the player. A setting is made to send a left-handed instruction command for instructing to return to the so-called left-handed (step 059AKS067), and the time saving end time processing is ended.

FIG. 18-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of FIG. 18-13 as the remaining hold period end determination process. The remaining hold period end determination process determines whether or not the remaining hold period has ended, that is, whether or not all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction have ended. It is a process to end the remaining hold period when it ends. In the remaining holding period end determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variation count value after the end of the reduced working hours matches the remaining holding number count value set in step 059AKS064 in FIG. 18-17 (step 059AKS071). .. If the variable count value after the end of the reduced working hours does not match the remaining holding number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 ends the remaining holding period end determination process as it is.

On the other hand, when the variable count value after the end of working hours matches the remaining hold count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the flag during the remaining hold period to the off state (step 059AKS072), and various count values. Is cleared (step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, the values of the remaining hold count value and the variable count value after the end of working hours may be cleared to "0", which is the initial value, as in the process of step 059AKS056. After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 is set to send a left-handed instruction command for instructing the player to return to the so-called left-handed shot that launches the game ball to the left-handed game area (step 059AKS074). , Ends the remaining hold period end determination process. By transmitting the left-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS074 to the side of the staging control board 12, left-handed as shown in FIG. 18-34 (N-2) on the side of the staging control board 12. Instructions will be displayed.

FIG. 18-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIGS. 18-19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the big hit opening post-processing of step S116 shown in FIG. 14, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7", the waiting time at the end of the big hit, which is the execution period of the ending effect, is previously taken into consideration. The specified timer initial value is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the process of step S321, the game control process timer value is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0”). Depending on whether or not it is, it may be determined whether or not the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read out (step S322). , Identify whether the jackpot type was "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variation" (step S323).

If it is determined in step S323 that the jackpot type is "non-probable change" (step S323; Yes), a setting is made to start control for setting the gaming state to the time saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, "100") corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time saving state to the time saving number counter. Set to. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change" or "probability change" (step S323; No), a setting is made to start control to set the gaming state to the probable change state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the ON state.

It should be noted that the setting for controlling the different types of probability change states may be made depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change" or the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change". As an example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, the initial value of the time reduction count value is not set, and then the special figure display result is displayed. Set so that both probability variation control and time saving control are continuously performed until a "big hit" is reached. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability", both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time reduction count value is the same as when the time reduction state is controlled. The setting is made, and the probability variation control is continuously performed until the next special figure display result becomes "big hit", while the time saving control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, "100"). It may be set as follows. Alternatively, when the jackpot type is determined to be "probability", if the predetermined time-saving / medium-probability flag is on, the setting for starting the time-saving control together with the probability change control is made, while the time-saving / medium-probability flag is off. If so, the setting for starting only the probability change control may be made. Here, for the time saving medium sudden probability flag, for example, when it is determined in step S298 shown in FIG. 18-13 that the big hit flag is on, the big hit type is "probable" and the time saving flag is on. It suffices to be set to the on state corresponding to the time reduction control being performed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared, the value is initialized to "0" (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

Next, the process of the feature unit 059AK in the staging control board 12 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning opening designation command, special figure hold storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the 1st start opening prize designation command or the 1st special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (1st start opening winning designation command, 1st special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the 2nd start opening prize designation command or the 2nd special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (2nd start opening winning designation command, 2nd special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 18-21 (A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. The command buffer at the time of the first start winning is stored in various command data constituting the start winning command received at the time of the first start winning. The command buffer at the time of winning the first start corresponds to a storage area (holding display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure hold storage number. Area) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment has an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display during execution are stored as the hold display number “0”. (The same applies to the command buffer at the time of winning the second start).

When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting opening winning designation command, 1st special figure hold storage designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start opening winning designation commands, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the first start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, FIG. 18-21 (B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. The second start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning command received at the time of the second start winning. The command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) that can store various data for the number corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold storage number. Area) is provided. As in the case of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, the command buffer at the time of the second start winning in the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment has a hold display number “0” as shown in the variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start prize to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands, the 2nd starting opening winning designation command, the 2nd special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start opening winning designation commands, the second special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the second start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The data in the free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start, that is, the area in which the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the second start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first starting winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers is provided, and a display stage change pattern described later is provided. A storage area for storing is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 17-8 (B), an example is shown in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the hold display numbers “0” to “4”.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 18-20, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the command at the time of starting winning is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state specification command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state specification command. (Step S404).

The high-probability flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the staging control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the probabilistic change state. The on / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. The high base flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the staging control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the time saving state. The on / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. For example, when the game state specification command specifies the high accuracy high base state (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be on), the effect control CPU 120 has a high accuracy flag and a high accuracy flag. Turn both of the base flags on (if they are already on, keep them on. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the game state specification command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability change flag is on and the time saving flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and the high base state is specified. Turn off the flag. When the game state specification command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when the probability change flag and the time saving flag are specified to be off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set. Turn it off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing To finish.

FIG. 18-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 16 as the look-ahead notice setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIGS. 18-22, the staging control CPU 120 first receives the staging control command (start opening winning designation command, winning determination result command, hold storage number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not there is reception (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, whether or not the start opening winning designation command, the winning determination result command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer. By confirming, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of winning a start.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "during the winning determination restriction" is specified (step S1303). If the winning judgment result is other than "Restricting winning judgment" (step S1303; No), whether or not the production control command transmitted at the time of starting winning includes the first starting opening winning designation command. That is, it is determined whether or not the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning command (step 059AKS081).

In the case of the first start opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds or holds the variable display result as "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)" in the stored hold. It is determined whether or not the variable display result is "missing" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap, is stored (step 059AKS082). In the process of step 059AKS082, by confirming the contents of the first start winning buffer shown in FIG. It suffices to determine whether or not the result is "loss" and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gas, is stored.

When the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)", or the variable display result is "loss" and the hold which is the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is not stored (step 059AKS082; No). ), The normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, when either the hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss (time reduction)" or the hold in which the variable display result is "loss" and the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction is stored (step). 059AKS082; Yes), the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

When it is determined in step 059AKS081 that it is not the first start opening winning command (step 059AKS081; No), it is the second starting opening winning command and the time is shortened. The time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 shown in C) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any of the processes of step 059AKS083, 059AKS084, and 059AKS085, the staging control CPU 120 reads ahead according to the variable display result and the variation pattern according to the determination ratio shown in the pending change determination table selected as the table to be used. Whether or not to execute the hold display change effect as the advance notice effect and the execution mode are determined (step S1304).

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (A), the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or in the stored hold. This table is selected when the hold that causes "loss (time reduction)" or the variable display result is "loss" and neither of the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction, is stored. As shown in the figure, in the normal hold change determination table, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern of super reach loss, or the variable display result of "small hit". If it is, it is a variable display result of "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and it is a fluctuation pattern of the time reduction, and in other cases, it corresponds to, and when it is executed, it is a big hit than when it is not executed. The decision ratio is assigned as shown in the figure so that the expectation is high and the jackpot expectation is high in the order of "red"> "green"> "blue" when executing. When the normal time hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 18-22, whether or not the hold display change effect is executed and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal time hold change determination table. ..

In the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (B), the received start opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "big hit" or in the stored hold. This table is selected when either the hold that is "missing (time saving)" or the holding that is the variable display result of "missing" and is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving is stored. In such a case, the change from the normal state to the time-saving state (which may be a probable change state) after the end of the variable display executed first, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read-ahead notice target. Therefore, the variable display result and the variation pattern may differ between the time of pre-reading and the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target. Therefore, in the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (B), the execution of the hold display change effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is a certain value or more (“green” or more in this example) is restricted. In the illustrated example, the hold display change effect in the "blue" mode can be executed, but it may be performed only without execution. For example, if the variable display result is "missing" in the stored hold and the hold, which is the fluctuation pattern of the time saving, is stored, the display mode of the hold display to be notified is initially set to "blue". , And after the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gas, the display mode for the hold subject to the notice (hold displayed in "blue") is changed to the hold display of "green" or higher. You may change it. Further, the active display may be changed to a mode of "green" or higher. When the restricted hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 18-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the restricted hold change determination table. ..

Further, in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (A) and the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (B), when the variable display result is "missing (time reduction)". , An example in which the mode is the same as the case of "big hit" is shown, but for example, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or the variable display result is "loss", the time reduction fluctuation. When it is a pattern, there may be a peculiar aspect (for example, "time?"). According to this, the variation of the hold display change effect increases, and the player's attention can be attracted.

The time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 18-23 (C) is a table selected when the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning command. As shown in the figure, in the time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2, what is the normal time hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (A) and the limited time hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (B)? Unlike this, the determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" or when the variable display result is "missing" and the variation pattern of the time saving is lost. If the received start opening winning command is the second starting opening winning designation command and the winning determination is not in progress, the gaming state is in the time saving state (high base control is in progress). In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time saving symbol (special figure) is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the time saving control is not newly performed, and further, the time saving control is controlled in the remaining hold by the return effect described later. Since the effect suggesting whether or not to be performed is performed, it is not necessary to execute the hold display change effect for notifying that the time will be shortened. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time saving hold change determination table for special figure 2, the variable display result is "missing (time saving)" or the variable display result is "missing", which is a variation pattern of the time saving gap. If no decision percentage is assigned. When the time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 18-22, execution of the hold display change effect according to the determination ratio shown in the time-saving hold change determination table for special figure 2. The presence or absence and the execution mode are determined.

Returning to FIG. 18-22, after executing the process of step S1304, or when it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is being restricted (step S1303; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the determination result of step S1304. Is stored in the hold display data storage unit in association with the hold number corresponding to the new start winning prize (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is being restricted, the data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the pending change determination table shown in FIGS. 18-23 may be stored.

Following the process of step S1311, the hold display update setting at the time of starting winning is performed (step S1313), and then the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. For example, when the number of 1st special figure hold storage is increased by 1 due to the passing (entry) of the game ball through the 1st start winning opening, the 1st hold display on the 1st hold display unit 5HR is increased by 1. Add a new first hold display. On the other hand, when the number of second special figure hold storage increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HL is increased by 1. Add a new second hold display. The first hold display and the second hold display added at this time may be any hold display in the mode determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

18-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the staging control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time is being shortened (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, if it is determined whether or not the time is shortened by confirming whether or not the high base flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is set to the ON state. good.

If the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS086; Yes), the staging control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the time reduction number and updates the time reduction number (step 059AKS086A). The number of time reductions is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 18-30), which will be described later, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or when it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time is not shortened (step 059AKS086; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the left-handed instruction command from the main board 11 side. Is determined (step 059AKS087), and when it is received (step 059AKS087; Yes), a left-handed instruction display (see M6 in FIG. 18-34 (N-2)) is performed to instruct the player to hit left (see M6 in FIG. 18-34 (N-2)). Step 059AKS088). The left-handed instruction display may be continued for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed instruction command to the time when the variable display is performed four times, for example. .. When the left-handed instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or when the process of step 059AKS088 is executed, the staging control CPU 120 issues a right-handed instruction command or a simplified right-handed instruction command to the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the command was received from (step 059AKS089).

When either the right-handed instruction command or the simple mode right-handed instruction command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the staging control CPU 120 displays the right-handed instruction according to each command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when the right-handed instruction command is received, the right-handed instruction display M3 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 18-33 (F) is performed, and when the simplified right-handed instruction command is received, FIG. 18- The right-handed instruction display M3 of the embodiment shown in 35 (O) is performed. After the right-handed instruction display according to each command is performed in step 059AKS090, other effects are shown in the variable display each time until the time saving state ends, as shown in FIGS. 18-33 (G). It suffices if the right-handed instruction is displayed in a manner that does not interfere with the above.

After executing the process of step 059AKS090, or when it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right-handed instruction command nor the simplified right-handed instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, for example, by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, it may be determined whether or not the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command can be normally received.

If either the display result designation command or the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received (step 059AKS090A; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes a missing time process (step 059AKS090B).

FIG. 18-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of FIG. 18-24 as the process at the time of missing. In the omission processing shown in FIGS. 18-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern specification command can be normally received, that is, whether or not the omission command is a display result specification command (step). 059AKS093). If the variation pattern designation command has not been normally received (step 059AKS093; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process at the time of dropping as it is. In this case, the decorative symbol is not variably displayed, and the previous variable display result remains as it is, waiting until the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received in accordance with the reception. , The decorative design corresponding to the display result specification command may be stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS093; Yes), that is, when the missed command is the display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 has the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Is a fluctuation pattern of time saving determination or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas, that is, whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of PB2-4 or PB2-5 (step 059AKS094). In the case of a variation pattern of time reduction determination or a variation pattern of time reduction gas (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the variation pattern includes a time reduction fanning effect period, a stop symbol setting process described later is performed (step 059AKS095). Ends the process when a product is missed. In the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment, even if the display result specification command is missed, if the variation pattern specification command can be normally received, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is generated. If it is a fluctuation pattern of time saving confirmation or a fluctuation pattern of time saving gas, it is possible to execute the time saving fanning effect by performing the stop symbol setting process described later, but either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command was missed. In that case, it is possible to prohibit the execution of a time-saving effect such as a time-saving fanning effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of dropping.

On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the time saving determination or the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gas (step 059AKS094; No), the effect control CPU 120 uses a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command as the final stop symbol. It is determined (step 059AKS096), and the processing at the time of missing is terminated. In step 059AKS096, among the combinations of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the combination that has the lowest advantage for the player may be determined. According to this, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies such as the fact that the combination of decorative symbols having a high degree of advantage is stopped and displayed, but the result is actually a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. be able to. In this case, since the display result designation command is missed, it cannot be determined on the side of the staging control board 12 whether or not the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 may perform an effect according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (for example, a reach effect of super reach), and then the variable display result may be "missing (time reduction)". In that case, for example, a decorative symbol of "???" may be displayed or a predetermined lost symbol may be shaken until the symbol confirmation designation command is received.

Returning to FIG. 18-24, when the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command can be normally received (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is the display result specification command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS090A; Yes). It is determined whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) becomes "missing" based on the display result designation command (command stored in the storage area) or the like (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result (variable display result) is "missing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a variation pattern determination result specification command (variation pattern determination) transmitted from the main board 11. The non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1) corresponding to the case where the variation pattern specified by the result specification command storage area) is "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode. -2) It is determined whether or not it is (step S552).

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S553). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative pattern of a non-reach combination updated by, for example, an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and outputs it to the ROM 121. The definite decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the non-reach combination prepared in advance.

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the stop symbol setting process (step 059AKS092).

18-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of FIG. 18-24. In the stop symbol setting process, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect and the execution setting of the return effect are performed, and when the special symbol display result (variable display result) is "missing (time saving)", the time saving symbol is finally stopped. Processing to make a symbol is performed. In addition, the time-saving symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol is referred to as a time-saving symbol in order to distinguish it from the special symbol.

In the stop symbol setting process in FIGS. 18-26, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special figure based on a display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether the result is "loss (time reduction)" or "loss" and the fluctuation pattern of the time reduction gas (step 059AKS101).

If the special figure display result is "loss (time reduction)", or if it is "loss" and the variation pattern of the time reduction is (step 059AKS101; Yes), whether or not the CPU 120 for staging control is in the time reduction. Is determined (step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, if it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened by confirming whether or not the high base flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is set to the ON state. good. When the time is not shortened (step 059AKS102; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the lost symbol of the reach combination as the temporary stop symbol (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature unit 059AK, if the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", or if it is "missing" and the time saving is a fluctuation pattern, the reach effect of super reach is executed, and then. A time-saving fanning effect is performed. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a result of the reach effect of the super reach is determined to be the lost symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the decorative symbol of the reach combination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the decorative of the reach combination prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is stored. The temporary stop symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) may be determined by referring to the symbol determination table or the like.

After executing the process of step 059AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving fanning effect setting process for setting the time-saving fanning effect (step 059AKS104).

FIG. 18-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS104 of FIG. 18-26 as the time saving fanning effect setting process. In the time-saving fanning effect setting process shown in FIGS. 18-27, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. As shown in 18-28, the time-saving fanning effect pattern is determined (step 059AKS113), and the time-saving fanning effect setting process is completed. Although not shown in FIGS. 18-28, if the time-saving fanning effect setting process is executed due to the stop symbol setting process being performed in the missing time processing in FIGS. 18-25, the time-saving effect setting process is executed. Since the time-saving type is unknown except for the fluctuation pattern of the ghost, it may be determined to use the time-saving fanning effect pattern, which is a special pattern for missing items (for example, the effect pattern of "success D" with an effect time of 5 seconds).

As shown in FIGS. 18-28, when the time saving types are "time saving A" and "time saving B", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success A" with an effect time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving C", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success B" with an effect time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving D", the time saving fanning effect pattern of "success C" having an effect time of 1 second is determined. In the case of the variation pattern of the time saving gas, it is determined to be the time saving fanning effect pattern of "failure" of the effect time of 10 seconds. The staging time is a time corresponding to the time-saving fanning staging period added in step 059AKS013 in FIG. 18-8 (see FIG. 18-9), and the staging control CPU 120 is a display result transmitted from the main board 11. The time corresponding to the time-saving fanning effect period is determined as the time-saving fanning effect time by the designated command and the variation pattern specification command. In addition, in the feature unit 059AK, for example, the same character is displayed because the production time is the same for the time-saving fanning effect pattern of "success A" and the time-saving fanning effect pattern of "failure", and the time-saving pattern is displayed in "success A". Is the success pattern that finally stops and displays, and in "Failure", the time-saving symbol does not finally stop and displays, and the decorative symbol of the reach combination stops and displays. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not it succeeds (whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, in the feature unit 059AK, as shown in FIGS. 18-12, the rate at which the variable display result becomes "missing (time saving)" differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. Similarly, the execution ratio differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. That is, with respect to the reach effect of Super Reach A, which has a high expectation of a big hit, the variable display result does not become "missing (time reduction)", and the time reduction fanning effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained. Further, as shown in FIG. 18-12 (B), regarding the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gasp that the variable display result does not become "loss (time saving)" even if the time saving fanning effect is executed, the jackpot expectation such as Super Reach C is obtained. A low reach effect is performed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing the time-saving fanning effect also differs.

After returning to FIGS. 18-26 and executing the process of step 059AKS104, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is “missing (time saving)” (step 059AKS105). When the special symbol display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the staging control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time reduction symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and stops. The symbol setting process is terminated. In step 059AKS106, the time saving symbol in the mode corresponding to the time saving type may be determined as the final stop symbol (see FIGS. 18-32 (D-1) and 18-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, when the special figure display result is neither "missing (time saving)" nor "missing" and is not a fluctuation pattern of the time saving gap (step 059AKS101; No), the staging control CPU 120 is a decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed this time. It is determined whether or not the variable display of is the variable display corresponding to the change of the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 18-24, after the number of time reductions is subtracted by 1 to become "0", the time reduction end time flag is set to the on state, and the variable display performed immediately after that is displayed. Whether or not the display is variable corresponding to the second special figure may be determined by whether or not the second symbol change start designation command has been received.

In the case of variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is stored after the end of the time reduction. Executes the return effect setting process to execute the return effect that suggests whether or not the hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the figure. (Step 059AKS108).

FIG. 18-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of FIGS. 18-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in FIGS. 18-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)". , Of the effect control command reception buffers provided in the RAM 122, the determination is made by confirming the contents of the effect control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special figure (step 059AKS115).

When there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS115; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 holds the hold corresponding to the second special figure. A return success pattern is set to notify that there is a hold in the memory in which the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)", that is, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed again in any of the remaining holds (step 059AKS116). ), Ends the return effect setting process. On the other hand, when there is no hold in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" (step 059AKS115; No), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the second special figure. A return failure pattern is used to notify that there is no hold in the hold memory for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)", that is, the time saving symbol will not be stopped and displayed again due to one of the remaining holds. It is set (step 059AKS117), and the return effect setting process is terminated. In the feature unit 059AK, both the return effect of the return success pattern and the return effect of the return failure pattern perform a common effect (an effect of inciting whether or not the time is shortened again), and as a result, a stop display is displayed. The combination of decorative patterns to be made is different.

After returning to FIGS. 18-26 and executing the process of step 059AKS108, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the return effect pattern set in step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; Yes), the decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time saving return symbol is determined as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS110), and the stop symbol setting process is terminated. The time saving return symbol is a symbol different from the time saving symbol determined as the final stop symbol in step 059AKS106 according to the time saving type (see FIG. 18-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, when it is not a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; No), when it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time is being shortened (step 059AKS102; Yes), or when it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)". When it is determined that the display is not (step 059AKS105; No), or when it is determined that the display is not variable corresponding to the change of the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction in step 059AKS107 (step 059AKS107; No). ), The effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a reach combination updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random number counter for effect, and stores it in ROM 121 in advance. The definite decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the reach combination. In this way, even if it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special symbol display result is "missing (time reduction)" in the stop symbol setting process, if the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), the decorative symbol The final stop symbol of is a decorative symbol of the reach combination by the processing of step 059AKS111.

After returning to FIG. 18-24 and executing the process of step 059AKS092, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display in addition to the settings in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. After making settings for executing the effect during variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern such as the effect to be made or a mini game (step S559), one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance for the effect control pattern. (Step S560). The staging control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared staging control patterns (staging control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) corresponding to, for example, the staging pattern indicated by the staging pattern determination result specification command. Set as a pattern. Further, when it is decided to execute the time saving fanning effect or the returning effect, the effect control pattern corresponding to the time saving fanning effect or the returning effect is selected and set as the usage pattern. If it is determined in the process of dropping out in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern designation command cannot be normally received, it is not necessary to select the staging control pattern. In this case, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed and the previous variable display result remains, but it is waited until the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received. At the same time, the decorative design corresponding to the display result specification command may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the variation pattern specification command has not been normally received, the effect control pattern dedicated to the time of omission may be selected in step S560. ..

Following the process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120 receives, for example, a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result designation command and the effect time in the case of executing the time saving fanning effect. The initial value of the staging control process timer provided in the staging control timer setting unit or the like is set (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, when the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect is made in the time saving fanning effect setting process of step 059AKS104 of FIGS. 18-26, it is indicated by the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result specification command. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set by adding the effect time of the time-saving fanning effect to the time. After the execution of step S561, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display screen of the image display device 5 to start the variation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 issues, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are started to change. Just do it.

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then the variable display start setting process. To finish.

FIG. 18-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 of FIG. When the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 18-30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S801). ). The effect control CPU 120 updates, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time reduction number display period for displaying the time reduction number (step 059AKS121). ). The time reduction number display period is a period for displaying the time reduction number updated in step 059AKS086A in FIG. 18-24, and may be predetermined in the staging control pattern determined in step S560. When it is determined that the time reduction number display period is reached (step 059AKS121; Yes), the staging control CPU 120 displays the time reduction number display control updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 18-24 as the remaining time reduction number. (Step 059AKS122).

After executing the process of step 059AKS122, or when it is determined in step 059AKS121 that the time saving number display period is not (step 059AKS121; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. (Step 059AKS123). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 059AKS123; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or when it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the reach effect period (step 059AKS123; No), the effect control CPU 120 is at the symbol temporary stop timing which is the timing to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbol. It is determined whether or not there is (step 059AKS125). The symbol temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined when the temporary stop symbol of the reach combination is determined in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 18-26 (step 059AKS103). When it is determined that the symbol temporary stop timing is reached (step 059AKS125; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol temporary stop display (step 059AKS126), and temporarily stops the decorative symbol of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103. Display.

After executing the process of step 059AKS126, or when it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the symbol temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; No), the effect control CPU 120 is the time-saving fanning effect period for executing the time-saving fanning effect. It is determined whether or not (step 059AKS127). The time-saving fanning effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving fanning effect setting process of FIGS. 18-27. When it is determined that the time-saving fanning effect period is reached (step 059AKS127; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the time-saving fanning effect control for executing the time-saving fanning effect (step 059AKS128).

After executing the process of step 059AKS128, or when it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not the time-saving fanning effect period (step 059AKS126; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the return effect period for executing the return effect. (Step 059AKS129). The return effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return effect setting process of FIGS. 18-29. When it is determined that it is the return effect period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the return effect control for executing the return effect (step 059AKS130).

After executing the process of step 059AKS130, or when it is determined that it is not the return effect period (step 059AKS129; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, control is performed to execute an effect during variable display including an effect of changing the display mode of the active display and a variable display operation of a decorative pattern such as a mini game (step S808), and the effect process during variable display is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 is normally received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command has not been normally received (step 809; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is "missing (time reduction)". (Step 059AKS137). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect process during variable display.

On the other hand, when the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets "XXX" as the special time reduction number in the time reduction number (step). 059AKS138), after performing the special time-saving number notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time-saving number (059AKS139), the variable display-during staging process ends. If the symbol confirmation command has not been received normally, the effect itself of notifying the number of time reductions may not be executed. In addition, even if the message is received normally, but inconsistency occurs, for example, the content indicated by the symbol confirmation command and the content indicated by the display result specification command do not match, the notification of the number of time reductions is similarly "?". The special time reduction notification control for displaying "?? times" may be performed, or the effect itself for notifying the time reduction number may not be executed.

When the symbol confirmation command is normally received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the symbol (step S810). After executing the process of step 810, the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmed symbol display time according to the received symbol confirmation command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the fixed time indicated by the commands 8F00 to 8F04 set for transmission in step 059AKS043 shown in FIG. 18-15 or step 059AKS044 may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS131, the staging control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result) is “missing (time reduction)” (step 059AKS132). When the special figure display result (variable display result) is "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is specified by the received symbol confirmation command (FIG. 18-15 (B). ) Is set (step 059AKS133), and the time reduction number notification control for displaying the time reduction number (notifying the time reduction number) is performed (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or when it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special figure display result (variable display result) is not "loss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; No), the staging control CPU 120 is right-handed. It is determined whether or not the erase command is received from the main board 11 side (step 059AKS135), and if it is received (step 059AKS135; Yes), the right-handed instruction display is erased (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or when it is determined in step 059AKS135 that the right-handed erase command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the effect control CPU 120 waits for the value of the effect process flag. The value is updated to "3" corresponding to the processing (step S812), and the variable display during effect processing is terminated.

FIG. 18-31 is a timing chart showing each timing during the variable display in the case where the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed and in other cases. FIGS. 18-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which the variable display result is "loss" (including loss (time reduction)). Specifically, FIGS. 18-31 (A) show an example in which a time saving symbol (referred to as "time saving A" as a time saving type) is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and FIGS. 18-31. (B) shows an example in which the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol without executing the time saving fanning effect, and FIGS. 18-31 (C) show the time saving gasse. An example of a fluctuation pattern is shown. In the illustrated example, in order to facilitate understanding, all of FIGS. 18-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which Super Reach C is executed, and FIGS. 18-31 (A) and ( B) shows an example in which the fluctuation pattern of PB2-1 is selected, and FIG. 18-31 (C) shows an example in which the fluctuation pattern of PB2-5 is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 18-31 (A), when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and then the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. To. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (in this example, the decorative symbol of 757). And the time-saving fanning production is performed. The time-saving fanning effect period L4 is 10 seconds, similarly to the time-saving fanning effect period L5 shown in FIGS. 18-31 (C) (see FIGS. 18-9 and 18-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the time saving fanning effect is completed, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the combination of the decorative symbols at 7:07), and the fluctuation changes after the confirmation symbol display period L1 elapses. finish. The confirmed symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 18-15 (B)).

As shown in FIGS. 18-31 (B), when the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol without the time saving fanning effect being executed, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached. After that, the reach production of Super Reach C is executed. After that, when the symbol confirmation command is received (767 in this example). Then, after the lapse of the confirmed symbol display period L2, the fluctuation ends. The confirmed symbol display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see FIGS. 18-15 (A)), which is the same as the confirmed symbol display period L3 shown in FIGS. 18-31 (C).

As shown in FIGS. 18-31 (C), in the case of the variation pattern of the time saving gas, when the variable display is started, the reach state is reached, and then the reach effect of the super reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbol of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed (in this example, the decorative symbol of 757). And the time-saving fanning production is performed. The time-saving fanning effect period L5 is 10 seconds, similarly to the time-saving fanning effect period L4 shown in FIGS. 18-31 (A) (see FIGS. 18-9 and 18-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the time-saving fanning effect is completed, the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (767 in this example). Then, after the lapse of the finalized symbol display period L3, the fluctuation ends. The confirmed symbol display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIGS. 18-15 (A)), which is the same as the confirmed symbol display period L2 shown in FIGS. 18-31 (B).

Next, an example of the operation of the effect when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed or when the time-saving fanning effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 18-32 to 18-35.

As shown in FIG. 18-32 (A), when the game state is the normal state after the reach effect of the super reach C is executed, the symbol temporary stop timing is shown in FIG. 18-32 (B-1). As shown, the decorative design of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", "7" is used as the decorative symbol 5La, "5" is used as the decorative symbol 5Ca, and the decorative symbol 5Ra is used, respectively. An example is shown when "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. As shown in the figure, the symbol "5" as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed in a visually recognizable manner while being shaken. Further, the present invention is not limited to the decorative symbol 5Ca in each decorative symbol display area 5C of the “middle”, and all the decorative symbols may remain shaken. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the time saving state, since it is determined as No in step 059AKS102 in FIGS. 18-26, the process of step 059AKS111 is performed without displaying the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol of the reach combination. , As shown in FIG. 18-32 (B-2), the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In the illustrated example, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result (in the illustrated example, an example of the special symbol display result of "1" which is the time saving type of the time saving A is shown), while the decorative symbol is shown. Shows an example of the case where the time saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 18-32 (B-2), after the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the final stop symbol display period.

When the time-saving fanning effect period is reached from the state shown in FIG. 18-32 (B-1), the time-saving fanning effect is executed as shown in FIG. 18-32 (C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 of "maybe time saving !?" is displayed to indicate whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, for example, two characters battle. Then, depending on whether or not the player wins, it may be possible to incite whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation command is received, the final stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIGS. 18-32 (D-1) or (D-2). In FIG. 18-32 (D-1), the variable display result is “missing (time reduction)”, and the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 18-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, and “time reduction A”. The example of the case where the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol is shown, and the special symbol display result also shows the number "1" which is the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving A". An example is shown when a special symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the display mode of "green" before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed. The display mode may be changed immediately after the start of the effect, or may be changed during the reach effect of the super reach. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern of the time saving gas, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 shown in FIG. 18-15 (A) is received, as the final stop symbol as shown in FIG. 18-32 (D-2). The lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. As the special symbol display result, as shown in the figure, a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" which is a lost symbol is displayed as the special symbol display result. Then, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the display mode of "blue" before the lost symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. The display mode may be changed immediately after the start of the fanning effect, or may be changed during the reach effect of the super reach. In addition, regarding the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, depending on which display mode the display mode of the active display changes to, even if the reach effect of the same type of super reach is performed, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. The display mode of the active display may be changed so that the ratio of the active display is different. The change destination of the display mode in the active change effect may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (A). Further, unlike the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (A), the variable display result is different depending on whether the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" or the variation pattern of the time reduction gap. It is also possible to set the ratio of the display mode of "green" or "red" to be higher in the case of "loss (shortening of time)".

By executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 18-30 in the state shown in FIGS. 18-32 (D-1), as shown in FIGS. 18-33 (E), the time reduction number display as the time reduction number notification control. M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in FIGS. 18-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, "time reduction 100 times!" Is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. When the process of step 059AKS139 in FIG. 18-30 is executed, "time reduction ??? times" is displayed as a special time reduction notification control, and the notification of the time reduction number (time reduction number) is restricted. Just do it. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F01, elapses, as shown in FIGS. 18-33 (F), the time is controlled to a shorter time state and a new variable display (hold display) is performed. (Variable display corresponding to HL1) is started. At that time, the hold display HL3 and HL2 shift to the right. Further, by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 18-30, as shown in FIG. 18-33 (F), the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 99 times" is displayed. Further, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 18-24, the right-handed instruction display M3 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 18-33 (F) is performed.

After that, the variable display is performed a plurality of times in the time saving state. FIG. 18-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. In the time-saving state, since the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, the variable display corresponding to the second special figure is performed and the hold corresponding to the second special figure is stored. In the example shown in FIGS. 18-33 (G), four reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure are stored, and four reserved displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. Further, an example is shown in which the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 19 times" is displayed. It should be noted that the right-handed instruction display of the mode displayed in FIGS. 18-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second and subsequent times are terminated with FIGS. 18-33 (G). ), It is displayed as a right-handed instruction display M3 in an aspect that does not interfere with other effects.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th variation in the time saving state) is completed after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state ends. FIG. 18-33 (H) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed in the 100th variable display after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Is shown. After the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols, are stopped and displayed, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00, and the time saving state ends. When the time saving state ends, the right-handed erase command is received from the main board 11 side, so that the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 18-30 is performed, and right-handed as shown in FIG. 18-33 (H). The instruction display M3 will be erased. In this state, as shown in the figure, four reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure are stored, four of the reserved displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, and the variable corresponding to the reserved display HR1 is displayed. The period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4 is the remaining hold period).

Subsequently, when the time saving state ends and the normal state is reached, as shown in FIG. 18-33 (I), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is started. In the illustrated example, an example in which the variable display result is "missing" is shown (an example in which it is not "missing (time reduction)" is also shown). In the feature unit 059AK of this embodiment, the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)" in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state, although it is in the normal state. Since the ratio is high (see FIGS. 18-5 (A) and (B)), the ratio of being controlled to the time saving state again is high. Therefore, although it is in a normal state during the remaining hold period, the left-handed instruction display is not performed as shown in the figure, and the right-handed instruction display and the left-handed instruction display are repeatedly displayed, which confuses the player. It is prevented from letting you do it. As shown in FIG. 18-34 (N-2), the left-handed instruction display is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the remaining hold period.

The variable display is the first variable display in the second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction, and since the return effect execution setting is performed in the process of step 059AKS108 of FIGS. 18-26, the return effect is performed. During the period, the return effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 18-34 (J). In the return effect, for example, whether or not a hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored depending on whether or not the predetermined mission is cleared (variable corresponding to the remaining hold HR2 to HR4). Whether or not the display result is "missing (time reduction)"), that is, an effect suggesting whether or not the time reduction return symbol is stopped and displayed may be executed. If it is a return success pattern, the predetermined mission is cleared and the time saving return symbol is stopped and displayed, while if it is a return failure pattern, the predetermined mission ends in failure and the time saving return symbol is not displayed as a stop. The combination of decorative symbols constituting the reach may be stopped and displayed as the final stop. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of predetermined missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. If the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is "missing (time reduction)", the return effect is not executed because it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIGS. 18-26, but the return effect is executed. You may try to do it. In this case, the time-saving fanning effect may be executed after the return effect.

When the hold in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored, that is, when the return is a successful pattern, the process of step 059AKS110 in FIGS. 18-26 changes the display to FIG. 18-34 (K-1). As shown, the combination of decorative symbols including the time reduction return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and it is notified that there is a hold in which the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" in the stored hold. Will be done. In this example, the case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time reduction)" (more specifically, the time reduction type of "time reduction D") is shown.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (L-1), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the time-saving return small symbol M5 that makes it visible that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed may be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. According to this, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed while the remaining hold is in progress, so that the player can be given a sense of security.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time reduction)" (the time reduction type is "time reduction D"), so that it is a symbol confirmation command. Upon receiving the symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIGS. 18-15 (B), as shown in FIG. 18-34 (M-1), the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of "time saving D" is stopped as the final stop symbol. Is displayed. As for the special figure display result, unlike FIG. 18-32 (D-1), a special symbol showing the number "8" corresponding to the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving D" is displayed as the special figure display result. The number. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA is changed to the display mode of "green" before the time saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

By executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 18-30 in the state shown in FIG. 18-34 (M-1), as shown in FIG. 18-35 (N-1), the time reduction as the time reduction number notification control is performed. The number of times display M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in FIGS. 18-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, "time reduction 20 times!" Is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F04, elapses, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in FIGS. 18-35 (O), it is controlled to a time saving state and newly. Variable display (variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3) is started. Further, by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 18-30, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (O), the time reduction number display M4 of "time reduction remaining 19 times" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 18-35 (O) in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 18-24, a simple right-handed instruction display M3, which is a mode that is less conspicuous than the mode shown in FIG. 18-33 (F), is displayed. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the hold in which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is not stored, that is, in the case of the return failure pattern, the process of step 059AKS111 in FIGS. 18-26 causes FIG. 18-34 (K-2). ), The decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination are stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, and the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (L-2), the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, unlike FIG. 18-34 (L-1), the short-time return small symbol M5 is not displayed because it was a return effect of the return failure pattern.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 18-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed, and the confirmed symbols specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 are displayed. After 0.5 seconds of the display period, the fluctuation ends and the remaining hold period ends. When the remaining holding period ends, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 18-18.

Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3 is started, the process of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 18-24 causes "return to left-handed!" As shown in FIG. 18-34 (N-2). The left-handed instruction display M6 is displayed. In this way, the left-handed instruction display is performed in the variable display to be executed next after the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure remaining after the end of the time reduction is completed.

18-36 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing in the information output processing performed in the information output processing in step S23 of FIG. In the processing in the information output processing shown in FIGS. 18-36, for example, a processing for outputting signals such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. I do. When the process in the information output process shown in FIGS. 18-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating a special figure display result or a normal figure display result as a display signal output process (step S1801). After executing the process of step S1801, the CPU 103 executes the drive signal output process (step S1802) and outputs the drive signal of the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes the external information output process (step S1803), and ends the process in the information output process. In step S1803, the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress, the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the jackpot is in the middle or the time reduction state (the prize is being awarded), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time reduction state is in progress, and the jackpot signal 3. Various signals such as a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the fluctuation has ended are output.

18-37 is a timing chart showing the output timings of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of FIGS. 18-36. Specifically, FIGS. 18-37 (A) show the output timings of various signals when the time saving state is reached due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and FIGS. 18-37 (B) show the time saving state due to the time saving symbol stop. The output timings of various signals in the case of

As shown in FIGS. 18-37 (A), when the time is shortened due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, first, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the jackpot symbol stop is output, and thereby (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). Then, the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the jackpot signal 3 is output because the time is shortened at that timing. Then, with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and when the symbol confirmation signal indicating a jackpot symbol stop is output again without ending the time saving state, the jackpot signal 1 is output and the jackpot signal 3 is output. Stops output. Since it is a big hit in the time saving state, the output of the big hit signal 2 is continued as shown in the figure. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the jackpot signal 3 is output because the time is shortened at that timing. After that, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the loss symbol stop is output, and the time reduction state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. , The outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 18-37 (B), when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, first, the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and thereby (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). Then, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing. Then, with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a lost symbol stop is output, and when a symbol confirmation signal indicating a jackpot symbol stop is output without ending the time saving state, a jackpot is output at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. The signal 1 is output, and the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, the output of the jackpot signal 1 is stopped at the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the time is shortened again at that timing, so that the jackpot signal 3 is output. As shown in the figure, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. After that, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed with the passage of time, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the loss symbol stop is output, and the time reduction state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. , The outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation and prevent confusion, and the external device is suitable for a time saving state or continuous operation. The state of the villa can be specified. After that, when the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output again, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

In the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 18-4, the CPU 103 can determine "missing (time saving)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether or not the game state is the time saving state, and the special figure display result. When "Loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed, when it is in the normal state, it is controlled to the time reduction state (travel-specific state) in the next special figure game (variable display), while the time reduction. When it is in the state, the control regarding the game state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time reduction)" is not performed (the new time reduction control is not performed). Further, when the effect control CPU 120 derives and displays "loss (time reduction)" as a special figure display result, in the normal state, the time reduction as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIGS. 18-26. While the use symbol is stopped and displayed, when the time is shortened, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of FIGS. 18-26. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18-32 (B-2) and (D-1), as a "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the time reduction state is achieved. The special figure display result of is a common display result (special figure display result showing the number of "1" corresponding to the time reduction type of "time reduction A"), while the variable display result of the decorative symbol is in the game state. In the normal state, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 18-26, while in the time-saving state, the reach is reached in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 18-26. The final stop symbol that composes the combination is stopped and displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game entertainment when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, in the process of step 059AKS104 of FIGS. 18-26, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect for inciting whether or not the time saving symbol indicating that the time saving symbol is controlled to be controlled to the time saving state from the next variable display is stopped is set. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a time-saving fanning effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 does not perform the process of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the normal state, and does not perform the process of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of a time saving state (special state), the time saving fanning effect is not executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game entertainment when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, when the "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, the CPU 103 is in the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 18-15, in the process of step 059AKS043. While the decorative symbol stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 18-15 (B) is transmitted, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS041, the decorative symbol stop command with the fixed time set to 0.5 seconds is transmitted. That is, when "missing (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed in the normal state and the special state. Time (fixed time) is different. According to this, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game entertainment when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

Further, in the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 18-4, the CPU 103 can determine "missing (time saving)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether or not the game state is the time saving state. When "Loss (time reduction)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the display result, when it is in the normal state, it is controlled to the time reduction state (travel-specific state) in the next special figure game (variable display). , In the time saving state, the control regarding the game state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time saving)" is not performed (the new time saving control is not performed). Then, as shown in FIGS. 18-5, in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table "misses" the special figure display result. The determination data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the time reduction state from the next variable display as "time reduction)" is high. Further, the staging control CPU 120 returns based on whether or not the hold of "loss (time saving)" is stored in the hold stored at the end of the time saving state by the process of step 059AKS108 of FIGS. 18-26. It is possible to execute the production. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can display the right-handed instruction in the process of step 059AKS090 in FIG. 18-24, and until the left-handed instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 18-18 is received, that is, The left-handed instruction display is not performed until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are finished. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 18-24 by receiving the left-handed instruction command in the normal state. Then, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 18-18, that is, when all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. The effect control CPU 120 displays the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 18-24 in the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed. .. According to this, suitable launch notification becomes possible, and the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not the remaining hold period is reached, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 in FIGS. 18-16. Then, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, a right-handed instruction display in a mode corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 18-24. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game entertainment.

In the return effect, the effect control CPU 120 stores, for example, whether or not a hold for which the special figure display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared (HR2 which is a remaining hold). -Whether or not the variable display result corresponding to HR4 is "missing (time reduction)"), that is, whether or not the time reduction return symbol is stopped and displayed. The return effect includes a return effect of the return success pattern and a return effect of the return failure pattern, both of which aim to clear a predetermined mission to determine whether or not the time is shortened again. The combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not the predetermined mission is cleared as a result of executing the effect). According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention after performing a common effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-7, when the variable display result of the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)", the CPU 103 determines "time reduction C" or "time reduction D" as the time reduction type. Then, in the process of step 059AKS113 of FIGS. 18-27, the effect control CPU 120 is determined as a time-saving fanning effect pattern that executes a time-saving fanning effect of different patterns according to the time-saving type, as shown in FIGS. 18-28. That is, the time-saving fanning effect executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure in the normal state becomes "loss (time reduction)" and the variable display result corresponding to the second special figure of the remaining hold are "loss". (Time saving) ”, a different pattern of time saving fanning effect is executed with the time saving fanning effect. According to this, since different patterns of production are executed depending on the situation, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed erase command in the variable display of the time saving end times by the process of step 059AKS066 in FIG. 18-17. Then, at the end of the variable display of the reduced working hours end time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the right-handed instruction display by the process of step 059AKS136 in FIG. 18-30 based on the command. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display is erased during the remaining hold period. Further, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not the remaining hold period is reached, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 in FIGS. 18-16. Then, on the side of the staging control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed after the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), the relevant step 059AKS090 in FIG. 18-24. A right-handed instruction is displayed according to the received command. According to this, suitable launch notification becomes possible, and the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Further, the CPU 103 has a big hit signal 1 indicating that it is in a big hit, a big hit signal 2 indicating that it is in a big hit middle or a time saving state (it is in a special prize), and a time saving by the process of step S1803 in FIGS. 18-36. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the machine is in a state and a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the fluctuation has ended can be output to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, as shown in FIGS. 18-37 (B), a symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and a big hit signal is output at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. Is output. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18-37 (B), the CPU 103 outputs the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped. Stop. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 18-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time reduction start flag is on is selected), the super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation The decision value is not assigned, and the decision value is assigned so that the rate of "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of super reach to be executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-handed instruction commands depending on whether or not the remaining hold period is reached, as in the processes of step 059AKS054 and step 059AKS057 in FIGS. 18-16. Then, on the side of the staging control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (variable display performed after the variable display in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed), the relevant step 059AKS090 in FIG. 18-24. A right-handed instruction is displayed according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18-11 and 18-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, when it becomes a big hit, when it becomes a loss (time reduction), or when it simply becomes a loss. , And so on, the determined values are assigned so as to have a plurality of variable display results. According to this, the variation of the production result increases and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result specification command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect based on these commands. .. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is such that the reach effect of the super reach B is performed by the received variation pattern designation command, and even if it is determined as No in step S552 of FIG. 18-24, the display is displayed. Based on the result designation command, whether or not to execute the process of step 059AKS104 or step 059AKS106 differs depending on whether the case of determining Yes or No in 059AKS101 of FIGS. 18-26. That is, even when a variation pattern command of common effect contents such as executing the reach effect of super reach B or super reach C is received, a different effect is executed depending on the content of the display result designation command. According to this, the variation of the production result increases and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the process of step 059AKS104 of FIGS. 18-26, the execution setting of the time saving fanning effect (special effect) for inciting whether or not the time saving symbol indicating that the time saving symbol is controlled to be controlled to the time saving state from the next variable display is stopped and displayed. By performing the above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving fanning effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving fanning effect after executing the reach effect common to the case where the time-saving fanning effect is executed and the case where the time-saving fanning effect is not executed. According to this, since the special production is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18-12, since the ratio of the variable display result to "loss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the time reduction fanning effect is also executed in the same manner. The execution rate differs depending on the type of reach effect to be performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-12 (B), with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the time saving gasp that the variable display result does not become "loss (time saving)" even if the time saving fanning effect is executed, the jackpot expectation such as Super Reach C is obtained. A low reach effect is performed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing the time-saving fanning effect also differs. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the rate at which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed differs depending on which display mode the active display display mode changes, even if the reach effect is the same type of super reach. Change the display mode of the active display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result specification command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect based on these commands. .. Even if the content of the received display result specification command is different, the effect control CPU 120 may display a special figure display result (variable) if the received variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern for performing the reach effect of Super Reach B. Regardless of the display result), the common reach effect of Super Reach B is executed. According to this, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-7, the number of time reductions controlled to the time reduction state differs depending on the time reduction type, and as shown in FIG. 18-12, the super reach effect executed according to the time reduction type is performed. The proportions are different. Further, as shown in FIGS. 18-28, the pattern of the time-saving fanning effect to be executed differs depending on the time-saving type. According to this, it is possible to attract the attention of the player because the number of time reductions thereafter differs depending on the effect to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 18-8, and sets a transmission of a decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 18-15. The effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the effect based on the content of the received display result specification command in the stop symbol setting process of FIGS. 18-26, and receives the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 of FIG. 18-30. Set the number of time reductions specified by. According to this, the staging control can be preferably performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 18-24, so that the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command can be input. When it is determined whether or not reception is normal, and if reception is not normal, the missing time processing shown in Fig. 18-25 is executed, and either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is missed. , It is prohibited to execute a time-saving effect such as a time-saving fanning effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of a miss. According to this, it is possible to appropriately perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game entertainment.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the staging control CPU 120 could not be normally received in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 18-24, the variation pattern specification command can be normally received and is specified by the variation pattern specification command. When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of time reduction confirmation or a fluctuation pattern of time reduction gas, by executing the stop symbol setting process in step 059AKS095 of FIG. It is possible. According to this, it is possible to appropriately perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the number of time reductions by the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 18-30. Then, when the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally, the special time reduction number notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time reduction number in the process of step 059AKS139 is performed to execute the time reduction number notification. Restrict. According to this, it is possible to appropriately perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold display change effect in the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIGS. 18-22. Then, in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is a hold that is a "big hit", a hold that is a "loss (time reduction)", or a hold that is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 18-23 (B) is selected, and the hold display change effect is executed. That is, when a hold whose variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the hold storage currently stored, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is a hold that is a "big hit", a hold that is a "loss (time reduction)", or a hold that is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 18-23 (B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when a hold whose display result is "big hit" is stored, as in the case where a hold whose variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the currently stored hold storage, FIG. 18 -23 (B) is selected to restrict the execution of the hold display change effect by selecting the hold change determination table at the time of restriction. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082, the variable display result is a hold that is a "big hit", a hold that is a "loss (time reduction)", or a hold that is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is "time reduction". When the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the hold change determination table at the time of limitation shown in FIG. 18-23 (B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the display result is "missing" and the holding of the fluctuation pattern whose fluctuation pattern is "time saving" is stored, the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game when the effect related to the state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 18-23 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the hold display change effect when the hold display change effect is restricted, or even if the hold display change effect is executed, the hold display change of the display mode of "blue" is changed. Perform the production. That is, the hold display change effect indicating the degree of expectation higher than the display mode of "green" is not executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18-23 (B), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute a type of hold display change effect that changes to a display mode such as "green" or "red" when the hold display change effect is restricted. .. According to this, since the execution of the specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unnecessary expectation.

(Modification example of feature part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18-5, an example is shown in which the time-saving symbol as a special figure display result is a part of "loss", but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIGS. 18-38, a part of the small hit symbol may be used as a time saving symbol. In this case, the time saving control may be performed after the end of the small hit game state, and the right-handed instruction display may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small hit game state. Further, as in the above embodiment, even when the small hit symbol, which is the time saving symbol, is stopped and displayed again in the time saving state in the time saving state, the time saving state is not newly controlled, and the effect control CPU 120 is used. Instead of the small hit symbol including the time saving symbol, the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the small hit may be simply stopped and displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining hold are completed, the left-handed instruction command is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 18-18, and the remaining hold is performed by the effect control CPU 120. An example of performing a left-handed instruction display in the first variable display performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the above is shown. There may be a second aspect that is inconspicuous to the player, and the left-handed instruction display of the second aspect may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold. The left-handed instruction display is performed for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed instruction command to, for example, four variable displays, but with the passage of time, from the second aspect. It may change to the first aspect. Further, the left-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include voice, lighting of a lamp, and the like (that is, left-handed notification for notifying left-handed). Then, for example, in the first aspect, the other output sound is erased and the sound for notifying the left-handed is output, while in the second aspect, the sound for notifying the left-handed is output without erasing the other output sound. do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the return effect is performed when the variable display (variation) corresponding to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the reduced working hours is performed, but this is an example. Is. The execution timing of the return effect is not limited to the first variable display after the end of the time reduction. The timing of any of the first to third variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return effect. In addition, after the return effect of the return failure pattern is executed, the pattern is switched to the return success pattern, and after the return effect of the return failure pattern is executed, the return effect of the return success pattern is performed in the next variable display. The return effect may be executed a plurality of times until a success pattern is reached over the display.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pattern of the time saving fanning effect executed according to the time saving type is different, that is, the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "missing (time saving)" (time saving C or D time saving). An example is shown in which the pattern of the time saving fanning effect is different depending on the type and the case where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time saving)" (time saving type A or B). This is an example. There are cases where the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" and cases where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". , The pattern of the time-saving fanning effect may be common.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18-15, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), in the normal state. An example in which the time (fixed time) from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation is different depending on the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction A or B). Is shown, but this is just an example. When the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". The fixed time may be the same depending on the case (time reduction type A or B). According to this, it is possible to suppress the increase of control data.

For example, the fixed time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" is the same as the case where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". It may be time. According to this, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state will be achieved.

In addition, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "loss (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction C or D), the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "loss (time reduction)". (FIGS. 18-35 (N-1) and 18-33 (E)) show an example in which, for example, the number of times of time reduction in a common mode is notified in the fixed time in the case of (time reduction type A or B). However, these may be in different embodiments.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the right-handed instruction display is erased after the end of the time saving state and the right-handed instruction display is not performed during the remaining hold period, but this is an example. The right-handed instruction display is not limited to a simple display, but may include voice, lighting of a lamp, etc. (that is, it may be a right-handed notification that notifies right-handed), and an image is displayed during the remaining hold period. The right-handed lamp indicating right-handedness may be turned on without displaying and outputting the sound in the device 5.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 18-37 (B), when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time reductions is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating a loss symbol stop is output, and the symbol confirmation is performed. Since the time saving state ends at the timing when the signal output is stopped, an example in which the output with the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the timing is shown, but this is an example. For example, the variable display result corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time reduction has a high ratio of "missing (time reduction)", so that even if the time reduction state ends, it remains. The output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the hold is completed. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the consecutive villa state with an external device.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a time saving fanning effect is performed after the reach effect of the super reach, and it is suggested whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped, but this is an example. For example, as a result of the reach effect, the results of a big hit (including a small hit), a time-saving symbol stop, and a loss may be displayed. According to this, the variation of the execution result of the reach effect increases, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time reduction)", an example of adding the time reduction fanning effect period to the fluctuation pattern is shown, but in addition to this, for example, "revival jackpot" is variable. A display result is provided, the same fluctuation pattern as when the variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" can be selected, the revival effect period to be executed after the reach effect is added (for example, 20 seconds), and a big hit is configured after the revival effect. The symbol (special symbol and corresponding decorative symbol) to be displayed may be stopped and displayed. According to this, the variation of the production can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, when the variable display result is "revival jackpot", the process of adding the revival effect period may be executed after step S262 in FIG. 18-8, and the variation of the effect can be increased by a simple process. can.

In the above embodiment, after the effect of inciting whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by the reach effect of super reach is performed, the effect of inciting whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed by the time-saving fanning effect is performed. However, in addition to this, for example, in the time-saving fanning effect, in addition to whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is more advantageous than the time-saving. May be notified. According to this, it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, the symbol confirmation command cannot be normally received in steps S809 and 059AKS137 of FIGS. 18-30, and the special symbol display result (variable display result) is the symbol in "loss (time reduction)". If it is a confirmation command, an example of limiting the notification of the time reduction number by performing the special time reduction number notification control that displays "??? times" as the notification of the time reduction number in step 059AKS139 is shown. Even when the special time reduction number notification control is performed by changing the background image according to the time reduction number, the player may be able to specify the time reduction number to some extent. Specifically, the background designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side according to the remaining number of time reductions, and the background image specified by the received background designation command is displayed on the effect control board 12 side. do it. According to this, since the player can specify the number of time reductions to some extent from the background image, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, each time the variable display is executed, the main board 11 side sends a time reduction number designation command indicating the remaining time reduction number, and the staging control board 12 side sends the remaining time reduction number according to the time reduction number designation command. The number of times may be notified. According to this, even when the special time reduction notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest. Further, for example, when the number of time reductions is 100, a special fluctuation pattern may be transmitted from the main board 11 side to the staging control board 12 side at the timing when the remaining 50 times are left. On the side, the remaining 50 times of time reduction notification may be performed according to the reception of the special fluctuation pattern. According to this, even when the special time reduction notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining time reduction number of times, so that it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest.

In the above embodiment, the variable display result is "big hit" in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 18-22, "loss (time reduction)", or "loss". When the hold of the change pattern whose change pattern is "time saving" is stored, an example of selecting the time-limited hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (B) and executing the hold display change effect, that is, , When the hold in which the variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the hold storage currently stored, or when the hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" is stored, FIG. 18- An example is shown in which the common limited time hold change determination table shown in 23 (B) is selected and the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted, but this is an example. It differs depending on whether the hold in which the variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the hold storage currently stored and the hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" is stored. The execution of the hold display change effect may be restricted by selecting the hold change determination table at the time of restriction. For example, on the one hand, the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change effect may be executed, and on the other hand, the pre-reading notice effect of the dialogue notice may be executed. In this case, it suffices to execute a kind of production with a low degree of expectation. In addition, if the hold that the variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" is stored in the hold storage that is currently stored, the hold display change effect is not executed and the variable display result becomes "big hit". When the hold is stored, it may be determined whether or not the hold change effect is executed based on the hold change determination table which does not have the display mode of "green" or more shown in FIG. 18-23 (B).

Further, in the above embodiment, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit", a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit", or a hold in which the variable display result is "missing (time reduction)" in the hold storage currently stored in step 059AKS082 in FIG. 18-22, or " When the hold of the change pattern of "Loss" and the change pattern of "Time saving" is stored, select the time-limited hold change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (B), and expect the degree of expectation to be "green" or higher. An example is shown in which the hold display change effect is not executed, but this is an example. For example, in addition to the hold display change effect as the look-ahead notice effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of look-ahead notice effect such as a dialogue notice and a look-ahead zone notice, and when it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082 of FIG. The pre-reading notice effect of the zone notice type may not be executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted from the hold stored before the read-ahead notice target.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbols are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "-". An example represented by a lighting pattern is shown, but this is just an example. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of eight LEDs, for example, as shown in FIGS. 18-39, and the special symbol is represented by a lighting combination of these eight LEDs. May be good. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", it is represented by lighting of three of the eight LEDs, and the variable display result is "missing (time saving)". In the case of "" and "missing", it may be represented by lighting of two LEDs.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 18-34 (L-1), as shown in FIG. 18-34 (M-1), “time saving D” is performed at the central portion of the image display device 5. An example is shown in which the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type is displayed as a final stop symbol, but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 18-40, after the state shown in FIG. 18-40 (L-1) (similar to FIG. 18-34 (L-1)), the time saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed. Since the time saving return small symbol M5 to be visible is displayed and it has already been notified that the time saving symbol will be stopped during the remaining hold period, as shown in FIG. 18-40 (M-3), the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display of the above may be reduced and displayed (referred to as a reduced symbol M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, may be displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5. According to this, the game can be sharpened and the game can be improved. Since it has already been notified that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining hold period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining hold period. In addition to not executing, the restriction may include executing in a mode with low expectation, or executing in an inconspicuous manner such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 059AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
The state control means is
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the normal display result is based on the special display result. Controlling from the state to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, the control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed).
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the normal state is the normal state or the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS092). Execute, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for staging is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure and the decorative pattern). Variable display, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, FIGS. 18-32 (B-2) and As shown in (D-1), the special figure display result as "loss (time reduction)" (special display result) in the case where the game state is the normal state and the case where the game state is the time reduction state is a common display result ( (Special figure display result indicating the number "1" which is the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving A")), the identification information for the effect different between the normal state and the special state. (For example, regarding the variable display result of the decorative symbol, when the game state is the normal state, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 059AKS106 of FIGS. 18-26, while the time saving is displayed. When it is in the state, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 in FIGS. 18-26).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game entertainment when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting that the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is No. 1 in step 059AKS102. If it is determined that, the process of step 059AKS104 can be executed, etc.), if it is in the special state, the special effect is not executed (for example, if it is determined to be Yes in step 059AKS102, the process of step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.) ),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game entertainment when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation is different between the normal state and the special state (for example, the normal state). If so, while the decorative symbol stop command for the fixed time shown in FIG. 18-15 (B) is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS043, if Yes is determined in step 059AKS041, the fixed time is set to 0.5 seconds. (Send a decorative pattern stop command, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game entertainment when the special display result is displayed in the special state.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 060AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 060AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
The state control means is
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the normal display result is based on the special display result. Controlling from the state to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, the control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed).
As the variable display, the first identification information and the second identification information are variablely displayed, and the variable display of the staging identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The variable display result of the second identification information has a higher ratio of displaying the special display result than the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure display result determination table and the second special). In the figure display result determination table, the probability that the second special figure display result determination table is determined to control the special figure display result to the time reduction state from the next variable display as "loss (time reduction)" is higher. , Decision data is assigned, etc.),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information regarding the variable display stored at the end of the special state includes the information that the variable display result becomes the special display result (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 can execute the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
The second identification information stored at the end of the special state by notifying that the game medium should be launched to a specific path in the game area during control to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS090). The information related to the variable display of is stored at the end of the special state depending on whether the variable display result includes the information that becomes the special display result or the information that becomes the special display result. Until the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information is completed, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the normal route different from the specific route is not performed (for example, right in the process of step 059AKS090). The striking instruction display is possible, and until the left striking instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, that is, until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. Do not display left-handed instructions, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is
Notifying that the game medium should be launched to the normal path in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088).
In the variable display of the first identification information, which is executed first after the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed, the game medium to the normal route. (For example, in the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold is completed, the left-handed instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, suitable launch notification is possible, and the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means is stored when the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and when the special state ends. When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route performed during control in the special state is notified. The mode is different (for example, right-handed instruction display of the mode corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090 is performed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the game entertainment.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The staging execution means includes a case where the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information that the variable display result becomes the special display result, and the special display. Different effects after performing a common effect in the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, depending on whether the resulting information is included. (For example, the return effect includes a return effect of a return success pattern and a return effect of a return failure pattern, and both perform a common effect (for example, an effect aimed at clearing a predetermined mission). However, as a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not the specified mission is cleared),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention after performing a common effect.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The effect executing means is stored when the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and when the special state ends. The effect when the special display result is controlled as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18-28). The pattern of the time-saving fanning effect that is executed according to the time-saving type is different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, different patterns of production are executed depending on the situation, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The case where the special display result is displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information in the advantageous state and the normal state different from the special state, and the case where the second identification information is stored at the end of the special state. The display time of the special display result is the same as when the special display result is displayed as the variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display (for example, the variable display result corresponding to the remaining hold is "missing (time reduction)). (Time reduction type of time reduction C or D) and the case where the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is "missing (time reduction)" (time reduction type of time reduction A or B). Time is common, etc.),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect executing means is
During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route is not performed (for example, the process of step 059AKS136). Etc.),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, the notification that the game medium should be launched to the specific route is given (for example, the process of step 059AKS090 is executed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, suitable launch notification is possible, and the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
A first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state, and
A second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state.
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal corresponding to being controlled in the special state (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3), and the like.
It is equipped with a fourth signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a symbol confirmation signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal in response to the end of variable display.
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the fourth signal is output by the fourth signal output means and the third signal is output by the third signal output means at the end of the variable display. Output (for example, when the time saving state is reached due to the time saving symbol stop, as shown in FIGS. 18-37 (B), the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and the timing at which the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped is stopped. (For example, a big hit signal is output),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the continuous villa state with an external device.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
A first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal corresponding to being controlled in the advantageous state, and
A second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state.
A third signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal corresponding to being controlled in the special state is provided.
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed (time reduction). Even when the state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is not stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold ends),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the continuous villa state with an external device.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above.
The output of the second signal and the third signal are stopped at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped, the outputs of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are the same. Stop at the timing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state and the continuous villa state with an external device.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 061AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 061AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the variable display.
When the state control means displays a special display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time reduction)") different from the specific display result as the variable display result in the normal state, the special display result. Based on this, the normal state is controlled to the special state (for example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed).
The effect executing means is
Depending on whether the variable display result is the specific display result or the special display result, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of common specific effects (for example, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of reach effects).
The ratio of the special display result differs depending on which type of the specific effect is executed among the plurality of types of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18-12, "" depending on the type of super reach. The rate of "loss (shorter working hours)" is different, etc.),
During the control to the special state, the game medium should be notified to be launched to the specific route in the game area, and the game medium should be launched to the specific route in the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed. Start the notification (for example, display a right-handed instruction in a mode corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The staging execution means is common to the specific display result when the variable display result is the specific display result, the special display result, and the specific display result and the predetermined display result different from the special display result. Multiple types of effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18-11 and 11-12, when the reach effects of Super Reach B and Super Reach C are executed, if a big hit occurs, the time is reduced. In the case of a simple loss, the decision value is assigned so that multiple variable display results are obtained, etc.),
You may do so.

With such a configuration, the variation of the production result can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for staging is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed).
A determination means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means.
A command transmission means (for example, variable in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The variable display pattern determining means has a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result when the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result and the special display result. In some cases, a common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C can be determined regardless of the variable display result).
Variable display of the staging identification information is performed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, processing in step S171 or step S172 is executed).
When the effect executing means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect executing means executes a different effect depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, when it is determined as No in step S552). Even so, different effects are executed depending on whether the 059AKS101 determines Yes and No).
You may do so.

With such a configuration, the variation of the production result can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
After executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained (for example, after executing the reach effect of super reach, the time-saving fanning effect can be executed. Etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the special effect is executed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
After executing the specific effect, the effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained, and whether or not the special effect is executed differs depending on the type of the specific effect (for example). Depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, the rate at which the time-saving fanning effect is executed differs, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained after executing the specific effect, and when the special effect is executed depending on the type of the specific effect, the effect is described. The ratio of the special display result is different (for example, the ratio of the time saving fanning effect being executed differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, and the ratio of the time saving symbol being stopped and displayed as the execution result of the time saving fanning effect is also different. Different, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to further execute a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the active display).
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined effect, the ratio of the special display result when the specific effect is executed differs (for example, the display mode of the active display changes to which display mode, the same type of supermarket. Even in the reach production of reach, the rate at which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being excessively executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The effect executing means can execute a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result is obtained after the specific effect is executed, and after executing the special effect, an effect of notifying the specific display result is executed. It is possible (for example, in the time saving fanning effect, in addition to whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the advantage is higher than the time saving, such as whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). ,
You may do so.

With such a configuration, the expectation that a specific display result can be obtained can be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
As the variable display, the identification information is variablely displayed, and the identification information for staging is variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed).
A determination means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means.
A command transmission means (for example, variable in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The variable display pattern determining means has a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result when the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result and the special display result. In some cases, a common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C can be determined regardless of the variable display result).
In the variable display of the identification information, the variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determination means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable display time of step 059AKS013). Execute processing, etc.),
In the variable display of the staging identification information, the variable display time of the staging identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, staging control). CPU 120 executes the process of step S561 etc.),
When the type of the received variable display result command is different, the effect executing means can execute a common effect if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of Super Reach B even when the content indicated by the display result specification command is different),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D").
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
The effect executing means can execute different types of effects depending on the type of the special display result in the variable display that is the special display result (for example, "time reduction B" rather than the time reduction type of "time reduction A". The execution rate of Super Reach C is higher for the time-saving type, and the pattern of the time-saving fanning effect that is executed according to the time-saving type is different.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the attention of the player because the number of time reductions thereafter differs depending on the effect to be executed.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D").
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
It is possible to send a first command indicating the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state, and after sending the first command, it is possible to send a second command different from the first command (for example,). CPU 103, etc., which transmits a display result specification command in step S268 and sets transmission of a decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021).
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. (For example, the effect corresponding to the content of the display result specification command is executed, and the number of time reductions specified by the received symbol confirmation command is set in step 059AKS133, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the staging control can be suitably performed.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above.
A determination means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means.
A command transmission means (for example, variable in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The effect executing means executes an effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means, and either the variable display result command or the variable display pattern command. If one of them cannot be received normally, the execution of the effect related to the special state is restricted (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game entertainment.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above.
A determination means for determining the variable display result (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step S111) that determines a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means.
A command transmission means (for example, variable in step S268) for transmitting a variable display result command indicating a variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating a variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means. It is further equipped with a pattern specification command, a CPU 103 that sends a display result specification command, etc.).
The effect executing means is
An effect is executed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, the process of step S171 is executed).
When the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result cannot be normally received, the effect related to the special state can be executed when the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern. Yes (for example, the process of step 059AKS095 can be executed).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game entertainment.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above.
There are multiple types of the special display results.
The state control means can control the special state having a different period according to the type of the special display result (for example, it can control the time reduction state of the number of time reductions according to the time reduction type).
It is possible to send a first command indicating the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state, and after sending the first command, it is possible to send a second command different from the first command (for example,). CPU 103, etc., which transmits a display result specification command in step S268 and sets transmission of a decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021).
The effect executing means determines the effect during variable display based on the received first command, and notifies the number of variable displays executed during control to the special state based on the received second command. If the second command cannot be received normally, the notification of the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state is limited (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS139).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the production while preventing the deterioration of the game entertainment.

(Explanation of means relating to feature part 062AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 062AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
A staging execution means (for example, a staging control CPU 120 that executes a staging based on a staging control command) capable of executing a staging based on information from the game control means is provided.
The game control means is
Determining means for determining the advantageous state (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) and
A determination means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means, and
A state control means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and
Information transmission means (for example, effect control) capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means determines that the advantageous state is reached. CPU 103 that sends commands, etc.), including
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, the process of step 059AKS025 is executed),
The determination means can determine that the state control means will be in the special state before the state control means controls the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS001).
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can specify that the determination means is controlled to the special state when it is determined that the determination means is in the special state (for example, "missing (time reduction)" display result designation. It is possible to send commands, etc.),
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed).
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processes of step 059AKS084 and step S1304 are performed. Etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the newly received determination result information is further restricted (). For example, if a hold whose variable display result is "big hit" is stored in the hold storage currently stored, it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082).
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Execute processing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state and prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is newly received after receiving the determination result information indicating that the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the special state is controlled is executed, the newly received determination result information is added to the determination result information. Further restricting the execution of the pre-reading effect (for example, if a hold for executing the time-saving fanning effect is stored in the currently stored hold storage, it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS082).
During the limitation of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). Execute processing, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game entertainment when the effect related to the state transition is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The effect executing means does not execute the look-ahead effect in an aspect indicating that the advantage controlled in the advantageous state is equal to or higher than the specific advantage while the look-ahead effect is restricted (for example, FIG. 18-23 (B)). Do not execute the hold display change effect of "green" or higher as shown in),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the production due to the transition of the state and prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
The effect executing means does not execute the specific type of the look-ahead effect while the look-ahead effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 18-23 (B), when the hold display change effect is restricted, “green” or “green” or “ Do not execute the type of hold display change effect that changes to the display mode such as "red"),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the execution of the specific type of advance notice effect is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unnecessary expectation.

(Explanation of feature part 063AK)
Hereinafter, the feature unit 063AK according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 19-1, in the game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board, the left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top side of the image display device 5 and the right side side of the top side of the image display device 5 The right game area 063AK2 and the like are provided. The left game area 063AK1 and the right game area 063AK2 may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2 or the arrangement PL of the nails. When the game ball (game medium) launched from the hitting ball launching device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 063AK1, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails, the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce to 063AK2. Further, when the game ball launched from the hit ball launching device and driven into the game area 2 is guided to the right game area 063AK2, for example, by being guided along the arrangement PL of the nails, the game ball is guided to the left game area 063AK1. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce.

The left game area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning opening 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right game area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning opening 10 is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can be won by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins (enters) the general prize opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out as a prize ball.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can be won by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball wins in the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first start condition, which is a condition for executing the first special figure game, can be satisfied. .. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started.

As shown in FIG. 19-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door 063AK3 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door (for a special electric accessory). The large winning opening door 063AK3 has a large winning opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win (second state). ing. FIG. 19-2 shows a state in which the large winning opening door 063AK3 is in a closed state of the large winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is off, the big winning door 063AK3 closes the big winning door 063AK4, and the game ball wins the big winning door 063AK4. It becomes impossible or difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door 063AK3 opens the big winning door 063AK4, and the game ball can easily win the big winning door 063AK4. Will be. When a game ball wins in the large prize opening 063AK4, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball wins in, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, or the general winning opening 10.

In the big winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, the big hit symbol (specific display result) is derived and displayed (stopped display) as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". , When controlled to the jackpot game state (advantageous state), it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) and the timing until the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (9 in this embodiment). , Whichever comes first. One cycle in which the large winning opening 063AK4 is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times in the present embodiment) is reached.

Further, in the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, a small hit symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, and the display result of the variable display becomes "small hit". , When controlled to the small hit game state, it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined manner. Specifically, in the small hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 are repeated. For example, in the small hit game state, the open state for 0.1 seconds and the closed state for 1.0 seconds are repeated. The operation of repeatedly opening and closing the large winning opening 063AK4 is also referred to as opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening and closing of the large winning opening is repeated up to a predetermined upper limit opening number of times (10 times in this embodiment) for 0.1 seconds, or a predetermined upper limit winning number of game balls is placed in the large winning opening 063AK4 (this embodiment). Then, it ends when one of the conditions is satisfied among the winning up to 10).

The feature unit 063AK causes the player to perform a game method (hereinafter referred to as “left-handed”) in which the left game area 063AK1 launches a game ball in a normal state (low accuracy low base state). A game method in which a game ball is launched into the right game area 063AK2 in a time-saving state (low accuracy high base state) while aiming to win a prize in the general winning opening 10 or the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (a game method). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “right-handed”) so as to aim for winning in the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the player is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player is made to hit right to the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. It is configured to aim for a prize.

The feature unit 063AK performs a right-handed striking promotion effect that encourages the player to perform a right-handed striking during a period controlled by a time saving state, a big hit gaming state, and a small hit gaming state in which right-handed striking is advantageous.

The game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 passes (enters) the large winning opening switch 063AK5, is detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that has fallen into the recess 063AK6 is guided backward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage port 063AK7. Behind the passage port 063AK7, a distribution section supply path 063AK8 extending toward the lower left and a discharge path 063AK9 extending toward the lower right are provided.

All the game balls that have won the big prize opening 063AK4 in the big hit game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, only one of the game balls that won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution part 063AK18 described later through the distribution part supply path 063AK8, and the one game. Other than the ball, it is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

19-3 (a) to 19-3 (c) are views showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 with respect to the feature portion 063AK, as viewed from the arrow I-I in FIG. 19-2. Shows the case. As shown in FIG. 19-3 (a), the special variable winning ball device 7 moves the plunger 063AK11 in the left-right direction by switching between the abbreviated rotating piece 063AK10 and the on state and the off state. It is equipped with a solenoid 063AK12 for supplying a distribution unit. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting projection 063AK13 connected to the plunger 063AK11, and rotates about the rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching between the on state and the off state of the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12.

As shown in FIG. 19-3 (a), when the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the ON state, the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Further, the lower surface of the distribution section supply path 063AK8 is located at a position lower than the lower surface of the discharge path 063AK9 (provided below). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19-3 (a), the game ball A1 that first passes through the passing port 063AK falls into the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and its movement is restricted by the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. Will be done. As a result, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. As shown in FIG. 19-3 (b), the game ball A2 that has passed through 063AK7 following the game ball A1 cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8 due to being blocked by the game ball A1 and proceeds to the right side. Change direction. The game ball A2 flows down the discharge path 063AK9 as it is. The discharge path 063AK9 is provided with a discharge count switch 063AK16, and a game ball that has passed through the discharge path 063AK9 is detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game ball that has passed through the discharge path 063AK9 is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the rotary piece 063AK10 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 from the on state to the off state while the game ball A1 is held, the plunger 063AK11 supplies the distribution unit as shown in FIG. 19-3 (c). Solenoid 063AK12 Jumps out of the main body. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14, and the game ball A1 is repelled toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The repelled game ball A1 flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 19-4 (a), the game ball A3 flowing down the distribution section supply path 063AK passes through the distribution section passage switch 063AK17, is detected by the distribution section passage switch 063AK17, and then is distributed. Enter the section 063AK18.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and guides the game ball that has flowed down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and has a jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area) and a time saving area 063AK20 (special area). ) And the loss area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are all areas (members) configured to allow the game ball to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21 are provided below the distribution unit 063AK18.

The game ball that has entered the big hit area 063AK19 passes through the big hit area passing switch 063AK22, is detected by the big hit area passing switch 063AK22, and then passes through the big hit area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the big hit area discharge path is detected by the big hit area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball that has won the large prize opening 063AK4 has passed through the large hit area 063AK19. Based on this, the game is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

The game ball that has entered the time-saving area 063AK20 passes through the time-saving area passing switch 063AK23, is detected by the time-saving area passing switch 063AK23, and then passes through the time-saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the time saving area discharge path is detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 Based on the passage through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control for controlling the time saving state (special state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state is performed for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game state. Will be played. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4. However, when the time-saving region 063AK20 is passed, the time-saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. That is, when the time saving state is already controlled, even if the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the period controlled to the time saving state by performing the time saving transition control. It is configured so that the control to extend is not performed.

In the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the large winning opening 063AK4 is won. When the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is started when the next variable display is started after the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state and the small hit game state is finished. Is performed, and it is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state. That is, when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. .. According to such a configuration, after one game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the other game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 or the loss area 063AK21, so that the game state after the end of the small hit game state is reached. It is possible to suppress the possibility that an inconsistency will occur between the control and the production, which will confuse the player and reduce the enjoyment of the game. That is, according to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

The game ball that has entered the loss area 063AK21 passes through the loss area passage switch 063AK24, is detected by the loss area passage switch 063AK24, and then passes through the loss area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. Is discharged to. The game ball discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the loss area discharge path is detected by the loss area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit game state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the loss area 063AK21. In this case, after the end of the small hit game state, the control to change the game state based on the passage is not performed.

The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the jackpot region 063AK19. Time-saving region light emitting units 063AK26 are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the time-saving region 063AK20. The loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the loss region 063AK21. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are provided with light emitting elements such as LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) so that they can emit light. .. Although the details will be described later, in the feature unit 063AK, an effect of causing the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 to emit light in a predetermined manner is performed. FIG. 19-4 (a) shows a state in which the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving region light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution unit 063AK18 includes a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. The game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through any of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time saving region 063AK20, and the loss region 063AK21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-4 (b), the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time saving area entrance 063AK32, and a loss area entrance 063AK33. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the loss area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged along the left-right direction. The jackpot region entrance 063AK31 communicates with the jackpot region 063AK19, and the game ball that has passed through the jackpot region entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot region 063AK19. The time saving area entrance 063AK32 communicates with the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. The loss area entrance 063AK33 communicates with the loss area 063AK21, and the game ball that has passed through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is arranged above the jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the loss area entrance 063AK33. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a passage port 063AK34 through which a game ball can pass. Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding, the P coordinate axes shown in FIG. 19-4 (b) are set. The P coordinate axis is set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and is located in the left-right direction between the position P6 as the left end position and the position P3 as the right end position shown in FIG. 19-4 (b). Move back and forth along. FIG. 19-4 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 as the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b), the game ball A4 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 19-5 (a). It passes through the passage port 063AK34 formed in the member 063AK28, and passes through the time saving area advance entrance 063AK32. The game ball A4 that has passed through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P3 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b), the game ball A5 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 19-5 (b). It collides with the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the left along the inclined direction, and passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A5 that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P6 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b), the game ball A6 that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is distributed as shown in FIG. 19-5 (c). It collides with the right-side inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclined direction, and passes through the loss region entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the distribution portion 063AK18. The game ball A6 that has passed through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to execute an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIGS. 19-6. FIG. 19-6 shows the transition of the position of the distribution member 063AK28 according to the time passage when the distribution member 063AK28 is performing the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, and the time of the region through which the game ball passes. The transition according to the progress is shown. The distribution member 063AK28 is stopped at the position P0 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b) when the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 19-6, when the distribution member 063AK28 starts the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, it stops at the position P0 for a predetermined central standby time, and then moves to the right from the position P0 at a constant speed. Moves to, passes through the position P1 on the right side of the position P0 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b), passes through the position P2 on the right side of the position P1 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b), and passes through FIG. It reaches the position P3 shown in b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the middle right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P3 stops at the position P3 over a predetermined right end standby time. Subsequently, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the left from the position P3 at a constant speed, passes through the position P2, passes through the position P1, and reaches the position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P3 may be predetermined as the right middle movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 stops at the position P0 over the central standby time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the left at a constant speed from the position P0, passes through the position P4 on the left side of the position P0 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b), and is shown in FIG. 19-4 (b). It passes through the position P5 on the left side of the indicated position P4 and reaches the position P6 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 to the position P6 may be predetermined as the middle-left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P6 stops at the position P6 for a predetermined left end standby time. After that, the distribution member 063AK28 moves to the right from the position P6 at a constant speed, passes through the position P5, passes through the position P4, and reaches the position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the central position P0 from the position P6 may be predetermined as the left middle movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 repeats the above-mentioned operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 reciprocates in the left-right direction between the position P3 and the position P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 operates according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-6, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 according to the change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28. However, it also changes whether it passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. Specifically, during the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P2 and the position P3, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. It will be the period of passing through the jackpot area. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and the position P1 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and the position P4 have entered the distribution unit 063AK18. By guiding the game ball to the distribution member 063AK28, the time-saving region passage period is set when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20. During the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the position P5 and the position P6, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to pass through the loss area 063AK21. It will be a period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P1 and P2 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P4 and P5 enter the distribution unit 063AK18. When the game ball is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, it becomes a passing area uncertain period in which it is not determined whether to enter the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

In the present embodiment, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit start effect (small hit) for notifying that the control to the small hit game state is started is performed. The fanfare effect) is feasible, and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small hit start effect. As shown in FIGS. 19-6, the small hit start effect is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and then the small hit start effect is started. It ends according to the passage of the production time.

In the present embodiment, in the small hit game state, as shown in FIGS. 19-6, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is started in response to the end of the small hit start effect. As described above, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is either whether the opening state of 0.1 seconds is repeated up to the predetermined upper limit opening number, or whether the game ball wins the large winning opening 063AK4 up to the predetermined upper limit winning number. It ends when either condition is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19-6, in the small hit game state, the solenoid 063AK12 for supplying the distribution unit is turned on in response to the end of the small hit start effect and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening. The state is controlled so that the rotary piece 063AK10 can hold the game ball that has entered the distribution unit supply path 063AK8. The distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the on state and then to the off state according to the elapse of a predetermined game ball holding time. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 repels the held game ball toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the repelled game ball flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 and enters the distribution section 063AK18. .. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, only one of the game balls winning the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. Then, except for the one game ball, the ball is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to the ON state in the big hit game state. With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, all the game balls that have won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the big hit game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 19-6, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state and rotates at time t0 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the on state. The game ball repelled by the piece 063AK10 enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 19-6, the time t0 when the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

The game ball holding time is set longer than the time required to open and close the large winning opening by a predetermined upper limit opening number in the small hit game state. That is, the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 after the opening and closing of the large winning opening is completed.

As shown in FIG. 19-6, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 19-6) is the special figure confirmation display time, the small hit start effect time, and the game ball. Specified by retention time.

In the present embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the special figure confirmation display time and the game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the small hit type, while the small hit start effect time is set to the same time. Depending on the small hit type, it is set to one of multiple types of time. With such a configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 differs depending on the small hit type.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit start effect time is set to the predetermined first specific time to the third specific time shown in FIGS. 19-7 according to the small hit type. Set to one of the times. As shown in FIG. 19-7, the second specific time (for example, 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (for example, 11 seconds), and the third specific time (for example, 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in FIGS. 19-7, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, it corresponds to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After the small hit start effect is started, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be on at the timing when the small hit start effect ends according to the elapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the off state, and the game was repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 19-7, since the time t1 is included in the loss region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t1 is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 and is lost. It passes through region 063AK21. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the loss area 063AK21.

When the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the small hit start effect is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is completed according to the elapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the off state, and the game was repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 19-7, since the time t2 is included in the time saving region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t2 is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 to shorten the time. It passes through region 063AK20. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20.

When the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the small hit start effect is started according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation display time after the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game. After that, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be turned on at the timing when the small hit start effect is completed according to the elapse of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the on state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the off state, and the game was repelled by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 19-7, since the time t3 is included in the jackpot region passing period, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at the time t3 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 to make a jackpot. It passes through region 063AK19. That is, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit gaming state passes through the large hit area 063AK19.

As described above, depending on whether the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time to the third specific time, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is the large hit area 063AK19. Which of the time saving area 063AK20 and the loss area 063AK21 is passed is different. In the feature unit 063AK, the small hit start effect time is set to any of the first specific time to the third specific time according to the small hit type, so that the game ball that wins the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state. , The area corresponding to the small hit type among the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 is passed.

The feature unit 063AK is based on the execution of variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small hit variation") in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and the display result of the variable display is "small hit" in the special figure game. As a result corresponding to the small hit fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (a), in addition to the above-mentioned right-handed promotion effect and small hit start effect, a time saving suggestion effect, a passing fanning effect, and a passing notification are provided. It is configured to be feasible with staging.

In the present embodiment, as a right-handed promotion effect, an effect of displaying a right-handed promotion image indicating an arrow pointing in the right direction is executed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-handed promotion effect is executed during the period controlled by the time saving state and the big hit gaming state, and is controlled to the small hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 19-8 (a). Performed in a period.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a small hit start effect, an effect of displaying a right arrow image and a small hit start image on the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. The right arrow image has the shape of an arrow pointing in the right direction, and is a staging image showing the message "Aim to the right!". The small hit start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7, and also shows the message "Put the ball here!" To encourage the player to win the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is an image. As described above, the small hit start effect is started in response to the fact that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game and the control to the small hit game state is started, and then the small hit start effect time elapses. It ends according to what you have done.

The time saving suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the time reduction state is controlled, and is configured to be feasible during execution of the small hit variation. As described above, in the normal state, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit gaming state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. To. Correspondingly, in the feature unit 063AK, as an effect suggesting that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite special symbol in the special figure game when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state. It is configured so that the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, various effects can be performed and the game entertainment can be improved in the variable display when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. can.

As shown in FIG. 19-8 (a), when the normal reach effect, which is the reach effect of the normal reach, the super reach effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach, and the time reduction suggestion effect, are executed in the small hit fluctuation, the time reduction is performed. The suggestion effect is started after the reach is established, the normal reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect is executed, and then the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the small hit fluctuation is completed. finish. Hereinafter, the details of the time saving suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-9 (a) and 19-9 (b).

As shown in FIG. 19-9 (a), when the time saving suggestion effect is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5 are started. In, the predetermined lost symbol (“767” in the present embodiment) is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode different from the case where it is derived and displayed. Next, revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle", and then FIG. 19 is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The time saving suggestion symbol suggesting that the time saving state is controlled as shown in -9 (b) is temporarily stopped and displayed. As for the time saving suggestion symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", and it is called "chance" in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols that display a decorative symbol that indicates a message. Returning to FIG. 19-9 (a), after the time saving suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is revariably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is executed, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game, and the time saving suggestion effect ends according to the end of the small hit fluctuation.

Returning to FIG. 19-8 (a), the passing fanning effect suggests that the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. This is an effect (an effect that suggests passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21). The passing fanning effect is started in response to the end of the small hit start effect and the start of opening and closing of the large prize opening, and then the game ball that has won the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is in the large hit area 063AK19, shortening the time. It ends depending on whether it has passed through either the area 063AK20 or the lost area 063AK21.

The passage notification effect is an effect of notifying whether the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect is executed as a small hit end effect (small hit ending effect) for notifying that the control to the small hit game state is completed. The passage notification effect is started in response to the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passing through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and then the predetermined passage notification effect time. It ends according to the passage.

In the present embodiment, the passage notification effect time is a predetermined number depending on whether the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. It is set to any of 1 special time to 3rd special time. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, the passage notification effect time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). Further, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is not performed based on the passage, and the passing notification effect time is such that the game ball loses the time saving area 063AK21. It is set to the first special time as in the case of passing through. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passage notification effect time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the passage notification effect time is set to the third special time (for example, 10 seconds). According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

In the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (b), the time saving suggestion effect and the passing fanning occur depending on whether the small hit variation is executed in the normal state or the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state. It is configured so that the presence / absence or mode of execution of the effect and the passage notification effect is different.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (b), when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed while the small hit variation is being executed. When the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small hit variation. That is, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state. It is configured so that different effects can be performed during the execution of the small hit variation.

In the feature unit 063AK, in the normal state, when the small hit variation is executed, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed, so that the player can know that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that the game can be improved by giving a feeling of expectation that the time saving transition control is performed and the time saving state is controlled.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, in the case of the time saving state, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed when the small hit variation is executed, so that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. It prevents the player from having the expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 even though the time saving transition control based on the time saving is not performed. It is configured so that the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the normal state, and when the small hit variation is executed and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state. By being configured so that different effects can be performed during the execution of the small hit variation, a suitable effect can be performed according to the state.

In the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (b), when the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the big winning opening is opened and closed under the control of the small hit gaming state after the small hit fluctuation is completed. At that time, as a passing fanning effect, a normal time passing fanning effect (special effect) is executed, which is an effect of suggesting the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. On the other hand, when the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, when the small hit gaming state is controlled to open and close the large winning opening after the small hit variation is completed, the passage of the time saving area 063AK29 is related as a passing fanning effect. Without making a suggestion, a time-saving time-saving passage fanning effect (specific effect), which is an effect of suggesting the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21, is executed.

In the present embodiment, the normal time passage fanning effect suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It is a production to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the time-saving time-saving fanning effect does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, but the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It is a production that suggests that it will pass through.

In the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit gaming state is controlled after the small hit fluctuation is completed in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the player is given a normal passing fanning effect. , It is configured to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the time saving state based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, and to improve the game entertainment.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit game state is controlled after the small hit variation is completed and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state in the time saving state, the game is performed by executing the time saving time passing fanning effect. Expectations from the player that the game ball is controlled in a time-saving state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though the control based on the passage is not performed when the ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. It is configured so that it can prevent the feeling of being embraced and suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

As described above, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit gaming state is controlled after the small hit fluctuation is completed and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state in the normal state, the normal passing fanning effect is executed. When the small hit game state is controlled and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state after the end of the small hit fluctuation in the time saving state, the time saving time passing fanning effect is executed. A suitable effect can be produced according to the state.

In the present embodiment, as a normal passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 19-10 (a), the normal passing fanning image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss area light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light, and the normal time passing fanning sound indicating the message "Big hit? Time saving? Loss?" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Perform the production.

The normal time passing fan image AK1 shows the message "big hit", the big hit area passing fan image AK2 suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, and the message "time saving", and the game ball shows the time saving area. It includes a time-saving region-passing fanning image AK3 suggesting that it passes through 063AK20, and a losing region-passing fanning image AK4 showing the message "missing" and suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing region 063AK21.

In the feature unit 063AK, it is expected that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state according to the display mode of the normal passing fanning image AK1. Based on the degree (ratio) and the expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the expected degree of being controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the small hit game state, and the game ball in the small hit game state It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation of passing through the loss region 063AK21. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the normal passing fanning image AK1 and improve the game entertainment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal passing fanning image AK1, the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 is expected to allow the game ball to pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small hitting gaming state (big hit after the end of the small hitting gaming state). It is displayed in a display area according to the expected degree controlled by the gaming state, and the time-saving area passing fan image AK3 shows the expectation degree that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state (end of the small hit gaming state). It is displayed in the display area according to the expectation degree that is later controlled to the time saving state), and the loss area passing fan image AK4 has the display area according to the expectation degree that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. Is displayed.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure), the first special figure game (first special figure is played). In the special figure game used), the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state at a higher rate than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. .. Corresponding to this, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, in the normal time passing fanning effect, it is normal. While the time-passing fan image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 19-10 (a), when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and controlled to the small hit game state, it is normal. In the time-passing fanning effect, the normal time-passing fanning image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 19-10 (b). In the display mode shown in FIG. 19-10 (b), the display area of the time-saving region passing fanned image AK2 is larger than that in the display mode shown in FIG. 19-10 (a). In addition, in the second special figure game, the normal time passing fanning effect shown in FIG. 19-10 (b), which is executed when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit gaming state, is a normal passing fanning image. Except for the difference in the display mode of AK1, the normal passage shown in FIG. 19-10 (a) is executed when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and controlled to the small hit gaming state in the first special figure game. It is the same production mode as the fanning production.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19-10 (c), the time-saving time-saving passage fanning image AK5 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 to emit light, and the speakers 8L and 8R emit a time-saving passing fanning voice indicating the message "Big hit or loss?" Perform an output effect. The time-saving time-saving passing image AK5 includes the jackpot area passing image AK2 and the loss area passing image AK4, while the time-saving area passing image AK3 is not included.

Returning to FIG. 19-8 (b), in the normal state, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, the game ball is in the big hit area as a passage notification effect. A normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed to notify that the player passes through 063AK19 and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, as a normal time jackpot area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a normal time jackpot area passage notification image indicating the message "V" is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 as a passage notification effect, and the small hit gaming state. After the end, the time saving area passage notification effect for notifying that the time saving state is controlled is executed. In the present embodiment, as the time-saving area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving area passage notification image indicating the message "lucky!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 as a passage notification effect, and the small hit game state. After the end, the loss area passage notification effect for notifying that the control for changing the gaming state is not performed is executed. In the present embodiment, as the loss area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a loss area passage notification image indicating the message "Sorry!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (b), when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, as a passage notification effect. , A time-saving jackpot area passage notification effect different from the normal jackpot area passage notification effect is executed, which notifies that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small hit game state. To. In the present embodiment, as a time-saving big hit area passage notification effect, an effect of displaying a time-saving big hit area passage notification image showing the message "BONUS!" Is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state, the passing notification effect is provided in response to the fact that the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. As a result, the above-mentioned loss area passage notification effect is executed.

In the short time state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, the loss area passage notification effect is executed as the passage notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 19-8 (a) and 19-8 (b), in the feature unit 063AK, a small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. When the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state and then the big winning opening 063AK is controlled to the closed state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. , Is configured to enable different productions. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect performed when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state, and to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (b), when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. In addition, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, by executing the time-saving area passage notification effect, the player is informed of the time-saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20. It is possible to make people recognize that they are controlled by the game and improve the game entertainment.

On the other hand, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. By executing the loss area passage notification effect, the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 to the player even though the time saving transition control based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20 is not performed. Based on the above, it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of expectation that the game will be controlled to a shorter time after the end of the small hit game state, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In this way, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. In the case where the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game in the time saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. By being configured to be able to execute different effects, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed.

More specifically, in the feature unit 063AK, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the time saving state, and both the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area 063AK20 pass through. It is configured to be able to execute the loss area passage notification effect, which is the same effect as when it was not performed. According to such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, the player is not controlled based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from having a feeling of expectation that it will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Can be done.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (b), the game ball is executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. It is configured to be able to execute a time-saving big hit area passage notification effect different from the normal time big hit area passage notification effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect performed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and to improve the game entertainment.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game which is easy to be executed in the time saving state, and the game ball is in the big hit area when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state. When passing through 063AK19, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game which is easy to be executed in the normal state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. At a high rate, it is controlled to "big hit A", which has a higher advantage for the player than "big hit B" after the end of the small hit game state. With such a configuration, the player is made to pay attention to whether the time-saving big hit area passage notification effect or the normal time large hit area passage notification effect is executed when the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. You can improve your interest.

FIG. 19-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol normal process with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the special symbol normal processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reserved storage number is "0" (step 063AKS101). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 063AKS101, the RAM 102 may read the second hold storage count value stored in the second hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

In the present embodiment, for example, a second special figure holding storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In the second special figure holding storage unit, the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the second starting winning is generated, but the special drawing game (second special) that has not been started yet. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are set as pending data, and the number thereof is Storage is performed until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As the pending data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 063AKS102, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure holding storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS103). Further, in the process of step 063AKS103, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special chart designation buffer, to “2” (step 063AKS104).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the RAM 102 may read the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" in step 063AKS101, and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure (special figure 2) is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (special figure 1).

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

In the present embodiment, for example, a first special figure holding storage unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure game (first special symbol) that has not been started yet, although the game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the first start winning has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are stored as pending data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 063AKS115, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure holding storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS116). Further, in the process of step 063AKS116, the RAM 102 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing any of the processes of step 063AKS104 and 063AKS117, the CPU 103 determines whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". As a table to be used for this purpose, a special map display result determination table corresponding to the variable special map designation buffer value is selected and set (step 063AKS105). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (a) is set in the table to be used. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (b) is set in the table to be used.

In the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (a), a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Before It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for. In the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIGS. 19-12 (b), a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Before It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 for.

The first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (b) are compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Numerical values (decision values) are assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (b), it is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The table data indicating the determined value is whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state, and whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "small hit" in the small hit gaming state. It is the decision data assigned to the decision result.

Further, in the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (b), a larger number of decision values than in the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (a) is "small hit". It is assigned to the special figure display result of. That is, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (b) are the second special figure display result determination table. The determination data is assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit gaming state is high.

Returning to FIG. 19-11, following the processing of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 selects the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation in the special figure selected in step 063AKS105. By comparing with the determination value assigned to the "big hit" in the display result determination table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "big hit" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the special figure display result is "big hit" (step 063AKS107). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 063AKS108). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-13 (b) as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 has a special symbol (“variable special figure”) in which the big hit type is variably displayed in the special figure game by performing a random number lottery using the big hit type determination table set in step 063AKS109. "Big hit A" shown in FIG. 19-13 (a) depending on whether it is a special figure or a second special figure (whether the variable special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"). And "big hit B" (step 063AKS110).

Both "big hit A" and "big hit B" shown in FIGS. 19-13 (a) are "non-probable variable big hits" that are not controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state. When it is controlled to "big hit A", it is controlled to a time saving state for a period until the variable display is executed five times after the end of the big hit game state. When controlled to "big hit B", it is controlled to a time saving state for a period from the end of the big hit gaming state until the variable display is executed once. "Big hit A", which has a longer period controlled to shorten the time after the end of the big hit gaming state than "Big hit B", has a higher advantage for the player than "Big hit B". In the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 19-13 (b), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the big hit type is determined to be either "big hit A" or "big hit B". On the other hand, when the variable special map is the second special map, the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit A" and is not determined to be "big hit B". With such a configuration, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game, the rate is higher than that when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game, for the player than "big hit B". It is controlled to "big hit A", which has a high degree of advantage.

After returning to FIG. 19-11 and executing the process of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 corresponds to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110, for example, the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102. (Step 063AKS111), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", and if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "1".

When it is determined in step 063AKS107 that the variable display result is not determined to be "big hit" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 is for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with the determined value assigned to the "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105, the special figure display result is defined as "small hit". Whether or not it is determined (step 063AKS118).

After executing the process of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined in step 063AKS118 that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS119). Then, when it is determined that the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 063AKS120). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 19-14 (b) as a table to be used for determining the small hit type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the small hit type determination table set in step 063AKS121, and determines whether the small hit type is the first special figure or the second special figure (variation). Depending on whether the special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"), it is determined to be one of "small hit A" to "small hit E" shown in FIG. 19-14 (a) (. Step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIGS. 19-14 (a), in the "small hit A" and "small hit B", the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state is a distribution member. It is a small hit type that passes through the big hit area 063AK19 by being guided to 063AK28. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned third specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19. When the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit A", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit gaming state. .. On the other hand, when the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit B", the big hit gaming state of "big hit B" is completed after the end of the small hit gaming state. Is controlled by.

In the "small hit C" and "small hit D", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, so that the time saving area 063AK20 is set. It is a small hit type that passes. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit C", the variable display is executed five times after the end of the small hit gaming state. It is controlled to shorten the time. On the other hand, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state of "small hit D", the variable display is executed once after the end of the small hit gaming state. It is controlled to shorten the time until.

"Small hit E" is a small hit type in which the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the loss area 063AK21. be. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect time is set to the above-mentioned first specific time. As described above, when the small hit start effect time is set to the first specific time, the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit E", the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 19-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the small hit type is determined at a higher rate than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, it is configured to be determined to be the "small hit A" controlled by the "big hit A" which is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit B". With such a configuration, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, in the first special figure game. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game is played from "Big hit B" after the small hit game state is completed at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. It is controlled by "big hit A", which has a high advantage for the person.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 19-14 (b), the total of the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit A" and the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit B". The value corresponds to the degree of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state. Further, the total value of the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" is the total value of the game ball in the small hit gaming state 063AK20. It corresponds to the expectation degree controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on passing through. Further, the ratio at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit E" is a control for changing the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit gaming state. Corresponds to the degree of expectation that is not done.

As shown in FIG. 19-14 (b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the ratio (15%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the small hit type is ". The ratio (15%) determined to be "small hit D" and the total value (30%) are determined so that the small hit type is "small hit C" when the variable special figure is the first special figure. It is larger than the total value (25%) of the ratio (15%) and the ratio (10%) in which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D". That is, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed at a higher rate than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first special figure game, in the small hit gaming state. The game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and is configured to be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final special symbol of the second special diagram game, and to improve the game interest.

After returning to FIG. 19-11 and executing the process of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 corresponds to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122, for example, a small hit which is a stored value of the small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102. By setting the type buffer value or the like (step 063AKS123), the determined small hit type is stored. As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "small hit B", it is set to "1", and if it is "small hit C", it is "2". If it is a "small hit D", it may be set to "3", and if it is a "small hit E", it may be set to "4".

When it is determined in step 063AKS119 that the special figure display result is not determined to be "small hit" in step 063AKS118 (step 063AKS119; No), or after the processing of step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123 is executed, the CPU 103 determines. The definite special symbol is determined in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the determination result of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state, and the like (step 063AKS112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 063AKS113), and then ends the special symbol normal process. When the number of reserved first special figures is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a predetermined demo display setting (step 063AKS124), and then ends the special symbol normal processing.

In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern is determined to be any of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIGS. 19-15.

As shown in FIGS. 19-15, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the case where the variable display result is "big hit" are supported. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 and the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" are preset.

In the present embodiment, three types of super reach, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, are set, and a normal reach effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 19-15. Fluctuation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed together with the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, and PA5-1. Fluctuation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed, and variation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. -3, PB5-3, and are included. In the present embodiment, as the reach effect of the super reach A, an effect of displaying a character image indicating the character A is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and as a reach effect of the super reach B, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In addition, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character B is performed, and as a reach effect of the super reach C, an effect of displaying a character image showing the character C is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Further, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" include fluctuation patterns PA4-1 and PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which the time saving suggestion effect is executed. Fluctuation patterns PA5-1 and PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which the time saving suggestion effect is not executed are included.

FIG. 19-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process as the variation pattern setting process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 063AK201). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 19-17 to display the variation pattern as "variable display result". It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the case of "big hit" (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 19-17, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern PB3-in which the reach effect of the super reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PA3-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. It is determined to be 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PB3-1. It is determined to be the variation pattern PB3-2, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PB3-2. Is determined by the variation pattern PB3-3 to be executed. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed. The time is higher than when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed, and the time is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed than when the normal reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 19-16, when it is determined in step 063AK201 that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 19-18 to display the fluctuation pattern in a variable display result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case of "loss" (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIGS. 19-18, in the loss variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern PB2- in which the reach effect of the super reach C is executed at a lower rate than the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. It is determined to be 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a lower rate than the variation pattern PB2-1. It is determined to be the variation pattern PB2-2, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variation pattern PB2-2. Is determined by the variation pattern PB2-3 to be executed.

Returning to FIG. 19-16, when it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state. Determination (step 063AKS209). The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled.

When it is determined that the time saving flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 19-19 (a). , Depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern is changed to correspond to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time saving suggestion effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of PA4-1 to PB4-3 (step 063AKS210). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time saving variation pattern determination table for the time saving state shown in FIG. 19-19 (b). By doing so, depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E", the variation pattern can be changed to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the time saving suggestion effect can be achieved. It is determined to be one of the variation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 that are not executed (step 063AKS211). With such a configuration, when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, the time saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit variation, while when the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the small hit variation is executed. The time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 19-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 19-19 (b), the small hit type is a game ball. When is a "small hit A" or a "small hit B" passing through the big hit area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern is at a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 and PB5-1 in which the reach effect of the super reach C is executed. The variation pattern PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed is determined, and the variation pattern PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -3, PB5-3 is decided. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 (the degree of expectation of passing through the jackpot area) is such that the reach effect of super reach B is executed when the reach effect of super reach A is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the reach effects of Super Reach A and Super Reach C is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 19-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 19-19 (b), the small hit type is a game ball. When is "small hit C" or "small hit D" passing through the time saving area 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is at a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-3 and PB5-3 in which the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The variation pattern PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed is determined, and the variation pattern PB4 in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -1, PB5-1 is determined. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (the degree of expectation of passing through the time-saving area) is such that the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the reach effects of Super Reach A and Super Reach C is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

After returning to FIG. 19-16 and executing the processing of steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211th, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. Is. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in the game control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 063AKS203, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Among them, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the start condition is satisfied (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold display 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold display 25A may be used (for example, the number of LEDs lit is reduced by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold display 25B may be used (for example, the number of LEDs lit is reduced by one).

After executing the process of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Set the transmission (step 063AKS205). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 requests the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 as a first fluctuation start designation command and a fluctuation pattern designation command (variation start designation command). Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), first special figure hold storage number specification command (1 decremented 1st special figure reserved storage count value, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the 1st special figure reserved storage number when one reserved storage is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially performed. Set the transmission settings for transmission. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 requests the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 as a second fluctuation start designation command and a fluctuation pattern designation command (variation start designation command). Step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211 command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure hold storage number specification command (The second special figure reserved storage count value reduced by 1, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved storage number when one reserved storage is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially performed. Set the transmission settings for transmission. In the present embodiment, in the display result designation command (variable display result notification command), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" is used. , Decision result of multiple types of big hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" (big hit type determination result), Multiple types of small hit type when the variable display result is "small hit" Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (small hit type determination result) of which one is to be used.

After executing the process of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 063AKS206), and then ends the special symbol normal process.

FIG. 19-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol stop process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the special symbol stop process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on (step 063AKS301). Here, the flag for confirming the special figure is set to the ON state by the process of step 063AKS305, which will be described later, in response to the derivation and display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special symbol is off (step 063AKS301; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step 063AKS302), and issues a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12. Make settings for transmission (step 063AKS303). The decorative symbol stop command is also called a symbol confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special figure confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the process of step 063AKS304, the special figure confirmation display time timer value, which is a stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special figure confirmation display time. After that, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol confirmation display flag to the on state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

In step 063AKS301, when the special figure confirmation display flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the process of step 063AKS306, the special figure confirmation display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the special figure confirmation is performed according to whether or not the updated special figure confirmation display time timer value is “0”. It may be determined whether or not the display time has elapsed. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and the process waits until the special symbol confirmation display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special figure confirmation display flag and turns it off (step 063AKS307), and then is the jackpot flag turned on? It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start effect waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start effect time when the jackpot start effect (big hit fanfare effect) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start effect waiting time. After executing the process of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command (big hit fanfare command) corresponding to the big hit from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS311), and clears the time saving flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state (a production control command for designating the current game state in the pachinko game 1) from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step). 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the open count value, which is a stored value of the open count counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds (15 in the present embodiment) in the big hit game state (15 times). In this embodiment, it is set to "15") (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time reduction counter (063AKS315). The time reduction counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of time reductions, which is the remaining number of variable displays controlled in the time reduction state. In the process of step 063AKS315, the time reduction count counter is cleared, so that the time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the time reduction counter, is set to "0" as the initial value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the big hit flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 063AKS318).

When it is determined in step 063AKS317 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first specific time to third specific time. (Step 063AKS319). The small hit start effect waiting time corresponds to the small hit start effect time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time by referring to the small hit start effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 19-21, and the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit A". It is determined to be one of the first specific time to the third specific time according to which of the small hit E ”, and is a stored value of the small hit start effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. The hit start effect waiting time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start effect waiting time. The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 19-21, in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time. Then, the waiting time for the small hit start effect is also determined at the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect waiting time is also the second specific corresponding to the small hit start effect time being set to the second specific time. Determined by time. When the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect waiting time is also determined to be the first specific time corresponding to the small hit start effect time being set to the first specific time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command (small hit fanfare command) corresponding to the small hit from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 (step 063AKS320). ..

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start the operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small hit flag and puts it in the off state (step 063AKS322), and the opening number count value corresponds to the upper limit opening number of opening and closing of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state (10 times in this embodiment). (In this embodiment, "10") is set (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 063AKS324).

After executing the process of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS325). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

When it is determined that the time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the time reduction count value (step 063AKS326), and the updated time reduction count value is "0". It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time reduction count value is not "0" (step 063AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

When it is determined that the time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), and sends a game state specification command indicating a normal state. (Step 063AKS329) is performed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

FIG. 19-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S118 of the special symbol process process as the small hit opening pre-process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit opening pre-processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the process of step 063AKS401, the small hit start effect waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start is started depending on whether or not the updated small hit start effect waiting time timer value is "0". It is determined whether or not the production waiting time has elapsed. When it is determined that the small hit start effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening pre-processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS401 that the small hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to be in the ON state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets the game ball holding time timer value, which is the stored value of the game ball holding time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the process of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “9” which is a value corresponding to the process during the small hit opening (step 063AKS404), and ends the small hit opening preprocessing.

FIG. 19-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S119 of the special symbol process process as the process during the opening of the small hit with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit opening process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the opening count value is “0” (step 063AKS501). When it is determined that the opening count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state is a predetermined upper limit in the small hit game state. It is determined whether or not the number of winnings (10 in this embodiment) or more (step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5) is equal to or greater than the upper limit winning number.

When it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls winning in the large winning opening 063AK4 is less than the upper limit winning number (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS503). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the large winning opening 063AK4 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to the on state. (Step 063AKS504), the setting for transmitting the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening is made (step 063AKS505). After performing the process of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the opening count value (step 063AKS506).

After executing the process of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the opening timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the large winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the processing during the opening of the small hit. When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the big winning opening 063AK4 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door to the off state. (Step 063AKS508). After executing the process of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the designated command after opening the big winning opening (step 063AKS509), and ends the process during opening the small hit.

When it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the open count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or when it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the upper limit winning number. (Step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 is updated by subtracting 1 from the game ball holding time timer value, and the game ball holding time elapses depending on whether or not the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0". Determine if it has been done. When it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS510 that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to the off state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball winning the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state. (Step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 is in the small hit gaming state depending on whether or not any of the big hit area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the losing area passing flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on. It is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21.

When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the lost area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (big hit area). It is determined (whether or not the passing switch 063AK22 has detected the game ball) (step 063AKS518). When it is determined that the big hit area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the big hit area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519), and ends the small hit opening processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS518 that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 detects the game ball). Whether or not it was done) is determined (step 063AKS520). When it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time saving area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS522), and ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS520 that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the losing area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (the losing area passing switch 063AK24 detects the game ball. Whether or not it was done) is determined (step 063AKS523). When it is determined that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or when it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 is lost. The area passage flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS524), and the small hit opening process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes). Occasionally, the lost area passage flag is set to the on state without the time saving area passing flag being set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 wins the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit gaming state. It is determined whether or not all the game balls have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 uses the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times the game balls are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16) and the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (big hit). The number of game balls detected by the area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch (the number of times the game ball is detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch), and the lost area discharge count switch. Whether or not the total value of the number of game balls detected by (the number of times the game balls are detected by the loss area discharge count switch) and the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 063AK5 matches the number of game balls detected by Accordingly, it is determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7.

When it is determined in step 063AKS513 that all the game balls that have won in the large winning opening 063AK4 have not been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the distribution member operation pattern by the distribution member 063AK28. Control is performed to end the according operation (step 063AKS514).

After executing the process of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hit end designation command (small hit ending command) corresponding to the small hit from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state or the time saving state after the end of the small hit game state, and to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state, as a hit end designation command according to the small hit. An effect control command indicating the type of big hit when controlled and the number of variable displays controlled to the time-saving state when controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small-hit gaming state is transmitted.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the hit end designation command determination table shown in FIG. 19-24, thereby indicating the states of the big hit area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the losing area passing flag, and the small hit type. And, as the hit end designation command according to the small hit, one of the small hit end designation command 1 to the small hit end designation command 5 is selected, and the setting for transmitting the selected command is made.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 19-24, when the big hit area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small hit type is "small hit A", "big hit A" is completed after the small hit gaming state ends. The small hit end designation command 1 indicating that the game is controlled to the big hit game state is selected. When the big hit area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit B", it indicates that the small hit is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit B" after the end of the small hit gaming state. The end specification command 2 is selected. When the time saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit C", the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the end of the small hit game state. The small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the command is to be executed is selected. When the time saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small hit type is "small hit D", the time saving state is controlled for the period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once. The small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the command is to be executed is transmitted. When the loss area passage flag is set to the ON state, the small hit end specification command 5 indicating that the control to change the game state is not performed after the end of the small hit game state is transmitted regardless of the small hit type. Will be done.

After returning to FIG. 19-23 and executing the process of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passage notification effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first special time to the third special time (step 063AKS516). The passage notification effect waiting time corresponds to the passage notification effect time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to the states of the jackpot area passing flag, the time saving area passing flag, and the lost area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIGS. 19-25. Accordingly, it was determined to be one of the first special time to the third special time, and the passage notification effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passage notification effect waiting time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, was determined. Set to a value corresponding to the passage notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIGS. 19-25, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, and the time saving area passing flag is turned on. When is set to, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the loss area passage flag is set to the ON state, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time. To.

After returning to FIG. 19-23 and executing the process of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “10” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end process (step 063AKS517), and releases the small hit. End the middle process.

FIG. 19-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S120 of the special symbol process process as the small hit end process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit end process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates by subtracting 1 from the passage notification effect waiting time timer value, and waits for the passage notification effect depending on whether or not the updated passage notification effect waiting time timer value is "0". Determine if time has passed. When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit end process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot area passage flag is on (step 063AKS602). When it is determined that the jackpot area passage flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passage flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets the big hit type buffer value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063AKS604, if the small hit type is "small hit A" controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit A" after the end of the small hit gaming state, the big hit type buffer value is set to "big hit A". While setting the corresponding "0", if the small hit type is "small hit B" which is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "big hit B" after the end of the small hit gaming state, the big hit type buffer value is set to "big hit B". Set to "1" corresponding to "". The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start effect waiting time (step 063AKS605), and transmits a hit start designation command according to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. (Step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS607), and sends a game state specification command indicating a normal state from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Make the settings (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the open count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit of the number of rounds in the big hit game state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time reduction counter (063AKS610). After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small hit end processing.

When it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612). When it is determined that the time saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to the on state (step 063AKS614), and sets the time saving number count value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small hit type is "small hit C", which is controlled to the time reduction state over the period from the end of the small hit gaming state until the variable display is executed five times, the time reduction count value. Is set to "5", while if the small hit type is "small hit D", which is controlled to be in a time saving state for a period until the variable display is executed once after the end of the small hit gaming state, the time saving number of times is counted. Set the value to "1". The small hit type may be specified based on the small hit type buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the game state designation command indicating the time saving state from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

When it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time saving area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the losing area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the process of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 063AKS618), and then performs the small hit end process. finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the small hit end process is started in response to the end of the small hit opening process in which the large winning opening is opened, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612). ; Yes), in the small hit end process, the time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS614). With such a configuration, when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, it is not controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. It is configured.

In the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4, the feature unit 063AK executes each of the above-mentioned processes as the process in the special symbol process process of step S25, and also executes the above-mentioned processes as the information output process of step S23. Similarly, the process shown in the flowchart of FIGS. 18-36 is executed. With such a configuration, in the information output process of step S23, the feature unit 063AK has the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is being hit, and the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is being hit, and the jackpot is being hit or the time is shortened (during the special prize). In addition to the jackpot signal 2 indicating that there is), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time is being shortened is output to an external device such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

According to such a configuration, the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit gaming state under the normal state and the case where the time saving state is controlled based on the end of the big hit gaming state has the time saving area 063AK4. In either case, the time saving state is controlled after the end of the small hit game state based on the passage, or the time saving state or the consecutive villa state can be preferably specified in the external device.

FIG. 19-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled. When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time reduction counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is updated by subtracting one (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time reduction counter counts the number of time reductions (the remaining number of variable displays controlled in the time reduction state).

After executing the process of step 063AKS702, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the time reduction number notification effect for notifying the time reduction number of times (step 063AKS703). In the present embodiment, as the time reduction number notification effect, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying a time reduction number notification image indicating the time reduction number on the screen of the image display device 5. In the time reduction number notification effect, the time reduction number notification image is displayed in a display mode indicating the current time reduction number based on the sub-side time reduction number count value. In the present embodiment, the time saving number notification effect is executed when the variable display is executed in the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS703, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the right-handed promotion effect flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). When it is determined that the right-handed promotion effect flag is not on (step 063AKS704; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the right-handed promotion effect flag to the on state (step 063AKS705), and controls to start the right-handed promotion effect. (Step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063AKS706, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting for executing the time reduction rush effect to notify that the control to the time reduction state has started (controlled from the normal state to the time reduction state). (Step 063AKS707). In the present embodiment, as the time saving rush effect, the first time saving rush image showing the message "time saving!" And the message "Put the ball into the electric chew aiming to the right!" Are shown on the screen of the image display device 5. The effect of displaying the second time-saving rush image and is executed. The second time-saving rush image is an effect image that urges the player to win a game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B. In the present embodiment, the time saving rush effect is executed when the variable display is first executed after being controlled from the normal state to the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS707, or when it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), when it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-handed promotion effect flag is on. (Step 063AKS704; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit” based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 063AKS708). When it is determined that the special symbol display result is "big hit" (step 063AKS708; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is a decoration that is a jackpot combination as a final stop symbol that is a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. The combination of symbols is determined (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the effect control CPU 120 obtains the decorative symbol of the jackpot combination as the final decorative symbol by, for example, performing a random number lottery with reference to the decorative symbol determination table of the jackpot combination prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121. decide.

When it is determined in step 063AKS708 that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step 063AKS708; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the special figure based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS710). When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "small hit" (step 063AKS710; No), the staging control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols to be a loss combination as the final decorative symbol (step 063AKS711). In step 063AKS711, the effect control CPU 120 obtains the decorative symbol of the losing combination as the final decorative symbol by, for example, performing a random number lottery with reference to the decorative symbol determination table of the losing combination stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

When it is determined in step 063AKS710 that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 063AKS710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS712). ..

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the normal state small hit time confirmation decoration symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 19-28 (b). By performing a random number lottery using the random number lottery, as a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a small hit combination according to which of "small hit A" and "small hit E" the small hit type is, FIG. 19 Any one of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol shown in −28 (a) is determined (step 063AKS713). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" may be specified based on a display result designation command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the small hit time confirmation decorative symbol for the time saving state shown in FIGS. 19-28 (c). By performing a random number lottery using the table, as a fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is a combination of small hits, depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E". Any one of the first small hit symbol to the fifth small hit symbol shown in FIGS. 19-28 (a) is determined (step 063AKS714).

In the first small hit symbol shown in FIGS. 19-28 (a), the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and is "middle". It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a rectangular decorative symbol in red indicating a message of "V" suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the above is displayed. As for the second small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the large hit is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a rectangular decorative symbol in blue indicating the message "V" suggesting that the game is controlled is displayed. As for the third small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the time is shortened in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a rectangular decorative symbol in red indicating the message "hour" suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed. As for the 4th small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the time is shortened in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is a combination of decorative symbols in which a rectangular decorative symbol in blue indicating the message "hour" suggesting that the state is controlled is displayed. As for the 5th small hit symbol, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed. It is a combination of decorative patterns in which a white rectangular decorative pattern indicating the message "small" is displayed. The first small hit symbol and the second small hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the big hit gaming state is controlled. The third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit symbol are a combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the time saving state is controlled.

In the small hit determination decorative symbol determination table for normal state shown in FIGS. 19-28 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19. , The fixed decorative symbol is determined to be the 4th small hit symbol at a higher rate than the 5th small hit symbol, and is determined to be the 3rd small hit symbol at a higher rate than the 4th small hit symbol, and is determined from the 3rd small hit symbol. Is determined to be the second small hit symbol at a high rate, and is determined to be the first small hit symbol at a higher rate than the second small hit symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and is controlled to the big hit gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol. This is higher than when the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol, it is higher than when the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed. It was higher, and when the 3rd small hit symbol was derived and displayed as the definite decoration symbol, it was higher than when the 4th small hit symbol was derived and displayed, and the 4th small hit symbol was derived and displayed as the definite decoration symbol. The time is higher than when the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first small hit symbol and the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite decorative symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the small hit fixed decoration symbol determination table for the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 19-28 (b), the third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit symbol suggesting that the fixed decorative symbol is controlled to the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be determined as a small hit pattern. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, the player can derive and display the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol, which suggests that the fixed decorative symbol is controlled in the time saving state. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is performed to give a feeling of expectation that the game ball is controlled to the time saving state, and the game interest can be improved.

Specifically, in the small hit fixed decoration symbol determination table for the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 19-28 (b), the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit C" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. In the case of "small hit D", the definite decorative symbol is determined to be the first small hit symbol at a higher rate than the fifth small hit symbol, and is determined to be the second small hit symbol at a higher rate than the first small hit symbol. , The 4th small hit symbol is determined at a higher rate than the 2nd small hit symbol, and the 3rd small hit symbol is determined at a higher rate than the 4th small hit symbol. With such a configuration, the expectation that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small hit gaming state is when the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol. However, it is higher than when the 4th small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the 4th small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol, it is higher than when the 2nd small hit symbol is derived and displayed. , When the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite decoration symbol, it is higher than when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the first small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite decoration symbol. Is higher than when the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first small hit symbol and the fifth small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite decorative symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the small hit time-saving fixed decoration symbol determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIGS. 19-28 (c), the third small hit symbol and the fourth small hit suggesting that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled to the time-saving state. It is configured so that it is not determined by the winning symbol. According to such a configuration, in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed, but the time saving state is controlled as a definite decorative symbol. The third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and the player is expected to be controlled to the time saving state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured to prevent the player from being embraced and to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest. As described above, in the present embodiment, the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol, which suggests that the fixed decoration symbol is controlled in the time saving state in the normal state, can be derived and displayed, while the fixed decoration in the time saving state can be derived and displayed. By being configured so that the third small hit symbol or the fourth small hit symbol is not derived and displayed as a symbol, it is possible to perform a suitable effect according to the state.

Returning to FIGS. 19-27, after executing the processes of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713 or step 063AKS714, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of effect control patterns (special figure variation time effect control pattern) prepared (set) in advance according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. ), And set it as the effect control pattern to be used. When the setting for executing the time reduction number of times notification effect is made in step 063AKS703, the effect control for selecting and using the effect control pattern (time reduction number of times notification effect control pattern) corresponding to the time reduction number of times notification effect in step 063AKS715 is performed. Set as a pattern. When the setting for executing the time saving rush effect control is made in step 063AKS707, as the effect control pattern (time saving rush effect control pattern) to select and use the effect control pattern corresponding to the time reduction rush effect in step 063AKS715. set.

After executing the process of step 063AKS715, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. Set (step 063AKS716).

After executing the process of step 063AKS716, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for starting variable display such as a decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 transmits, for example, a display control command (command) specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Variable display of decorative symbols is started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step 063AKS717, the effect control CPU 120 sets the settings for updating the display of the hold display and the active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display. (Step 063AKS718).

After executing the process of step 063AKS718, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 063AKS719), and performs the variable display start setting process. finish.

FIG. 19-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the effect processing during variable display is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer. Is determined (step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the staging control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the staging control process timer by, for example, subtracting 1, and the staging control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 (staging control pattern when the special figure fluctuates). ) To determine whether or not the end code has been read corresponding to the updated timer value, thereby determining whether or not the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063AKS801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach effect period is such that the reach effect is executed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step 063AKS802). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 063AKS802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step 063AKS803).

After executing the process of step 063AKS803, or when it is determined in step 063AKS802 that it is not the reach effect period (step 063AKS802; No), the effect control CPU 120 has a time reduction number of times based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. It is determined whether or not it is the time-reduced number of times notification effect period in which the notification effect is executed (step 063AKS804). The time reduction number notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time reduction number notification effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time reduction number notification effect period is reached (step 063AKS804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time reduction number notification effect (step 063AKS805).

After executing the process of step 063AKS805, or when it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time reduction number notification effect period (step 063AKS804; No), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the timer value of the effect control process timer and the like. It is determined whether or not it is the time saving suggestion effect period in which the time reduction suggestion effect is executed (step 063AKS806). The time saving suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time reduction suggestion effect period is reached (step 063AKS806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time reduction suggestion effect (step 063AKS807).

After executing the process of step 063AKS807, or when it is determined in step 063AKS806 that it is not the time saving suggestion effect period (step 063AKS806; No), the effect control CPU 120 reduces the time based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. It is determined whether or not it is the time-saving rushing effect period in which the rushing effect is executed (step 063AKS808). The time-saving rushing effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time-saving rushing effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. When it is determined that the time saving rush effect period is reached (step 063AKS808; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the time saving rush effect (step 063AKS809).

After executing the process of step 063AKS809, or when it is determined in step 063AKS808 that it is not the time saving rush effect period (step 063AKS808; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control pattern determined in step 063AKS715. Based on this, other control is performed to execute the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step 063AKS810), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol determination command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step 063AKS811; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect processing during variable display.

When it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby transmitting "left" and "middle". In each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "right", the definite decorative symbol as the final stop symbol determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, or step 063AKS712 is derived and displayed (step 063AKS812).

After executing the process of step 063AKS812, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 063AKS813), and sets the value of the effect process flag to the value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process. It is updated to "3" (step 063AKS814), and the variable display during effect processing is terminated.

FIG. 19-30 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S173 of the staging control process process as the waiting process for hitting the special figure with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the special figure hit wait process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901). When it is determined that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS904), and promotes right-handed strike. After clearing the effect flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS905), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion effect (step 063AKS906).

After executing the process of step 063AKS906, or when it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), the sub-side time reduction count value is not "0" in step 063AKS903. When the determination is made (step 063AKS903; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step 063AKS907), and waits for a special figure. To finish.

When it is determined in step 063AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not elapsed (step 063AKS901; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received. (Step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the big hit start effect time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start effect time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot start effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start effect time. After executing the process of step 063AKS909, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the big hit start effect (step 063AKS910), and sets the value of the effect process flag to "6", which is a value corresponding to the big hit middle effect process. After updating (step 063AKS911), the waiting process for hitting a special figure is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS908 that the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received. Determination (step 063AKS912). When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has not been received (step 063AKS912; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special figure hit wait process.

When it is determined that the hit start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS912; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time to any of the first specific time to the third specific time. (Step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start effect time by referring to the small hit start effect time determination table shown in FIG. 19-30 (b), and the small hit type is “small hit”. Depending on which of "A" to "small hit E", it is determined to be any of the first specific time to the third specific time, and the stored value of the small hit start effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. The small hit start effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start effect time. The small hit type may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 19-30 (b), in the present embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start effect time is set to the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start effect time is set to the second specific time, and when the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start effect The time is set to the first specific time.

After returning to FIG. 19-30 (a) and executing the process of step 063AKS913, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the small hit start effect (step 063AKS914), and the value of the effect process flag is set to the small hit. After updating to "4", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing (step 063AKS915), the special figure hit waiting process is terminated.

FIG. 19-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S174 of the effect control process process as the effect process during the small hit with respect to the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit middle effect process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the small hit start effect time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small hit start effect time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start effect time elapses depending on whether or not the updated small hit start effect time timer value is "0". Determine if it has been done. When it is determined that the small hit start effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1001; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit medium effect process.

When it is determined that the small hit start effect time has elapsed (step 063AKS1001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start effect end flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS1001; Yes). Step 063AKS1002). When it is determined that the small hit start effect end flag is not on (step 063AKS1002; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the small hit start effect (step 063AKS1004) and turns on the small hit start effect end flag. Set to the state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS1006; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the normal time passing fanning effect (step 063AKS1007), and ends the small hit medium effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving time passing fanning effect (step 063AKS1008), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1002 that the small hit start effect end flag is on (step 063AKS1002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS1002; Yes). Step 063AKS1003). When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has not been received (step 063AKS1003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit middle effect process.

When it is determined that the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063AKS1003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the small hit start effect end flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1009), and passes. After controlling to end the normal time passing fanning effect or the time saving time passing fanning effect being executed as the time fanning effect (step 063AKS1010), the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process. Update to 5 ”(step 063AKS1011).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1011, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command according to the small hit. Determination (step 063AKS1012).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the third special time (step 063AKS1012; Yes). Step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passage notification effect time timer value, which is a stored value of the passage notification effect time timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS1013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is not on (step 063AKS1014; No), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the normal large hit area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1015), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do. When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving time large hit area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1016), and ends the small hit medium effect process. do.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1012 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. It is determined whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 3 and the small hit end designation command 4 is received as a command (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the second special time (step 063AKS1017; Yes). Step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1018, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the time saving area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small hit medium effect process.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1017 that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the passage notification effect time to the first special. Set to time (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passage notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1020, the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the loss area passage notification effect (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small hit medium effect process.

FIG. 19-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S175 of the effect control process process as the small hit end effect process for the feature unit 063AK.

When the small hit end effect process is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the passage notification effect time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018 or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, it is updated by subtracting 1 from the passage notification effect time timer value, and whether or not the passage notification effect time has elapsed depending on whether the updated passage notification effect time timer value is "0". Is determined. When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1101; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the small hit end effect process.

When it is determined that the passage notification effect time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 includes the small hit end specification command 1 and the small hit end specification command 2 as the hit end specification commands according to the small hits. It is determined whether or not any of them has been received (step 063AKS1102). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the hit start designation command reception waiting time. (Step 063AKS1103), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step 063AKS1104), and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

When it is determined in step 063AKS1102 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. It is determined whether or not any of the small hit end designation command 3 and the small hit end designation command 4 is received as a command (step 063AKS1105). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction flag to the ON state (step 063AKS1106). ).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the effect control CPU 120 receives a sub, based on whether the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 is received as the hit end designation command according to the small hit. The side time reduction count value is set (step 063AKS1107). When the small hit end designation command 3 indicating that the variable display is controlled to the time saving state is received for a period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed five times, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving count value is set. Set to "5". When the small hit end designation command 4 indicating that the variable display is controlled to the time reduction state is received for the period from the end of the small hit game state until the variable display is executed once, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time reduction count value is set. Set to "1".

When it is determined in step 063AKS1105 that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; No), the effect control CPU 120 has the sub-side time saving flag turned on. It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS1108). When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

When it is determined that the sub-side time reduction count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the staging control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time reduction flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1110) to promote right-handed striking. After clearing the effect flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS1111), control is performed to end the right-handed promotion effect (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or when it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), the sub-side time saving count value is "0" in step 063AKS1109. If it is determined that this is not the case (step 063AKS1109; No), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step 063AKS1113), and makes a small hit. End Ends the staging process.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation according to the feature unit 063AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-33 to 19-36.

First, with reference to FIGS. 19-33 and 19-34, an example of the effect operation in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the normal state will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, the small hit variation is executed in the normal state, and the reach effect of the super reach A and the time saving suggestion effect are executed during the small hit variation, and the third small hit symbol is executed as the final decorative symbol. Will be described using an example of the case where is derived and displayed.

19-33 (a) shows the lost symbols (“135”) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5 in the normal state. Indicates the stopped display state. In FIGS. 19-33 (b), the small hit fluctuation is started in the normal state, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It shows the state of being done.

FIGS. 19-33 (c) show a state in which the reach is established and the character image AK6 showing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the reach effect of the super reach A. ..

In FIGS. 19-33 (d), the time saving suggestion effect is started, and a predetermined lost symbol (“767”) is tentatively set in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Indicates the stopped display state. FIG. 19-24 (e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is revariably displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the time saving suggestion effect. FIGS. 19-33 (f) show a state in which the time saving suggestion symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time saving suggestion effect. There is. FIG. 19-33 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are revariably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the time saving suggestion effect. Shows.

In FIGS. 19-33 (h), the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small hit variation. Indicates the finished state.

In FIGS. 19-33 (i), control to the small hit game state is started, and as a small hit start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and "Aim to the right! The right arrow image AK8 showing the message "" and the small hit start image AK9 showing the message "Put the ball here!" Are executed while showing the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7. It shows the state of being. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-33 (i), the right-handed promotion effect is started in response to the start of control to the small hit gaming state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 showing an arrow pointing in the right direction is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the screen of the device 5.

In the normal state, after the effect operation shown in FIGS. 19-33 (i) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 19-34 (a) is executed. FIGS. 19-34 (a) show a state in which the normal passage fanning effect is being executed. In the normal time passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 19-34 (a), the big hit area passing fanning image AK2, the time saving area passing fanning image AK3, and the lost area passing fanning image AK4 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The normal time passing fan image AK1 including the Is it a short time? Is it a loss? "

Hereinafter, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 while the normal time passage fanning effect is being executed in the normal state will be described.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the effect operation shown in FIGS. 19-34 (a) is completed, and the effect operation shown in FIGS. 19-34 (b) is executed. FIG. 19-34 (b) shows a state in which the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect is executed and the normal time jackpot area passage notification image AK10 indicating the message “V” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. ing.

19-34 (c) shows that after the small hit game state is completed, the big hit game state is controlled, and as a big hit start effect, the screen of the image display device 5 has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right direction. Shows the state in which the effect of displaying the first jackpot start image AK11 showing the message "Aim to the right!" And the second jackpot start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball into the attacker!" Is being executed. There is. The second big hit start image AK12 is a staging image that urges the player to win a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-34 (c), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

Next, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 while the normal time passage fanning effect is being executed in the normal state will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIGS. 19-34 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 19-34 (d) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the time saving region 063AK20. FIG. 19-34 (d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passage notification effect is executed and the time-saving area passage notification image AK13 indicating the message “lucky!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 19-34 (e) shows the screen of the image display device 5 as a time saving rush effect, in which the normal state is controlled to the time saving state according to the start of the next variable display after the small hit game state is finished. The first time-saving rush image AK14 showing the message "Time saving!" And the second time-saving rush image AK15 showing the message "Aim at the right and put the ball in the electric chew!" Are displayed. It shows the state of being. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-34 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 19-34 (e), the time reduction number notification effect is executed according to the control to the time reduction state, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of times is four.

Next, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 while the normal time passage fanning effect is being executed in the normal state will be described.

In the normal state, the effect operation shown in FIGS. 19-34 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 19-34 (f) is executed in response to the passing of the game ball through the loss region 063AK21. FIG. 19-34 (f) shows a state in which the loss area passage notification effect is executed and the loss area passage notification image AK17 indicating the message “Sorry!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIGS. 19-34 (g), after the small hit game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without changing, the next variable display is started, and “left”, “middle”, It shows a state in which variable display is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right”.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 19-35 and 19-36, an example of the effect operation in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state will be described. Specifically, hereinafter, a case where the small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, the reach effect of the super reach A is executed during the small hit variation, and the third small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite decorative symbol. It will be explained using an example.

In FIGS. 19-35 (a), the lost symbols (“135”) are shown in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5 in the time saving state. Indicates the stopped display state. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-35 (a), the right-handed promotion effect is executed, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 19-35 (a), the time reduction number notification effect is executed, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the time reduction number is 4 times. It is displayed in the mode.

In FIGS. 19-35 (b), small hit fluctuations are started in a time-saving state, and variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It shows the state of being done. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-35 (b), the display mode of the time reduction number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time reduction number is 3 times. Has been done.

19-35 (c) shows a state in which the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach A is executed, and the character image AK6 showing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIGS. 19-35 (d), the second small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a definite decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small hit variation. Indicates the finished state.

In FIGS. 19-35 (e), the control to the small hit game state is started, the small hit start effect is executed, and the right arrow image AK8 and the start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It shows the state. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-35 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed in response to the start of control to the small hit gaming state, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIG. 19-35 (e) is executed, and then the effect operation shown in FIG. 19-36 (a) is executed. FIG. 19-36 (a) shows a state in which the time-saving time-passing fanning effect is being executed. In the time-saving time-saving passing fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 19-36 (a), the time-saving time-saving passing fanning image including the jackpot area passing fanning image AK2 and the loss area passing fanning image AK4 on the screen of the image display device 5. AK5 is displayed, and the jackpot region light emitting unit 063AK25 and the loss region light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light. A production is performed to output a short-time passing fanning voice indicating the message "Is it?"

Hereinafter, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 while the time-reduced time-time passage fanning effect is being executed will be described.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIGS. 19-36 (a) ends and the effect operation shown in FIG. 19-36 (b) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19. In FIGS. 19-36 (b), the time-saving big hit area passage notification effect is executed, and the time-saving big hit area passage notification image AK18 indicating the message “BONUS!” Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Shows.

In FIGS. 19-36 (c), after the small hit game state is completed, the big hit start effect is executed under the control of the big hit game state, and the first big hit start image AK11 and the second big hit are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The state where the start image AK12 and the like are displayed is shown. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-36 (c), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Has been done.

Next, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 while the time-saving time-passing fanning effect is being executed in the time-saving state will be described. In the time saving state, the same effect operation is executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the time saving state, the effect operation shown in FIGS. 19-36 (a) is completed and the effect operation shown in FIG. 19-36 (d) is executed in response to the game ball passing through the time reduction area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21. Will be done. FIG. 19-36 (d) shows a state in which the loss area passage notification effect is executed and the loss area passage notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIGS. 19-36 (e), after the small hit game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state without changing, the next variable display is started, and “left”, “middle”, It shows a state in which variable display is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R on the “right”. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-36 (e), the display mode of the time reduction number notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time reduction number is 2 times. Has been done. Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 19-36 (e), the right-handed promotion effect is subsequently executed when the small hit game state is controlled, and the right-handed promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in.

As described above, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game in the normal state, and is formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). When the game ball (game medium) passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (special area) when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the time saving from the normal state is shortened. While controlling to the state (special state), the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game when the time is shortened, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball is shortened. When the region 063AK20 is passed, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. Further, in the feature unit 063AK, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and the time saving state. In the special figure game, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, it is configured to be able to execute a different effect from the case where the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. .. According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, the same effect is produced when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state and when the game ball does not pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 or the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. It is configured to be viable. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games.

Further, the feature unit 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects depending on whether the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the time saving state and the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 in the normal state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, different effects are variably displayed depending on whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state and when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the time saving state. It is configured to be executable during execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state, it is controlled to the time saving state as an effect suggesting that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite special symbol. It is configured so that the time saving suggestion effect suggesting that can be executed during the execution of the variable display. According to such a configuration, various effects can be performed and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite special symbol in the second special symbol game, it is higher than when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite special symbol in the first special symbol game. It is configured to be controlled in a time-saving state at a rate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the definite special symbol in the second special symbol game, and to improve the game interest.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, the display mode of the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, whereby the variable display corresponding to the hold display is displayed. In the display, the game ball that is controlled to the small hit gaming state or has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state is either the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21. It may be configured to enable the hold display change effect for notifying the passing of the image.

For example, by changing the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started yet by the hold display change effect, the display color of the hold display is changed to one of blue, green, and red different from the white in the normal time, so that the hold display can be displayed. The game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to the small hit gaming state by making the change in the display mode recognizable and controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state, has the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area. It may be configured so that it can be suggested that it passes through either 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21.

Specifically, when the hold display change effect is configured to be executable as a look-ahead notice, the look-ahead judgment is performed based on the occurrence of the start prize in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. I just need to be. In the look-ahead determination, for example, a random number lottery is performed by referring to the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12 (b). , Fig. 19-14 when the process of pre-reading whether the variable display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", or when the variable display result is pre-reading as "small hit" By performing a random number lottery with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in (b), a process of pre-reading and determining whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" is performed. Just do it. After that, in the start winning determination process, a setting for transmitting a start winning command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination may be made.

The start winning command that has been set to be transmitted in the start winning determination process is mainly due to the command control process being executed in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The start winning command transmitted from the main board 11 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 at the time of starting winning by executing the command analysis process in step S75 of the staging control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It may be stored in the command buffer.

In this case, in the pre-reading notice setting process executed in step S161 of the effect control process process, whether or not the hold display change effect as the pre-reading notice effect is executed in response to receiving the start winning command from the main board 11. And the execution mode may be determined.

In the hold storage stored when deciding whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is If either "small hit C" or "small hit D" hold on which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is included, after the end of the variable display executed first, that is, the destination By changing from the normal state to the time saving state before executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read notice target, the variable display is performed at the time of pre-reading and at the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the hold of the read notice target. Results and fluctuation patterns may differ. In such a case, there will be an inconsistency between the suggested content of the hold display change effect as the look-ahead notice effect and the actual variable display result or fluctuation pattern, which will lead to distrust of the player and reduce the game interest. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the stored hold, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" and a hold in which the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". And, if any of the above is included, the execution of the hold display change effect may be restricted. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games.

For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit" in the stored hold, and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit C". When neither of the hold that becomes "small hit D" is included, according to the variable display result and the small hit type according to the decision ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table shown in FIG. 19-37 (a). , Whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode may be determined. On the other hand, in the stored hold, the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". When any of the following is included, the variable display result and the small hit are according to the determination ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table shown in the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 19-37 (b). Depending on the type, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode may be determined. In the stored hold, a hold in which the variable display result is "big hit" and a hold in which the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". It may be determined whether or not is included by checking the contents of the buffer at the time of starting winning.

In the normal hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 19-37 (a), when the variable display result is "big hit", the hold display change effect is held at a higher rate than determined to be not executed (white). The display mode of the display is determined to be blue, the display mode of the hold display is determined to be green at a higher rate than blue, and the display mode of the hold display is determined to be red at a rate higher than green. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the hold display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, and when the hold display is displayed in green, it is in blue. It is higher than when it is displayed, and when the hold display is displayed in blue, it is higher than when it is displayed in white (when the hold display change effect is not executed). On the other hand, in the hold change determination table at the time of restriction, as shown in FIGS. 19-37 (b), the execution of the hold display change effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is green or higher is restricted. In the example shown in FIGS. 19-37 (b), the hold display change effect in which the hold display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be limited to "no execution".

In the normal hold change determination table shown in FIGS. 19-37 (a) and the restricted hold change determination table shown in FIG. 19-37 (b), variable display is performed when the variable display result is "small hit". An example is shown in which the display mode is determined in the same manner as when the result is "big hit", but this is only an example, the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit A" or. When the display mode is peculiar to "small hit B" (for example, "big hit?") Or when the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". There may be a peculiar display mode (“time?”). With such a configuration, the variation of the hold display change effect increases, and the player's attention can be attracted.

In the above embodiment, the special figure display result is "small hit" in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state is completed, and the small hit type is the game ball in the time saving area 063AK20. Even if it is configured so that different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved storage that becomes "small hit C" or "small hit D" passing through the above is included and the case where such reserved storage is not included. good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

For example, in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, the special figure display result becomes "small hit", and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". If the hold memory that becomes There is a hold in which the special figure display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in the hold memory corresponding to)). Just do it. On the other hand, the special figure display result is "small hit" in the hold storage corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state is completed, and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". If the hold that becomes is not included, the special figure display result will be "small hit" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game that it will not be controlled to the time saving state again by any of the remaining hold. , There is no hold for which the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D")). As an example, both the return success effect and the return failure effect are the effects in which the combination of different decorative symbols is stopped and displayed after performing the effect of inciting whether or not the time is controlled again as a common effect. All you need is.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit variation, the game ball that has won the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state does not suggest that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Is configured to be able to execute a big hit fanning effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state. Based on this, after performing a loss effect suggesting that the game ball did not pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and based on the passage, the game ball enters the time saving state after the end of the small hit gaming state. Relief effects suggesting that they are controlled may be configured to be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

For example, as a big hit fanning effect, as shown in FIG. 19-38 (a), the message "big hit" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19. An effect of displaying the jackpot fanning image AK19 including the image AK20, the loss suggestion image AK21 which indicates the message of "loss" and suggests that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 may be configured to be feasible. In this case, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving region 063AK20, as a loss effect, as shown in FIGS. 19-38 (b), an effect of highlighting the loss suggestion image AK21 included in the jackpot fanning image AK19. Just run. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-38 (b), the frame line of the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame line of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 which is not highlighted, so that the loss suggestion image AK21 is highlighted. There is. After performing the effect operation shown in FIG. 19-38 (b) as a loss effect, as a relief effect, as shown in FIG. 19-38 (c), a part of the area where the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed is displayed. The message "time saving" is shown, the time saving suggestion image AK22 suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is displayed, the highlighting of the loss suggestion image AK21 is terminated, and the time saving suggestion image AK22 is highlighted. All you have to do is execute the production. In the state shown in FIGS. 19-38 (c), the frame line of the time saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame lines of the unhighlighted jackpot suggestion image AK20 and the loss suggestion image AK21, so that the time saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed. Is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19-11, after determining whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit” (step 063AKS106), the special figure display result is displayed in step 063AKS106. When it is determined that the "big hit" is not determined (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is the "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is only an example, and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" are optional. It can be executed in the order of. For example, after executing a process of determining whether or not to set the special figure display result as a "small hit", when the process does not determine that the special figure display result is a "small hit", the special figure is displayed. It may be configured to execute a process of determining whether or not the result is a "big hit". Alternatively, by determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" by a single process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "big hit". The process of determining whether or not to set the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be executed at the same time.

In the above embodiment, only one of the game balls that won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state flows down to the distribution part 063AK18 through the distribution part supply path 063AK8, and the one is Except for the game ball, it has been described as being discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is only an example, and a plurality of game balls among the game balls that have won the large winning opening 063AK4 in the small hit game state are configured to enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. You may. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

In this configuration, one game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18, passes through one of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and then at least one other game ball. May enter the distribution section 063AK18 and pass through the other areas of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20 and the loss area 063AK21. In this case, among the plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, the game ball that first entered the distribution unit 063AK18 has passed through any of the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. It suffices to control the gaming state after the small hit gaming state ends based on the crab. For example, when the game ball that first enters the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, even if another game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 after the passage, it is the first time. Based on the fact that the game ball of No. 1 has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, it may be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, of the plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state, which of the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 has passed the game ball that last entered the distribution unit 063AK18. You may control the gaming state after the small hit gaming state ends based on. For example, when the game ball that last entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state passes through the big hit area 063AK19, it is assumed that another game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 before the passage. Also, based on the fact that the last game ball has passed through the big hit area 063AK19, it may be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state.

Alternatively, a priority is set in advance between the big hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small hit game state are set in the big hit area 063AK19. , Time saving area 063AK20 and loss area 063AK21, when passing through a plurality of areas, the game after the small hit game state is completed based on the passage to the area having the highest priority among the areas passed by the game ball. You may control the state. For example, the priority of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority of the time saving area 063AK20, and the priority of the time saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority of the lost area 063AK21. In this case, based on the fact that when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, the game balls pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 having the highest priority. Then, after the end of the small hit game state, it is controlled to the big hit game state.

In the above embodiment, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is performed. I explained it as something that couldn't be done. However, this is only an example, and in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball winning the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit game state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, based on the passage. By performing the time saving transition control and controlling the time saving state for a predetermined period after the small hit game state ends, the period controlled to the time saving state may be extended. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

In this case, the effect of notifying that the period controlled to the time saving state has been extended based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state is produced. It may be configured to be feasible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game. For example, as an effect of notifying that the period controlled to the time reduction state has been extended, a time reduction number recovery effect of increasing the time reduction number indicated by the time reduction number notification image AK16 may be performed.

In this case, in the time saving state, the suggestion regarding the passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21 is given without suggesting the passage of the time saving area 063AK20 (the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20). It is suggested that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the game ball passes through the loss region 063AK21 without suggesting). It is suggested that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. ) It may be configured so that the normal passing fanning effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the small hit fluctuation, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 controlled to the open state in the small hit gaming state has the large hit area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. An effect suggesting which of the above may be passed may be configured to be feasible during the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game. For example, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19, the effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19 is produced by the small hit variation. If the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is produced. If the small hit type is "small hit E", which is executed during the execution of the small hit variation and the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, a small hit suggests that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It may be configured to execute during the execution of the variation.

In the above embodiment, the normal time passing fanning effect and the short time passing fanning effect are started in response to the end of the small hit variation, the end of the small hit start effect, and the start of opening and closing of the large winning opening. Explained as. However, this is only an example, and the normal time passing fanning effect and the short time passing fanning effect may be configured to be able to start from the execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game. In particular, when the normal time passing fanning effect is configured to be executable during the execution of the small hit variation, the game ball is a big hit in the small hit gaming state by displaying the normal passing fanning image AK1 during the execution of the small hit variation. Based on the expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on passing through the area 063AK19, and the small hit game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the time is controlled after the end of the state and the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state, and the game interest can be improved.

In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving area passage notification image AK13 indicating the message "lucky!" Is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, it is a pity! The loss area passage notification image AK17 indicating the message "" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the loss area passage notification effect is executed. However, this is only an example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state is different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. It may be a production of. For example, when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is emitted, while when the game ball passes through the time-saving region 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the time-saving region light emitting unit 063AK26 is performed. It may be possible to perform an effect of not emitting light (turning off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the notification voice indicating the message "time saving!" Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the game ball outputs the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. When passing through, the effect of not outputting the notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having a jackpot area 063AK19, a time saving area 063AK20, and a loss area 063AK21, but this is only an example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured not to include the jackpot area 063AK19 or the loss area 063AK21 while the time saving area 063AK20 is provided. According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include a plurality of time saving regions 063AK20. In this case, even if the small hit gaming state is configured to be controlled to the time saving state for different periods after the small hit gaming state ends, depending on which of the plurality of time saving regions 063AK20 the game ball has passed through. good. For example, the time saving area 063AK20 is configured to include a first time saving area and a second time saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time saving area in the small hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state. When the game ball passes through the second time-saving area in the small-hit game state, after the small-hit game state ends, while controlling the time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the end of , It may be configured to control the time saving state for a period until the variable display is executed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the plurality of time-saving regions 063AK20 the game ball passes through in the small hit game state, and to improve the game interest.

In the above embodiment, in the low probability low base state as a normal state, the time saving transition control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state is performed. It was explained that it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of. However, this is only an example, and the time saving transition control is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the time saving area 063AK20 in the small hit gaming state in the high accuracy and low base state, and the small hit gaming state is performed. It may be configured to be controlled to a time saving state after the end of.

Any part or all of each of the above configurations can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration relating to the feature portion 063AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions.

For example, the feature unit 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 063AK, the production is performed in the first period such as the normal time passing fanning effect, the time saving passing fanning effect, and the reach effect of Super Reach A to Super Reach C as predetermined effects. An effect moving image having a progress speed of the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and the progress speed of the effect is the first in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period. An effect video having a second speed slower than the speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the effect sound in both the first period and the second period. The speeds related to the above may be configured to be output at the same speed by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means. According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the staging video of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period. Since the speed of the staging sound corresponding to the reach staging of Super Reach C does not change between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 063AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result. In pachinko game machines 1 etc.)
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state,
A first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) has a special area (for example, a time saving area 063AK20) and is easy to enter, and a second state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Variable means that can be controlled (for example, special variable winning ball device 7), and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that can execute an effect corresponding to a variable display.
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 19-6 and 19) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result. -8, Fig. 19-23, etc.),
The state control means is
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state and the gaming medium passes through the special region when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the above-mentioned is performed based on the passage. Control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIGS. 19-23, 19-26, etc.).
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the game medium passes through the special region when the variable means is controlled to the first state, control based on the passage is performed. (For example, FIGS. 19-23, 19-26, etc.),
The effect executing means derives and displays the special display result as a variable display result in the normal state, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the game medium passes through the special area. In the special state, the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a different effect can be executed depending on whether the game medium passes through the special area. (For example, FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-24, FIG. 19-31, FIG. 19-34, FIG. 19-36, etc.).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 063AK.
The variable means has a specific area (for example, a jackpot area 063AK19).
The state control means can control the advantageous state when the gaming medium passes through the specific region (for example, FIGS. 19-23, 19-26, etc.).
The effect executing means is the same effect when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area and the special area in the special state. Is feasible (eg, FIGS. 19-8, 19-23, 19-24, 19-31, 19-36, etc.).
You may do so.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 063AK.
The effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 19). -8, Fig. 19-23, Fig. 19-24, Fig. 19-31, Fig. 19-34, Fig. 19-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

(4) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (3) according to the feature unit 063AK,
The effect executing means produces different effects depending on whether the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. It can be executed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 19-8, 19-9, 19-15, 19-16, 19-19, 19-33, 19-35, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

(5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (4) according to the feature unit 063AK,
The effect executing means puts the special display result into the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state. An effect suggesting to be controlled (eg, time saving suggestion effect, etc.) can be performed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 19-8, 19-9, 19-15, 19-16, 19). -19, Fig. 19-33, Fig. 19-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, various effects can be performed and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (5) according to the feature unit 063AK,
It is possible to execute a variable display of the first identification information (for example, a first special figure game) and a variable display of the second identification information (for example, a second special figure game).
When the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, the special state is higher than when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first identification information. (For example, FIGS. 19-14),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, and to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 064AK)
The feature unit 063AK includes the feature unit 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 064AK is
In a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state,
A first state (for example, an open state) that has a specific area (for example, a jackpot area 063AK19) and a special area (for example, a time saving area 063AK20) and is easy for a game medium (for example, a game ball) to enter, and a game. A second state in which the medium is inaccessible or difficult to enter (for example, a closed state), a variable means that can be controlled (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7), and the like.
It is equipped with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that can execute an effect corresponding to a variable display.
The state control means is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area, the advantageous state can be controlled (for example, FIGS. 19-23, 19-26, etc.).
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the special region, it is possible to control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIGS. 19-23, 19-26, etc.).
When the variable means is controlled to the first state, the effect executing means can execute a special effect (for example, a normal passing fanning effect) that suggests passage between the specific area and the special area. Yes (eg, FIGS. 19-8, 19-10, 19-31, 19-34, etc.).
When the variable means is controlled to the first state and the gaming medium passes through the special region, the state control means controls the variable means to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state. No (eg, Figures 19-23, 19-26, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means is
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 19-8, 19-10, 19-31, 19-34, etc.).
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific effect of suggesting the passage of the specific area without suggesting the passage of the special area (for example, a time-saving time-saving passage fanning effect, etc.) ) (For example, FIGS. 19-8, 19-10, 19-31, 19-36, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable production depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means can execute different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 19). -8, Fig. 19-23, Fig. 19-24, Fig. 19-31, Fig. 19-34, Fig. 19-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, FIGS. 19-6 and 19-) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable table result. 8, Fig. 19-23, etc.),
The effect executing means produces different effects depending on whether the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. It can be executed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 19-8, 19-9, 19-15, 19-16, 19-19, 19-33, 19-35, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suitable effect depending on the state.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above, which relates to the feature unit 064AK.
The effect executing means puts the special display result into the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result in the normal state. An effect suggesting to be controlled (eg, time saving suggestion effect, etc.) can be performed during the execution of the variable display (eg, FIGS. 19-8, 19-9, 19-15, 19-16, 19). -19, Fig. 19-33, Fig. 19-35, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, various effects can be performed and the game entertainment can be improved.

(6) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (3) to (5) according to the feature unit 064AK,
In the effect executing means, when the special display result is derived as a variable display result, the variable means is controlled to the first state, and then the variable means is controlled to the second state, the game medium is set. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether the game medium passes through the specific area or the special area (for example, FIGS. 19-8, 19-23, 19-24, 19-31). , Figures 19-34, 19-36, etc.),
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of feature 065AK)
The feature unit 065AK will be described. In the feature unit 065AK, the description of the parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the basic explanation will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation, after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, it was possible to control to the high base state (time saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, in the low base state (normal state), the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is the predetermined "time saving symbol" among the "normal symbol loss". When becomes, it is controlled to the high base state (time saving state) regardless of the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, the game may shift from the low base state to the high base state without going through the jackpot game state, so that it is possible to provide unexpected game playability.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, when the display result of the normal symbol is "time saving symbol", the transition from the low base state to the high base state is performed even while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. It has become like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of suggesting / notifying the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. By the predetermined effect, it is possible to suggest and notify that the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit" or "time saving symbol", or the display result of the special symbol is "big hit". With such a predetermined effect, the player can expect which display result is suggested / notified, and the interest is improved.

(Structure of feature part 065AK)
FIG. 20-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 having the feature portion 065AK, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK is different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description shown in FIG. 1 in the arrangement of a part of the configuration. In addition, here, the part different from FIG. 1 will be mainly described, and the same number will be assigned to the same configuration and the description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK shown in FIG. 20-1, the gaming ball launched from the hitting ball launching device is the first path, which is the path on the left side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, or the image display device. You will be guided to the lower side of the game area via the second route, which is the route on the right side of the frame surrounding 5, and you will either win (enter) each winning opening or go to the out opening without entering any winning opening. It is captured.

Launching a game ball so that the game ball passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called left-handed, and launching the game ball so that the game ball passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5. Making it right-handed is called right-handed. The area where the left-struck game ball can be guided is called the left area, and the area where the right-struck game ball can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5 and in the left region of the gaming area, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation, while the winning ball device 6A is a variable winning machine. The ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided in the lower right region of the image display device 5 and in the right region of the gaming area. Therefore, in the high base state where the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is open, or in the big hit game state where the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is open, the game is played by right-handed hitting. In the low base state where the winning opening is not open, the game is played by left-handed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, the passing gates 41 are provided in the left region and the right region, so that the normal drawing game can be easily executed even in the low base state where the game is played by left-handed strike. .. As a result, in the low base state, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a "time saving symbol", and it is possible to secure an opportunity to shift to the high base state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, the general winning openings 10 are provided in the left region and the right region. The general winning opening 10 may be provided in either area.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature portion 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the gaming area, and the attacker lamp 9c is a special variable winning prize in the gaming board 2. It is provided in the vicinity of the ball device 7. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a position above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Subsequently, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature unit 065AK will be described. FIG. 20-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process process executed in step S26 of FIG. In the normal symbol process process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 is in the ON state, that is, the game ball has passed through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the gate switch pass process (step S412). do.

The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the count value (the number of gate passage storages) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example) in the gate switch passage processing in step S412. If the maximum value is not reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by 1, the value of the random number for normal symbol determination, which is a software random number, is extracted and stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passage storage number. In addition, the number of lights on the normal figure hold display 25C is increased by 1. After that, one of the processes of steps S400 to S404 as shown below is executed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In the normal symbol normal processing of step S400, the CPU 103 is not in a state where the normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol variation display is not executed in the normal symbol display 20 and is a variable winning prize. If the ball device 6B is not in the open state) and the number of stored gates is not 0, the value of the random number for determining normal symbol stored in the storage area and the normal symbol shown in FIG. 20-3. Using the determination table, it is determined whether or not to make a hit (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol) and whether or not to make it a time-saving symbol. If the game state is in the low base state (if the time reduction flag is not set), the table shown in FIG. 20-3 (A) should be used, and if the game state is in the high base state (time reduction flag is not set). B), the table shown in FIG. 20-3 (B) is used. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“1” in this example) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 normally sets a value corresponding to the variable display time (normal symbol fluctuation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the normal symbol process timer. Start the symbol process timer. In addition, a control for transmitting a command for designating the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to the staging control board 12 is executed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402) (“2” in this example).

The CPU 103 executes variable display (variation) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation process of step S402. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“3” in this example) indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S403). ..

The CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 20 in the normal symbol stop processing in step S403. Then, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation time (stop symbol display time) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol process timer, and when the timer times out, the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Check if it exists. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), if it is a time-saving symbol, the process for starting the time-saving state is executed. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400) (“0” in this example). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal symbol process timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“4” in this example) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process (step S404).

The CPU 103 sets the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 6B to the open state in the process of opening the ordinary electric accessory in step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

FIG. 20-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table in which a determination value regarding a display result of a normal symbol for determining a display result of a normal symbol is set in the normal symbol normal process of step S400. In this embodiment, the range that the random number for normal symbol determination can take is 1 to 250, but the normal symbol determination table is compared with the random number value for normal symbol determination and the determination value is set.

FIG. 20-3 (A) is a normal symbol determination table used in a low base state. As shown in FIG. 20-3 (A), in the low base state, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a hit (normal figure hit). When it is determined that the hit is a normal figure, the variable winning ball device 6A is opened for 5 seconds. When the random value for normal symbol determination is 3 to 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal symbol loss). If it is determined that the normal figure is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened. In the case of hitting or losing a normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds.

Further, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol A). When it is determined that the time saving symbol A is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time-saving symbol A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

Further, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 241 to 250, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol B). When it is determined that the time saving symbol B is determined, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened, but is controlled to a high base state (time saving state). In the case of the time-saving symbol B, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 15 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbol is a part of the time-saving symbol, and a part of the determination value corresponding to the time-saving symbol is assigned to the time-saving symbol.

Further, in the normal symbol normal processing in step S400, after determining (determining) whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a time-saving symbol. By doing so, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal figure and a time-saving symbol due to an error of a random number or the like, the normal figure hit can be prioritized. In the low base state, it is more advantageous for the player to have a time-saving symbol than to hit a normal symbol, so it is first determined whether or not to use a time-saving symbol, and then the normal symbol is used. It may be determined whether or not it is a figure hit.

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving symbols are provided, and the period of the high base state (end condition, number of time-savings) is different between the case of time-saving symbol A and the case of time-saving symbol B. As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time reduction symbol A" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 50 times (time reduction number of times). Will be 50 times). Further, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time reduction symbol B" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (the number of time reductions becomes 100 times). Therefore, the time-saving symbol B is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving symbol A.

In this embodiment, whether or not the time-saving symbol is used and the type of the time-saving symbol are determined by the random number value for normal symbol determination when the normal symbol is lost, but different random numbers are used. It may be determined whether or not the time-saving symbol is used and the type of the time-saving symbol. Further, the types of time-saving symbols are not limited to two types, and there may be one type or three or more types. When there is only one type of time-saving symbol, it is easy to determine the display result by determining whether or not to use the time-saving symbol by the normal symbol determination random value.

As shown in FIG. 20-3 (A), the symbol confirmation time for hitting or losing a normal figure is 0.5 seconds, whereas the symbol confirmation time for a time-saving symbol is as long as 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, it is possible to perform notification of shifting to a high base state (time reduction state) or right-handed at the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the sudden transition to a high base state and the disadvantage of the player due to lack of preparation. The symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the display result.

The fluctuation time for the time-saving symbol B is 15 seconds, and the fluctuation time for other display results is 10 seconds. As a result, the display result can be announced by the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time may be determined according to the display result, or the fluctuation time of all the display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

FIG. 20-3 (B) is a normal symbol determination table used in a high base state. As shown in FIG. 20-3 (B), in the high base state, when the random value for normal symbol determination is 1 to 229, it is determined to be a hit (normal figure hit). When it is determined that the hit is a normal figure, the variable winning ball device 6A is opened for 7.5 seconds. When the random value for normal symbol determination is 230, it is determined to be a loss (normal symbol loss). When the random value for normal symbol determination is 231 to 240, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol A). When the random value for normal symbol determination is 241 to 250, it is determined to be lost (time saving symbol B). In the high base state, even if the time reduction symbols (time reduction symbols A and B) are set, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), the number of time reductions (end condition in the high base state) is not updated and is controlled. It is designed not to affect the high base condition inside. That is, in the high base state, the time-saving symbol is treated in the same way as the normal figure loss. If it is determined that the normal figure is lost, the variable winning ball device 6A is not opened.

In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.5 seconds and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the display result. As a result, the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be quickly repeated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-3, the fluctuation time is determined according to the display result of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is based on the determined display result of the normal symbol. May be decided. In this case, if the display result is a normal map loss, the determination rate of the fluctuation time may be different depending on whether or not the symbol is a time-saving symbol. By doing so, it is possible to suggest whether or not the time-saving symbol is obtained by the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 20-3 (A) and 20-3, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, whereas the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state is 10. It's getting longer, seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state, it is possible to perform notification of shifting to the high base state (time reduction state) or hitting right at the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or reduce the sudden transition to a high base state and the disadvantage of the player due to lack of preparation. In addition, in the high base state, even if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, such notification is not necessary. Therefore, by shortening the symbol confirmation time, the change of the next normal symbol should be executed promptly. Can be done. The symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and is controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as big hit types when the display result of the first special figure is a big hit, and the big hit of "big hit A" is provided. After entering the game state, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 50 times (the number of time reductions is 50 times), and after the big hit game state of "Big hit B" is reached, 100 times. The high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed (the number of time reductions is 100). It should be noted that the display result of the first special figure is basically a big hit when the base is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), "big hit C" is provided as a big hit type when the display result of the second special figure is a big hit, and it is a big hit gaming state of "big hit C". After that, the high base state continues until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (the number of time reductions becomes 100 times). It should be noted that the display result of the second special figure is basically a big hit at the time of high base.

As described above, in this embodiment, the end condition (number of time reductions) of the high base state (time reduction state) is that the display result of the second special figure is a big hit than the case where the display result of the first special figure is a big hit. It is more advantageous when it becomes. As a result, the player's disappointment can be suppressed because the end condition of the high base state does not become disadvantageous to the player because the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and shifts to the high base state. Also, at the time of high base, the end condition of the high base state (time saving state) in the case of a big hit is more advantageous than the low base state, so once the high base state is reached, it is easy to maintain the high base state for a long time. Can be done.

In the feature unit 065AK, it suffices to be controlled to at least a time saving state after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the number of rounds of "big hit A" to "big hit C" and the presence or absence of probability variation control are arbitrary. good. Further, the jackpot type and the number of time reductions shown in FIG. 20-5 are examples, and the number of jackpot types may be larger or smaller than in FIG. 20-5, or the number of time reductions may be the same, for example.

FIG. 20-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol stop processing in step S403 of FIG. 20-2. In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the flag for confirming the normal symbol is set (step 065AKS001). Ordinary symbols are displayed from the time when the display result is derived and displayed until the symbol confirmation time elapses. That is, the symbol confirmation time can be said to be the period from the derivation display of the display result of the normal symbol to the start of the next fluctuation of the normal symbol. If it is the symbol confirmation time, the flag for displaying the normal symbol confirmation is set.

If the flag for confirming the normal symbol is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the normal symbol (confirmed normal symbol) is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20 (step 065AKS002), and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The setting for transmitting the designated normal-figure stop designation command to the staging control board 12 is executed (step 065AKS003). In step 065AKS003, the staging control board 12 is set to send a normal map stop designation command according to the display result so that the display result of the normal symbol can be specified. Then, the game state (high base state, low base state) and the symbol confirmation period (see FIG. 20-3) according to the normal map display result are set (step 065AKS004), and the normal map confirmation display flag is set to the on state. (Step 065AKS005). After that, the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation period of the normal symbol has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the process of step 065AKS011, for example, the timer value corresponding to the symbol determination period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted to determine whether or not the value becomes 0. If the symbol determination period has not elapsed (step 065AKS011; No), the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the symbol determination period has elapsed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result is a normal figure (step 065AKS012). When the display result is a normal symbol (step 065AKS012; Yes), the normal electric accessory release time is set in the normal symbol process timer (step 065AKS013), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory release. The value indicating the intermediate processing (for example, "4") is updated (step 065AKS014), and the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the display result is not a normal figure (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether or not the display result is a time-saving symbol (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time saving symbol (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set to determine whether or not it is in the high base state (step 065AKS016). If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS016; No), for example, by checking the value of the special figure process flag, it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit game state (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, in the case of the big hit gaming state, since the time saving state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, the transition to the time saving state based on the time saving symbol is not performed. There is. In addition, when the special symbol is changing and the display result of the change is a big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit, so that it is a time saving symbol. The transition to the based time saving state may not be performed.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time saving flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS018), and the time saving number counter is set according to the time saving symbol (see FIG. 20-4 (A)). (Step 065AKS019). As a result, it is possible to shift to a high base state (time saving state). Further, in response to the transition to the time saving state, a setting is made for transmitting a game state designation command for designating the time saving state to the staging control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

When the display result is not a time-saving symbol but a normal figure loss (step 065AKS015; No), a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), a big hit game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or step 065AKS020. After executing the process of, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (for example, “0”) (step 065AKS021), and the process when the normal symbol is stopped is terminated.

FIG. 20-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process (step S76) shown in FIG. 9 of the feature unit 065AK. In the staging control process process of the feature unit 065AK, in addition to the staging control process process of the basic explanation shown in FIG. 16, after the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), the staging interlocking staging control process (step 065AKS1) and the time saving The notification setting process (step 065AKS2) is executed.

FIG. 20-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal diagram interlocking effect control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the effect control process process of FIG. 20-7. The normal symbol interlocking effect is an effect of suggesting and notifying the display result of the ordinary symbol in conjunction with the execution of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. The normal drawing interlocking production is included in the predetermined production. In the normal map interlocking effect control process, control is performed to execute the normal map interlocking effect.

In the normal map interlocking effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS031). The normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set when the execution of the normal map interlocking effect is started as a predetermined effect. If the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it is confirmed whether or not the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set when the execution of the special figure interlocking effect is started. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special symbol interlocking effect that suggests and notifies the display result of the special symbol in conjunction with the execution of the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) as the predetermined effect. The special figure interlocking effect will be described later. When the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS032; Yes), that is, when the special figure interlocking effect is being executed as the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect (normal figure interlocking effect) is newly executed. Therefore, the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command has been received (step 065AKS051). If the normal symbol change start designation command has not been received (step 065AKS051; No), the normal symbol interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command is set (step 065AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub-time reduction flag is on, thereby determining whether or not the sub-time reduction flag is in the high base state. (Step 065AKS052). In the case of a high base state (step 065AKS052; Yes), the frequency of fluctuations of the normal symbol is high, and the display result is almost the same as the normal figure. To finish.

When it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not the game is in the big hit game state is confirmed by, for example, the value of the effect control process flag. In that case, when the value of the effect control process flag is 6 or more, it is assumed that the game is in a big hit game state. In the case of a big hit game state (step 065AKS053; Yes), since it does not interfere with the effect during the big hit and is controlled to the high base state after the end of the big hit game state, it is normal without executing the normal figure interlocking effect. The figure-linked staging control process ends.

When it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, it is the time when the fluctuation is executed by the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the super reach, and it may be determined by whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation exceeds the start timing of the super reach. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS056; Yes), the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated without executing the normal map interlocking effect in order to pay attention to the reach effect of the super reach. Even if the normal map interlocking effect is not executed even during the execution of the effect other than the reach effect of the super reach (preliminary effect on the image display device 5, motion effect of the movable body 32, effect with high expectation of big hit, etc.). good.

When the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to whether or not the normal figure interlocking effect is executed and the effect mode when the normal figure interlocking effect is executed is determined (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), whether or not to execute the normal symbol interlocking effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the ordinary symbol specified from the normal symbol change start designation command.

FIG. 20-8 (C) is a diagram showing a predetermined effect pattern. The predetermined effect is an effect that suggests / informs the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol, and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal symbol and the special symbol are lost. Is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "normal figure hit", and the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is a pattern for notifying that it will be a "time saving symbol". The predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns suggesting that the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol, and the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is expected to be a big hit more than the predetermined effect pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined effects of all the predetermined effect patterns are started in the same manner, and then the result corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern is notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined effect pattern SP1 suggests that the effect is lost, it can be expected that the predetermined effect pattern will be another predetermined effect pattern at the start of the effect.

In addition, after suggesting the display result or the display result of the special symbol, a Gase pattern suggesting that the loss may occur may be provided. For example, a pattern that displays an image such as "Maybe it's time saving?" May be provided.

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the normal map interlocking effect are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the presence / absence of execution of the normal figure interlocking effect and the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP3 at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B). Which one to use is decided. As shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), when the display result (normal map display result) of the normal symbol is "per normal map", the ratio of being determined to the predetermined effect pattern SP2 is high, and the "normal map" is determined. In the case of "loss", the ratio of being determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is high, and in the case of "time saving symbol A" or "time saving symbol B", especially in the case of "time saving symbol B" having a large number of time saving times. Has a high ratio of being determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP3. As a result, it is possible to suggest and notify the normal map display result by the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect). The determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-8 (B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the normal map display result can be suggested and notified by the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect). Further, as a predetermined effect pattern for the normal drawing interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP3 may be provided.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the normal figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS064). If it is not decided to execute the normal map interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; No), the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When it is decided to execute the normal map interlocking effect (step 065AKS064; Yes), the execution time of the normal map interlocking effect according to the decision result (predetermined effect pattern) in step 065AKS059 on the normal map interlocking effect timer. The value corresponding to is set (step 065AKS078). Then, the normal map interlocking effect (predetermined effect) is started based on the effect control data or the like corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the normal map interlocking effect, the flag for executing the normal map interlocking effect is set (step 065AKS080), and the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

If the flag for executing the normal map interlocking effect is set (step 065AKS031; No), the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer is subtracted by 1 (step 065AKS034), and the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer becomes 0. It is determined whether or not (step 065AKS035). If the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer is not 0 (step 065AKS035; No), the normal map interlocking effect control process is terminated.

When the value of the normal map interlocking effect timer becomes 0 (step 065AKS035; Yes), the normal map interlocking effect is terminated (step 065AKS036), and the normal map interlocking effect executing flag is reset to the off state (step 065AKS037). ), Ends the normal map interlocking effect control process.

FIG. 20-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure interlocking effect determination process for determining whether or not a special figure interlocking effect is executed as a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect pattern when the predetermined effect is executed. The special figure interlocking effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIGS. 20-7 before the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In the special figure interlocking effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the normal map interlocking effect executing flag is set (step 065AKS091). When the flag for executing the normal map interlocking effect is set (step 065AKS091; Yes), that is, when the normal map interlocking effect is executed as the predetermined effect, a new predetermined effect (special figure interlocking effect) is executed. Therefore, the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. When the normal figure interlocking effect executing flag is not set (step 065AKS091; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the high base state by determining whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on (step 065AKS092). ). In the high base state (step 065AKS092; Yes), the average special figure fluctuation time is short and the period for executing the special figure interlocking effect cannot be secured. Therefore, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed. The production determination process ends.

Since the special figure interlocking effect determination process is a process executed at the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the special figure interlocking effect is not determined and executed in the case of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. If it is not in a high base state (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation started this time is a fluctuation pattern that results in a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093). It should be noted that whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot can be specifically determined by checking the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. If it is not a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; No), the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure interlocking effect is not executed when the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach, but the special figure interlocking is performed at a predetermined ratio even when the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by super reach. The effect (for example, the predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP1) may be executed.

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the special figure interlocking effect and the effect mode when the special figure interlocking effect is executed is determined (step 065AKS094). In step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), whether or not to execute the special symbol interlocking effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

The predetermined effect patterns corresponding to the special figure interlocking effect are SP1, SP4, and SP5. In step 065AKS094, whether or not the special figure interlocking effect is executed and the predetermined effect pattern SP1 are performed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20-9 (B). , SP4, SP5 is determined. As shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), when the special figure display result is "big hit", the ratio determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP5 is high, and when the special figure display result is "missing". , The ratio determined by the predetermined effect pattern SP4 is high. As a result, the expected degree of jackpot (reliability) is higher in the predetermined effect pattern SP5 than in the predetermined effect pattern SP4. Since the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach, it is possible to notify that the predetermined effect pattern will be super reach when the special figure interlocking effect of these predetermined effect patterns is executed. Further, at the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 20-9, a big hit may occur even when the predetermined effect pattern SP1 is used, so that an unexpected effect can be executed. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-9 (B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the special figure display result can be suggested and notified by the special figure interlocking effect (predetermined effect). Further, as the predetermined effect pattern of the special figure interlocking effect, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be provided.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095). If it is decided not to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; Yes), the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated. When it is decided to execute the special figure interlocking effect (step 065AKS095; No), the setting for executing the special figure interlocking effect corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern is made (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, the effect control data corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 as usage data. Then, the special figure interlocking effect executing flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS097), and the special figure interlocking effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 20-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the effect control process process of FIG. 20-7. The time saving notification setting process is a process for notifying the transition to the time saving state when the display result of the normal symbol is controlled to the high base state (time saving state) corresponding to the time saving symbol. ..

In the time saving notification setting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a normal figure stop designation command for designating that the time saving symbol has stopped has been received (step 065AKS101). If the normal map stop designation command for designating that the time saving symbol has stopped has not been received (step 065AKS101; No), the time saving notification setting process is terminated.

If a normal map stop specification command for specifying that the time saving symbol has stopped is received (step 065AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time saving flag is on or not, and whether the sub time saving flag is in the high base state. Confirm whether or not (step 065AKS102). In the case of the high base state (step 065AKS102; Yes), the control based on the time saving symbol is not executed, so the time saving notification setting process is terminated.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS102; No), the sub time reduction flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS103). The sub time saving flag is also set to the on state when the big hit game state ends and is controlled to the time saving state.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is in the big hit game state (step 065AKS104). In the case of the big hit game state (step 065AKS104; Yes), since the time reduction state is controlled after the big hit game state, the time reduction notification setting process is terminated without notifying that the time reduction state has been entered.

When the game is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; No), a right-handed display instructing the right-handed to strike at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 is displayed (step 065AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS106). When the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS106; No), the setting for starting the notification of the transition to the time saving state (time saving transition notification) and the notification of right-handed hitting (right-handed notification). (Step 065AKS107).

Further, when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), a setting for starting the right-handed notification is made at the start of the next fluctuation (step 065AKS108). As described above, in this embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the time reduction shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed in order to pay attention to the reach effect of the super reach, and the right-handed one is hit in the next fluctuation. It is designed to execute notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the super reach from being hindered. It should be noted that the time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed even during the execution of the effects other than the reach effect of the super reach (the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the operation effect of the movable body 32, the effect with high expectation of big hit, etc.). You may do it. Further, although the shift to the time saving state may have already been performed at the start of the next fluctuation, the time saving shift notification may be executed at the next fluctuation.

Although the time reduction notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, the right-handed display is displayed, so that it is possible to indicate that the time reduction state has been reached at the minimum, which is disadvantageous because the player cannot grasp the game state. Can be reduced.

After executing the process of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time saving notification setting process is terminated.

FIG. 20-11 is a timing chart showing the content of the effect at the time of time reduction transition. In FIG. 20-11, ON of "special symbol fluctuation" indicates that the special symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the special symbol is stopped. ON of "normal symbol fluctuation" indicates that the normal symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the normal symbol is stopped. ON of the "right-handed image" indicates that the right-handed image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that the right-handed image is not displayed.

FIG. 20-11 (A) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 20-11 (A), when the time saving symbol is stopped as a display result of the normal symbol during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are executed. In addition, a right-handed image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving symbol stops. Then, after the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed, the time-saving control is started at the next start of fluctuation of the normal symbol. In this way, by executing the time reduction shift notification and the right-handed notification at the symbol confirmation time of the time reduction symbol before the time reduction control is actually started, even when the time reduction state is entered during the change of the special symbol, the time reduction is performed. It is possible to appropriately notify that the state is changed and that the game is played by right-handed hitting.

FIG. 20-11 (B) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 20-11 (B), when the super reach occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the time saving symbol stops as a result of displaying the normal symbol during the reach production of the super reach, the time saving symbol stops at the timing of stopping. The right-handed image is displayed, but the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are not executed. Then, at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the fluctuation accompanied by super reach, the right-handed notification is executed. If the next fluctuation start timing is after the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, the time is already shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time-saving symbol is stopped during the reach production of the super reach, the next time. The time saving notification is not performed at the start of the fluctuation of. On the other hand, the time saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (B), when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol elapses after the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation.

If the end timing of the change of the special symbol being executed when the time-saving symbol is stopped is before the lapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, which is the timing when the time-saving control is actually started, this special symbol is used. Since it is not necessary to rush to execute the time saving shift notification or right-handed notification during the fluctuation of the time saving symbol, the time saving transition notification or right-handed notification is sent during the period after the start of the next special symbol change and before the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. You may want to do it.

Subsequently, an example of the staging operation of the feature unit 065AK will be described. 20-12 to 20-14 show an example of an effect operation of a predetermined effect of the feature unit 065AK. FIG. 20-12 (A) is a downward arrow indicating that the decorative symbol is changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a variation of a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also executed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the predetermined effect (normal map interlocking effect, special figure interlocking effect) is executed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. The predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be constantly displayed on the image display device 5, or may be displayed when the predetermined effect is executed. For example, the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be erased in a high base state or a big hit game state in which the predetermined effect is not executed.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. In FIG. 20-12 (B), it is shown that the effect image is scrolled by the downward arrow. After that, the effect result corresponding to the predetermined effect pattern is notified.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP1, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), the effect image of "x" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect fails and the degree of expectation that the display result of the normal symbol or the special symbol is a hit is low.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP2, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the effect image of “◯” is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and that the normal symbol is a hit.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP4, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the effect image of the musical note is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined production is successful, the high expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, the super reach will be executed, and the like.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP5, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (F), the effect image of the characters "heat" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, the predetermined production is successful, and it is notified that the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit is higher and that the super reach is executed.

In the case of the predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (E) and (F), the decorative symbols having the same number stop in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and reach. After that, the effect result of the predetermined effect (the effect image of the musical note and the characters of "heat") is displayed. By doing so, if a predetermined effect is executed during the reach, it can be expected to be a super reach.

The predetermined effect patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as the normal drawing interlocking effect, and the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as the special figure interlocking effect. Since the normal symbol interlocking effect is executed regardless of the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol), it can be executed at any timing during the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

FIG. 20-13 is an example of an effect operation when a predetermined effect (ordinary figure interlocking effect) of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 is executed. FIG. 20-13 (A) shows that the variation of the decorative symbol is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a variation of a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also executed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol.

When the time saving symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), a right-handed display instructing right-handedness is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and a "time saving rush" is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5. The time saving transition notification is executed when the image of the characters "!" Is displayed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving symbol B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (E), a right-handed notification is executed in which an image of the characters "Aim right!" Is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (F), the image of the right-handed notification is erased and the right-handed notification ends. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. As described above, in this embodiment, even during the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol), when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol, the state shifts to the time-saving state. In that case, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect for notifying that the time saving symbol is stopped, and the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification as shown in FIGS. 20-13 (D) and (E) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably notify the transition to the time saving state. As a result, the player can continue the game without being confused.

FIG. 20-14 is an example of an effect operation when a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP3 (a normal figure interlocking effect) is executed during the reach effect of the super reach. In FIGS. 20-14 (A), the decorative symbols showing the numbers "7" are stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbols are changed in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside. It shows that it is in reach. At the upper left of the image display device 5, a variation of a small symbol that is always visible to the player is also executed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (B), the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started. At this time, the reach effect of the super reach is started on the image display device 5.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (C), the effect image of "hour" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and the process is stopped. As a result, it is notified that the predetermined effect is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol.

When the time saving symbol is stopped during the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (D), a right-handed display instructing right-handed is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but the image display device 5 The time saving shift notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, and the reach effect of the super reach is continuously executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (E), the decorative symbol showing the number "6" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C inside, resulting in a loss. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (F), a right-handed notification in which an image of the characters "Aim to the right!" Is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 with the start of fluctuation of the next decorative symbol. Is executed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed corresponding to the time saving symbol A. Here, the number of time reductions is subtracted from 50 times to 49 times due to the transition to the time reduction state during the previous fluctuation and the digestion of one fluctuation.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol during the reach production of the super reach, the time-saving transition notification and the right-handed notification are not executed, and the reach production of the super reach is prioritized. Is executed. When a big hit is obtained as a result of the super reach, the time is controlled after the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit. Therefore, even if the time saving transition notification is executed during the reach production of the super reach, the notification may be useless or may be an exciting production, so that the reach production of the super reach is prioritized. Then, when the display result is lost, the right-handed notification is executed at the time of the next fluctuation, so that it is possible to preferably notify that the time has been shortened or that the player has right-handed. If the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol during the reach production of the super reach and the display result of the fluctuation accompanying the super reach becomes a big hit, the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time-saving symbol. The corresponding notification (time saving transition notification, right-handed notification) may not be executed, or the notification corresponding to the fact that the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol due to the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit game state is notified. You may want to do it.

(Modification example of feature part 065AK)
This feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The processing contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts and the determination methods of various effects shown in the above-mentioned examples and modifications are examples, and the same effects as those of the above-mentioned examples can be obtained. Anything may be used as long as it can be carried out suitably. Further, the staging operation example shown in the above embodiment is an example, and can be appropriately changed as long as the same staging effect can be achieved. Further, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the case of pre-reading the display result of the special symbol and executing the pre-reading notice effect, if the display result of the normal symbol is a time-saving symbol, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted. For example, when the display result of the normal symbol is a time-saving symbol, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed until the time-saving symbol is stopped and the time-saving state is entered. In addition, if the display result of the normal symbol before the start of fluctuation is pre-read and there is pending data of the normal symbol that becomes the time-saving symbol, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the special symbol may be restricted. good. By doing so, the game state is changed after the pre-reading notice effect is executed, so that the variation pattern changes between the pre-reading time and the actual variation execution time, which is consistent with the effect content of the pre-reading notice effect. It can be prevented from disappearing.

As signals to be externally output to the hall computer or data display, in addition to the big hit signal (output during the big hit) and the special prize medium signal (output during the big hit and during the time reduction), the time reduction medium signal (output only during the time reduction) is provided. May be good.

In the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol is a time-saving symbol in the big hit game state, the control to the time-saving state is not performed, but when the big hit is made in the low base state, the big hit is obtained. In the corresponding big hit game state, the time saving state may be controlled based on the time saving symbol. In this case, the order is as follows: start of the big hit game state → start of the time reduction control based on the time saving symbol → end of the big hit game state, and the base changes before and after the big hit game state. Therefore, the time reduction number based on the control of the big hit gaming state may be set at the start of the fluctuation after the end of the big hit gaming state. For example, if the number of time reductions in the case of a big hit in the low base state is 50 or 100 times, and the number of time reductions in the case of a big hit in the high base state is 100 times, the number of time reductions during the big hit game state When the symbol is stopped, the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit game state is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time reductions at the start of fluctuation after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to suitably shift to the state even if the game state changes during the big hit. In addition, when the big hit game state is reached, the number of time reductions may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time reductions may be determined at a constant rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effect (normal symbol interlocking effect, special symbol interlocking effect) that suggests / informs the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol is the effect result by scrolling the effect image in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. (FIGS. 20-12 to 20-14), any effect may be used as long as it can suggest and notify the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. Further, the predetermined effect may be at least an effect of suggesting / notifying whether or not the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol or the display result of the special symbol.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the high base state, the time reduction number is not updated, but the display result of the normal symbol becomes the time saving symbol in the high base state. If this happens, the number of time reductions may be updated or added. In addition, it seems that the determination ratio of the number of time reductions and the number of time reductions differs depending on whether the display result of the normal symbol is the time reduction symbol in the low base state and the display result of the normal symbol is the time reduction symbol in the high base state. You may do it.

In the above embodiment, the execution of the time saving transition notification and the right-handed notification is restricted in a predetermined case such as during the reach production of the super reach, but the time saving symbol is displayed regardless of the production content during the execution. When shifting to the time saving state according to the situation, the time saving transition notification or the right-handed notification may be executed. For example, when the time saving shift notification or the right-handed notification is executed by a display means different from that of the image display device 5, the time saving transition notification or the right-handed notification may be executed regardless of the effect content of the image display device 5. good.

(Means pertaining to feature unit 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 065AK is
The special identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variablely displayed, and the special variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) is based on the fact that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which a game medium can easily enter the big winning opening)).
Variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, ordinary symbol) is performed, and based on the fact that the variable display result of ordinary identification information becomes a predetermined result (for example, per ordinary symbol), ordinary variable means (for example, variable winning ball device 6B (for example, the first) A variable control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S404) that changes the game medium into a predetermined state (for example, an open state) that is easy for the game medium to enter (2 start winning opening)).
A state control means (for example, a CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state.
A staging execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for staging control) capable of executing a staging is provided.
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is a special result (for example, a time saving symbol) different from the predetermined result (for example, a step). Execute the process of 065AKS018),
The effect executing means includes a specific effect (for example, a predetermined effect of predetermined effect patterns SP4 and SP5, a special figure interlocking effect) suggesting that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes the specific display result, and a variable normal identification information. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, a normal figure interlocking effect) that suggests that the display result is the special result.
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state even if the variable display of the special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes the special result (the normal state). For example, the process of step 065AKS018 is executed).
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined notification means that performs a predetermined notification (for example, a time saving shift notification, a right-handed notification) based on the change of the ordinary variable means to the predetermined state, and a predetermined notification means.
Depending on the effect content during the variable display of the special identification information, a predetermined notification limiting means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 065AKS106 and step 065AKS108) may be provided. ..
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the effect during the variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
In the staging execution means, in the normal state, the variable display result of the normal identification information is the predetermined result, the variable display result of the normal identification information is the special result, and the variable display result of the special identification information is the above. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests which of the specific display results will be obtained (for example, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of the predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP5. FIGS. 20-12 and 20-13). You may do so.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the display results of both the ordinary identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
The state control means can be controlled to the special state based on the control to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 20-5).
When the variable display of the special identification information after being controlled to the advantageous state is started, it is controlled based on being controlled to the advantageous state according to whether it is the normal state or the special state. The termination conditions of the special state may be different.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be suitably performed.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
When the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the special result, it takes longer time from the display of the variable display result to the confirmation than when the variable display result of the ordinary identification information is the predetermined result (for example, FIG. 20-3 (A)) may be used.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be suitably performed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
In the case of the normal state, the time from the display of the special result as the variable display result of the normal identification information to the confirmation is longer than in the case of the special state (for example, FIGS. 20-3 (A), (Fig. 20-3 (A)). B)) may be done.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be suitably performed.

(Explanation related to the association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

(Explanation of feature section 079SG)
Next, the feature portion 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 21-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG. As shown in FIG. 21-1, the voice control board 13 in the feature unit 079SG is used for voice synthesis to generate sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. The IC079SG132, the amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and the voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted, and the effect control CPU 120 is from the main board 11. The sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132 based on the effect control command, and the sound corresponding to the sound number data is generated in the voice synthesis IC079SG132.

When the sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 individually generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data for each speaker 8L and 8R, and causes the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R, respectively.

The voice data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting the sound corresponding to the effect performed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data. .. That is, these control data are output modes (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sound effects such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the effect period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). Is a collection of data including voice data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 21-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device 5 in the feature unit 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying an effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, a reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. Further, the lower end portion of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D in which the first special figure reserved storage number can be displayed by the number of circular reserved displays, and the second special figure reserved storage number is outlined in white. A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, the portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (hold display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. This is the display area for displaying (displaying the number of pending storages). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature unit 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 includes a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variablely displayed, a display of the first special symbol reserved storage number, and a display of the second special symbol reserved storage number. 3 Display area 079SG005Sb constitutes.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is formed to be less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The left-right width is formed to have the same length as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, although the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, its height and left-right width are formed to be extremely shorter than the height H and the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in the feature unit 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F in the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. ..

As shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display operation process (see FIG. 21-13) described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated and displayed at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3) around the vertical axis.

As shown in FIG. 21-2 (C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 21-13) described later to respond to the gaming state and the effect being executed. A message (for example, a message according to the state of the effect such as "XX mode!" During a specific reach effect) is moved from the left to the right by a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3). It is possible to display while.

The characters included in the message according to the game state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time, are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again from the left to the right. Moved in the direction. Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message according to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can see the message. It is easier to recognize the current gaming state.

In the feature unit 079SG, the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T have different constant speeds. It may be rotatable and movable with.

As shown in FIG. 21-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb blink alternately at regular intervals. Indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the variable display result is off, both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (turned off) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result is a big hit or a miss. In that case, both are turned on (turned on) at the end timing of the variable display.

The display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new reserved storage occurs and the timing when a new variable display is started. Only the number changes. That is, the display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U. , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging another image data with a transparency of 0% on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 21-3 (A) to 21-3 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth This is data drawn to display the symbol 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn for displaying a small symbol of the image data 1 decorative symbol in the first display area 079SG005F (on the left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), the image data 2 is data drawn for displaying the images of the chance-up effect, the still image display effect, and the operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. ..

As shown in FIG. 21-3 (C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern and the reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 21-3 (A) to 21-3 (C), the image data 1, the image data 2, and the image data 3 have display priorities for displaying an image on the image display device 5. Is set. As for the display priority, the image data 1 is set to the highest and the image data 3 is set to the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3). .. That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image of a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are displayed with priority.

As shown in FIG. 21-3 (D), when the image based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image data 3 Since the image based on the image is displayed as the image of the lowest layer, at least a part of the image based on the image data 3 becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

Although the details will be described later in this feature unit 079SG, the image based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image whose progress speed is always constant, while on the image data 3. Based on the image, the image display device 5 is displayed as a moving image or a still image having a plurality of progress speeds based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, although details will be described later, it is possible to display a moving image of the reach effect at a normal progress speed V1 and a progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than the V1 during the reach effect of the super reach. It has become. This is because the data for the effect video displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the effect video displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Only the data for the production video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and a part of the production video for the reach production is set to the progress speed V2 by performing a predetermined process on the data. May be displayable.

As described above, in the feature unit 079SG, the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is set to V1 by setting the image progress speed, which is the speed at which the effect video changes, to the first speed, which is the non-slow motion period, and the image. By setting the traveling speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set so that the progressing speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is the slow second speed. That is, the slow-motion moving image, which is the effect moving image in which the advancing speed of the effect in the feature unit 079SG is slow, is the image advancing as compared with the non-slow-motion moving image whose image advancing speed is V1 displayed in front of the slow-motion moving image. Anything with a slow speed will do.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see FIGS. 21-18 to 21-25), but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the content itself of the effect video displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 21-18 to 21-25, but the video progress speed. Does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not result in a slow motion period, the slow motion period is achieved in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 21-18 to 21-25. May be easily recognized by the player.

That is, when performing a super reach effect in which the content of the staging video is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the staging video is a second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. Is that, by displaying the staging video having the same content at a video progress speed V2 slower than the video progress speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach effect, it is displayed over a longer period than the non-slow motion super reach effect. The displayed staging video corresponds to this.

As described above, the feature unit 079SG configures a slow motion effect in which the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing the video advance speed of the effect video, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the output of the above is illustrated as a form that does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this, and the speakers 8L, 8R are not limited to this, and the video progress speed of the production moving image is not changed (V1 remains). By conversely increasing the reproduction speed of the sound output from the player and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion may be configured in which the player feels that the progress speed of the reach effect has slowed down.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG includes a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying the effect moving image, and the progress speed of the effect by at least one of these effect output means. Is different between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period, so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is slow motion in the slow motion period.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect video of the reach effect is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion is not limited to this. The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect can be changed (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases or decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 21-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 21-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the big winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit state described later. ..

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 21-4 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 21-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 21-5, in the feature unit 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 21-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 21-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 079SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 079SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 079SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 21-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes It is a table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is generated in the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. In a high base state where a game ball can easily enter the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 21-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 079SG has a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 079SG will be described with reference to FIG. 21-7 (B). In the feature section 079SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A", "Probability change big hit B", "Probability change big hit C" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to the low accuracy high base state. A "non-probability change jackpot" to be transferred is set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot gaming state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called, and the "non-probable variable jackpot" may be referred to as a two-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 079SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A, the probabilistic jackpot B, and the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. .. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 21-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In this feature unit 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 079SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided. Further, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG also includes a fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of a special hit corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a “small hit”.

As shown in FIG. 21-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 079SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining these variation pattern types. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 21-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In the feature unit 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern). And PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach β3 jackpot). When the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 21-9, the number of assigned determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5 is different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in this feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system, are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since it is determined to be, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. do.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach outlier variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach outlier variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 outlier variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β3 deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β3 deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (variation pattern of super reach α3 deviation), PA2-4 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation), and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β3 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (variation pattern of super reach β2 deviation) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of super reach β3 deviation).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 079SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIG. 21-8, the reach effect of the super reach α1 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach effect described later is executed. The reach effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the reach effect of the super reach α2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half part and the second half part of the first reach effect described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is out of order, and the reach effect of the super reach α3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach described later. After executing the first half part and the second half part of the effect, the second reach effect described later is executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a miss.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 21-8 and 21-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit after being executed up to the second reach effect is executed by the first reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

Further, the reach effect of the super reach β1 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result becomes a big hit after executing the first half of the third reach effect described later. Yes, in the reach effect of Super Reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-4), the variable display result is out of order after executing the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. The reach effect of the super reach β3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. After that, the fourth reach effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a miss.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 21-8 and 21-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit after being executed up to the fourth reach effect is executed by the third reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In the present feature unit 079SG, the second reach effect is always executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The second reach effect and the fourth reach effect may be performed by themselves.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, each reach effect can be executed by a combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect during the variable display, and can be executed by the combination of the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect is a combination other than these combinations (for example, a first reach effect and a fourth reach effect, a second reach effect and a third reach effect). A case may be provided in which the execution is performed by a combination of reach effects and the like).

Further, in the present feature section 069SG, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally super reach α system. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) of the present invention. A part of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β system (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is not limited to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α system (variation pattern PA2-). 2. The jackpot expectation may be lower than any of PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 079SG is a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in, for example, FIG. 21-10, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 21-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 079SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 079SG153, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), it is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 079SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the staging control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 holds data for staging control as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the staging operation. Area 079 SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 21-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 079SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 079SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 079SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 has a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 079SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 21-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 079SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is set. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the 1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold storage number notification command (the first) Two commands (1 hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 079SG194A associate these start opening winning designation commands with the hold storage number notification command. , A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 079SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The pending memory count notification command will be stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 21-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that was terminated immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 21-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 079 SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS102; N). Step 079 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 079 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure hold storage number by reading, for example, the second hold storage number count value which is the storage value of the second hold storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS105; N). Step 079 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure hold storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 079 SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 can be used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Make settings for sending the number notification command (step 079 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 21-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the staging control process processing in the feature unit 079SG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U after executing the look-ahead advance notice setting process (step S161), and the first of these. The hold display operation process (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to be performed and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, any one of steps S170 to S177 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag. Executes the processing of.

21-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the staging control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079 SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted higher by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to a higher position (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, "7" as a stop symbol. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbol is other than "7". It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chance eyes. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. Determine (missing symbol).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of the super reach (step 079SGS277). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). Executes the chance-up effect determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in the latter half of the first reach effect or the second half of the third reach effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-15, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. When the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the feature unit 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 21-27 and 21-32, the feature unit 079SG is provided with only one effect pattern as the effect mode of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of effect patterns may be provided as an effect mode of the chance-up effect, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which effect pattern the chance-up effect is executed.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-27 and 21-32, the effect start timing of the chance-up effect is only one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect is not limited to this. A plurality of production start timings of the production may be provided, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which production start timing the chance-up production is started.

Further, after deciding whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in step 079 SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079 SGS279). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss) is performed after the second reach effect is completed. The still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during the period until the notification effect) is started. The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 21-16 (A), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100%. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern SG-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 21-16 (B), the pattern SG-1 for the still image display effect stops the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. It is an effect pattern to be displayed as an image, and the still image display effect pattern SG-2 is after displaying the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , Is an effect pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. Therefore, if the second reach effect is executed, is the still image display effect executed by the pattern SG-2? It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

Further, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the superreach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step 079SGS281; N). Step S079SGS282). When the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than the super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; Y). ), The operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that urges the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. ..

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 21-17 (A), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 80%. It is decided to be -1, and the pattern SS-2 is decided at a rate of 20%. When the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 21-17 (B), the operation promotion effect pattern SS-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B on the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and is an operation promotion pattern. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B on the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

That is, as the operation promotion effect in the feature unit 079SG, when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2. ) Is higher than the case where the image of the push button 31B of a normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed by the pattern SS-1). Since the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (the big hit notification effect is executed) is high, the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not each effect such as the chance-up effect, the still image display effect, and the operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and the variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079 SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 079SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079 SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction is timer-out. Determine if it has been done. Then, if the process timer after subtraction is not timer-out, the effector is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after subtraction is timer-out, the process data The effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data by switching and starting the next process timer.

Next, an effect mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 21-18 to 21-35.

First, regarding the variable display of the super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. 21-18, 21-19, 21-26 (A) to 21-26 (G), when the variable display is started, the image is displayed. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the traveling speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal traveling speed V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM, the effect sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are alternately lit (blinking) at regular intervals, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at regular intervals. To. Hereinafter, the blinking and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the feature unit 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all blinked and lit in synchronization. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-18, 21-19, 21-26 (A) to 21-26 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle production between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half of the first reach effect execution period is approached, the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, staging sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, when the first half of the reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 21-18 and 21-26 (E) to 21-26 (G). In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a big hit notification effect, after a video in which the attack of the ally character A is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the decorative symbol stops at the combination of the big hits and is controlled to the big hit game state. It is notified that it will be done. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-26 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the big hit of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character A is successful is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIGS. 21-26 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 21-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of the big hits and is notified to be controlled to the big hit game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 21-26 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach α2 or super reach α3, as shown in FIGS. 21-19 and 21-26 (D) when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends. , The attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the process shifts to the second half execution period of the first reach effect.

As shown in FIGS. 21-19 and 21-27 (A) to 21-27 (B), when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half of the first reach effect execution period, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 21-27 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half of the first reach effect execution period is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, staging sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α2, as shown in FIGS. 21-19 and 21-27 (E) to 21-27 (G) when the second half execution period of the first reach effect ends. In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, after the attack of the ally character A fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the decorative symbol stops with a combination of out-of-orders and the variable display result is out of order. Is notified.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. To.

Further, during the disconnection notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-27 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α3, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, 21-21 and 21-27 (D), the ally in the second half execution period of the first reach effect. The attack of character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, the period shifts to the first half execution period of the second reach production.

As shown in FIGS. 21-20, 21-21 and 21-28 (A) to 21-28 (B), when the first half execution period of the second reach effect is entered, the ally character A and the enemy character B become Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, the second half of the first half of the second reach effect is approached, and as shown in FIGS. 21-20, 21-21 and 21-28 (C), an image is displayed as an effect effect. The display of the concentrated line is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, staging sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is short). It will be faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 21-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-mentioned effect effect is gradually increased and displayed.

That is, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is reduced to V2, so that the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second half of the reach effect execution period is completed, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, 21-21 and 21-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image (the image immediately before the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B in the feature unit 079SG) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from the left to the right. The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing, and the BGM, the effect sound, and the like are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the video of the battle effect. It returns to the cycle before the speed drops to V2.

When the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. 21-29 (A) to 21-29 (E), the battle effect is performed as the still image display effect. The color of the image displayed at the end of is reversed. Then, after the end of the still image display effect in which the colors are reversed, as a jackpot notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B collapses, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a big hit as the big hit notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-29 (F), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the big hit of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

As a big hit notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 21-20, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is at the progress speed V1. Although it is displayed, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image in which the decorative symbol stops in the combination of big hits after the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the traveling speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a big hit as the big hit notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is made. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and FIG. 21-30 (A). )-As shown in FIGS. 21-30 (D), when the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in FIGS. 21-30 (F) to 21-30 (H), the miss notification is notified. The production may be executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed by the pattern SG-1 is as shown in FIG. 21-20, the same as the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed by the pattern SG-2. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the traveling speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the traveling speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B collapses, it is displayed at the traveling speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-30 (E), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the big hit of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, as a missed notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1, the attack of the ally character A does not hit the enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of the enemy character B becomes the ally character A. After a hit and the ally character A collapses, the decorative symbol stops in a combination of being off, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As the missed notification effect, as shown in FIG. 21-21, a moving image until the attack of the ally character A is not hit and is defeated by the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the disconnection notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are not changed and are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-30 (I), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

Next, regarding the variable display of the super reach β1 to β3 shown in FIGS. 21-22, 21-23, 21-31 (A) to 21-31 (H), when the variable display is started, the image is displayed. In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal progress speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the traveling speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal traveling speed V3. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM, the effect sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are alternately lit (blinking) at regular intervals, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at regular intervals. To.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-22, 21-23, 21-31 (A) to 21-31 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle production between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half execution period of the third reach effect is approached, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, staging sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 21-22 and 21-31 (E) to 21-31 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, it is notified that after a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the control to the jackpot gaming state is performed. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-31 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the big hit of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character B is successful is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 21-30 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 21-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of the big hits and is notified to be controlled to the big hit game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 21-30 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach β2 or super reach β3, as shown in FIGS. 21-23 and 21-31 (D) when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends. , The attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 21-23 and 21-32 (A) to 21-32 (B), when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half of the third reach effect execution period, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 21-32 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small symbol is displayed with priority over the effect video of the chance-up effect, while the effect video of the chance-up effect is the image shown in the decorative design (FIGS. 21-32 (B)). It is displayed with priority over "7") displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. Therefore, in this feature unit 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbol, and at the same time, decorate the effect video of the chance-up effect. By displaying the image with priority over the symbol, it is possible to surely secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chan-up effect in the image display device 5.

In this feature unit 079SG, the effect video of the chance-up effect is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern is displayed from the effect video of the chance-up effect. May be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which decorative pattern combination of reach the reach effect being performed has evolved from, so that the game interest can be improved.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half of the first reach effect execution period is approached, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, staging sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 21-23 and 21-32 (E) to 21-32 (G) when the second half execution period of the third reach effect ends. In the first display area 079SG005F, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order after the attack of the ally character B fails and is defeated by the enemy character A as an out-of-order notification effect.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character B fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. To.

Further, during the disconnection notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-32 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β3, as shown in FIGS. 21-24, 21-25 and 21-32 (D), the ally in the second half execution period of the third reach effect. The attack of character B is successful and the enemy character A is defeated. Then, it shifts to the first half execution period of the fourth reach production.

As shown in FIGS. 21-24, 21-25, and 21-33 (A) to 21-33 (B), when the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is entered, the ally character AB and the enemy character B are used. The battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. are transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, the latter half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is approached, and as shown in FIGS. 21-24, 21-25 and 21-33 (C), the image display device 5 In the first display area 079SG005F, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, staging sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is short). It will be faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently as the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 causes the battle effect. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, the operation promotion effect is executed. When the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-1, the push button 31B together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the shape of the push button 31B in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of the meter 079SG005M is started, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral edge of the image display device 5 are started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 21-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed movie.

As shown in FIG. 21-33 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. The update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle effect is lower than that. Since the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect during the execution period, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 21-33 (D) and 21-33 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 21-34 (A) to 21-34 (E), when the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-2, the first display of the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, and the meter 079SG005M suggesting the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B are started to be displayed. Then, the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 21-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed movie.

As shown in FIG. 21-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb can be used. Most of the images of the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed by the pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than that when the operation promotion effect is executed by the pattern SS-1. Since the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect during the execution period, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 21-34 (D) and 21-34 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed to the scene where it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the big hit notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set). When it ends), the big hit notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed from the timing when these players operate the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

As a big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 21-24 and 21-35 (A) to 21-35 (C), a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B is shown. It is displayed at the progress speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the traveling speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-35 (D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the big hit of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, as the off-off notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 21-25 and 21-35 (E) to 21-35 (G), the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B. On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B collapses, it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled. In particular, when the missed notification effect is executed, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa.

As the missed notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 21-25, a moving image until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbol stops due to the combination of misses is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the disconnection notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are not changed and are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and are executed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 21-35 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are turned off. ) Is performed.

21-26 (H), 21-27 (H), 10-29 (F), 21-30 (E), 21-30 (I), 21-31 (H), FIG. As shown in 21-32 (H), FIG. 21-35 (D), and FIG. 21-35 (H), in the feature unit 079SG, a telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. Although the embodiment in which the telop display area 079SG005T including the telop display area is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the end timing of the variable display, the display itself of the telop display area 079SG005T on the image display device 5 is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T itself may not be executed.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, in the variable display of the super reach α3 and the super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 is used only during the slow motion period immediately before the notification effect (the period during which the effect video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2). Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game is shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Further, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened even in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-19 to 21-25, each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the first half execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the latter half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the partial execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional transfer of the player to the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and the jackpot notification is given. Since it is possible to raise the expectation that the production will be executed, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the BGM and the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are produced. Since the output does not change and is output at V4, which is a normal playback speed, it is prevented from giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, since the sound output hand in the feature unit 079SG includes the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, the reproducibility is achieved in the variable display including the execution of the reach effect and the execution of the jackpot game. High-quality BGM (music), sound effects, and other production sounds can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, 21-21, 21-24, and 21-25, the game effect is achieved during the second half execution period of the second reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Since the lamp 9 blinks in a shorter cycle than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 in a shorter cycle while the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In the present feature unit 079SG, an embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach effect and the fourth reach effect. By doing so, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed soon by the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, an embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half portion execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first reach effect to the fourth reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-19 to 21-25, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect during each execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the movement speed of the telop are both constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the staging sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which both the rotation speed of the hold display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is wider than the area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the combined area of the third display area 079SG005Sb. During execution, the reach effect displayed on the first display area 079SG005F can be more easily recognized by the player than the hold display or telop displayed on the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-18 to 21-25, the rotation display of the hold display is the rotation speed V3 in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U during the period other than the reach effect. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the telop movement display is executed at the movement speed V3, that is, the rotation display of the hold display and the telop movement display are executed at the same speed as during the reach production, so that the player can perform the telop movement display. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to recognize these hold displays and telops.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed at the same time as the telop display area. Since it is displayed again at the left end of the 079SG005T and moved from the left to the right again, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this and moves in the telop display area 079SG005T. Some of the displayed telops may be invisible to the player at some time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, 21-21, and 21-28, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the effect movie of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the image is displayed. By executing the effect effect of displaying the concentrated line on the display device 5, the effect effect of the second half portion of the reach effect can be enhanced by the effect effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-28 (C) and 21-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, so that the concentrated lines are displayed. It is possible for the player to more easily recognize that the second reach effect is completed and the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed due to the increase in the number.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the effect effect in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the speaker 8L, and the like. The output of the specific effect sound from the 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as the effect effect, and the second reach effect ( As the effect effect progresses, the effect level of the effect effect is gradually increased (for example, the operating range of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, and the stick is used. The vibration of the controller 31A and the push button 31B may be increased, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased, and the like).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-26 (G), 21-29 (E), 21-30 (D), 21-31 (G), and 21-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the player is made to recognize that the jackpot gaming state is controlled while further improving the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa. It can be done easily.

When executing the jackpot notification effect, the feature unit 079SG hides the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. Although the embodiment in which the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa is used. In a state where the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first). (2) In the display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlapping with the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are transparently displayed or reduced, or the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U are displayed. And, the visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the hold displays displayed in the hold display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-28 and 21-29, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. 21-20 and FIGS. As shown in 21-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and FIG. 21-2. Since the telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, the hold display is being displayed or the telop movement display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. Can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the hold display and the display of the telop by stopping the rotation display of the hold display and the movement display of the telop. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-16 and 21-29 (A) to 21-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed by the pattern SG-2, the colors of the still image are reversed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In the feature unit 079SG, as a still image display effect, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, a form of inverting the color of the still image is exemplified. The form that changes the color of the still image is not limited to one that changes the color of the still image to black and white, one that changes only a part of the color of the still image, and a new color for the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2 and the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted, the color of the still image is inverted. Since the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, the player is displayed in these second display areas 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

Further, in each variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 079SG, a pattern that shifts to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect or the third reach effect, and the first reach effect or the third reach effect. Since there is a pattern in which the variable display that shifts to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect ends after the execution of the effect, the display of the effect video of the reach effect progresses during the first reach effect and the third reach effect. Whether or not to shift to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after being executed at the speed V2, and the display of the effect video of the reach effect during the second reach effect or the third reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the game is controlled to the big hit game state after the game is played, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-19, 21-20, 21-21, 21-23, 21-24, and 21-25, the first reach is being produced and the third reach is being produced. During the 1st reach production second half execution period and the 3rd reach production second half execution period, the production in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the 1st reach production second half execution period or the 3rd reach production second half execution period proceed at the same time. Since it is executed at the speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period or from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period. However, in the second half execution period of the first reach effect and the second half execution period of the third reach effect, the expectation that the ally character is controlled to the big hit game state by being different from the progress speed of the effect of being defeated by the enemy character is excessively raised. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Further, FIGS. 21-18, 21-20, 21-22, 21-24, 21-25 and 21-26 (E) to 21-26 (G), 21-29 (C). 21-29 (E), 21-30 (B) to 21-30 (D), 21-31 (E) to 21-31 (G), 21-35 (A) to FIGS. As shown in 21-35 (C), in the jackpot notification effect of this feature unit 079SG, while the video is displayed at the progress speed V2 when the enemy character collapses due to the hit of the attack of the ally character, while it is executed. 21-19, 21-21, 21-23, 21-25, 21-27 (E) to 21-27 (G), 21-30 (F) to 21-30 (H). ), FIGS. 21-32 (E) to 21-32 (G), and 21-35 (D) to 21-35 (F). Since the display of is executed at the progress speed V1, when the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the loss notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It should be noted that, in the present feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result of the super reach is performed and the staging notification effect is executed, the mode in which the staging video of the deviating notification effect is displayed at the progress speed V1 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the display of the staging moving image of the loss notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the production of the out-of-order notification effect, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the present feature unit 079SG, an example is exemplified in which the traveling speed V1 of the production moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the third speed in the present invention, and the traveling speed V2 of the effecting moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Further, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as the speed is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-24 and 21-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation promotion effect.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 while the operation promotion effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the operation promotion effect is being executed, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect may be executed at the progress speed V1. Further, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the operation promotion effect is executed before the operation promotion effect is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

Further, as the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display at the progress speed V2 of the effect video of the fourth reach effect is continuously executed, but the notification effect is not progressed. .. Further, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. Then, the same big hit notification effect or miss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the push button 31B is controlled to the jackpot gaming state during the operation acceptance period.

Although the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the detection means in the present invention is the push button 31B, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is other than the push button 31B such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means of the above, sensors such as a motion sensor and a touch sensor that can detect the movement of the player may be used.

In addition, FIGS. 21-18, 21-20, 21-22, 21-24, 21-26 (E) to 21-26 (G), 21-29 (C) to 21-29. (E), FIGS. 21-30 (B) to 21-30 (D), FIGS. 21-31 (E) to 21-31 (G), FIGS. 21-35 (A) to 21-35C). As shown, in the jackpot notification effect in this feature unit 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is the progress speed V2. It is displayed at. On the other hand, FIGS. 21-19, 21-21, 21-23, 21-25, 21-27 (E) to 21-27 (G), 21-30 (E) to 21-. As shown in 30 (G), FIGS. 21-32 (E) to 21-32 (G), and FIGS. 21-35 (D) to 21-35 (F), the out-of-order notification effect of the feature unit 079SG is produced. The moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is not displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the player can be impressed that the jackpot gaming state is controlled by displaying a part of the effect movie of the jackpot notification effect at the progress speed V2. can.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed by the pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which the colors are inverted). Therefore, as a still image display effect, the player can pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 is a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is not limited to this. , An effect other than the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is golden or rainbow color, etc.) may be executed.

Further, the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG imitates the pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F and the push button 31B imitating the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. As the operation promotion image, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb having a size larger than that of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba can be displayed in any of the effect patterns of the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized in the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-17, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the ratio of the big hit, the player can pay attention to whether the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-24, 21-25 and 21-33 (C) to 21-33 (E), when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image is displayed. While the 079SG005Ba is being displayed, the display of the production video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed by the pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb displays the traveling speed V2 (slow motion). ) Has illustrated a form in which the visibility of the effect video (battle effect) of the fourth reach effect is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is the pattern SS. When executed in -2, in addition to the display of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the effect video (battle) of the fourth reach effect is displayed. The production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period when the production video (battle production) of the 4th reach production is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion production pattern SS-2, the production video of the 4th reach production is displayed. The display may be executed at the traveling speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the reach effect of the super reach, the second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Further, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the variable display of the super reach β1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of Super Reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach effect execution period after the first half execution period of the first reach effect to notify the deviation, and the second half of the third reach effect after the first half of the third reach effect execution period. Variable display of super reach β2 that executes the partial execution period and notifies the deviation, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to execute the variable display of the super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach effect after When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, when shifting from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period , When shifting from the third reach effect second half execution period to the fourth reach effect first half execution period, each reach effect effect video is executed at the progress speed V2, and the first reach effect first half execution period is started. When shifting to the second half of the reach effect execution period, when shifting from the first half of the reach effect to the first half of the reach effect, the first half of the reach effect to the second half of the reach effect When shifting from the third reach effect second half execution period to the fourth reach effect first half execution period, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, the third reach When shifting from the first half of the effect execution period to the second half of the third reach effect, and when shifting from the second half of the third reach effect to the first half of the fourth reach effect, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Further, by displaying the effect video of each reach effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branch of the reach effect drawn by the player.

The variable display of the super reach of the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which two reach effects can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the super reach is 3 or more. The reach effect may be feasible, or only one reach effect may be feasible.

Although the feature portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach, and a part of the effect movie of the reach effect is provided in all of these reach effects. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern in which the display of the staging video is always executed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the staging video is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the effect content may be different between the reach effect in which a part of the effect movie is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the reach effect in which the display of the effect movie is not executed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the reach production of the super reach, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R always has a constant reproduction speed (reproduction speed V4) regardless of whether or not the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the output form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach are illustrated. In the first half of each reach production second half of the production, the playback speed V4 from the speakers 8L, 8R as in the first half of each reach production of 1 reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production. While the production sound is output at, what is V4 in the latter half of the execution period (slow motion period) in the latter half of each reach production of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production? The effect sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5 slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, the effect of the effect sound on the reach effect can be improved by making the reproduction speed of the effect sound different while the display of the effect video of the reach effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-33 and 21-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb cannot be reduced while the property can be reduced, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. 21-36 and 21-37, after the end of the reach effect. , The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as a part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-36 (A) to 21-36 (D), when the second reach effect is executed, when the second reach effect is completed together with the still image display effect, As a part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 21-36 (E) and 21-36 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the missed notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-37 (A) to 21-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes. When the operation promotion effect is completed without operating the button 31B, the circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed second as part of the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 21-37 (E) and 21-37 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the missed notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 21-36 and 21-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while the second display area is shown in FIGS. 21-36 and 21-37. After the end of the reach effect or after the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Does not change, so that the player can easily recognize the timing when the notification effect is set by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be improved. Since it does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

Further, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), and is the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the first display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are not changed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, it is possible to make it difficult to change the visibility of the area corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, in the present modification 079SG-2, a mode in which the operation promotion effect is executed during the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. It may be executed as a part.

When the operation promotion effect is executed as a part of the notification effect, it is the same as the modified example 079SG-2 as shown in FIGS. 21-38 (A) to 21-38 (F) as the modified example 079SG-3. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect as shown in FIG. 21-38 (D). do.

By displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player is controlled to the big hit game state based on the end of the operation promotion effect without operating the push button 31B, or the big hit game state. Is notified that it is not controlled.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data. Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made to stand out with respect to the fourth reach effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the variable display result is always a big hit when the still image display effect is executed by the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modification 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed by the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always specified. It may be a probabilistic jackpot (furthermore, a probabilistic jackpot A that is most advantageous to the player). Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the effect that the missed notification effect is once executed and then the jackpot game state is controlled again. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that informs. Regarding the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 in this way, the case where the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot and the case where the jackpot is a non-probable variable jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). A case where the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and a case where the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a message indicating a gaming state is displayed as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited to this. As the displayed telop, even if it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, and the like can be displayed. good.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a telop can be displayed according to the state of the effect being executed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited thereto. The telops displayed in are those that can specify the game state, the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit (big hit expectation) in the variable display during execution, the explanation of the effect during execution (especially the reach effect), and the reach effect. It may be a notice effect or the like that can be executed from a timing earlier than that.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-33 and 21-34, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion) is performed during the period during which the moving image of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the embodiment (display of image 079SG005Bb) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-33 and 21-34, as an operation promotion effect, an embodiment in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the operation promotion effect, not only the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, but also the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, for example. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are duplicated and displayed to promote the operation. You may execute the effect that 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed.

When the effect of moving the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B toward the center of the image display device 5 in this way is executed as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B The moving display speed of the image display device 5 may decrease as it approaches the center of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, 21-21, 21-24, and 21-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from that when the reach effect video display is executed at the progress speed V1. You may. For example, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-20, 21-21, 21-24, and 21-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the video of the reach effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 21-26, 21-29, 21-30, 21-31, and 21-35, as an effect mode of the big hit notification effect, the reach effect is terminated. Later, a form in which the decorative design is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a big hit. The timing may be during the reach production.

Further, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of a production sound such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operating means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to. By doing so, when the player sets the output of the effect sound that suits his / her taste, the speaker 8L is displayed when the display of the moving image of each reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1. , The effect sound output from 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without change, so that the effect sound is from the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the low-speed playback.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is always out of alignment when is executed. After the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is once switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the effect indicating that the variable display result is a big hit. (For example, a case of executing a revival effect) may be provided.

When the revival effect is executed in this way, the revival effect is performed for the player by lighting and blinking the game effect lamp 9 before displaying the video of the revival effect on the image display device 5. May be made aware that is executed. Further, as the effect mode of the revival effect, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when executing the resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of the scene where the enemy character collapses) is displayed at the progress speed V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. May be good.

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine whose jackpot probability can be changed by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 16. In such a case, for example, a pattern is provided in which the variable display result is out of alignment in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous for the player. When is set, even if the variable display result is out of order in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other set values are set for the pachinko gaming machine 1. good. By doing so, the fact that the variable display result is off in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that the high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is out of order while suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest due to the variable display result being out of place in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It will be possible.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine for performing a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine for performing a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. It may be a slot machine or a general game machine other than the pachinko game machine 1 as long as it performs the above.

(Explanation related to the association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 059AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to other feature portions such as the feature portion 063AK, the feature portion 065AK, and the feature portion 079SG. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions. For example, in addition to controlling the time saving state by stopping and displaying the time saving symbol like the feature part 059AK, the small hit game state ends based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20 like the feature part 063AK. Then, it may be controlled to shorten the time for a predetermined period. In addition to this, even when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the normal symbol, as in the feature unit 065AK, the time-saving state may be controlled. According to this, the opportunity to be controlled to the time saving state increases, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, for example, the feature unit features a time-saving fanning effect in the feature unit 059AK, a normal time-passing fanning effect and a time-saving time-passing fanning effect in the feature unit 063AK, a predetermined effect in the feature unit 065AK, and a reach effect of Super Reach A to Super Reach C. It may be a predetermined effect in 079SG. Then, in the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving image whose progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and the predetermined effect after the first period can be displayed. In the second period, it is possible to display the effect moving image, which is the second speed in which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed, on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is the first period. In any of the second period and the second period, the speed related to the effect sound may be configured to be output at the same speed by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means. According to this, the progress speed of the staging video of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the staging sound does not change between the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent giving a feeling of strangeness.

(Explanation relating to the association between the feature part 059AK and the feature part 063AK, the feature part 065AK and the feature part 069SG and the feature part 099SG)
(Regarding the time saving state B (relief time saving state, relief time saving) in the feature unit 069SG and the feature unit 099SG)
As a result of the winning random number value determination process performed in the time saving state B, the determination result of the variable display result may be determined to be the “missing (time saving)” display result. However, the time saving state B is continued without controlling the time saving state based on the result of "missing (time saving)" display. Since the time-saving state B is designed to have a higher advantage than the time-saving state based on the result of "missing (time-saving)" display (the number of times of time-saving is more in the time-saving state B), "time-saving state B" is displayed during the time-saving state B. By rewriting to the time saving state based on the "missing (time saving)" display result, it is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to the time saving state where the number of time saving times is small, and as a result, a game equipped with multiple time saving states. The commercial value of the machine can be enhanced.
Further, in the fluctuation controlled to the time saving state B (900th variable display in the non-special state (normal state)), when the "missing (time saving)" display result is obtained, the time saving state B is controlled. When a "loss (time reduction)" display result is obtained in a fluctuation controlled by the time reduction state B, whether to control to either the time reduction state B or the time reduction state based on the "loss (time reduction)" display result. However, because the time saving state B is designed to have a higher advantage than the time saving state based on the "missing (time saving)" display result (the design has more time saving times in the time saving state B). By giving priority to the time saving state B and controlling it to the time saving state B, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being controlled to a small number of time saving states, and as a result, the commerciality of the gaming machine equipped with a plurality of time saving states is enhanced. be able to.

(Explanation relating to the association between the feature part 059AK and the feature part 063AK, the feature part 065AK and the feature part 069SG and the feature part 099SG)
(Regarding the relationship between the 1st special state, the 2nd special state, and the 3rd special state)
The non-special state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the first special state is the time saving state controlled after the advantageous state (big hit) is completed (time saving state A in the feature unit 069SG), and the second. The special state is a time-saving state that is controlled by executing the fluctuation of the loss a predetermined number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state (time-saving state B in the feature unit 069SG). The third special state is a time saving state that is controlled when a loss (time saving) display result that is a part of the loss display result is obtained (“time saving A” to “time saving D” in the feature unit 059AK), and these are The relationship may be as follows.
(Relationship with SG2020-069 1) Regarding the third special state As in the second special state, the number of types of out-of-order fluctuation patterns in the third special state is smaller than the number of types of out-of-order fluctuation patterns in the first special state. , The average fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation in the third special state may be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation in the first special state. By doing so, the gaming efficiency of the third special state can be enhanced, and the third special state can be digested crisply.
(Relationship with SG2020-069 2) The number of types of deviation fluctuation patterns in the second special state is smaller than the number of types of deviation fluctuation patterns in the third special state, and the average fluctuation of deviation fluctuations in the second special state. The time may be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the out-of-bounds fluctuation in the third special state. By doing so, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special state can be made higher than that of the first special state and the third special state, and the second gaming state can be digested more quickly than any of the states.
(Relationship with SG2020-071 1) Regarding the third special state As in the second special state, the number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns in the third special state is smaller than the number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns in the first special state. , The average fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the third special state may be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the first special state. By doing so, the gaming efficiency of the third special state can be enhanced, and the third special state can be digested crisply.
(Relationship with SG2020-071 2) The number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns in the second special state is smaller than the number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns in the third special state, and the average fluctuation of jackpot fluctuations in the second special state The time may be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the third special state. By doing so, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special state can be made higher than that of the first special state and the third special state, and the second gaming state can be digested more quickly than any of the states.
(Relationship with SG2020-079 1) Regarding the 3rd special state As in the 2nd special state, the number of types of pre-reading notice in the 3rd special state is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notice in the 1st special state, and the 3rd special state. The execution rate of the look-ahead notice in the state may be lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice in the first special state. By doing so, it is possible to limit excessive fanning in the third gaming state and enhance the playability of the third gaming state.
(Relationship with SG2020-079 2) The number of types of look-ahead notice in the second special state is smaller than the number of types of look-ahead notice in the third special state, and the execution rate of the look-ahead notice in the second special state is the third special state. It may be set to be lower than the execution rate of the look-ahead notice in. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the second gaming state by limiting the excessive fanning in the second special state and making the second gaming state less fanning than any of the states. can.
(Relationship with SG2020-089 1) Regarding the 3rd special state As in the 2nd special state, the execution rate of the reach fanning in the 3rd special state is lower than the execution rate of the reach fanning in the 1st special state. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to limit excessive fanning in the third gaming state and enhance the playability of the third gaming state.
(Relationship with SG2020-089 2) The execution rate of reach fanning in the second special state may be lower than the execution rate of reach fanning in the third special state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the second gaming state by limiting the excessive fanning in the second special state and making the second gaming state less fanning than any of the states. can.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and can control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result.
A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the information from the game control means.
The game control means is
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state, a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, and the advantageous state.
A decidable means that can be determined to control to the advantageous state,
A variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means.
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state is obtained before the determination of the determination means,
Includes an information transmission means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of specifying that the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state when the determination means is determined to be in the advantageous state to the staging execution means. ,
The special state includes a first special state, a second special state and a third special state.
The state control means is
When the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the non-special state, the advantageous state is controlled.
After the advantageous state is completed, the first special state is controlled.
When the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the non-special state without being controlled by the advantageous state, the second special state is controlled.
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the non-special state, control to the third special state is performed.
The number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is determined in the first special state. Less than the number of decidable variable display patterns,
The average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means is the first. 1 Shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state,
The determination means can determine that the state control means is controlled to the third special state before it is controlled to the third special state.
The information transmitting means can transmit special information that can identify that the determination means is controlled to the third special state when it is determined that the determination means is controlled to the third special state.
The effect executing means is
When the determination result information is received, the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result information.
When the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the determination result information is restricted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images